From 6e1cb38a2aef7680975e71f23de187859ee8b158 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Suresh Siddha Date: Thu, 10 Jul 2008 11:16:58 -0700 Subject: x64, x2apic/intr-remap: add x2apic support, including enabling interrupt-remapping x2apic support. Interrupt-remapping must be enabled before enabling x2apic, this is needed to ensure that IO interrupts continue to work properly after the cpu mode is changed to x2apic(which uses 32bit extended physical/cluster apic id). On systems where apicid's are > 255, BIOS can handover the control to OS in x2apic mode. Or if the OS handover was in legacy xapic mode, check if it is capable of x2apic mode. And if we succeed in enabling Interrupt-remapping, then we can enable x2apic mode in the CPU. Signed-off-by: Suresh Siddha Cc: akpm@linux-foundation.org Cc: arjan@linux.intel.com Cc: andi@firstfloor.org Cc: ebiederm@xmission.com Cc: jbarnes@virtuousgeek.org Cc: steiner@sgi.com Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 795c487..56689ef 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -1377,6 +1377,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file nolapic_timer [X86-32,APIC] Do not use the local APIC timer. + nox2apic [X86-64,APIC] Do not enable x2APIC mode. + noltlbs [PPC] Do not use large page/tlb entries for kernel lowmem mapping on PPC40x. -- cgit v1.1 From af9d13887f9e3699bbc852c39b076d30bb9dff2f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Suresh Siddha Date: Fri, 11 Jul 2008 13:11:57 -0700 Subject: x2apic: kernel-parameter documentation for "x2apic_phys" Signed-off-by: Suresh Siddha Cc: akpm@linux-foundation.org Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 4 ++++ 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 56689ef..88b08ac 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -1379,6 +1379,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file nox2apic [X86-64,APIC] Do not enable x2APIC mode. + x2apic_phys [X86-64,APIC] Use x2apic physical mode instead of + default x2apic cluster mode on platforms + supporting x2apic. + noltlbs [PPC] Do not use large page/tlb entries for kernel lowmem mapping on PPC40x. -- cgit v1.1 From 5616c23ad9cd3c50af674d408fef7b90abeee81c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "H. Peter Anvin" Date: Tue, 22 Jul 2008 15:32:38 -0400 Subject: x86: doc: move x86-generic documentation from Doc/x86/i386 The boot protocol, USB legacy support, and zero-page documentation is common to the x86 platform, not i386-specific. Signed-off-by: H. Peter Anvin --- Documentation/x86/boot.txt | 900 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Documentation/x86/i386/boot.txt | 900 -------------------------- Documentation/x86/i386/usb-legacy-support.txt | 44 -- Documentation/x86/i386/zero-page.txt | 31 - Documentation/x86/usb-legacy-support.txt | 44 ++ Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt | 31 + 6 files changed, 975 insertions(+), 975 deletions(-) create mode 100644 Documentation/x86/boot.txt delete mode 100644 Documentation/x86/i386/boot.txt delete mode 100644 Documentation/x86/i386/usb-legacy-support.txt delete mode 100644 Documentation/x86/i386/zero-page.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/x86/usb-legacy-support.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..147bfe5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt @@ -0,0 +1,900 @@ + THE LINUX/x86 BOOT PROTOCOL + --------------------------- + +On the x86 platform, the Linux kernel uses a rather complicated boot +convention. This has evolved partially due to historical aspects, as +well as the desire in the early days to have the kernel itself be a +bootable image, the complicated PC memory model and due to changed +expectations in the PC industry caused by the effective demise of +real-mode DOS as a mainstream operating system. + +Currently, the following versions of the Linux/x86 boot protocol exist. + +Old kernels: zImage/Image support only. Some very early kernels + may not even support a command line. + +Protocol 2.00: (Kernel 1.3.73) Added bzImage and initrd support, as + well as a formalized way to communicate between the + boot loader and the kernel. setup.S made relocatable, + although the traditional setup area still assumed + writable. + +Protocol 2.01: (Kernel 1.3.76) Added a heap overrun warning. + +Protocol 2.02: (Kernel 2.4.0-test3-pre3) New command line protocol. + Lower the conventional memory ceiling. No overwrite + of the traditional setup area, thus making booting + safe for systems which use the EBDA from SMM or 32-bit + BIOS entry points. zImage deprecated but still + supported. + +Protocol 2.03: (Kernel 2.4.18-pre1) Explicitly makes the highest possible + initrd address available to the bootloader. + +Protocol 2.04: (Kernel 2.6.14) Extend the syssize field to four bytes. + +Protocol 2.05: (Kernel 2.6.20) Make protected mode kernel relocatable. + Introduce relocatable_kernel and kernel_alignment fields. + +Protocol 2.06: (Kernel 2.6.22) Added a field that contains the size of + the boot command line. + +Protocol 2.07: (Kernel 2.6.24) Added paravirtualised boot protocol. + Introduced hardware_subarch and hardware_subarch_data + and KEEP_SEGMENTS flag in load_flags. + +Protocol 2.08: (Kernel 2.6.26) Added crc32 checksum and ELF format + payload. Introduced payload_offset and payload length + fields to aid in locating the payload. + +Protocol 2.09: (Kernel 2.6.26) Added a field of 64-bit physical + pointer to single linked list of struct setup_data. + +**** MEMORY LAYOUT + +The traditional memory map for the kernel loader, used for Image or +zImage kernels, typically looks like: + + | | +0A0000 +------------------------+ + | Reserved for BIOS | Do not use. Reserved for BIOS EBDA. +09A000 +------------------------+ + | Command line | + | Stack/heap | For use by the kernel real-mode code. +098000 +------------------------+ + | Kernel setup | The kernel real-mode code. +090200 +------------------------+ + | Kernel boot sector | The kernel legacy boot sector. +090000 +------------------------+ + | Protected-mode kernel | The bulk of the kernel image. +010000 +------------------------+ + | Boot loader | <- Boot sector entry point 0000:7C00 +001000 +------------------------+ + | Reserved for MBR/BIOS | +000800 +------------------------+ + | Typically used by MBR | +000600 +------------------------+ + | BIOS use only | +000000 +------------------------+ + + +When using bzImage, the protected-mode kernel was relocated to +0x100000 ("high memory"), and the kernel real-mode block (boot sector, +setup, and stack/heap) was made relocatable to any address between +0x10000 and end of low memory. Unfortunately, in protocols 2.00 and +2.01 the 0x90000+ memory range is still used internally by the kernel; +the 2.02 protocol resolves that problem. + +It is desirable to keep the "memory ceiling" -- the highest point in +low memory touched by the boot loader -- as low as possible, since +some newer BIOSes have begun to allocate some rather large amounts of +memory, called the Extended BIOS Data Area, near the top of low +memory. The boot loader should use the "INT 12h" BIOS call to verify +how much low memory is available. + +Unfortunately, if INT 12h reports that the amount of memory is too +low, there is usually nothing the boot loader can do but to report an +error to the user. The boot loader should therefore be designed to +take up as little space in low memory as it reasonably can. For +zImage or old bzImage kernels, which need data written into the +0x90000 segment, the boot loader should make sure not to use memory +above the 0x9A000 point; too many BIOSes will break above that point. + +For a modern bzImage kernel with boot protocol version >= 2.02, a +memory layout like the following is suggested: + + ~ ~ + | Protected-mode kernel | +100000 +------------------------+ + | I/O memory hole | +0A0000 +------------------------+ + | Reserved for BIOS | Leave as much as possible unused + ~ ~ + | Command line | (Can also be below the X+10000 mark) +X+10000 +------------------------+ + | Stack/heap | For use by the kernel real-mode code. +X+08000 +------------------------+ + | Kernel setup | The kernel real-mode code. + | Kernel boot sector | The kernel legacy boot sector. +X +------------------------+ + | Boot loader | <- Boot sector entry point 0000:7C00 +001000 +------------------------+ + | Reserved for MBR/BIOS | +000800 +------------------------+ + | Typically used by MBR | +000600 +------------------------+ + | BIOS use only | +000000 +------------------------+ + +... where the address X is as low as the design of the boot loader +permits. + + +**** THE REAL-MODE KERNEL HEADER + +In the following text, and anywhere in the kernel boot sequence, "a +sector" refers to 512 bytes. It is independent of the actual sector +size of the underlying medium. + +The first step in loading a Linux kernel should be to load the +real-mode code (boot sector and setup code) and then examine the +following header at offset 0x01f1. The real-mode code can total up to +32K, although the boot loader may choose to load only the first two +sectors (1K) and then examine the bootup sector size. + +The header looks like: + +Offset Proto Name Meaning +/Size + +01F1/1 ALL(1 setup_sects The size of the setup in sectors +01F2/2 ALL root_flags If set, the root is mounted readonly +01F4/4 2.04+(2 syssize The size of the 32-bit code in 16-byte paras +01F8/2 ALL ram_size DO NOT USE - for bootsect.S use only +01FA/2 ALL vid_mode Video mode control +01FC/2 ALL root_dev Default root device number +01FE/2 ALL boot_flag 0xAA55 magic number +0200/2 2.00+ jump Jump instruction +0202/4 2.00+ header Magic signature "HdrS" +0206/2 2.00+ version Boot protocol version supported +0208/4 2.00+ realmode_swtch Boot loader hook (see below) +020C/2 2.00+ start_sys The load-low segment (0x1000) (obsolete) +020E/2 2.00+ kernel_version Pointer to kernel version string +0210/1 2.00+ type_of_loader Boot loader identifier +0211/1 2.00+ loadflags Boot protocol option flags +0212/2 2.00+ setup_move_size Move to high memory size (used with hooks) +0214/4 2.00+ code32_start Boot loader hook (see below) +0218/4 2.00+ ramdisk_image initrd load address (set by boot loader) +021C/4 2.00+ ramdisk_size initrd size (set by boot loader) +0220/4 2.00+ bootsect_kludge DO NOT USE - for bootsect.S use only +0224/2 2.01+ heap_end_ptr Free memory after setup end +0226/2 N/A pad1 Unused +0228/4 2.02+ cmd_line_ptr 32-bit pointer to the kernel command line +022C/4 2.03+ initrd_addr_max Highest legal initrd address +0230/4 2.05+ kernel_alignment Physical addr alignment required for kernel +0234/1 2.05+ relocatable_kernel Whether kernel is relocatable or not +0235/3 N/A pad2 Unused +0238/4 2.06+ cmdline_size Maximum size of the kernel command line +023C/4 2.07+ hardware_subarch Hardware subarchitecture +0240/8 2.07+ hardware_subarch_data Subarchitecture-specific data +0248/4 2.08+ payload_offset Offset of kernel payload +024C/4 2.08+ payload_length Length of kernel payload +0250/8 2.09+ setup_data 64-bit physical pointer to linked list + of struct setup_data + +(1) For backwards compatibility, if the setup_sects field contains 0, the + real value is 4. + +(2) For boot protocol prior to 2.04, the upper two bytes of the syssize + field are unusable, which means the size of a bzImage kernel + cannot be determined. + +If the "HdrS" (0x53726448) magic number is not found at offset 0x202, +the boot protocol version is "old". Loading an old kernel, the +following parameters should be assumed: + + Image type = zImage + initrd not supported + Real-mode kernel must be located at 0x90000. + +Otherwise, the "version" field contains the protocol version, +e.g. protocol version 2.01 will contain 0x0201 in this field. When +setting fields in the header, you must make sure only to set fields +supported by the protocol version in use. + + +**** DETAILS OF HEADER FIELDS + +For each field, some are information from the kernel to the bootloader +("read"), some are expected to be filled out by the bootloader +("write"), and some are expected to be read and modified by the +bootloader ("modify"). + +All general purpose boot loaders should write the fields marked +(obligatory). Boot loaders who want to load the kernel at a +nonstandard address should fill in the fields marked (reloc); other +boot loaders can ignore those fields. + +The byte order of all fields is littleendian (this is x86, after all.) + +Field name: setup_sects +Type: read +Offset/size: 0x1f1/1 +Protocol: ALL + + The size of the setup code in 512-byte sectors. If this field is + 0, the real value is 4. The real-mode code consists of the boot + sector (always one 512-byte sector) plus the setup code. + +Field name: root_flags +Type: modify (optional) +Offset/size: 0x1f2/2 +Protocol: ALL + + If this field is nonzero, the root defaults to readonly. The use of + this field is deprecated; use the "ro" or "rw" options on the + command line instead. + +Field name: syssize +Type: read +Offset/size: 0x1f4/4 (protocol 2.04+) 0x1f4/2 (protocol ALL) +Protocol: 2.04+ + + The size of the protected-mode code in units of 16-byte paragraphs. + For protocol versions older than 2.04 this field is only two bytes + wide, and therefore cannot be trusted for the size of a kernel if + the LOAD_HIGH flag is set. + +Field name: ram_size +Type: kernel internal +Offset/size: 0x1f8/2 +Protocol: ALL + + This field is obsolete. + +Field name: vid_mode +Type: modify (obligatory) +Offset/size: 0x1fa/2 + + Please see the section on SPECIAL COMMAND LINE OPTIONS. + +Field name: root_dev +Type: modify (optional) +Offset/size: 0x1fc/2 +Protocol: ALL + + The default root device device number. The use of this field is + deprecated, use the "root=" option on the command line instead. + +Field name: boot_flag +Type: read +Offset/size: 0x1fe/2 +Protocol: ALL + + Contains 0xAA55. This is the closest thing old Linux kernels have + to a magic number. + +Field name: jump +Type: read +Offset/size: 0x200/2 +Protocol: 2.00+ + + Contains an x86 jump instruction, 0xEB followed by a signed offset + relative to byte 0x202. This can be used to determine the size of + the header. + +Field name: header +Type: read +Offset/size: 0x202/4 +Protocol: 2.00+ + + Contains the magic number "HdrS" (0x53726448). + +Field name: version +Type: read +Offset/size: 0x206/2 +Protocol: 2.00+ + + Contains the boot protocol version, in (major << 8)+minor format, + e.g. 0x0204 for version 2.04, and 0x0a11 for a hypothetical version + 10.17. + +Field name: readmode_swtch +Type: modify (optional) +Offset/size: 0x208/4 +Protocol: 2.00+ + + Boot loader hook (see ADVANCED BOOT LOADER HOOKS below.) + +Field name: start_sys +Type: read +Offset/size: 0x20c/4 +Protocol: 2.00+ + + The load low segment (0x1000). Obsolete. + +Field name: kernel_version +Type: read +Offset/size: 0x20e/2 +Protocol: 2.00+ + + If set to a nonzero value, contains a pointer to a NUL-terminated + human-readable kernel version number string, less 0x200. This can + be used to display the kernel version to the user. This value + should be less than (0x200*setup_sects). + + For example, if this value is set to 0x1c00, the kernel version + number string can be found at offset 0x1e00 in the kernel file. + This is a valid value if and only if the "setup_sects" field + contains the value 15 or higher, as: + + 0x1c00 < 15*0x200 (= 0x1e00) but + 0x1c00 >= 14*0x200 (= 0x1c00) + + 0x1c00 >> 9 = 14, so the minimum value for setup_secs is 15. + +Field name: type_of_loader +Type: write (obligatory) +Offset/size: 0x210/1 +Protocol: 2.00+ + + If your boot loader has an assigned id (see table below), enter + 0xTV here, where T is an identifier for the boot loader and V is + a version number. Otherwise, enter 0xFF here. + + Assigned boot loader ids: + 0 LILO (0x00 reserved for pre-2.00 bootloader) + 1 Loadlin + 2 bootsect-loader (0x20, all other values reserved) + 3 SYSLINUX + 4 EtherBoot + 5 ELILO + 7 GRuB + 8 U-BOOT + 9 Xen + A Gujin + B Qemu + + Please contact if you need a bootloader ID + value assigned. + +Field name: loadflags +Type: modify (obligatory) +Offset/size: 0x211/1 +Protocol: 2.00+ + + This field is a bitmask. + + Bit 0 (read): LOADED_HIGH + - If 0, the protected-mode code is loaded at 0x10000. + - If 1, the protected-mode code is loaded at 0x100000. + + Bit 5 (write): QUIET_FLAG + - If 0, print early messages. + - If 1, suppress early messages. + This requests to the kernel (decompressor and early + kernel) to not write early messages that require + accessing the display hardware directly. + + Bit 6 (write): KEEP_SEGMENTS + Protocol: 2.07+ + - If 0, reload the segment registers in the 32bit entry point. + - If 1, do not reload the segment registers in the 32bit entry point. + Assume that %cs %ds %ss %es are all set to flat segments with + a base of 0 (or the equivalent for their environment). + + Bit 7 (write): CAN_USE_HEAP + Set this bit to 1 to indicate that the value entered in the + heap_end_ptr is valid. If this field is clear, some setup code + functionality will be disabled. + +Field name: setup_move_size +Type: modify (obligatory) +Offset/size: 0x212/2 +Protocol: 2.00-2.01 + + When using protocol 2.00 or 2.01, if the real mode kernel is not + loaded at 0x90000, it gets moved there later in the loading + sequence. Fill in this field if you want additional data (such as + the kernel command line) moved in addition to the real-mode kernel + itself. + + The unit is bytes starting with the beginning of the boot sector. + + This field is can be ignored when the protocol is 2.02 or higher, or + if the real-mode code is loaded at 0x90000. + +Field name: code32_start +Type: modify (optional, reloc) +Offset/size: 0x214/4 +Protocol: 2.00+ + + The address to jump to in protected mode. This defaults to the load + address of the kernel, and can be used by the boot loader to + determine the proper load address. + + This field can be modified for two purposes: + + 1. as a boot loader hook (see ADVANCED BOOT LOADER HOOKS below.) + + 2. if a bootloader which does not install a hook loads a + relocatable kernel at a nonstandard address it will have to modify + this field to point to the load address. + +Field name: ramdisk_image +Type: write (obligatory) +Offset/size: 0x218/4 +Protocol: 2.00+ + + The 32-bit linear address of the initial ramdisk or ramfs. Leave at + zero if there is no initial ramdisk/ramfs. + +Field name: ramdisk_size +Type: write (obligatory) +Offset/size: 0x21c/4 +Protocol: 2.00+ + + Size of the initial ramdisk or ramfs. Leave at zero if there is no + initial ramdisk/ramfs. + +Field name: bootsect_kludge +Type: kernel internal +Offset/size: 0x220/4 +Protocol: 2.00+ + + This field is obsolete. + +Field name: heap_end_ptr +Type: write (obligatory) +Offset/size: 0x224/2 +Protocol: 2.01+ + + Set this field to the offset (from the beginning of the real-mode + code) of the end of the setup stack/heap, minus 0x0200. + +Field name: cmd_line_ptr +Type: write (obligatory) +Offset/size: 0x228/4 +Protocol: 2.02+ + + Set this field to the linear address of the kernel command line. + The kernel command line can be located anywhere between the end of + the setup heap and 0xA0000; it does not have to be located in the + same 64K segment as the real-mode code itself. + + Fill in this field even if your boot loader does not support a + command line, in which case you can point this to an empty string + (or better yet, to the string "auto".) If this field is left at + zero, the kernel will assume that your boot loader does not support + the 2.02+ protocol. + +Field name: initrd_addr_max +Type: read +Offset/size: 0x22c/4 +Protocol: 2.03+ + + The maximum address that may be occupied by the initial + ramdisk/ramfs contents. For boot protocols 2.02 or earlier, this + field is not present, and the maximum address is 0x37FFFFFF. (This + address is defined as the address of the highest safe byte, so if + your ramdisk is exactly 131072 bytes long and this field is + 0x37FFFFFF, you can start your ramdisk at 0x37FE0000.) + +Field name: kernel_alignment +Type: read (reloc) +Offset/size: 0x230/4 +Protocol: 2.05+ + + Alignment unit required by the kernel (if relocatable_kernel is true.) + +Field name: relocatable_kernel +Type: read (reloc) +Offset/size: 0x234/1 +Protocol: 2.05+ + + If this field is nonzero, the protected-mode part of the kernel can + be loaded at any address that satisfies the kernel_alignment field. + After loading, the boot loader must set the code32_start field to + point to the loaded code, or to a boot loader hook. + +Field name: cmdline_size +Type: read +Offset/size: 0x238/4 +Protocol: 2.06+ + + The maximum size of the command line without the terminating + zero. This means that the command line can contain at most + cmdline_size characters. With protocol version 2.05 and earlier, the + maximum size was 255. + +Field name: hardware_subarch +Type: write (optional, defaults to x86/PC) +Offset/size: 0x23c/4 +Protocol: 2.07+ + + In a paravirtualized environment the hardware low level architectural + pieces such as interrupt handling, page table handling, and + accessing process control registers needs to be done differently. + + This field allows the bootloader to inform the kernel we are in one + one of those environments. + + 0x00000000 The default x86/PC environment + 0x00000001 lguest + 0x00000002 Xen + +Field name: hardware_subarch_data +Type: write (subarch-dependent) +Offset/size: 0x240/8 +Protocol: 2.07+ + + A pointer to data that is specific to hardware subarch + This field is currently unused for the default x86/PC environment, + do not modify. + +Field name: payload_offset +Type: read +Offset/size: 0x248/4 +Protocol: 2.08+ + + If non-zero then this field contains the offset from the end of the + real-mode code to the payload. + + The payload may be compressed. The format of both the compressed and + uncompressed data should be determined using the standard magic + numbers. Currently only gzip compressed ELF is used. + +Field name: payload_length +Type: read +Offset/size: 0x24c/4 +Protocol: 2.08+ + + The length of the payload. + +Field name: setup_data +Type: write (special) +Offset/size: 0x250/8 +Protocol: 2.09+ + + The 64-bit physical pointer to NULL terminated single linked list of + struct setup_data. This is used to define a more extensible boot + parameters passing mechanism. The definition of struct setup_data is + as follow: + + struct setup_data { + u64 next; + u32 type; + u32 len; + u8 data[0]; + }; + + Where, the next is a 64-bit physical pointer to the next node of + linked list, the next field of the last node is 0; the type is used + to identify the contents of data; the len is the length of data + field; the data holds the real payload. + + This list may be modified at a number of points during the bootup + process. Therefore, when modifying this list one should always make + sure to consider the case where the linked list already contains + entries. + + +**** THE IMAGE CHECKSUM + +From boot protocol version 2.08 onwards the CRC-32 is calculated over +the entire file using the characteristic polynomial 0x04C11DB7 and an +initial remainder of 0xffffffff. The checksum is appended to the +file; therefore the CRC of the file up to the limit specified in the +syssize field of the header is always 0. + + +**** THE KERNEL COMMAND LINE + +The kernel command line has become an important way for the boot +loader to communicate with the kernel. Some of its options are also +relevant to the boot loader itself, see "special command line options" +below. + +The kernel command line is a null-terminated string. The maximum +length can be retrieved from the field cmdline_size. Before protocol +version 2.06, the maximum was 255 characters. A string that is too +long will be automatically truncated by the kernel. + +If the boot protocol version is 2.02 or later, the address of the +kernel command line is given by the header field cmd_line_ptr (see +above.) This address can be anywhere between the end of the setup +heap and 0xA0000. + +If the protocol version is *not* 2.02 or higher, the kernel +command line is entered using the following protocol: + + At offset 0x0020 (word), "cmd_line_magic", enter the magic + number 0xA33F. + + At offset 0x0022 (word), "cmd_line_offset", enter the offset + of the kernel command line (relative to the start of the + real-mode kernel). + + The kernel command line *must* be within the memory region + covered by setup_move_size, so you may need to adjust this + field. + + +**** MEMORY LAYOUT OF THE REAL-MODE CODE + +The real-mode code requires a stack/heap to be set up, as well as +memory allocated for the kernel command line. This needs to be done +in the real-mode accessible memory in bottom megabyte. + +It should be noted that modern machines often have a sizable Extended +BIOS Data Area (EBDA). As a result, it is advisable to use as little +of the low megabyte as possible. + +Unfortunately, under the following circumstances the 0x90000 memory +segment has to be used: + + - When loading a zImage kernel ((loadflags & 0x01) == 0). + - When loading a 2.01 or earlier boot protocol kernel. + + -> For the 2.00 and 2.01 boot protocols, the real-mode code + can be loaded at another address, but it is internally + relocated to 0x90000. For the "old" protocol, the + real-mode code must be loaded at 0x90000. + +When loading at 0x90000, avoid using memory above 0x9a000. + +For boot protocol 2.02 or higher, the command line does not have to be +located in the same 64K segment as the real-mode setup code; it is +thus permitted to give the stack/heap the full 64K segment and locate +the command line above it. + +The kernel command line should not be located below the real-mode +code, nor should it be located in high memory. + + +**** SAMPLE BOOT CONFIGURATION + +As a sample configuration, assume the following layout of the real +mode segment: + + When loading below 0x90000, use the entire segment: + + 0x0000-0x7fff Real mode kernel + 0x8000-0xdfff Stack and heap + 0xe000-0xffff Kernel command line + + When loading at 0x90000 OR the protocol version is 2.01 or earlier: + + 0x0000-0x7fff Real mode kernel + 0x8000-0x97ff Stack and heap + 0x9800-0x9fff Kernel command line + +Such a boot loader should enter the following fields in the header: + + unsigned long base_ptr; /* base address for real-mode segment */ + + if ( setup_sects == 0 ) { + setup_sects = 4; + } + + if ( protocol >= 0x0200 ) { + type_of_loader = ; + if ( loading_initrd ) { + ramdisk_image = ; + ramdisk_size = ; + } + + if ( protocol >= 0x0202 && loadflags & 0x01 ) + heap_end = 0xe000; + else + heap_end = 0x9800; + + if ( protocol >= 0x0201 ) { + heap_end_ptr = heap_end - 0x200; + loadflags |= 0x80; /* CAN_USE_HEAP */ + } + + if ( protocol >= 0x0202 ) { + cmd_line_ptr = base_ptr + heap_end; + strcpy(cmd_line_ptr, cmdline); + } else { + cmd_line_magic = 0xA33F; + cmd_line_offset = heap_end; + setup_move_size = heap_end + strlen(cmdline)+1; + strcpy(base_ptr+cmd_line_offset, cmdline); + } + } else { + /* Very old kernel */ + + heap_end = 0x9800; + + cmd_line_magic = 0xA33F; + cmd_line_offset = heap_end; + + /* A very old kernel MUST have its real-mode code + loaded at 0x90000 */ + + if ( base_ptr != 0x90000 ) { + /* Copy the real-mode kernel */ + memcpy(0x90000, base_ptr, (setup_sects+1)*512); + base_ptr = 0x90000; /* Relocated */ + } + + strcpy(0x90000+cmd_line_offset, cmdline); + + /* It is recommended to clear memory up to the 32K mark */ + memset(0x90000 + (setup_sects+1)*512, 0, + (64-(setup_sects+1))*512); + } + + +**** LOADING THE REST OF THE KERNEL + +The 32-bit (non-real-mode) kernel starts at offset (setup_sects+1)*512 +in the kernel file (again, if setup_sects == 0 the real value is 4.) +It should be loaded at address 0x10000 for Image/zImage kernels and +0x100000 for bzImage kernels. + +The kernel is a bzImage kernel if the protocol >= 2.00 and the 0x01 +bit (LOAD_HIGH) in the loadflags field is set: + + is_bzImage = (protocol >= 0x0200) && (loadflags & 0x01); + load_address = is_bzImage ? 0x100000 : 0x10000; + +Note that Image/zImage kernels can be up to 512K in size, and thus use +the entire 0x10000-0x90000 range of memory. This means it is pretty +much a requirement for these kernels to load the real-mode part at +0x90000. bzImage kernels allow much more flexibility. + + +**** SPECIAL COMMAND LINE OPTIONS + +If the command line provided by the boot loader is entered by the +user, the user may expect the following command line options to work. +They should normally not be deleted from the kernel command line even +though not all of them are actually meaningful to the kernel. Boot +loader authors who need additional command line options for the boot +loader itself should get them registered in +Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt to make sure they will not +conflict with actual kernel options now or in the future. + + vga= + here is either an integer (in C notation, either + decimal, octal, or hexadecimal) or one of the strings + "normal" (meaning 0xFFFF), "ext" (meaning 0xFFFE) or "ask" + (meaning 0xFFFD). This value should be entered into the + vid_mode field, as it is used by the kernel before the command + line is parsed. + + mem= + is an integer in C notation optionally followed by + (case insensitive) K, M, G, T, P or E (meaning << 10, << 20, + << 30, << 40, << 50 or << 60). This specifies the end of + memory to the kernel. This affects the possible placement of + an initrd, since an initrd should be placed near end of + memory. Note that this is an option to *both* the kernel and + the bootloader! + + initrd= + An initrd should be loaded. The meaning of is + obviously bootloader-dependent, and some boot loaders + (e.g. LILO) do not have such a command. + +In addition, some boot loaders add the following options to the +user-specified command line: + + BOOT_IMAGE= + The boot image which was loaded. Again, the meaning of + is obviously bootloader-dependent. + + auto + The kernel was booted without explicit user intervention. + +If these options are added by the boot loader, it is highly +recommended that they are located *first*, before the user-specified +or configuration-specified command line. Otherwise, "init=/bin/sh" +gets confused by the "auto" option. + + +**** RUNNING THE KERNEL + +The kernel is started by jumping to the kernel entry point, which is +located at *segment* offset 0x20 from the start of the real mode +kernel. This means that if you loaded your real-mode kernel code at +0x90000, the kernel entry point is 9020:0000. + +At entry, ds = es = ss should point to the start of the real-mode +kernel code (0x9000 if the code is loaded at 0x90000), sp should be +set up properly, normally pointing to the top of the heap, and +interrupts should be disabled. Furthermore, to guard against bugs in +the kernel, it is recommended that the boot loader sets fs = gs = ds = +es = ss. + +In our example from above, we would do: + + /* Note: in the case of the "old" kernel protocol, base_ptr must + be == 0x90000 at this point; see the previous sample code */ + + seg = base_ptr >> 4; + + cli(); /* Enter with interrupts disabled! */ + + /* Set up the real-mode kernel stack */ + _SS = seg; + _SP = heap_end; + + _DS = _ES = _FS = _GS = seg; + jmp_far(seg+0x20, 0); /* Run the kernel */ + +If your boot sector accesses a floppy drive, it is recommended to +switch off the floppy motor before running the kernel, since the +kernel boot leaves interrupts off and thus the motor will not be +switched off, especially if the loaded kernel has the floppy driver as +a demand-loaded module! + + +**** ADVANCED BOOT LOADER HOOKS + +If the boot loader runs in a particularly hostile environment (such as +LOADLIN, which runs under DOS) it may be impossible to follow the +standard memory location requirements. Such a boot loader may use the +following hooks that, if set, are invoked by the kernel at the +appropriate time. The use of these hooks should probably be +considered an absolutely last resort! + +IMPORTANT: All the hooks are required to preserve %esp, %ebp, %esi and +%edi across invocation. + + realmode_swtch: + A 16-bit real mode far subroutine invoked immediately before + entering protected mode. The default routine disables NMI, so + your routine should probably do so, too. + + code32_start: + A 32-bit flat-mode routine *jumped* to immediately after the + transition to protected mode, but before the kernel is + uncompressed. No segments, except CS, are guaranteed to be + set up (current kernels do, but older ones do not); you should + set them up to BOOT_DS (0x18) yourself. + + After completing your hook, you should jump to the address + that was in this field before your boot loader overwrote it + (relocated, if appropriate.) + + +**** 32-bit BOOT PROTOCOL + +For machine with some new BIOS other than legacy BIOS, such as EFI, +LinuxBIOS, etc, and kexec, the 16-bit real mode setup code in kernel +based on legacy BIOS can not be used, so a 32-bit boot protocol needs +to be defined. + +In 32-bit boot protocol, the first step in loading a Linux kernel +should be to setup the boot parameters (struct boot_params, +traditionally known as "zero page"). The memory for struct boot_params +should be allocated and initialized to all zero. Then the setup header +from offset 0x01f1 of kernel image on should be loaded into struct +boot_params and examined. The end of setup header can be calculated as +follow: + + 0x0202 + byte value at offset 0x0201 + +In addition to read/modify/write the setup header of the struct +boot_params as that of 16-bit boot protocol, the boot loader should +also fill the additional fields of the struct boot_params as that +described in zero-page.txt. + +After setupping the struct boot_params, the boot loader can load the +32/64-bit kernel in the same way as that of 16-bit boot protocol. + +In 32-bit boot protocol, the kernel is started by jumping to the +32-bit kernel entry point, which is the start address of loaded +32/64-bit kernel. + +At entry, the CPU must be in 32-bit protected mode with paging +disabled; a GDT must be loaded with the descriptors for selectors +__BOOT_CS(0x10) and __BOOT_DS(0x18); both descriptors must be 4G flat +segment; __BOOS_CS must have execute/read permission, and __BOOT_DS +must have read/write permission; CS must be __BOOT_CS and DS, ES, SS +must be __BOOT_DS; interrupt must be disabled; %esi must hold the base +address of the struct boot_params; %ebp, %edi and %ebx must be zero. diff --git a/Documentation/x86/i386/boot.txt b/Documentation/x86/i386/boot.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 147bfe5..0000000 --- a/Documentation/x86/i386/boot.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,900 +0,0 @@ - THE LINUX/x86 BOOT PROTOCOL - --------------------------- - -On the x86 platform, the Linux kernel uses a rather complicated boot -convention. This has evolved partially due to historical aspects, as -well as the desire in the early days to have the kernel itself be a -bootable image, the complicated PC memory model and due to changed -expectations in the PC industry caused by the effective demise of -real-mode DOS as a mainstream operating system. - -Currently, the following versions of the Linux/x86 boot protocol exist. - -Old kernels: zImage/Image support only. Some very early kernels - may not even support a command line. - -Protocol 2.00: (Kernel 1.3.73) Added bzImage and initrd support, as - well as a formalized way to communicate between the - boot loader and the kernel. setup.S made relocatable, - although the traditional setup area still assumed - writable. - -Protocol 2.01: (Kernel 1.3.76) Added a heap overrun warning. - -Protocol 2.02: (Kernel 2.4.0-test3-pre3) New command line protocol. - Lower the conventional memory ceiling. No overwrite - of the traditional setup area, thus making booting - safe for systems which use the EBDA from SMM or 32-bit - BIOS entry points. zImage deprecated but still - supported. - -Protocol 2.03: (Kernel 2.4.18-pre1) Explicitly makes the highest possible - initrd address available to the bootloader. - -Protocol 2.04: (Kernel 2.6.14) Extend the syssize field to four bytes. - -Protocol 2.05: (Kernel 2.6.20) Make protected mode kernel relocatable. - Introduce relocatable_kernel and kernel_alignment fields. - -Protocol 2.06: (Kernel 2.6.22) Added a field that contains the size of - the boot command line. - -Protocol 2.07: (Kernel 2.6.24) Added paravirtualised boot protocol. - Introduced hardware_subarch and hardware_subarch_data - and KEEP_SEGMENTS flag in load_flags. - -Protocol 2.08: (Kernel 2.6.26) Added crc32 checksum and ELF format - payload. Introduced payload_offset and payload length - fields to aid in locating the payload. - -Protocol 2.09: (Kernel 2.6.26) Added a field of 64-bit physical - pointer to single linked list of struct setup_data. - -**** MEMORY LAYOUT - -The traditional memory map for the kernel loader, used for Image or -zImage kernels, typically looks like: - - | | -0A0000 +------------------------+ - | Reserved for BIOS | Do not use. Reserved for BIOS EBDA. -09A000 +------------------------+ - | Command line | - | Stack/heap | For use by the kernel real-mode code. -098000 +------------------------+ - | Kernel setup | The kernel real-mode code. -090200 +------------------------+ - | Kernel boot sector | The kernel legacy boot sector. -090000 +------------------------+ - | Protected-mode kernel | The bulk of the kernel image. -010000 +------------------------+ - | Boot loader | <- Boot sector entry point 0000:7C00 -001000 +------------------------+ - | Reserved for MBR/BIOS | -000800 +------------------------+ - | Typically used by MBR | -000600 +------------------------+ - | BIOS use only | -000000 +------------------------+ - - -When using bzImage, the protected-mode kernel was relocated to -0x100000 ("high memory"), and the kernel real-mode block (boot sector, -setup, and stack/heap) was made relocatable to any address between -0x10000 and end of low memory. Unfortunately, in protocols 2.00 and -2.01 the 0x90000+ memory range is still used internally by the kernel; -the 2.02 protocol resolves that problem. - -It is desirable to keep the "memory ceiling" -- the highest point in -low memory touched by the boot loader -- as low as possible, since -some newer BIOSes have begun to allocate some rather large amounts of -memory, called the Extended BIOS Data Area, near the top of low -memory. The boot loader should use the "INT 12h" BIOS call to verify -how much low memory is available. - -Unfortunately, if INT 12h reports that the amount of memory is too -low, there is usually nothing the boot loader can do but to report an -error to the user. The boot loader should therefore be designed to -take up as little space in low memory as it reasonably can. For -zImage or old bzImage kernels, which need data written into the -0x90000 segment, the boot loader should make sure not to use memory -above the 0x9A000 point; too many BIOSes will break above that point. - -For a modern bzImage kernel with boot protocol version >= 2.02, a -memory layout like the following is suggested: - - ~ ~ - | Protected-mode kernel | -100000 +------------------------+ - | I/O memory hole | -0A0000 +------------------------+ - | Reserved for BIOS | Leave as much as possible unused - ~ ~ - | Command line | (Can also be below the X+10000 mark) -X+10000 +------------------------+ - | Stack/heap | For use by the kernel real-mode code. -X+08000 +------------------------+ - | Kernel setup | The kernel real-mode code. - | Kernel boot sector | The kernel legacy boot sector. -X +------------------------+ - | Boot loader | <- Boot sector entry point 0000:7C00 -001000 +------------------------+ - | Reserved for MBR/BIOS | -000800 +------------------------+ - | Typically used by MBR | -000600 +------------------------+ - | BIOS use only | -000000 +------------------------+ - -... where the address X is as low as the design of the boot loader -permits. - - -**** THE REAL-MODE KERNEL HEADER - -In the following text, and anywhere in the kernel boot sequence, "a -sector" refers to 512 bytes. It is independent of the actual sector -size of the underlying medium. - -The first step in loading a Linux kernel should be to load the -real-mode code (boot sector and setup code) and then examine the -following header at offset 0x01f1. The real-mode code can total up to -32K, although the boot loader may choose to load only the first two -sectors (1K) and then examine the bootup sector size. - -The header looks like: - -Offset Proto Name Meaning -/Size - -01F1/1 ALL(1 setup_sects The size of the setup in sectors -01F2/2 ALL root_flags If set, the root is mounted readonly -01F4/4 2.04+(2 syssize The size of the 32-bit code in 16-byte paras -01F8/2 ALL ram_size DO NOT USE - for bootsect.S use only -01FA/2 ALL vid_mode Video mode control -01FC/2 ALL root_dev Default root device number -01FE/2 ALL boot_flag 0xAA55 magic number -0200/2 2.00+ jump Jump instruction -0202/4 2.00+ header Magic signature "HdrS" -0206/2 2.00+ version Boot protocol version supported -0208/4 2.00+ realmode_swtch Boot loader hook (see below) -020C/2 2.00+ start_sys The load-low segment (0x1000) (obsolete) -020E/2 2.00+ kernel_version Pointer to kernel version string -0210/1 2.00+ type_of_loader Boot loader identifier -0211/1 2.00+ loadflags Boot protocol option flags -0212/2 2.00+ setup_move_size Move to high memory size (used with hooks) -0214/4 2.00+ code32_start Boot loader hook (see below) -0218/4 2.00+ ramdisk_image initrd load address (set by boot loader) -021C/4 2.00+ ramdisk_size initrd size (set by boot loader) -0220/4 2.00+ bootsect_kludge DO NOT USE - for bootsect.S use only -0224/2 2.01+ heap_end_ptr Free memory after setup end -0226/2 N/A pad1 Unused -0228/4 2.02+ cmd_line_ptr 32-bit pointer to the kernel command line -022C/4 2.03+ initrd_addr_max Highest legal initrd address -0230/4 2.05+ kernel_alignment Physical addr alignment required for kernel -0234/1 2.05+ relocatable_kernel Whether kernel is relocatable or not -0235/3 N/A pad2 Unused -0238/4 2.06+ cmdline_size Maximum size of the kernel command line -023C/4 2.07+ hardware_subarch Hardware subarchitecture -0240/8 2.07+ hardware_subarch_data Subarchitecture-specific data -0248/4 2.08+ payload_offset Offset of kernel payload -024C/4 2.08+ payload_length Length of kernel payload -0250/8 2.09+ setup_data 64-bit physical pointer to linked list - of struct setup_data - -(1) For backwards compatibility, if the setup_sects field contains 0, the - real value is 4. - -(2) For boot protocol prior to 2.04, the upper two bytes of the syssize - field are unusable, which means the size of a bzImage kernel - cannot be determined. - -If the "HdrS" (0x53726448) magic number is not found at offset 0x202, -the boot protocol version is "old". Loading an old kernel, the -following parameters should be assumed: - - Image type = zImage - initrd not supported - Real-mode kernel must be located at 0x90000. - -Otherwise, the "version" field contains the protocol version, -e.g. protocol version 2.01 will contain 0x0201 in this field. When -setting fields in the header, you must make sure only to set fields -supported by the protocol version in use. - - -**** DETAILS OF HEADER FIELDS - -For each field, some are information from the kernel to the bootloader -("read"), some are expected to be filled out by the bootloader -("write"), and some are expected to be read and modified by the -bootloader ("modify"). - -All general purpose boot loaders should write the fields marked -(obligatory). Boot loaders who want to load the kernel at a -nonstandard address should fill in the fields marked (reloc); other -boot loaders can ignore those fields. - -The byte order of all fields is littleendian (this is x86, after all.) - -Field name: setup_sects -Type: read -Offset/size: 0x1f1/1 -Protocol: ALL - - The size of the setup code in 512-byte sectors. If this field is - 0, the real value is 4. The real-mode code consists of the boot - sector (always one 512-byte sector) plus the setup code. - -Field name: root_flags -Type: modify (optional) -Offset/size: 0x1f2/2 -Protocol: ALL - - If this field is nonzero, the root defaults to readonly. The use of - this field is deprecated; use the "ro" or "rw" options on the - command line instead. - -Field name: syssize -Type: read -Offset/size: 0x1f4/4 (protocol 2.04+) 0x1f4/2 (protocol ALL) -Protocol: 2.04+ - - The size of the protected-mode code in units of 16-byte paragraphs. - For protocol versions older than 2.04 this field is only two bytes - wide, and therefore cannot be trusted for the size of a kernel if - the LOAD_HIGH flag is set. - -Field name: ram_size -Type: kernel internal -Offset/size: 0x1f8/2 -Protocol: ALL - - This field is obsolete. - -Field name: vid_mode -Type: modify (obligatory) -Offset/size: 0x1fa/2 - - Please see the section on SPECIAL COMMAND LINE OPTIONS. - -Field name: root_dev -Type: modify (optional) -Offset/size: 0x1fc/2 -Protocol: ALL - - The default root device device number. The use of this field is - deprecated, use the "root=" option on the command line instead. - -Field name: boot_flag -Type: read -Offset/size: 0x1fe/2 -Protocol: ALL - - Contains 0xAA55. This is the closest thing old Linux kernels have - to a magic number. - -Field name: jump -Type: read -Offset/size: 0x200/2 -Protocol: 2.00+ - - Contains an x86 jump instruction, 0xEB followed by a signed offset - relative to byte 0x202. This can be used to determine the size of - the header. - -Field name: header -Type: read -Offset/size: 0x202/4 -Protocol: 2.00+ - - Contains the magic number "HdrS" (0x53726448). - -Field name: version -Type: read -Offset/size: 0x206/2 -Protocol: 2.00+ - - Contains the boot protocol version, in (major << 8)+minor format, - e.g. 0x0204 for version 2.04, and 0x0a11 for a hypothetical version - 10.17. - -Field name: readmode_swtch -Type: modify (optional) -Offset/size: 0x208/4 -Protocol: 2.00+ - - Boot loader hook (see ADVANCED BOOT LOADER HOOKS below.) - -Field name: start_sys -Type: read -Offset/size: 0x20c/4 -Protocol: 2.00+ - - The load low segment (0x1000). Obsolete. - -Field name: kernel_version -Type: read -Offset/size: 0x20e/2 -Protocol: 2.00+ - - If set to a nonzero value, contains a pointer to a NUL-terminated - human-readable kernel version number string, less 0x200. This can - be used to display the kernel version to the user. This value - should be less than (0x200*setup_sects). - - For example, if this value is set to 0x1c00, the kernel version - number string can be found at offset 0x1e00 in the kernel file. - This is a valid value if and only if the "setup_sects" field - contains the value 15 or higher, as: - - 0x1c00 < 15*0x200 (= 0x1e00) but - 0x1c00 >= 14*0x200 (= 0x1c00) - - 0x1c00 >> 9 = 14, so the minimum value for setup_secs is 15. - -Field name: type_of_loader -Type: write (obligatory) -Offset/size: 0x210/1 -Protocol: 2.00+ - - If your boot loader has an assigned id (see table below), enter - 0xTV here, where T is an identifier for the boot loader and V is - a version number. Otherwise, enter 0xFF here. - - Assigned boot loader ids: - 0 LILO (0x00 reserved for pre-2.00 bootloader) - 1 Loadlin - 2 bootsect-loader (0x20, all other values reserved) - 3 SYSLINUX - 4 EtherBoot - 5 ELILO - 7 GRuB - 8 U-BOOT - 9 Xen - A Gujin - B Qemu - - Please contact if you need a bootloader ID - value assigned. - -Field name: loadflags -Type: modify (obligatory) -Offset/size: 0x211/1 -Protocol: 2.00+ - - This field is a bitmask. - - Bit 0 (read): LOADED_HIGH - - If 0, the protected-mode code is loaded at 0x10000. - - If 1, the protected-mode code is loaded at 0x100000. - - Bit 5 (write): QUIET_FLAG - - If 0, print early messages. - - If 1, suppress early messages. - This requests to the kernel (decompressor and early - kernel) to not write early messages that require - accessing the display hardware directly. - - Bit 6 (write): KEEP_SEGMENTS - Protocol: 2.07+ - - If 0, reload the segment registers in the 32bit entry point. - - If 1, do not reload the segment registers in the 32bit entry point. - Assume that %cs %ds %ss %es are all set to flat segments with - a base of 0 (or the equivalent for their environment). - - Bit 7 (write): CAN_USE_HEAP - Set this bit to 1 to indicate that the value entered in the - heap_end_ptr is valid. If this field is clear, some setup code - functionality will be disabled. - -Field name: setup_move_size -Type: modify (obligatory) -Offset/size: 0x212/2 -Protocol: 2.00-2.01 - - When using protocol 2.00 or 2.01, if the real mode kernel is not - loaded at 0x90000, it gets moved there later in the loading - sequence. Fill in this field if you want additional data (such as - the kernel command line) moved in addition to the real-mode kernel - itself. - - The unit is bytes starting with the beginning of the boot sector. - - This field is can be ignored when the protocol is 2.02 or higher, or - if the real-mode code is loaded at 0x90000. - -Field name: code32_start -Type: modify (optional, reloc) -Offset/size: 0x214/4 -Protocol: 2.00+ - - The address to jump to in protected mode. This defaults to the load - address of the kernel, and can be used by the boot loader to - determine the proper load address. - - This field can be modified for two purposes: - - 1. as a boot loader hook (see ADVANCED BOOT LOADER HOOKS below.) - - 2. if a bootloader which does not install a hook loads a - relocatable kernel at a nonstandard address it will have to modify - this field to point to the load address. - -Field name: ramdisk_image -Type: write (obligatory) -Offset/size: 0x218/4 -Protocol: 2.00+ - - The 32-bit linear address of the initial ramdisk or ramfs. Leave at - zero if there is no initial ramdisk/ramfs. - -Field name: ramdisk_size -Type: write (obligatory) -Offset/size: 0x21c/4 -Protocol: 2.00+ - - Size of the initial ramdisk or ramfs. Leave at zero if there is no - initial ramdisk/ramfs. - -Field name: bootsect_kludge -Type: kernel internal -Offset/size: 0x220/4 -Protocol: 2.00+ - - This field is obsolete. - -Field name: heap_end_ptr -Type: write (obligatory) -Offset/size: 0x224/2 -Protocol: 2.01+ - - Set this field to the offset (from the beginning of the real-mode - code) of the end of the setup stack/heap, minus 0x0200. - -Field name: cmd_line_ptr -Type: write (obligatory) -Offset/size: 0x228/4 -Protocol: 2.02+ - - Set this field to the linear address of the kernel command line. - The kernel command line can be located anywhere between the end of - the setup heap and 0xA0000; it does not have to be located in the - same 64K segment as the real-mode code itself. - - Fill in this field even if your boot loader does not support a - command line, in which case you can point this to an empty string - (or better yet, to the string "auto".) If this field is left at - zero, the kernel will assume that your boot loader does not support - the 2.02+ protocol. - -Field name: initrd_addr_max -Type: read -Offset/size: 0x22c/4 -Protocol: 2.03+ - - The maximum address that may be occupied by the initial - ramdisk/ramfs contents. For boot protocols 2.02 or earlier, this - field is not present, and the maximum address is 0x37FFFFFF. (This - address is defined as the address of the highest safe byte, so if - your ramdisk is exactly 131072 bytes long and this field is - 0x37FFFFFF, you can start your ramdisk at 0x37FE0000.) - -Field name: kernel_alignment -Type: read (reloc) -Offset/size: 0x230/4 -Protocol: 2.05+ - - Alignment unit required by the kernel (if relocatable_kernel is true.) - -Field name: relocatable_kernel -Type: read (reloc) -Offset/size: 0x234/1 -Protocol: 2.05+ - - If this field is nonzero, the protected-mode part of the kernel can - be loaded at any address that satisfies the kernel_alignment field. - After loading, the boot loader must set the code32_start field to - point to the loaded code, or to a boot loader hook. - -Field name: cmdline_size -Type: read -Offset/size: 0x238/4 -Protocol: 2.06+ - - The maximum size of the command line without the terminating - zero. This means that the command line can contain at most - cmdline_size characters. With protocol version 2.05 and earlier, the - maximum size was 255. - -Field name: hardware_subarch -Type: write (optional, defaults to x86/PC) -Offset/size: 0x23c/4 -Protocol: 2.07+ - - In a paravirtualized environment the hardware low level architectural - pieces such as interrupt handling, page table handling, and - accessing process control registers needs to be done differently. - - This field allows the bootloader to inform the kernel we are in one - one of those environments. - - 0x00000000 The default x86/PC environment - 0x00000001 lguest - 0x00000002 Xen - -Field name: hardware_subarch_data -Type: write (subarch-dependent) -Offset/size: 0x240/8 -Protocol: 2.07+ - - A pointer to data that is specific to hardware subarch - This field is currently unused for the default x86/PC environment, - do not modify. - -Field name: payload_offset -Type: read -Offset/size: 0x248/4 -Protocol: 2.08+ - - If non-zero then this field contains the offset from the end of the - real-mode code to the payload. - - The payload may be compressed. The format of both the compressed and - uncompressed data should be determined using the standard magic - numbers. Currently only gzip compressed ELF is used. - -Field name: payload_length -Type: read -Offset/size: 0x24c/4 -Protocol: 2.08+ - - The length of the payload. - -Field name: setup_data -Type: write (special) -Offset/size: 0x250/8 -Protocol: 2.09+ - - The 64-bit physical pointer to NULL terminated single linked list of - struct setup_data. This is used to define a more extensible boot - parameters passing mechanism. The definition of struct setup_data is - as follow: - - struct setup_data { - u64 next; - u32 type; - u32 len; - u8 data[0]; - }; - - Where, the next is a 64-bit physical pointer to the next node of - linked list, the next field of the last node is 0; the type is used - to identify the contents of data; the len is the length of data - field; the data holds the real payload. - - This list may be modified at a number of points during the bootup - process. Therefore, when modifying this list one should always make - sure to consider the case where the linked list already contains - entries. - - -**** THE IMAGE CHECKSUM - -From boot protocol version 2.08 onwards the CRC-32 is calculated over -the entire file using the characteristic polynomial 0x04C11DB7 and an -initial remainder of 0xffffffff. The checksum is appended to the -file; therefore the CRC of the file up to the limit specified in the -syssize field of the header is always 0. - - -**** THE KERNEL COMMAND LINE - -The kernel command line has become an important way for the boot -loader to communicate with the kernel. Some of its options are also -relevant to the boot loader itself, see "special command line options" -below. - -The kernel command line is a null-terminated string. The maximum -length can be retrieved from the field cmdline_size. Before protocol -version 2.06, the maximum was 255 characters. A string that is too -long will be automatically truncated by the kernel. - -If the boot protocol version is 2.02 or later, the address of the -kernel command line is given by the header field cmd_line_ptr (see -above.) This address can be anywhere between the end of the setup -heap and 0xA0000. - -If the protocol version is *not* 2.02 or higher, the kernel -command line is entered using the following protocol: - - At offset 0x0020 (word), "cmd_line_magic", enter the magic - number 0xA33F. - - At offset 0x0022 (word), "cmd_line_offset", enter the offset - of the kernel command line (relative to the start of the - real-mode kernel). - - The kernel command line *must* be within the memory region - covered by setup_move_size, so you may need to adjust this - field. - - -**** MEMORY LAYOUT OF THE REAL-MODE CODE - -The real-mode code requires a stack/heap to be set up, as well as -memory allocated for the kernel command line. This needs to be done -in the real-mode accessible memory in bottom megabyte. - -It should be noted that modern machines often have a sizable Extended -BIOS Data Area (EBDA). As a result, it is advisable to use as little -of the low megabyte as possible. - -Unfortunately, under the following circumstances the 0x90000 memory -segment has to be used: - - - When loading a zImage kernel ((loadflags & 0x01) == 0). - - When loading a 2.01 or earlier boot protocol kernel. - - -> For the 2.00 and 2.01 boot protocols, the real-mode code - can be loaded at another address, but it is internally - relocated to 0x90000. For the "old" protocol, the - real-mode code must be loaded at 0x90000. - -When loading at 0x90000, avoid using memory above 0x9a000. - -For boot protocol 2.02 or higher, the command line does not have to be -located in the same 64K segment as the real-mode setup code; it is -thus permitted to give the stack/heap the full 64K segment and locate -the command line above it. - -The kernel command line should not be located below the real-mode -code, nor should it be located in high memory. - - -**** SAMPLE BOOT CONFIGURATION - -As a sample configuration, assume the following layout of the real -mode segment: - - When loading below 0x90000, use the entire segment: - - 0x0000-0x7fff Real mode kernel - 0x8000-0xdfff Stack and heap - 0xe000-0xffff Kernel command line - - When loading at 0x90000 OR the protocol version is 2.01 or earlier: - - 0x0000-0x7fff Real mode kernel - 0x8000-0x97ff Stack and heap - 0x9800-0x9fff Kernel command line - -Such a boot loader should enter the following fields in the header: - - unsigned long base_ptr; /* base address for real-mode segment */ - - if ( setup_sects == 0 ) { - setup_sects = 4; - } - - if ( protocol >= 0x0200 ) { - type_of_loader = ; - if ( loading_initrd ) { - ramdisk_image = ; - ramdisk_size = ; - } - - if ( protocol >= 0x0202 && loadflags & 0x01 ) - heap_end = 0xe000; - else - heap_end = 0x9800; - - if ( protocol >= 0x0201 ) { - heap_end_ptr = heap_end - 0x200; - loadflags |= 0x80; /* CAN_USE_HEAP */ - } - - if ( protocol >= 0x0202 ) { - cmd_line_ptr = base_ptr + heap_end; - strcpy(cmd_line_ptr, cmdline); - } else { - cmd_line_magic = 0xA33F; - cmd_line_offset = heap_end; - setup_move_size = heap_end + strlen(cmdline)+1; - strcpy(base_ptr+cmd_line_offset, cmdline); - } - } else { - /* Very old kernel */ - - heap_end = 0x9800; - - cmd_line_magic = 0xA33F; - cmd_line_offset = heap_end; - - /* A very old kernel MUST have its real-mode code - loaded at 0x90000 */ - - if ( base_ptr != 0x90000 ) { - /* Copy the real-mode kernel */ - memcpy(0x90000, base_ptr, (setup_sects+1)*512); - base_ptr = 0x90000; /* Relocated */ - } - - strcpy(0x90000+cmd_line_offset, cmdline); - - /* It is recommended to clear memory up to the 32K mark */ - memset(0x90000 + (setup_sects+1)*512, 0, - (64-(setup_sects+1))*512); - } - - -**** LOADING THE REST OF THE KERNEL - -The 32-bit (non-real-mode) kernel starts at offset (setup_sects+1)*512 -in the kernel file (again, if setup_sects == 0 the real value is 4.) -It should be loaded at address 0x10000 for Image/zImage kernels and -0x100000 for bzImage kernels. - -The kernel is a bzImage kernel if the protocol >= 2.00 and the 0x01 -bit (LOAD_HIGH) in the loadflags field is set: - - is_bzImage = (protocol >= 0x0200) && (loadflags & 0x01); - load_address = is_bzImage ? 0x100000 : 0x10000; - -Note that Image/zImage kernels can be up to 512K in size, and thus use -the entire 0x10000-0x90000 range of memory. This means it is pretty -much a requirement for these kernels to load the real-mode part at -0x90000. bzImage kernels allow much more flexibility. - - -**** SPECIAL COMMAND LINE OPTIONS - -If the command line provided by the boot loader is entered by the -user, the user may expect the following command line options to work. -They should normally not be deleted from the kernel command line even -though not all of them are actually meaningful to the kernel. Boot -loader authors who need additional command line options for the boot -loader itself should get them registered in -Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt to make sure they will not -conflict with actual kernel options now or in the future. - - vga= - here is either an integer (in C notation, either - decimal, octal, or hexadecimal) or one of the strings - "normal" (meaning 0xFFFF), "ext" (meaning 0xFFFE) or "ask" - (meaning 0xFFFD). This value should be entered into the - vid_mode field, as it is used by the kernel before the command - line is parsed. - - mem= - is an integer in C notation optionally followed by - (case insensitive) K, M, G, T, P or E (meaning << 10, << 20, - << 30, << 40, << 50 or << 60). This specifies the end of - memory to the kernel. This affects the possible placement of - an initrd, since an initrd should be placed near end of - memory. Note that this is an option to *both* the kernel and - the bootloader! - - initrd= - An initrd should be loaded. The meaning of is - obviously bootloader-dependent, and some boot loaders - (e.g. LILO) do not have such a command. - -In addition, some boot loaders add the following options to the -user-specified command line: - - BOOT_IMAGE= - The boot image which was loaded. Again, the meaning of - is obviously bootloader-dependent. - - auto - The kernel was booted without explicit user intervention. - -If these options are added by the boot loader, it is highly -recommended that they are located *first*, before the user-specified -or configuration-specified command line. Otherwise, "init=/bin/sh" -gets confused by the "auto" option. - - -**** RUNNING THE KERNEL - -The kernel is started by jumping to the kernel entry point, which is -located at *segment* offset 0x20 from the start of the real mode -kernel. This means that if you loaded your real-mode kernel code at -0x90000, the kernel entry point is 9020:0000. - -At entry, ds = es = ss should point to the start of the real-mode -kernel code (0x9000 if the code is loaded at 0x90000), sp should be -set up properly, normally pointing to the top of the heap, and -interrupts should be disabled. Furthermore, to guard against bugs in -the kernel, it is recommended that the boot loader sets fs = gs = ds = -es = ss. - -In our example from above, we would do: - - /* Note: in the case of the "old" kernel protocol, base_ptr must - be == 0x90000 at this point; see the previous sample code */ - - seg = base_ptr >> 4; - - cli(); /* Enter with interrupts disabled! */ - - /* Set up the real-mode kernel stack */ - _SS = seg; - _SP = heap_end; - - _DS = _ES = _FS = _GS = seg; - jmp_far(seg+0x20, 0); /* Run the kernel */ - -If your boot sector accesses a floppy drive, it is recommended to -switch off the floppy motor before running the kernel, since the -kernel boot leaves interrupts off and thus the motor will not be -switched off, especially if the loaded kernel has the floppy driver as -a demand-loaded module! - - -**** ADVANCED BOOT LOADER HOOKS - -If the boot loader runs in a particularly hostile environment (such as -LOADLIN, which runs under DOS) it may be impossible to follow the -standard memory location requirements. Such a boot loader may use the -following hooks that, if set, are invoked by the kernel at the -appropriate time. The use of these hooks should probably be -considered an absolutely last resort! - -IMPORTANT: All the hooks are required to preserve %esp, %ebp, %esi and -%edi across invocation. - - realmode_swtch: - A 16-bit real mode far subroutine invoked immediately before - entering protected mode. The default routine disables NMI, so - your routine should probably do so, too. - - code32_start: - A 32-bit flat-mode routine *jumped* to immediately after the - transition to protected mode, but before the kernel is - uncompressed. No segments, except CS, are guaranteed to be - set up (current kernels do, but older ones do not); you should - set them up to BOOT_DS (0x18) yourself. - - After completing your hook, you should jump to the address - that was in this field before your boot loader overwrote it - (relocated, if appropriate.) - - -**** 32-bit BOOT PROTOCOL - -For machine with some new BIOS other than legacy BIOS, such as EFI, -LinuxBIOS, etc, and kexec, the 16-bit real mode setup code in kernel -based on legacy BIOS can not be used, so a 32-bit boot protocol needs -to be defined. - -In 32-bit boot protocol, the first step in loading a Linux kernel -should be to setup the boot parameters (struct boot_params, -traditionally known as "zero page"). The memory for struct boot_params -should be allocated and initialized to all zero. Then the setup header -from offset 0x01f1 of kernel image on should be loaded into struct -boot_params and examined. The end of setup header can be calculated as -follow: - - 0x0202 + byte value at offset 0x0201 - -In addition to read/modify/write the setup header of the struct -boot_params as that of 16-bit boot protocol, the boot loader should -also fill the additional fields of the struct boot_params as that -described in zero-page.txt. - -After setupping the struct boot_params, the boot loader can load the -32/64-bit kernel in the same way as that of 16-bit boot protocol. - -In 32-bit boot protocol, the kernel is started by jumping to the -32-bit kernel entry point, which is the start address of loaded -32/64-bit kernel. - -At entry, the CPU must be in 32-bit protected mode with paging -disabled; a GDT must be loaded with the descriptors for selectors -__BOOT_CS(0x10) and __BOOT_DS(0x18); both descriptors must be 4G flat -segment; __BOOS_CS must have execute/read permission, and __BOOT_DS -must have read/write permission; CS must be __BOOT_CS and DS, ES, SS -must be __BOOT_DS; interrupt must be disabled; %esi must hold the base -address of the struct boot_params; %ebp, %edi and %ebx must be zero. diff --git a/Documentation/x86/i386/usb-legacy-support.txt b/Documentation/x86/i386/usb-legacy-support.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 1894cdf..0000000 --- a/Documentation/x86/i386/usb-legacy-support.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ -USB Legacy support -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ - -Vojtech Pavlik , January 2004 - - -Also known as "USB Keyboard" or "USB Mouse support" in the BIOS Setup is a -feature that allows one to use the USB mouse and keyboard as if they were -their classic PS/2 counterparts. This means one can use an USB keyboard to -type in LILO for example. - -It has several drawbacks, though: - -1) On some machines, the emulated PS/2 mouse takes over even when no USB - mouse is present and a real PS/2 mouse is present. In that case the extra - features (wheel, extra buttons, touchpad mode) of the real PS/2 mouse may - not be available. - -2) If CONFIG_HIGHMEM64G is enabled, the PS/2 mouse emulation can cause - system crashes, because the SMM BIOS is not expecting to be in PAE mode. - The Intel E7505 is a typical machine where this happens. - -3) If AMD64 64-bit mode is enabled, again system crashes often happen, - because the SMM BIOS isn't expecting the CPU to be in 64-bit mode. The - BIOS manufacturers only test with Windows, and Windows doesn't do 64-bit - yet. - -Solutions: - -Problem 1) can be solved by loading the USB drivers prior to loading the -PS/2 mouse driver. Since the PS/2 mouse driver is in 2.6 compiled into -the kernel unconditionally, this means the USB drivers need to be -compiled-in, too. - -Problem 2) can currently only be solved by either disabling HIGHMEM64G -in the kernel config or USB Legacy support in the BIOS. A BIOS update -could help, but so far no such update exists. - -Problem 3) is usually fixed by a BIOS update. Check the board -manufacturers web site. If an update is not available, disable USB -Legacy support in the BIOS. If this alone doesn't help, try also adding -idle=poll on the kernel command line. The BIOS may be entering the SMM -on the HLT instruction as well. - diff --git a/Documentation/x86/i386/zero-page.txt b/Documentation/x86/i386/zero-page.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 169ad42..0000000 --- a/Documentation/x86/i386/zero-page.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ -The additional fields in struct boot_params as a part of 32-bit boot -protocol of kernel. These should be filled by bootloader or 16-bit -real-mode setup code of the kernel. References/settings to it mainly -are in: - - include/asm-x86/bootparam.h - - -Offset Proto Name Meaning -/Size - -000/040 ALL screen_info Text mode or frame buffer information - (struct screen_info) -040/014 ALL apm_bios_info APM BIOS information (struct apm_bios_info) -060/010 ALL ist_info Intel SpeedStep (IST) BIOS support information - (struct ist_info) -080/010 ALL hd0_info hd0 disk parameter, OBSOLETE!! -090/010 ALL hd1_info hd1 disk parameter, OBSOLETE!! -0A0/010 ALL sys_desc_table System description table (struct sys_desc_table) -140/080 ALL edid_info Video mode setup (struct edid_info) -1C0/020 ALL efi_info EFI 32 information (struct efi_info) -1E0/004 ALL alk_mem_k Alternative mem check, in KB -1E4/004 ALL scratch Scratch field for the kernel setup code -1E8/001 ALL e820_entries Number of entries in e820_map (below) -1E9/001 ALL eddbuf_entries Number of entries in eddbuf (below) -1EA/001 ALL edd_mbr_sig_buf_entries Number of entries in edd_mbr_sig_buffer - (below) -290/040 ALL edd_mbr_sig_buffer EDD MBR signatures -2D0/A00 ALL e820_map E820 memory map table - (array of struct e820entry) -D00/1EC ALL eddbuf EDD data (array of struct edd_info) diff --git a/Documentation/x86/usb-legacy-support.txt b/Documentation/x86/usb-legacy-support.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1894cdf --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/x86/usb-legacy-support.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +USB Legacy support +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Vojtech Pavlik , January 2004 + + +Also known as "USB Keyboard" or "USB Mouse support" in the BIOS Setup is a +feature that allows one to use the USB mouse and keyboard as if they were +their classic PS/2 counterparts. This means one can use an USB keyboard to +type in LILO for example. + +It has several drawbacks, though: + +1) On some machines, the emulated PS/2 mouse takes over even when no USB + mouse is present and a real PS/2 mouse is present. In that case the extra + features (wheel, extra buttons, touchpad mode) of the real PS/2 mouse may + not be available. + +2) If CONFIG_HIGHMEM64G is enabled, the PS/2 mouse emulation can cause + system crashes, because the SMM BIOS is not expecting to be in PAE mode. + The Intel E7505 is a typical machine where this happens. + +3) If AMD64 64-bit mode is enabled, again system crashes often happen, + because the SMM BIOS isn't expecting the CPU to be in 64-bit mode. The + BIOS manufacturers only test with Windows, and Windows doesn't do 64-bit + yet. + +Solutions: + +Problem 1) can be solved by loading the USB drivers prior to loading the +PS/2 mouse driver. Since the PS/2 mouse driver is in 2.6 compiled into +the kernel unconditionally, this means the USB drivers need to be +compiled-in, too. + +Problem 2) can currently only be solved by either disabling HIGHMEM64G +in the kernel config or USB Legacy support in the BIOS. A BIOS update +could help, but so far no such update exists. + +Problem 3) is usually fixed by a BIOS update. Check the board +manufacturers web site. If an update is not available, disable USB +Legacy support in the BIOS. If this alone doesn't help, try also adding +idle=poll on the kernel command line. The BIOS may be entering the SMM +on the HLT instruction as well. + diff --git a/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt b/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..169ad42 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +The additional fields in struct boot_params as a part of 32-bit boot +protocol of kernel. These should be filled by bootloader or 16-bit +real-mode setup code of the kernel. References/settings to it mainly +are in: + + include/asm-x86/bootparam.h + + +Offset Proto Name Meaning +/Size + +000/040 ALL screen_info Text mode or frame buffer information + (struct screen_info) +040/014 ALL apm_bios_info APM BIOS information (struct apm_bios_info) +060/010 ALL ist_info Intel SpeedStep (IST) BIOS support information + (struct ist_info) +080/010 ALL hd0_info hd0 disk parameter, OBSOLETE!! +090/010 ALL hd1_info hd1 disk parameter, OBSOLETE!! +0A0/010 ALL sys_desc_table System description table (struct sys_desc_table) +140/080 ALL edid_info Video mode setup (struct edid_info) +1C0/020 ALL efi_info EFI 32 information (struct efi_info) +1E0/004 ALL alk_mem_k Alternative mem check, in KB +1E4/004 ALL scratch Scratch field for the kernel setup code +1E8/001 ALL e820_entries Number of entries in e820_map (below) +1E9/001 ALL eddbuf_entries Number of entries in eddbuf (below) +1EA/001 ALL edd_mbr_sig_buf_entries Number of entries in edd_mbr_sig_buffer + (below) +290/040 ALL edd_mbr_sig_buffer EDD MBR signatures +2D0/A00 ALL e820_map E820 memory map table + (array of struct e820entry) +D00/1EC ALL eddbuf EDD data (array of struct edd_info) -- cgit v1.1 From a021e5124a6c57325ffb02a60cd1d5f40342f8aa Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "H. Peter Anvin" Date: Tue, 22 Jul 2008 15:33:57 -0400 Subject: x86: doc: boot.txt: fix the size of the start_sys field The start_sys field is two bytes, not four. Signed-off-by: H. Peter Anvin --- Documentation/x86/boot.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt index 147bfe5..83c0033 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt @@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ Protocol: 2.00+ Field name: start_sys Type: read -Offset/size: 0x20c/4 +Offset/size: 0x20c/2 Protocol: 2.00+ The load low segment (0x1000). Obsolete. -- cgit v1.1 From a300bec952127d9a15e666b391bb35c9aecb3002 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Randy Dunlap Date: Tue, 22 Jul 2008 09:46:13 -0700 Subject: documentation: move hpet.txt to timers/ subdirectory Move hpet.txt to Documentation/timers/ subdirectory. Add 00-INDEX to Documentation/timers/ subdirectory. Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Cc: tglx Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner --- Documentation/00-INDEX | 2 - Documentation/hpet.txt | 300 ------------------------------------------ Documentation/timers/00-INDEX | 10 ++ Documentation/timers/hpet.txt | 300 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 4 files changed, 310 insertions(+), 302 deletions(-) delete mode 100644 Documentation/hpet.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/timers/00-INDEX create mode 100644 Documentation/timers/hpet.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/00-INDEX b/Documentation/00-INDEX index 1977fab..6c40c4c 100644 --- a/Documentation/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/00-INDEX @@ -161,8 +161,6 @@ hayes-esp.txt - info on using the Hayes ESP serial driver. highuid.txt - notes on the change from 16 bit to 32 bit user/group IDs. -hpet.txt - - High Precision Event Timer Driver for Linux. timers/ - info on the timer related topics hw_random.txt diff --git a/Documentation/hpet.txt b/Documentation/hpet.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 6ad52d9..0000000 --- a/Documentation/hpet.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,300 +0,0 @@ - High Precision Event Timer Driver for Linux - -The High Precision Event Timer (HPET) hardware is the future replacement -for the 8254 and Real Time Clock (RTC) periodic timer functionality. -Each HPET can have up to 32 timers. It is possible to configure the -first two timers as legacy replacements for 8254 and RTC periodic timers. -A specification done by Intel and Microsoft can be found at -. - -The driver supports detection of HPET driver allocation and initialization -of the HPET before the driver module_init routine is called. This enables -platform code which uses timer 0 or 1 as the main timer to intercept HPET -initialization. An example of this initialization can be found in -arch/i386/kernel/time_hpet.c. - -The driver provides two APIs which are very similar to the API found in -the rtc.c driver. There is a user space API and a kernel space API. -An example user space program is provided below. - -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include - - -extern void hpet_open_close(int, const char **); -extern void hpet_info(int, const char **); -extern void hpet_poll(int, const char **); -extern void hpet_fasync(int, const char **); -extern void hpet_read(int, const char **); - -#include -#include -#include - -struct hpet_command { - char *command; - void (*func)(int argc, const char ** argv); -} hpet_command[] = { - { - "open-close", - hpet_open_close - }, - { - "info", - hpet_info - }, - { - "poll", - hpet_poll - }, - { - "fasync", - hpet_fasync - }, -}; - -int -main(int argc, const char ** argv) -{ - int i; - - argc--; - argv++; - - if (!argc) { - fprintf(stderr, "-hpet: requires command\n"); - return -1; - } - - - for (i = 0; i < (sizeof (hpet_command) / sizeof (hpet_command[0])); i++) - if (!strcmp(argv[0], hpet_command[i].command)) { - argc--; - argv++; - fprintf(stderr, "-hpet: executing %s\n", - hpet_command[i].command); - hpet_command[i].func(argc, argv); - return 0; - } - - fprintf(stderr, "do_hpet: command %s not implemented\n", argv[0]); - - return -1; -} - -void -hpet_open_close(int argc, const char **argv) -{ - int fd; - - if (argc != 1) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_open_close: device-name\n"); - return; - } - - fd = open(argv[0], O_RDONLY); - if (fd < 0) - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_open_close: open failed\n"); - else - close(fd); - - return; -} - -void -hpet_info(int argc, const char **argv) -{ -} - -void -hpet_poll(int argc, const char **argv) -{ - unsigned long freq; - int iterations, i, fd; - struct pollfd pfd; - struct hpet_info info; - struct timeval stv, etv; - struct timezone tz; - long usec; - - if (argc != 3) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: device-name freq iterations\n"); - return; - } - - freq = atoi(argv[1]); - iterations = atoi(argv[2]); - - fd = open(argv[0], O_RDONLY); - - if (fd < 0) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: open of %s failed\n", argv[0]); - return; - } - - if (ioctl(fd, HPET_IRQFREQ, freq) < 0) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: HPET_IRQFREQ failed\n"); - goto out; - } - - if (ioctl(fd, HPET_INFO, &info) < 0) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: failed to get info\n"); - goto out; - } - - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: info.hi_flags 0x%lx\n", info.hi_flags); - - if (info.hi_flags && (ioctl(fd, HPET_EPI, 0) < 0)) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: HPET_EPI failed\n"); - goto out; - } - - if (ioctl(fd, HPET_IE_ON, 0) < 0) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll, HPET_IE_ON failed\n"); - goto out; - } - - pfd.fd = fd; - pfd.events = POLLIN; - - for (i = 0; i < iterations; i++) { - pfd.revents = 0; - gettimeofday(&stv, &tz); - if (poll(&pfd, 1, -1) < 0) - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: poll failed\n"); - else { - long data; - - gettimeofday(&etv, &tz); - usec = stv.tv_sec * 1000000 + stv.tv_usec; - usec = (etv.tv_sec * 1000000 + etv.tv_usec) - usec; - - fprintf(stderr, - "hpet_poll: expired time = 0x%lx\n", usec); - - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: revents = 0x%x\n", - pfd.revents); - - if (read(fd, &data, sizeof(data)) != sizeof(data)) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: read failed\n"); - } - else - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: data 0x%lx\n", - data); - } - } - -out: - close(fd); - return; -} - -static int hpet_sigio_count; - -static void -hpet_sigio(int val) -{ - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_sigio: called\n"); - hpet_sigio_count++; -} - -void -hpet_fasync(int argc, const char **argv) -{ - unsigned long freq; - int iterations, i, fd, value; - sig_t oldsig; - struct hpet_info info; - - hpet_sigio_count = 0; - fd = -1; - - if ((oldsig = signal(SIGIO, hpet_sigio)) == SIG_ERR) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: failed to set signal handler\n"); - return; - } - - if (argc != 3) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: device-name freq iterations\n"); - goto out; - } - - fd = open(argv[0], O_RDONLY); - - if (fd < 0) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: failed to open %s\n", argv[0]); - return; - } - - - if ((fcntl(fd, F_SETOWN, getpid()) == 1) || - ((value = fcntl(fd, F_GETFL)) == 1) || - (fcntl(fd, F_SETFL, value | O_ASYNC) == 1)) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: fcntl failed\n"); - goto out; - } - - freq = atoi(argv[1]); - iterations = atoi(argv[2]); - - if (ioctl(fd, HPET_IRQFREQ, freq) < 0) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: HPET_IRQFREQ failed\n"); - goto out; - } - - if (ioctl(fd, HPET_INFO, &info) < 0) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: failed to get info\n"); - goto out; - } - - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: info.hi_flags 0x%lx\n", info.hi_flags); - - if (info.hi_flags && (ioctl(fd, HPET_EPI, 0) < 0)) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: HPET_EPI failed\n"); - goto out; - } - - if (ioctl(fd, HPET_IE_ON, 0) < 0) { - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync, HPET_IE_ON failed\n"); - goto out; - } - - for (i = 0; i < iterations; i++) { - (void) pause(); - fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: count = %d\n", hpet_sigio_count); - } - -out: - signal(SIGIO, oldsig); - - if (fd >= 0) - close(fd); - - return; -} - -The kernel API has three interfaces exported from the driver: - - hpet_register(struct hpet_task *tp, int periodic) - hpet_unregister(struct hpet_task *tp) - hpet_control(struct hpet_task *tp, unsigned int cmd, unsigned long arg) - -The kernel module using this interface fills in the ht_func and ht_data -members of the hpet_task structure before calling hpet_register. -hpet_control simply vectors to the hpet_ioctl routine and has the same -commands and respective arguments as the user API. hpet_unregister -is used to terminate usage of the HPET timer reserved by hpet_register. diff --git a/Documentation/timers/00-INDEX b/Documentation/timers/00-INDEX new file mode 100644 index 0000000..397dc35 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/timers/00-INDEX @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +00-INDEX + - this file +highres.txt + - High resolution timers and dynamic ticks design notes +hpet.txt + - High Precision Event Timer Driver for Linux +hrtimers.txt + - subsystem for high-resolution kernel timers +timer_stats.txt + - timer usage statistics diff --git a/Documentation/timers/hpet.txt b/Documentation/timers/hpet.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6ad52d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/timers/hpet.txt @@ -0,0 +1,300 @@ + High Precision Event Timer Driver for Linux + +The High Precision Event Timer (HPET) hardware is the future replacement +for the 8254 and Real Time Clock (RTC) periodic timer functionality. +Each HPET can have up to 32 timers. It is possible to configure the +first two timers as legacy replacements for 8254 and RTC periodic timers. +A specification done by Intel and Microsoft can be found at +. + +The driver supports detection of HPET driver allocation and initialization +of the HPET before the driver module_init routine is called. This enables +platform code which uses timer 0 or 1 as the main timer to intercept HPET +initialization. An example of this initialization can be found in +arch/i386/kernel/time_hpet.c. + +The driver provides two APIs which are very similar to the API found in +the rtc.c driver. There is a user space API and a kernel space API. +An example user space program is provided below. + +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include + + +extern void hpet_open_close(int, const char **); +extern void hpet_info(int, const char **); +extern void hpet_poll(int, const char **); +extern void hpet_fasync(int, const char **); +extern void hpet_read(int, const char **); + +#include +#include +#include + +struct hpet_command { + char *command; + void (*func)(int argc, const char ** argv); +} hpet_command[] = { + { + "open-close", + hpet_open_close + }, + { + "info", + hpet_info + }, + { + "poll", + hpet_poll + }, + { + "fasync", + hpet_fasync + }, +}; + +int +main(int argc, const char ** argv) +{ + int i; + + argc--; + argv++; + + if (!argc) { + fprintf(stderr, "-hpet: requires command\n"); + return -1; + } + + + for (i = 0; i < (sizeof (hpet_command) / sizeof (hpet_command[0])); i++) + if (!strcmp(argv[0], hpet_command[i].command)) { + argc--; + argv++; + fprintf(stderr, "-hpet: executing %s\n", + hpet_command[i].command); + hpet_command[i].func(argc, argv); + return 0; + } + + fprintf(stderr, "do_hpet: command %s not implemented\n", argv[0]); + + return -1; +} + +void +hpet_open_close(int argc, const char **argv) +{ + int fd; + + if (argc != 1) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_open_close: device-name\n"); + return; + } + + fd = open(argv[0], O_RDONLY); + if (fd < 0) + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_open_close: open failed\n"); + else + close(fd); + + return; +} + +void +hpet_info(int argc, const char **argv) +{ +} + +void +hpet_poll(int argc, const char **argv) +{ + unsigned long freq; + int iterations, i, fd; + struct pollfd pfd; + struct hpet_info info; + struct timeval stv, etv; + struct timezone tz; + long usec; + + if (argc != 3) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: device-name freq iterations\n"); + return; + } + + freq = atoi(argv[1]); + iterations = atoi(argv[2]); + + fd = open(argv[0], O_RDONLY); + + if (fd < 0) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: open of %s failed\n", argv[0]); + return; + } + + if (ioctl(fd, HPET_IRQFREQ, freq) < 0) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: HPET_IRQFREQ failed\n"); + goto out; + } + + if (ioctl(fd, HPET_INFO, &info) < 0) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: failed to get info\n"); + goto out; + } + + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: info.hi_flags 0x%lx\n", info.hi_flags); + + if (info.hi_flags && (ioctl(fd, HPET_EPI, 0) < 0)) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: HPET_EPI failed\n"); + goto out; + } + + if (ioctl(fd, HPET_IE_ON, 0) < 0) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll, HPET_IE_ON failed\n"); + goto out; + } + + pfd.fd = fd; + pfd.events = POLLIN; + + for (i = 0; i < iterations; i++) { + pfd.revents = 0; + gettimeofday(&stv, &tz); + if (poll(&pfd, 1, -1) < 0) + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: poll failed\n"); + else { + long data; + + gettimeofday(&etv, &tz); + usec = stv.tv_sec * 1000000 + stv.tv_usec; + usec = (etv.tv_sec * 1000000 + etv.tv_usec) - usec; + + fprintf(stderr, + "hpet_poll: expired time = 0x%lx\n", usec); + + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: revents = 0x%x\n", + pfd.revents); + + if (read(fd, &data, sizeof(data)) != sizeof(data)) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: read failed\n"); + } + else + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: data 0x%lx\n", + data); + } + } + +out: + close(fd); + return; +} + +static int hpet_sigio_count; + +static void +hpet_sigio(int val) +{ + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_sigio: called\n"); + hpet_sigio_count++; +} + +void +hpet_fasync(int argc, const char **argv) +{ + unsigned long freq; + int iterations, i, fd, value; + sig_t oldsig; + struct hpet_info info; + + hpet_sigio_count = 0; + fd = -1; + + if ((oldsig = signal(SIGIO, hpet_sigio)) == SIG_ERR) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: failed to set signal handler\n"); + return; + } + + if (argc != 3) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: device-name freq iterations\n"); + goto out; + } + + fd = open(argv[0], O_RDONLY); + + if (fd < 0) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: failed to open %s\n", argv[0]); + return; + } + + + if ((fcntl(fd, F_SETOWN, getpid()) == 1) || + ((value = fcntl(fd, F_GETFL)) == 1) || + (fcntl(fd, F_SETFL, value | O_ASYNC) == 1)) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: fcntl failed\n"); + goto out; + } + + freq = atoi(argv[1]); + iterations = atoi(argv[2]); + + if (ioctl(fd, HPET_IRQFREQ, freq) < 0) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: HPET_IRQFREQ failed\n"); + goto out; + } + + if (ioctl(fd, HPET_INFO, &info) < 0) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: failed to get info\n"); + goto out; + } + + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: info.hi_flags 0x%lx\n", info.hi_flags); + + if (info.hi_flags && (ioctl(fd, HPET_EPI, 0) < 0)) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: HPET_EPI failed\n"); + goto out; + } + + if (ioctl(fd, HPET_IE_ON, 0) < 0) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync, HPET_IE_ON failed\n"); + goto out; + } + + for (i = 0; i < iterations; i++) { + (void) pause(); + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: count = %d\n", hpet_sigio_count); + } + +out: + signal(SIGIO, oldsig); + + if (fd >= 0) + close(fd); + + return; +} + +The kernel API has three interfaces exported from the driver: + + hpet_register(struct hpet_task *tp, int periodic) + hpet_unregister(struct hpet_task *tp) + hpet_control(struct hpet_task *tp, unsigned int cmd, unsigned long arg) + +The kernel module using this interface fills in the ht_func and ht_data +members of the hpet_task structure before calling hpet_register. +hpet_control simply vectors to the hpet_ioctl routine and has the same +commands and respective arguments as the user API. hpet_unregister +is used to terminate usage of the HPET timer reserved by hpet_register. -- cgit v1.1 From 5c05917e7fe313a187ad6ebb94c1c6cf42862a0b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Yinghai Lu Date: Thu, 24 Jul 2008 17:29:40 -0700 Subject: x86: usb debug port early console, v4 based on work from Eric, and add some timeout so don't dead loop when debug device is not installed v2: fix checkpatch warning v3: move ehci struct def to linux/usrb/ehci_def.h from host/ehci.h also add CONFIG_EARLY_PRINTK_DBGP to disable it by default v4: address comments from Ingo, seperate ehci reg def moving to another patch also add auto detect port that connect to debug device for Nvidia southbridge Signed-off-by: Yinghai Lu Cc: Andrew Morton Cc: Andi Kleen Cc: "Arjan van de Ven" Cc: "Eric W. Biederman" Cc: "Greg KH" Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index e7bea3e..92ddd4a 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -657,11 +657,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file earlyprintk= [X86-32,X86-64,SH,BLACKFIN] earlyprintk=vga earlyprintk=serial[,ttySn[,baudrate]] + earlyprintk=dbgp Append ",keep" to not disable it when the real console takes over. - Only vga or serial at a time, not both. + Only vga or serial or usb debug port at a time. Currently only ttyS0 and ttyS1 are supported. -- cgit v1.1 From 7225e75144b9718cbbe1820d9c011c809d5773fd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Randy Dunlap Date: Sat, 26 Jul 2008 17:54:22 -0700 Subject: documentation: move mtrr.txt to Doc/x86/ subdir Move mtrr.txt to the Documentation/x86/ subdirectory. Add 00-INDEX to the Documentation/x86/ subdirectory. Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Cc: Adrian Bunk Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/00-INDEX | 2 - Documentation/mtrr.txt | 305 --------------------------------------------- Documentation/x86/00-INDEX | 4 + Documentation/x86/mtrr.txt | 305 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 4 files changed, 309 insertions(+), 307 deletions(-) delete mode 100644 Documentation/mtrr.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/x86/00-INDEX create mode 100644 Documentation/x86/mtrr.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/00-INDEX b/Documentation/00-INDEX index 1977fab..661b6cc 100644 --- a/Documentation/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/00-INDEX @@ -253,8 +253,6 @@ mono.txt - how to execute Mono-based .NET binaries with the help of BINFMT_MISC. moxa-smartio - file with info on installing/using Moxa multiport serial driver. -mtrr.txt - - how to use PPro Memory Type Range Registers to increase performance. mutex-design.txt - info on the generic mutex subsystem. namespaces/ diff --git a/Documentation/mtrr.txt b/Documentation/mtrr.txt deleted file mode 100644 index c39ac39..0000000 --- a/Documentation/mtrr.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,305 +0,0 @@ -MTRR (Memory Type Range Register) control -3 Jun 1999 -Richard Gooch - - - On Intel P6 family processors (Pentium Pro, Pentium II and later) - the Memory Type Range Registers (MTRRs) may be used to control - processor access to memory ranges. This is most useful when you have - a video (VGA) card on a PCI or AGP bus. Enabling write-combining - allows bus write transfers to be combined into a larger transfer - before bursting over the PCI/AGP bus. This can increase performance - of image write operations 2.5 times or more. - - The Cyrix 6x86, 6x86MX and M II processors have Address Range - Registers (ARRs) which provide a similar functionality to MTRRs. For - these, the ARRs are used to emulate the MTRRs. - - The AMD K6-2 (stepping 8 and above) and K6-3 processors have two - MTRRs. These are supported. The AMD Athlon family provide 8 Intel - style MTRRs. - - The Centaur C6 (WinChip) has 8 MCRs, allowing write-combining. These - are supported. - - The VIA Cyrix III and VIA C3 CPUs offer 8 Intel style MTRRs. - - The CONFIG_MTRR option creates a /proc/mtrr file which may be used - to manipulate your MTRRs. Typically the X server should use - this. This should have a reasonably generic interface so that - similar control registers on other processors can be easily - supported. - - -There are two interfaces to /proc/mtrr: one is an ASCII interface -which allows you to read and write. The other is an ioctl() -interface. The ASCII interface is meant for administration. The -ioctl() interface is meant for C programs (i.e. the X server). The -interfaces are described below, with sample commands and C code. - -=============================================================================== -Reading MTRRs from the shell: - -% cat /proc/mtrr -reg00: base=0x00000000 ( 0MB), size= 128MB: write-back, count=1 -reg01: base=0x08000000 ( 128MB), size= 64MB: write-back, count=1 -=============================================================================== -Creating MTRRs from the C-shell: -# echo "base=0xf8000000 size=0x400000 type=write-combining" >! /proc/mtrr -or if you use bash: -# echo "base=0xf8000000 size=0x400000 type=write-combining" >| /proc/mtrr - -And the result thereof: -% cat /proc/mtrr -reg00: base=0x00000000 ( 0MB), size= 128MB: write-back, count=1 -reg01: base=0x08000000 ( 128MB), size= 64MB: write-back, count=1 -reg02: base=0xf8000000 (3968MB), size= 4MB: write-combining, count=1 - -This is for video RAM at base address 0xf8000000 and size 4 megabytes. To -find out your base address, you need to look at the output of your X -server, which tells you where the linear framebuffer address is. A -typical line that you may get is: - -(--) S3: PCI: 968 rev 0, Linear FB @ 0xf8000000 - -Note that you should only use the value from the X server, as it may -move the framebuffer base address, so the only value you can trust is -that reported by the X server. - -To find out the size of your framebuffer (what, you don't actually -know?), the following line will tell you: - -(--) S3: videoram: 4096k - -That's 4 megabytes, which is 0x400000 bytes (in hexadecimal). -A patch is being written for XFree86 which will make this automatic: -in other words the X server will manipulate /proc/mtrr using the -ioctl() interface, so users won't have to do anything. If you use a -commercial X server, lobby your vendor to add support for MTRRs. -=============================================================================== -Creating overlapping MTRRs: - -%echo "base=0xfb000000 size=0x1000000 type=write-combining" >/proc/mtrr -%echo "base=0xfb000000 size=0x1000 type=uncachable" >/proc/mtrr - -And the results: cat /proc/mtrr -reg00: base=0x00000000 ( 0MB), size= 64MB: write-back, count=1 -reg01: base=0xfb000000 (4016MB), size= 16MB: write-combining, count=1 -reg02: base=0xfb000000 (4016MB), size= 4kB: uncachable, count=1 - -Some cards (especially Voodoo Graphics boards) need this 4 kB area -excluded from the beginning of the region because it is used for -registers. - -NOTE: You can only create type=uncachable region, if the first -region that you created is type=write-combining. -=============================================================================== -Removing MTRRs from the C-shell: -% echo "disable=2" >! /proc/mtrr -or using bash: -% echo "disable=2" >| /proc/mtrr -=============================================================================== -Reading MTRRs from a C program using ioctl()'s: - -/* mtrr-show.c - - Source file for mtrr-show (example program to show MTRRs using ioctl()'s) - - Copyright (C) 1997-1998 Richard Gooch - - This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify - it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by - the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or - (at your option) any later version. - - This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, - but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of - MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the - GNU General Public License for more details. - - You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License - along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software - Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. - - Richard Gooch may be reached by email at rgooch@atnf.csiro.au - The postal address is: - Richard Gooch, c/o ATNF, P. O. Box 76, Epping, N.S.W., 2121, Australia. -*/ - -/* - This program will use an ioctl() on /proc/mtrr to show the current MTRR - settings. This is an alternative to reading /proc/mtrr. - - - Written by Richard Gooch 17-DEC-1997 - - Last updated by Richard Gooch 2-MAY-1998 - - -*/ -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include - -#define TRUE 1 -#define FALSE 0 -#define ERRSTRING strerror (errno) - -static char *mtrr_strings[MTRR_NUM_TYPES] = -{ - "uncachable", /* 0 */ - "write-combining", /* 1 */ - "?", /* 2 */ - "?", /* 3 */ - "write-through", /* 4 */ - "write-protect", /* 5 */ - "write-back", /* 6 */ -}; - -int main () -{ - int fd; - struct mtrr_gentry gentry; - - if ( ( fd = open ("/proc/mtrr", O_RDONLY, 0) ) == -1 ) - { - if (errno == ENOENT) - { - fputs ("/proc/mtrr not found: not supported or you don't have a PPro?\n", - stderr); - exit (1); - } - fprintf (stderr, "Error opening /proc/mtrr\t%s\n", ERRSTRING); - exit (2); - } - for (gentry.regnum = 0; ioctl (fd, MTRRIOC_GET_ENTRY, &gentry) == 0; - ++gentry.regnum) - { - if (gentry.size < 1) - { - fprintf (stderr, "Register: %u disabled\n", gentry.regnum); - continue; - } - fprintf (stderr, "Register: %u base: 0x%lx size: 0x%lx type: %s\n", - gentry.regnum, gentry.base, gentry.size, - mtrr_strings[gentry.type]); - } - if (errno == EINVAL) exit (0); - fprintf (stderr, "Error doing ioctl(2) on /dev/mtrr\t%s\n", ERRSTRING); - exit (3); -} /* End Function main */ -=============================================================================== -Creating MTRRs from a C programme using ioctl()'s: - -/* mtrr-add.c - - Source file for mtrr-add (example programme to add an MTRRs using ioctl()) - - Copyright (C) 1997-1998 Richard Gooch - - This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify - it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by - the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or - (at your option) any later version. - - This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, - but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of - MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the - GNU General Public License for more details. - - You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License - along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software - Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. - - Richard Gooch may be reached by email at rgooch@atnf.csiro.au - The postal address is: - Richard Gooch, c/o ATNF, P. O. Box 76, Epping, N.S.W., 2121, Australia. -*/ - -/* - This programme will use an ioctl() on /proc/mtrr to add an entry. The first - available mtrr is used. This is an alternative to writing /proc/mtrr. - - - Written by Richard Gooch 17-DEC-1997 - - Last updated by Richard Gooch 2-MAY-1998 - - -*/ -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include -#include - -#define TRUE 1 -#define FALSE 0 -#define ERRSTRING strerror (errno) - -static char *mtrr_strings[MTRR_NUM_TYPES] = -{ - "uncachable", /* 0 */ - "write-combining", /* 1 */ - "?", /* 2 */ - "?", /* 3 */ - "write-through", /* 4 */ - "write-protect", /* 5 */ - "write-back", /* 6 */ -}; - -int main (int argc, char **argv) -{ - int fd; - struct mtrr_sentry sentry; - - if (argc != 4) - { - fprintf (stderr, "Usage:\tmtrr-add base size type\n"); - exit (1); - } - sentry.base = strtoul (argv[1], NULL, 0); - sentry.size = strtoul (argv[2], NULL, 0); - for (sentry.type = 0; sentry.type < MTRR_NUM_TYPES; ++sentry.type) - { - if (strcmp (argv[3], mtrr_strings[sentry.type]) == 0) break; - } - if (sentry.type >= MTRR_NUM_TYPES) - { - fprintf (stderr, "Illegal type: \"%s\"\n", argv[3]); - exit (2); - } - if ( ( fd = open ("/proc/mtrr", O_WRONLY, 0) ) == -1 ) - { - if (errno == ENOENT) - { - fputs ("/proc/mtrr not found: not supported or you don't have a PPro?\n", - stderr); - exit (3); - } - fprintf (stderr, "Error opening /proc/mtrr\t%s\n", ERRSTRING); - exit (4); - } - if (ioctl (fd, MTRRIOC_ADD_ENTRY, &sentry) == -1) - { - fprintf (stderr, "Error doing ioctl(2) on /dev/mtrr\t%s\n", ERRSTRING); - exit (5); - } - fprintf (stderr, "Sleeping for 5 seconds so you can see the new entry\n"); - sleep (5); - close (fd); - fputs ("I've just closed /proc/mtrr so now the new entry should be gone\n", - stderr); -} /* End Function main */ -=============================================================================== diff --git a/Documentation/x86/00-INDEX b/Documentation/x86/00-INDEX new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dbe3377 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/x86/00-INDEX @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +00-INDEX + - this file +mtrr.txt + - how to use x86 Memory Type Range Registers to increase performance diff --git a/Documentation/x86/mtrr.txt b/Documentation/x86/mtrr.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cc071dc --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/x86/mtrr.txt @@ -0,0 +1,305 @@ +MTRR (Memory Type Range Register) control +3 Jun 1999 +Richard Gooch + + + On Intel P6 family processors (Pentium Pro, Pentium II and later) + the Memory Type Range Registers (MTRRs) may be used to control + processor access to memory ranges. This is most useful when you have + a video (VGA) card on a PCI or AGP bus. Enabling write-combining + allows bus write transfers to be combined into a larger transfer + before bursting over the PCI/AGP bus. This can increase performance + of image write operations 2.5 times or more. + + The Cyrix 6x86, 6x86MX and M II processors have Address Range + Registers (ARRs) which provide a similar functionality to MTRRs. For + these, the ARRs are used to emulate the MTRRs. + + The AMD K6-2 (stepping 8 and above) and K6-3 processors have two + MTRRs. These are supported. The AMD Athlon family provide 8 Intel + style MTRRs. + + The Centaur C6 (WinChip) has 8 MCRs, allowing write-combining. These + are supported. + + The VIA Cyrix III and VIA C3 CPUs offer 8 Intel style MTRRs. + + The CONFIG_MTRR option creates a /proc/mtrr file which may be used + to manipulate your MTRRs. Typically the X server should use + this. This should have a reasonably generic interface so that + similar control registers on other processors can be easily + supported. + + +There are two interfaces to /proc/mtrr: one is an ASCII interface +which allows you to read and write. The other is an ioctl() +interface. The ASCII interface is meant for administration. The +ioctl() interface is meant for C programs (i.e. the X server). The +interfaces are described below, with sample commands and C code. + +=============================================================================== +Reading MTRRs from the shell: + +% cat /proc/mtrr +reg00: base=0x00000000 ( 0MB), size= 128MB: write-back, count=1 +reg01: base=0x08000000 ( 128MB), size= 64MB: write-back, count=1 +=============================================================================== +Creating MTRRs from the C-shell: +# echo "base=0xf8000000 size=0x400000 type=write-combining" >! /proc/mtrr +or if you use bash: +# echo "base=0xf8000000 size=0x400000 type=write-combining" >| /proc/mtrr + +And the result thereof: +% cat /proc/mtrr +reg00: base=0x00000000 ( 0MB), size= 128MB: write-back, count=1 +reg01: base=0x08000000 ( 128MB), size= 64MB: write-back, count=1 +reg02: base=0xf8000000 (3968MB), size= 4MB: write-combining, count=1 + +This is for video RAM at base address 0xf8000000 and size 4 megabytes. To +find out your base address, you need to look at the output of your X +server, which tells you where the linear framebuffer address is. A +typical line that you may get is: + +(--) S3: PCI: 968 rev 0, Linear FB @ 0xf8000000 + +Note that you should only use the value from the X server, as it may +move the framebuffer base address, so the only value you can trust is +that reported by the X server. + +To find out the size of your framebuffer (what, you don't actually +know?), the following line will tell you: + +(--) S3: videoram: 4096k + +That's 4 megabytes, which is 0x400000 bytes (in hexadecimal). +A patch is being written for XFree86 which will make this automatic: +in other words the X server will manipulate /proc/mtrr using the +ioctl() interface, so users won't have to do anything. If you use a +commercial X server, lobby your vendor to add support for MTRRs. +=============================================================================== +Creating overlapping MTRRs: + +%echo "base=0xfb000000 size=0x1000000 type=write-combining" >/proc/mtrr +%echo "base=0xfb000000 size=0x1000 type=uncachable" >/proc/mtrr + +And the results: cat /proc/mtrr +reg00: base=0x00000000 ( 0MB), size= 64MB: write-back, count=1 +reg01: base=0xfb000000 (4016MB), size= 16MB: write-combining, count=1 +reg02: base=0xfb000000 (4016MB), size= 4kB: uncachable, count=1 + +Some cards (especially Voodoo Graphics boards) need this 4 kB area +excluded from the beginning of the region because it is used for +registers. + +NOTE: You can only create type=uncachable region, if the first +region that you created is type=write-combining. +=============================================================================== +Removing MTRRs from the C-shell: +% echo "disable=2" >! /proc/mtrr +or using bash: +% echo "disable=2" >| /proc/mtrr +=============================================================================== +Reading MTRRs from a C program using ioctl()'s: + +/* mtrr-show.c + + Source file for mtrr-show (example program to show MTRRs using ioctl()'s) + + Copyright (C) 1997-1998 Richard Gooch + + This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify + it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by + the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or + (at your option) any later version. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the + GNU General Public License for more details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License + along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software + Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. + + Richard Gooch may be reached by email at rgooch@atnf.csiro.au + The postal address is: + Richard Gooch, c/o ATNF, P. O. Box 76, Epping, N.S.W., 2121, Australia. +*/ + +/* + This program will use an ioctl() on /proc/mtrr to show the current MTRR + settings. This is an alternative to reading /proc/mtrr. + + + Written by Richard Gooch 17-DEC-1997 + + Last updated by Richard Gooch 2-MAY-1998 + + +*/ +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include + +#define TRUE 1 +#define FALSE 0 +#define ERRSTRING strerror (errno) + +static char *mtrr_strings[MTRR_NUM_TYPES] = +{ + "uncachable", /* 0 */ + "write-combining", /* 1 */ + "?", /* 2 */ + "?", /* 3 */ + "write-through", /* 4 */ + "write-protect", /* 5 */ + "write-back", /* 6 */ +}; + +int main () +{ + int fd; + struct mtrr_gentry gentry; + + if ( ( fd = open ("/proc/mtrr", O_RDONLY, 0) ) == -1 ) + { + if (errno == ENOENT) + { + fputs ("/proc/mtrr not found: not supported or you don't have a PPro?\n", + stderr); + exit (1); + } + fprintf (stderr, "Error opening /proc/mtrr\t%s\n", ERRSTRING); + exit (2); + } + for (gentry.regnum = 0; ioctl (fd, MTRRIOC_GET_ENTRY, &gentry) == 0; + ++gentry.regnum) + { + if (gentry.size < 1) + { + fprintf (stderr, "Register: %u disabled\n", gentry.regnum); + continue; + } + fprintf (stderr, "Register: %u base: 0x%lx size: 0x%lx type: %s\n", + gentry.regnum, gentry.base, gentry.size, + mtrr_strings[gentry.type]); + } + if (errno == EINVAL) exit (0); + fprintf (stderr, "Error doing ioctl(2) on /dev/mtrr\t%s\n", ERRSTRING); + exit (3); +} /* End Function main */ +=============================================================================== +Creating MTRRs from a C programme using ioctl()'s: + +/* mtrr-add.c + + Source file for mtrr-add (example programme to add an MTRRs using ioctl()) + + Copyright (C) 1997-1998 Richard Gooch + + This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify + it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by + the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or + (at your option) any later version. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the + GNU General Public License for more details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License + along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software + Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. + + Richard Gooch may be reached by email at rgooch@atnf.csiro.au + The postal address is: + Richard Gooch, c/o ATNF, P. O. Box 76, Epping, N.S.W., 2121, Australia. +*/ + +/* + This programme will use an ioctl() on /proc/mtrr to add an entry. The first + available mtrr is used. This is an alternative to writing /proc/mtrr. + + + Written by Richard Gooch 17-DEC-1997 + + Last updated by Richard Gooch 2-MAY-1998 + + +*/ +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include + +#define TRUE 1 +#define FALSE 0 +#define ERRSTRING strerror (errno) + +static char *mtrr_strings[MTRR_NUM_TYPES] = +{ + "uncachable", /* 0 */ + "write-combining", /* 1 */ + "?", /* 2 */ + "?", /* 3 */ + "write-through", /* 4 */ + "write-protect", /* 5 */ + "write-back", /* 6 */ +}; + +int main (int argc, char **argv) +{ + int fd; + struct mtrr_sentry sentry; + + if (argc != 4) + { + fprintf (stderr, "Usage:\tmtrr-add base size type\n"); + exit (1); + } + sentry.base = strtoul (argv[1], NULL, 0); + sentry.size = strtoul (argv[2], NULL, 0); + for (sentry.type = 0; sentry.type < MTRR_NUM_TYPES; ++sentry.type) + { + if (strcmp (argv[3], mtrr_strings[sentry.type]) == 0) break; + } + if (sentry.type >= MTRR_NUM_TYPES) + { + fprintf (stderr, "Illegal type: \"%s\"\n", argv[3]); + exit (2); + } + if ( ( fd = open ("/proc/mtrr", O_WRONLY, 0) ) == -1 ) + { + if (errno == ENOENT) + { + fputs ("/proc/mtrr not found: not supported or you don't have a PPro?\n", + stderr); + exit (3); + } + fprintf (stderr, "Error opening /proc/mtrr\t%s\n", ERRSTRING); + exit (4); + } + if (ioctl (fd, MTRRIOC_ADD_ENTRY, &sentry) == -1) + { + fprintf (stderr, "Error doing ioctl(2) on /dev/mtrr\t%s\n", ERRSTRING); + exit (5); + } + fprintf (stderr, "Sleeping for 5 seconds so you can see the new entry\n"); + sleep (5); + close (fd); + fputs ("I've just closed /proc/mtrr so now the new entry should be gone\n", + stderr); +} /* End Function main */ +=============================================================================== -- cgit v1.1 From 64a76f667d987a559ad0726b4692c987800b22bc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: David Brownell Date: Tue, 29 Jul 2008 12:47:38 -0700 Subject: hpet: /dev/hpet - fixes and cleanup Minor /dev/hpet updates and bugfixes: * Remove dead code, mostly remnants of an incomplete/unusable kernel interface ... noted when addressing "sparse" warnings: + hpet_unregister() and a routine it calls + hpet_task and all references, including hpet_task_lock + hpet_data.hd_flags (and HPET_DATA_PLATFORM) * Correct and improve boot message: + displays *counter* (shared between comparators) bit width, not *timer* bit widths (which are often mixed) + relabel "timers" as "comparators"; this is less confusing, they are not independent like normal timers are (sigh) + display MHz not Hz; it's never less than 10 MHz. * Tighten and correct the userspace interface code + don't accidentally program comparators in 64-bit mode using 32-bit values ... always force comparators into 32-bit mode + provide the correct bit definition flagging comparators with periodic capability ... the ABI is unchanged * Update Documentation/hpet.txt + be more correct and current + expand description a bit + don't mention that now-gone kernel interface Plus, add a FIXME comment for something that could cause big trouble on systems with more capable HPETs than at least Intel seems to ship. It seems that few folk use this userspace interface; it's not very usable given the general lack of HPET IRQ routing. I'm told that the only real point of it any more is to mmap for fast timestamps; IMO that's handled better through the gettimeofday() vsyscall. Signed-off-by: David Brownell Acked-by: Clemens Ladisch Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/timers/hpet.txt | 43 +++++++++++++++++++++---------------------- 1 file changed, 21 insertions(+), 22 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/timers/hpet.txt b/Documentation/timers/hpet.txt index 6ad52d9..e7c09ab 100644 --- a/Documentation/timers/hpet.txt +++ b/Documentation/timers/hpet.txt @@ -1,21 +1,32 @@ High Precision Event Timer Driver for Linux -The High Precision Event Timer (HPET) hardware is the future replacement -for the 8254 and Real Time Clock (RTC) periodic timer functionality. -Each HPET can have up to 32 timers. It is possible to configure the -first two timers as legacy replacements for 8254 and RTC periodic timers. -A specification done by Intel and Microsoft can be found at -. +The High Precision Event Timer (HPET) hardware follows a specification +by Intel and Microsoft which can be found at + + http://www.intel.com/technology/architecture/hpetspec.htm + +Each HPET has one fixed-rate counter (at 10+ MHz, hence "High Precision") +and up to 32 comparators. Normally three or more comparators are provided, +each of which can generate oneshot interupts and at least one of which has +additional hardware to support periodic interrupts. The comparators are +also called "timers", which can be misleading since usually timers are +independent of each other ... these share a counter, complicating resets. + +HPET devices can support two interrupt routing modes. In one mode, the +comparators are additional interrupt sources with no particular system +role. Many x86 BIOS writers don't route HPET interrupts at all, which +prevents use of that mode. They support the other "legacy replacement" +mode where the first two comparators block interrupts from 8254 timers +and from the RTC. The driver supports detection of HPET driver allocation and initialization of the HPET before the driver module_init routine is called. This enables platform code which uses timer 0 or 1 as the main timer to intercept HPET initialization. An example of this initialization can be found in -arch/i386/kernel/time_hpet.c. +arch/x86/kernel/hpet.c. -The driver provides two APIs which are very similar to the API found in -the rtc.c driver. There is a user space API and a kernel space API. -An example user space program is provided below. +The driver provides a userspace API which resembles the API found in the +RTC driver framework. An example user space program is provided below. #include #include @@ -286,15 +297,3 @@ out: return; } - -The kernel API has three interfaces exported from the driver: - - hpet_register(struct hpet_task *tp, int periodic) - hpet_unregister(struct hpet_task *tp) - hpet_control(struct hpet_task *tp, unsigned int cmd, unsigned long arg) - -The kernel module using this interface fills in the ht_func and ht_data -members of the hpet_task structure before calling hpet_register. -hpet_control simply vectors to the hpet_ioctl routine and has the same -commands and respective arguments as the user API. hpet_unregister -is used to terminate usage of the HPET timer reserved by hpet_register. -- cgit v1.1 From 5ef03460a6ffc1d3ee6b6f2abc6765d3e224cf89 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Fri, 8 Aug 2008 17:06:01 +0200 Subject: ALSA: Introduce snd_BUG_ON() macro Introduced snd_BUG_ON() macro as a replacement of snd_assert() macro. snd_assert() is pretty ugly as it has the control flow in its argument. OTOH, snd_BUG_ON() behaves like a normal conditional, thus it's much easier to read the flow. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai Signed-off-by: Jaroslav Kysela --- .../sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl | 41 ++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 41 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl b/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl index e13c4e6..df699e4 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl @@ -6173,6 +6173,47 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime { When no debug flag is set, this macro is ignored. + +
+ <function>snd_BUG_ON()</function> + + snd_BUG_ON() macro is similar with + WARN_ON() macro. For example, + + + + + + + + or it can be used as the condition, + + + + + + + + + + The macro takes an conditional expression to evaluate. + When CONFIG_SND_DEBUG, is set, the + expression is actually evaluated. If it's non-zero, it shows + the warning message such as + BUG? (xxx) + normally followed by stack trace. It returns the evaluated + value. + When no CONFIG_SND_DEBUG is set, this + macro always returns zero. + + +
+ -- cgit v1.1 From 7cc6dffdae28058f5953fac5743b6abf705d4f05 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Fri, 8 Aug 2008 17:14:55 +0200 Subject: ALSA: Kill snd_assert() definition Remove snd_assert() completely now. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai Signed-off-by: Jaroslav Kysela --- .../sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl | 29 +--------------------- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 28 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl b/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl index df699e4..b54cb50 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl @@ -6135,38 +6135,11 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime { -
- <function>snd_assert()</function> - - snd_assert() macro is similar with the - normal assert() macro. For example, - - - - - - - - - - The first argument is the expression to evaluate, and the - second argument is the action if it fails. When - CONFIG_SND_DEBUG, is set, it will show an - error message such as BUG? (xxx) - together with stack trace. - - - When no debug flag is set, this macro is ignored. - -
-
<function>snd_BUG()</function> It shows the BUG? message and - stack trace as well as snd_assert at the point. + stack trace as well as snd_BUG_ON at the point. It's useful to show that a fatal error happens there. -- cgit v1.1 From 6ef109050da99952b59397840e9b50cd6611e92a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Alexander Beregalov Date: Wed, 13 Aug 2008 00:10:55 +0400 Subject: ALSA: ALSA-Configuration.txt: supported cards update ALSA-Configuration.txt: supported cards update Signed-off-by: Alexander Beregalov Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai Signed-off-by: Jaroslav Kysela --- Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 26 ++++++++++++++++++------- 1 file changed, 19 insertions(+), 7 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index b117e42..dd083b2 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -746,8 +746,10 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. Module snd-hda-intel -------------------- - Module for Intel HD Audio (ICH6, ICH6M, ESB2, ICH7, ICH8), - ATI SB450, SB600, RS600, + Module for Intel HD Audio (ICH6, ICH6M, ESB2, ICH7, ICH8, ICH9, ICH10, + PCH, SCH), + ATI SB450, SB600, R600, RS600, RS690, RS780, RV610, RV620, + RV630, RV635, RV670, RV770, VIA VT8251/VT8237A, SIS966, ULI M5461 @@ -1166,6 +1168,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. * Event Electronics, EZ8 * Digigram VX442 * Lionstracs, Mediastaton + * Terrasoniq TS 88 model - Use the given board model, one of the following: delta1010, dio2496, delta66, delta44, audiophile, delta410, @@ -1200,7 +1203,10 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. * TerraTec Phase 22 * TerraTec Phase 28 * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1 - * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1LT + * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1 LT + * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1 XT + * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1 HIFI + * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1 HD2 * AudioTrak Prodigy 192 * Pontis MS300 * Albatron K8X800 Pro II @@ -1211,12 +1217,16 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. * Shuttle SN25P * Onkyo SE-90PCI * Onkyo SE-200PCI + * ESI Juli@ + * Hercules Fortissimo IV + * EGO-SYS WaveTerminal 192M model - Use the given board model, one of the following: revo51, revo71, amp2000, prodigy71, prodigy71lt, - prodigy192, aureon51, aureon71, universe, ap192, - k8x800, phase22, phase28, ms300, av710, se200pci, - se90pci + prodigy71xt, prodigy71hifi, prodigyhd2, prodigy192, + juli, aureon51, aureon71, universe, ap192, k8x800, + phase22, phase28, ms300, av710, se200pci, se90pci, + fortissimo4, sn25p, WT192M This module supports multiple cards and autoprobe. @@ -1255,7 +1265,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. Module for AC'97 motherboards from Intel and compatibles. * Intel i810/810E, i815, i820, i830, i84x, MX440 - ICH5, ICH6, ICH7, ESB2 + ICH5, ICH6, ICH7, 6300ESB, ESB2 * SiS 7012 (SiS 735) * NVidia NForce, NForce2, NForce3, MCP04, CK804 CK8, CK8S, MCP501 @@ -1951,6 +1961,8 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. * CHIC True Sound 4Dwave * Shark Predator4D-PCI * Jaton SonicWave 4D + * SiS SI7018 PCI Audio + * Hoontech SoundTrack Digital 4DWave NX pcm_channels - max channels (voices) reserved for PCM wavetable_size - max wavetable size in kB (4-?kb) -- cgit v1.1 From 8a8f2662c535e1dedced896cc68cb8473fd98fa0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Wed, 13 Aug 2008 15:27:43 +0200 Subject: ALSA: Add missing description of usb-audio parameters Added the missing description of module parameters of usb-audio driver to ALSA-Configuration.txt. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai Signed-off-by: Jaroslav Kysela --- Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 8 ++++++++ 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index dd083b2..68bbc25 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -1978,12 +1978,20 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. vid - Vendor ID for the device (optional) pid - Product ID for the device (optional) + nrpacks - Max. number of packets per URB (default: 8) + async_unlink - Use async unlink mode (default: yes) device_setup - Device specific magic number (optional) - Influence depends on the device - Default: 0x0000 This module supports multiple devices, autoprobe and hotplugging. + NB: nrpacks parameter can be modified dynamically via sysfs. + Don't put the value over 20. Changing via sysfs has no sanity + check. + NB: async_unlink=0 would cause Oops. It remains just for + debugging purpose (if any). + Module snd-usb-caiaq -------------------- -- cgit v1.1 From 7a9b8063cf7d78d7de4f2555357101087548c699 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Wed, 13 Aug 2008 15:40:53 +0200 Subject: ALSA: usb-audio - Add ignore_ctl_error parameter Added the ignore_ctl_error parameter to enable/disable the control-error handling for mixer interfaces. It was a hard-coded ifdef, and now you can change it more easily. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai Signed-off-by: Jaroslav Kysela --- Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 5 +++++ 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index 68bbc25..b33e030 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -1983,6 +1983,8 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. device_setup - Device specific magic number (optional) - Influence depends on the device - Default: 0x0000 + ignore_ctl_error - Ignore any USB-controller regarding mixer + interface (default: no) This module supports multiple devices, autoprobe and hotplugging. @@ -1991,6 +1993,9 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. check. NB: async_unlink=0 would cause Oops. It remains just for debugging purpose (if any). + NB: ignore_ctl_error=1 may help when you get an error at accessing + the mixer element such as URB error -22. This happens on some + buggy USB device or the controller. Module snd-usb-caiaq -------------------- -- cgit v1.1 From 34d7c2b38d124219b7034356716e3455c439acd3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Paul E. McKenney" Date: Fri, 1 Aug 2008 14:11:05 -0700 Subject: rcu: remove list_for_each_rcu() All of the in-tree uses of list_for_each_rcu() have been converted to list_for_each_entry_rcu(), so list_for_each_rcu() can now be removed. Signed-off-by: Paul E. McKenney Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt | 2 +- Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt | 2 -- 2 files changed, 1 insertion(+), 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt b/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt index cf5562c..6e25340 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome! number of updates per grace period. 9. All RCU list-traversal primitives, which include - rcu_dereference(), list_for_each_rcu(), list_for_each_entry_rcu(), + rcu_dereference(), list_for_each_entry_rcu(), list_for_each_continue_rcu(), and list_for_each_safe_rcu(), must be either within an RCU read-side critical section or must be protected by appropriate update-side locks. RCU diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt index e04d643..9617082 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt @@ -786,8 +786,6 @@ RCU pointer/list traversal: list_for_each_entry_rcu hlist_for_each_entry_rcu - list_for_each_rcu (to be deprecated in favor of - list_for_each_entry_rcu) list_for_each_continue_rcu (to be deprecated in favor of new list_for_each_entry_continue_rcu) -- cgit v1.1 From 3f23d815c5049c9d7022226cec2242e384dd0b43 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Randy Dunlap Date: Sun, 17 Aug 2008 21:44:22 -0700 Subject: security: add/fix security kernel-doc Add security/inode.c functions to the kernel-api docbook. Use '%' on constants in kernel-doc notation. Fix several typos/spellos in security function descriptions. Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Signed-off-by: James Morris --- Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl index b7b1482..cd0e6d5 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl @@ -283,6 +283,7 @@ X!Earch/x86/kernel/mca_32.c Security Framework !Isecurity/security.c +!Esecurity/inode.c -- cgit v1.1 From f58e2c33ffa31b8d4a71609a5e71e8d893574a07 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Claudio Scordino Date: Wed, 20 Aug 2008 15:18:45 +0200 Subject: sched: new documentation about CFS Rewrite of the CFS documentation - because the old one was sorely out-dated. Signed-off-by: Claudio Scordino Acked-by: Peter Zijlstra Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt | 371 ++++++++++++++++----------- 1 file changed, 218 insertions(+), 153 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt index 88bcb87..b2aa856 100644 --- a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt +++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt @@ -1,151 +1,218 @@ + ============= + CFS Scheduler + ============= -This is the CFS scheduler. - -80% of CFS's design can be summed up in a single sentence: CFS basically -models an "ideal, precise multi-tasking CPU" on real hardware. - -"Ideal multi-tasking CPU" is a (non-existent :-)) CPU that has 100% -physical power and which can run each task at precise equal speed, in -parallel, each at 1/nr_running speed. For example: if there are 2 tasks -running then it runs each at 50% physical power - totally in parallel. - -On real hardware, we can run only a single task at once, so while that -one task runs, the other tasks that are waiting for the CPU are at a -disadvantage - the current task gets an unfair amount of CPU time. In -CFS this fairness imbalance is expressed and tracked via the per-task -p->wait_runtime (nanosec-unit) value. "wait_runtime" is the amount of -time the task should now run on the CPU for it to become completely fair -and balanced. - -( small detail: on 'ideal' hardware, the p->wait_runtime value would - always be zero - no task would ever get 'out of balance' from the - 'ideal' share of CPU time. ) - -CFS's task picking logic is based on this p->wait_runtime value and it -is thus very simple: it always tries to run the task with the largest -p->wait_runtime value. In other words, CFS tries to run the task with -the 'gravest need' for more CPU time. So CFS always tries to split up -CPU time between runnable tasks as close to 'ideal multitasking -hardware' as possible. - -Most of the rest of CFS's design just falls out of this really simple -concept, with a few add-on embellishments like nice levels, -multiprocessing and various algorithm variants to recognize sleepers. - -In practice it works like this: the system runs a task a bit, and when -the task schedules (or a scheduler tick happens) the task's CPU usage is -'accounted for': the (small) time it just spent using the physical CPU -is deducted from p->wait_runtime. [minus the 'fair share' it would have -gotten anyway]. Once p->wait_runtime gets low enough so that another -task becomes the 'leftmost task' of the time-ordered rbtree it maintains -(plus a small amount of 'granularity' distance relative to the leftmost -task so that we do not over-schedule tasks and trash the cache) then the -new leftmost task is picked and the current task is preempted. - -The rq->fair_clock value tracks the 'CPU time a runnable task would have -fairly gotten, had it been runnable during that time'. So by using -rq->fair_clock values we can accurately timestamp and measure the -'expected CPU time' a task should have gotten. All runnable tasks are -sorted in the rbtree by the "rq->fair_clock - p->wait_runtime" key, and -CFS picks the 'leftmost' task and sticks to it. As the system progresses -forwards, newly woken tasks are put into the tree more and more to the -right - slowly but surely giving a chance for every task to become the -'leftmost task' and thus get on the CPU within a deterministic amount of -time. - -Some implementation details: - - - the introduction of Scheduling Classes: an extensible hierarchy of - scheduler modules. These modules encapsulate scheduling policy - details and are handled by the scheduler core without the core - code assuming about them too much. - - - sched_fair.c implements the 'CFS desktop scheduler': it is a - replacement for the vanilla scheduler's SCHED_OTHER interactivity - code. - - I'd like to give credit to Con Kolivas for the general approach here: - he has proven via RSDL/SD that 'fair scheduling' is possible and that - it results in better desktop scheduling. Kudos Con! - - The CFS patch uses a completely different approach and implementation - from RSDL/SD. My goal was to make CFS's interactivity quality exceed - that of RSDL/SD, which is a high standard to meet :-) Testing - feedback is welcome to decide this one way or another. [ and, in any - case, all of SD's logic could be added via a kernel/sched_sd.c module - as well, if Con is interested in such an approach. ] - - CFS's design is quite radical: it does not use runqueues, it uses a - time-ordered rbtree to build a 'timeline' of future task execution, - and thus has no 'array switch' artifacts (by which both the vanilla - scheduler and RSDL/SD are affected). - - CFS uses nanosecond granularity accounting and does not rely on any - jiffies or other HZ detail. Thus the CFS scheduler has no notion of - 'timeslices' and has no heuristics whatsoever. There is only one - central tunable (you have to switch on CONFIG_SCHED_DEBUG): - - /proc/sys/kernel/sched_granularity_ns - - which can be used to tune the scheduler from 'desktop' (low - latencies) to 'server' (good batching) workloads. It defaults to a - setting suitable for desktop workloads. SCHED_BATCH is handled by the - CFS scheduler module too. - - Due to its design, the CFS scheduler is not prone to any of the - 'attacks' that exist today against the heuristics of the stock - scheduler: fiftyp.c, thud.c, chew.c, ring-test.c, massive_intr.c all - work fine and do not impact interactivity and produce the expected - behavior. - - the CFS scheduler has a much stronger handling of nice levels and - SCHED_BATCH: both types of workloads should be isolated much more - agressively than under the vanilla scheduler. - - ( another detail: due to nanosec accounting and timeline sorting, - sched_yield() support is very simple under CFS, and in fact under - CFS sched_yield() behaves much better than under any other - scheduler i have tested so far. ) - - - sched_rt.c implements SCHED_FIFO and SCHED_RR semantics, in a simpler - way than the vanilla scheduler does. It uses 100 runqueues (for all - 100 RT priority levels, instead of 140 in the vanilla scheduler) - and it needs no expired array. - - - reworked/sanitized SMP load-balancing: the runqueue-walking - assumptions are gone from the load-balancing code now, and - iterators of the scheduling modules are used. The balancing code got - quite a bit simpler as a result. - - -Group scheduler extension to CFS -================================ - -Normally the scheduler operates on individual tasks and strives to provide -fair CPU time to each task. Sometimes, it may be desirable to group tasks -and provide fair CPU time to each such task group. For example, it may -be desirable to first provide fair CPU time to each user on the system -and then to each task belonging to a user. - -CONFIG_FAIR_GROUP_SCHED strives to achieve exactly that. It lets -SCHED_NORMAL/BATCH tasks be be grouped and divides CPU time fairly among such -groups. At present, there are two (mutually exclusive) mechanisms to group -tasks for CPU bandwidth control purpose: - - - Based on user id (CONFIG_FAIR_USER_SCHED) - In this option, tasks are grouped according to their user id. - - Based on "cgroup" pseudo filesystem (CONFIG_FAIR_CGROUP_SCHED) - This options lets the administrator create arbitrary groups - of tasks, using the "cgroup" pseudo filesystem. See - Documentation/cgroups.txt for more information about this - filesystem. -Only one of these options to group tasks can be chosen and not both. +1. OVERVIEW + +CFS stands for "Completely Fair Scheduler," and is the new "desktop" process +scheduler implemented by Ingo Molnar and merged in Linux 2.6.23. It is the +replacement for the previous vanilla scheduler's SCHED_OTHER interactivity +code. + +80% of CFS's design can be summed up in a single sentence: CFS basically models +an "ideal, precise multi-tasking CPU" on real hardware. + +"Ideal multi-tasking CPU" is a (non-existent :-)) CPU that has 100% physical +power and which can run each task at precise equal speed, in parallel, each at +1/nr_running speed. For example: if there are 2 tasks running, then it runs +each at 50% physical power --- i.e., actually in parallel. + +On real hardware, we can run only a single task at once, so we have to +introduce the concept of "virtual runtime." The virtual runtime of a task +specifies when its next timeslice would start execution on the ideal +multi-tasking CPU described above. In practice, the virtual runtime of a task +is its actual runtime normalized to the total number of running tasks. + + + +2. FEW IMPLEMENTATION DETAILS + +In CFS the virtual runtime is expressed and tracked via the per-task +p->se.vruntime (nanosec-unit) value. This way, it's possible to accurately +timestamp and measure the "expected CPU time" a task should have gotten. + +[ small detail: on "ideal" hardware, at any time all tasks would have the same + p->se.vruntime value --- i.e., tasks would execute simultaneously and no task + would ever get "out of balance" from the "ideal" share of CPU time. ] + +CFS's task picking logic is based on this p->se.vruntime value and it is thus +very simple: it always tries to run the task with the smallest p->se.vruntime +value (i.e., the task which executed least so far). CFS always tries to split +up CPU time between runnable tasks as close to "ideal multitasking hardware" as +possible. + +Most of the rest of CFS's design just falls out of this really simple concept, +with a few add-on embellishments like nice levels, multiprocessing and various +algorithm variants to recognize sleepers. + + + +3. THE RBTREE + +CFS's design is quite radical: it does not use the old data structures for the +runqueues, but it uses a time-ordered rbtree to build a "timeline" of future +task execution, and thus has no "array switch" artifacts (by which both the +previous vanilla scheduler and RSDL/SD are affected). + +CFS also maintains the rq->cfs.min_vruntime value, which is a monotonic +increasing value tracking the smallest vruntime among all tasks in the +runqueue. The total amount of work done by the system is tracked using +min_vruntime; that value is used to place newly activated entities on the left +side of the tree as much as possible. + +The total number of running tasks in the runqueue is accounted through the +rq->cfs.load value, which is the sum of the weights of the tasks queued on the +runqueue. + +CFS maintains a time-ordered rbtree, where all runnable tasks are sorted by the +p->se.vruntime key (there is a subtraction using rq->cfs.min_vruntime to +account for possible wraparounds). CFS picks the "leftmost" task from this +tree and sticks to it. +As the system progresses forwards, the executed tasks are put into the tree +more and more to the right --- slowly but surely giving a chance for every task +to become the "leftmost task" and thus get on the CPU within a deterministic +amount of time. + +Summing up, CFS works like this: it runs a task a bit, and when the task +schedules (or a scheduler tick happens) the task's CPU usage is "accounted +for": the (small) time it just spent using the physical CPU is added to +p->se.vruntime. Once p->se.vruntime gets high enough so that another task +becomes the "leftmost task" of the time-ordered rbtree it maintains (plus a +small amount of "granularity" distance relative to the leftmost task so that we +do not over-schedule tasks and trash the cache), then the new leftmost task is +picked and the current task is preempted. + + + +4. SOME FEATURES OF CFS + +CFS uses nanosecond granularity accounting and does not rely on any jiffies or +other HZ detail. Thus the CFS scheduler has no notion of "timeslices" in the +way the previous scheduler had, and has no heuristics whatsoever. There is +only one central tunable (you have to switch on CONFIG_SCHED_DEBUG): + + /proc/sys/kernel/sched_granularity_ns + +which can be used to tune the scheduler from "desktop" (i.e., low latencies) to +"server" (i.e., good batching) workloads. It defaults to a setting suitable +for desktop workloads. SCHED_BATCH is handled by the CFS scheduler module too. + +Due to its design, the CFS scheduler is not prone to any of the "attacks" that +exist today against the heuristics of the stock scheduler: fiftyp.c, thud.c, +chew.c, ring-test.c, massive_intr.c all work fine and do not impact +interactivity and produce the expected behavior. + +The CFS scheduler has a much stronger handling of nice levels and SCHED_BATCH +than the previous vanilla scheduler: both types of workloads are isolated much +more aggressively. + +SMP load-balancing has been reworked/sanitized: the runqueue-walking +assumptions are gone from the load-balancing code now, and iterators of the +scheduling modules are used. The balancing code got quite a bit simpler as a +result. + + + +5. SCHEDULING CLASSES + +The new CFS scheduler has been designed in such a way to introduce "Scheduling +Classes," an extensible hierarchy of scheduler modules. These modules +encapsulate scheduling policy details and are handled by the scheduler core +without the core code assuming too much about them. + +sched_fair.c implements the CFS scheduler described above. -Group scheduler tunables: +sched_rt.c implements SCHED_FIFO and SCHED_RR semantics, in a simpler way than +the previous vanilla scheduler did. It uses 100 runqueues (for all 100 RT +priority levels, instead of 140 in the previous scheduler) and it needs no +expired array. -When CONFIG_FAIR_USER_SCHED is defined, a directory is created in sysfs for -each new user and a "cpu_share" file is added in that directory. +Scheduling classes are implemented through the sched_class structure, which +contains hooks to functions that must be called whenever an interesting event +occurs. + +This is the (partial) list of the hooks: + + - enqueue_task(...) + + Called when a task enters a runnable state. + It puts the scheduling entity (task) into the red-black tree and + increments the nr_running variable. + + - dequeue_tree(...) + + When a task is no longer runnable, this function is called to keep the + corresponding scheduling entity out of the red-black tree. It decrements + the nr_running variable. + + - yield_task(...) + + This function is basically just a dequeue followed by an enqueue, unless the + compat_yield sysctl is turned on; in that case, it places the scheduling + entity at the right-most end of the red-black tree. + + - check_preempt_curr(...) + + This function checks if a task that entered the runnable state should + preempt the currently running task. + + - pick_next_task(...) + + This function chooses the most appropriate task eligible to run next. + + - set_curr_task(...) + + This function is called when a task changes its scheduling class or changes + its task group. + + - task_tick(...) + + This function is mostly called from time tick functions; it might lead to + process switch. This drives the running preemption. + + - task_new(...) + + The core scheduler gives the scheduling module an opportunity to manage new + task startup. The CFS scheduling module uses it for group scheduling, while + the scheduling module for a real-time task does not use it. + + + +6. GROUP SCHEDULER EXTENSIONS TO CFS + +Normally, the scheduler operates on individual tasks and strives to provide +fair CPU time to each task. Sometimes, it may be desirable to group tasks and +provide fair CPU time to each such task group. For example, it may be +desirable to first provide fair CPU time to each user on the system and then to +each task belonging to a user. + +CONFIG_GROUP_SCHED strives to achieve exactly that. It lets tasks to be +grouped and divides CPU time fairly among such groups. + +CONFIG_RT_GROUP_SCHED permits to group real-time (i.e., SCHED_FIFO and +SCHED_RR) tasks. + +CONFIG_FAIR_GROUP_SCHED permits to group CFS (i.e., SCHED_NORMAL and +SCHED_BATCH) tasks. + +At present, there are two (mutually exclusive) mechanisms to group tasks for +CPU bandwidth control purposes: + + - Based on user id (CONFIG_USER_SCHED) + + With this option, tasks are grouped according to their user id. + + - Based on "cgroup" pseudo filesystem (CONFIG_CGROUP_SCHED) + + This options needs CONFIG_CGROUPS to be defined, and lets the administrator + create arbitrary groups of tasks, using the "cgroup" pseudo filesystem. See + Documentation/cgroups.txt for more information about this filesystem. + +Only one of these options to group tasks can be chosen and not both. + +When CONFIG_USER_SCHED is defined, a directory is created in sysfs for each new +user and a "cpu_share" file is added in that directory. # cd /sys/kernel/uids # cat 512/cpu_share # Display user 512's CPU share @@ -155,16 +222,14 @@ each new user and a "cpu_share" file is added in that directory. 2048 # -CPU bandwidth between two users are divided in the ratio of their CPU shares. -For ex: if you would like user "root" to get twice the bandwidth of user -"guest", then set the cpu_share for both the users such that "root"'s -cpu_share is twice "guest"'s cpu_share - +CPU bandwidth between two users is divided in the ratio of their CPU shares. +For example: if you would like user "root" to get twice the bandwidth of user +"guest," then set the cpu_share for both the users such that "root"'s cpu_share +is twice "guest"'s cpu_share. -When CONFIG_FAIR_CGROUP_SCHED is defined, a "cpu.shares" file is created -for each group created using the pseudo filesystem. See example steps -below to create task groups and modify their CPU share using the "cgroups" -pseudo filesystem +When CONFIG_CGROUP_SCHED is defined, a "cpu.shares" file is created for each +group created using the pseudo filesystem. See example steps below to create +task groups and modify their CPU share using the "cgroups" pseudo filesystem. # mkdir /dev/cpuctl # mount -t cgroup -ocpu none /dev/cpuctl -- cgit v1.1 From 59dfc3f8fbabb8681ab4f2fb2df795f9211f40f9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "venkatesh.pallipadi@intel.com" Date: Wed, 20 Aug 2008 16:45:54 -0700 Subject: x86: PAT documentation updates with debug info Documentation update for PAT. Reflect the latest API details. Also, adds details about ways to get more info in order to debug PAT. Signed-off-by: Venkatesh Pallipadi Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/x86/pat.txt | 54 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++-------- 1 file changed, 45 insertions(+), 9 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/x86/pat.txt b/Documentation/x86/pat.txt index 17965f9..c93ff5f 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/pat.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/pat.txt @@ -14,6 +14,10 @@ PAT allows for different types of memory attributes. The most commonly used ones that will be supported at this time are Write-back, Uncached, Write-combined and Uncached Minus. + +PAT APIs +-------- + There are many different APIs in the kernel that allows setting of memory attributes at the page level. In order to avoid aliasing, these interfaces should be used thoughtfully. Below is a table of interfaces available, @@ -26,38 +30,38 @@ address range to avoid any aliasing. API | RAM | ACPI,... | Reserved/Holes | -----------------------|----------|------------|------------------| | | | | -ioremap | -- | UC | UC | +ioremap | -- | UC- | UC- | | | | | ioremap_cache | -- | WB | WB | | | | | -ioremap_nocache | -- | UC | UC | +ioremap_nocache | -- | UC- | UC- | | | | | ioremap_wc | -- | -- | WC | | | | | -set_memory_uc | UC | -- | -- | +set_memory_uc | UC- | -- | -- | set_memory_wb | | | | | | | | set_memory_wc | WC | -- | -- | set_memory_wb | | | | | | | | -pci sysfs resource | -- | -- | UC | +pci sysfs resource | -- | -- | UC- | | | | | pci sysfs resource_wc | -- | -- | WC | is IORESOURCE_PREFETCH| | | | | | | | -pci proc | -- | -- | UC | +pci proc | -- | -- | UC- | !PCIIOC_WRITE_COMBINE | | | | | | | | pci proc | -- | -- | WC | PCIIOC_WRITE_COMBINE | | | | | | | | -/dev/mem | -- | UC | UC | +/dev/mem | -- | WB/WC/UC- | WB/WC/UC- | read-write | | | | | | | | -/dev/mem | -- | UC | UC | +/dev/mem | -- | UC- | UC- | mmap SYNC flag | | | | | | | | -/dev/mem | -- | WB/WC/UC | WB/WC/UC | +/dev/mem | -- | WB/WC/UC- | WB/WC/UC- | mmap !SYNC flag | |(from exist-| (from exist- | and | | ing alias)| ing alias) | any alias to this area| | | | @@ -68,7 +72,7 @@ pci proc | -- | -- | WC | and | | | | MTRR says WB | | | | | | | | -/dev/mem | -- | -- | UC_MINUS | +/dev/mem | -- | -- | UC- | mmap !SYNC flag | | | | no alias to this area | | | | and | | | | @@ -98,3 +102,35 @@ types. Drivers should use set_memory_[uc|wc] to set access type for RAM ranges. + +PAT debugging +------------- + +With CONFIG_DEBUG_FS enabled, PAT memtype list can be examined by + +# mount -t debugfs debugfs /sys/kernel/debug +# cat /sys/kernel/debug/x86/pat_memtype_list +PAT memtype list: +uncached-minus @ 0x7fadf000-0x7fae0000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb19000-0x7fb1a000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1a000-0x7fb1b000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1b000-0x7fb1c000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1c000-0x7fb1d000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1d000-0x7fb1e000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1e000-0x7fb25000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb25000-0x7fb26000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb26000-0x7fb27000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb27000-0x7fb28000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb28000-0x7fb2e000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb2e000-0x7fb2f000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb2f000-0x7fb30000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb31000-0x7fb32000 +uncached-minus @ 0x80000000-0x90000000 + +This list shows physical address ranges and various PAT settings used to +access those physical address ranges. + +Another, more verbose way of getting PAT related debug messages is with +"debugpat" boot parameter. With this parameter, various debug messages are +printed to dmesg log. + -- cgit v1.1 From b05f78f5c713eda2c34e495d92495ee4f1c3b5e1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Yinghai Lu Date: Fri, 22 Aug 2008 01:32:50 -0700 Subject: x86_64: printout msr -v2 commandline show_msr=1 for bsp, show_msr=32 for all 32 cpus. [ mingo@elte.hu: added documentation ] Signed-off-by: Yinghai Lu Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 6 ++++++ 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 47e7d87..8679e80 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -1852,6 +1852,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file shapers= [NET] Maximal number of shapers. + show_msr= [x86] show boot-time MSR settings + Format: { } + Show boot-time (BIOS-initialized) MSR settings. + The parameter means the number of CPUs to show, + for example 1 means boot CPU only. + sim710= [SCSI,HW] See header of drivers/scsi/sim710.c. -- cgit v1.1 From a804b574e6c7236222593046fc2b1b8bd0298fce Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Dominik Brodowski Date: Tue, 29 Jul 2008 08:38:30 +0200 Subject: pcmcia: add pcmcia_loop_config() helper By calling pcmcia_loop_config(), a pcmcia driver can iterate over all available configuration options. During a driver's probe() phase, one doesn't need to use pcmcia_get_{first,next}_tuple, pcmcia_get_tuple_data and pcmcia_parse_tuple directly in most if not all cases. Signed-off-by: Dominik Brodowski --- Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt | 6 ++++++ 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt b/Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt index 96f155e..0599343 100644 --- a/Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt +++ b/Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt @@ -1,5 +1,11 @@ This file details changes in 2.6 which affect PCMCIA card driver authors: +* New configuration loop helper (as of 2.6.28) + By calling pcmcia_loop_config(), a driver can iterate over all available + configuration options. During a driver's probe() phase, one doesn't need + to use pcmcia_get_{first,next}_tuple, pcmcia_get_tuple_data and + pcmcia_parse_tuple directly in most if not all cases. + * New release helper (as of 2.6.17) Instead of calling pcmcia_release_{configuration,io,irq,win}, all that's necessary now is calling pcmcia_disable_device. As there is no valid -- cgit v1.1 From 9e44c6e40fb383e6b1d0df0c9e375a98e11828d1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Mon, 18 Aug 2008 13:53:07 +0200 Subject: ALSA: hda - Add AD1882A codec support Added the basic support of AD1882A codec chip. It's almost compatible with AD1882, but with a digital mic and some differences in connections. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai Signed-off-by: Jaroslav Kysela --- Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index b33e030..02a7194 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -931,7 +931,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. allout 5-jack in back, 2-jack in front, SPDIF out auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) - AD1882 + AD1882 / AD1882A 3stack 3-stack mode (default) 6stack 6-stack mode -- cgit v1.1 From 65eb3dc609dec17deea48dcd4de2e549d29a9824 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Kevin Diggs Date: Tue, 26 Aug 2008 10:26:54 +0200 Subject: sched: add kernel doc for the completion, fix kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt This patch adds kernel doc for the completion feature. An error in the split-man.pl PERL snippet in kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt is also fixed. Signed-off-by: Kevin Diggs Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt index 0bd3274..c6841ee 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt @@ -168,10 +168,10 @@ if ($#ARGV < 0) { mkdir $ARGV[0],0777; $state = 0; while () { - if (/^\.TH \"[^\"]*\" 4 \"([^\"]*)\"/) { + if (/^\.TH \"[^\"]*\" 9 \"([^\"]*)\"/) { if ($state == 1) { close OUT } $state = 1; - $fn = "$ARGV[0]/$1.4"; + $fn = "$ARGV[0]/$1.9"; print STDERR "Creating $fn\n"; open OUT, ">$fn" or die "can't open $fn: $!\n"; print OUT $_; -- cgit v1.1 From 93c06cbbf9fea5d5be1778febb7fa9ab1a74e5f5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Serge E. Hallyn" Date: Tue, 26 Aug 2008 14:47:57 -0500 Subject: selinux: add support for installing a dummy policy (v2) In August 2006 I posted a patch generating a minimal SELinux policy. This week, David P. Quigley posted an updated version of that as a patch against the kernel. It also had nice logic for auto-installing the policy. Following is David's original patch intro (preserved especially bc it has stats on the generated policies): se interested in the changes there were only two significant changes. The first is that the iteration through the list of classes used NULL as a sentinel value. The problem with this is that the class_to_string array actually has NULL entries in its table as place holders for the user space object classes. The second change was that it would seem at some point the initial sids table was NULL terminated. This is no longer the case so that iteration has to be done on array length instead of looking for NULL. Some statistics on the policy that it generates: The policy consists of 523 lines which contain no blank lines. Of those 523 lines 453 of them are class, permission, and initial sid definitions. These lines are usually little to no concern to the policy developer since they will not be adding object classes or permissions. Of the remaining 70 lines there is one type, one role, and one user statement. The remaining lines are broken into three portions. The first group are TE allow rules which make up 29 of the remaining lines, the second is assignment of labels to the initial sids which consist of 27 lines, and file system labeling statements which are the remaining 11. In addition to the policy.conf generated there is a single file_contexts file containing two lines which labels the entire system with base_t. This policy generates a policy.23 binary that is 7920 bytes. (then a few versions later...): The new policy is 587 lines (stripped of blank lines) with 476 of those lines being the boilerplate that I mentioned last time. The remaining 111 lines have the 3 lines for type, user, and role, 70 lines for the allow rules (one for each object class including user space object classes), 27 lines to assign types to the initial sids, and 11 lines for file system labeling. The policy binary is 9194 bytes. Changelog: Aug 26: Added Documentation/SELinux.txt Aug 26: Incorporated a set of comments by Stephen Smalley: 1. auto-setup SELINUXTYPE=dummy 2. don't auto-install if selinux is enabled with non-dummy policy 3. don't re-compute policy version 4. /sbin/setfiles not /usr/sbin/setfiles Aug 22: As per JMorris comments, made sure make distclean cleans up the mdp directory. Removed a check for file_contexts which is now created in the same file as the check, making it superfluous. Signed-off-by: Serge Hallyn Signed-off-by: David Quigley Signed-off-by: James Morris --- Documentation/SELinux.txt | 27 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 27 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/SELinux.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/SELinux.txt b/Documentation/SELinux.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..07eae00 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/SELinux.txt @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +If you want to use SELinux, chances are you will want +to use the distro-provided policies, or install the +latest reference policy release from + http://oss.tresys.com/projects/refpolicy + +However, if you want to install a dummy policy for +testing, you can do using 'mdp' provided under +scripts/selinux. Note that this requires the selinux +userspace to be installed - in particular you will +need checkpolicy to compile a kernel, and setfiles and +fixfiles to label the filesystem. + + 1. Compile the kernel with selinux enabled. + 2. Type 'make' to compile mdp. + 3. Make sure that you are not running with + SELinux enabled and a real policy. If + you are, reboot with selinux disabled + before continuing. + 4. Run install_policy.sh: + cd scripts/selinux + sh install_policy.sh + +Step 4 will create a new dummy policy valid for your +kernel, with a single selinux user, role, and type. +It will compile the policy, will set your SELINUXTYPE to +dummy in /etc/selinux/config, install the compiled policy +as 'dummy', and relabel your filesystem. -- cgit v1.1 From 1befdefcf476d5eb2fb4243fdf4d996a376708b1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Luiz Fernando N. Capitulino" Date: Thu, 28 Aug 2008 11:00:07 -0300 Subject: x86: remove 8254 timer texts from Documentation Commit ecd29476ae0143b1c3641edfa76c0fc3e9ad3021 removed the "disable_8254_timer" and "enable_8254_timer" kernel parameters from the kernel but did not remove the references to them from two files in the Documentation directory: kernel-parameters.txt and x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt. This change completes the removal. Signed-off-by: Luiz Fernando N. Capitulino Acked-by: Maciej W. Rozycki Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 6 ------ Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt | 4 ---- 2 files changed, 10 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index a897646..53b0a8f 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -463,12 +463,6 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file Range: 0 - 8192 Default: 64 - disable_8254_timer - enable_8254_timer - [IA32/X86_64] Disable/Enable interrupt 0 timer routing - over the 8254 in addition to over the IO-APIC. The - kernel tries to set a sensible default. - hpet= [X86-32,HPET] option to control HPET usage Format: { enable (default) | disable | force } disable: disable HPET and use PIT instead diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt index b0c7b6c..72ffb53 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt @@ -54,10 +54,6 @@ APICs apicmaintimer. Useful when your PIT timer is totally broken. - disable_8254_timer / enable_8254_timer - Enable interrupt 0 timer routing over the 8254 in addition to over - the IO-APIC. The kernel tries to set a sensible default. - Early Console syntax: earlyprintk=vga -- cgit v1.1 From 2922c9aff22ea65f33a891af894331f0f883d127 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Wed, 27 Aug 2008 18:12:42 +0200 Subject: ALSA: hda - Add descriptions of missing model values Added the descriptions of missing model values. Also, fixed the model strings of a few new models to a standard style. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai Signed-off-by: Jaroslav Kysela --- Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 16 ++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 16 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index 02a7194..374cfc0 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -809,6 +809,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. ALC260 hp HP machines hp-3013 HP machines (3013-variant) + hp-dc7600 HP DC7600 fujitsu Fujitsu S7020 acer Acer TravelMate will Will laptops (PB V7900) @@ -830,8 +831,10 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. hippo Hippo (ATI) with jack detection, Sony UX-90s hippo_1 Hippo (Benq) with jack detection sony-assamd Sony ASSAMD + toshiba-s06 Toshiba S06 ultra Samsung Q1 Ultra Vista model lenovo-3000 Lenovo 3000 y410 + nec NEC Versa S9100 basic fixed pin assignment w/o SPDIF auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) @@ -840,6 +843,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. 3stack 3-stack model toshiba Toshiba A205 acer Acer laptops + acer-aspire Acer Aspire One dell Dell OEM laptops (Vostro 1200) zepto Zepto laptops test for testing/debugging purpose, almost all controls can @@ -849,6 +853,9 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. ALC269 basic Basic preset + quanta Quanta FL1 + eeepc-p703 ASUS Eeepc P703 P900A + eeepc-p901 ASUS Eeepc P901 S101 ALC662/663 3stack-dig 3-stack (2-channel) with SPDIF @@ -858,10 +865,17 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. lenovo-101e Lenovo laptop eeepc-p701 ASUS Eeepc P701 eeepc-ep20 ASUS Eeepc EP20 + ecs ECS/Foxconn mobo m51va ASUS M51VA g71v ASUS G71V h13 ASUS H13 g50v ASUS G50V + asus-mode1 ASUS + asus-mode2 ASUS + asus-mode3 ASUS + asus-mode4 ASUS + asus-mode5 ASUS + asus-mode6 ASUS auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) ALC882/885 @@ -893,12 +907,14 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. lenovo-101e Lenovo 101E lenovo-nb0763 Lenovo NB0763 lenovo-ms7195-dig Lenovo MS7195 + lenovo-sky Lenovo Sky haier-w66 Haier W66 3stack-hp HP machines with 3stack (Lucknow, Samba boards) 6stack-dell Dell machines with 6stack (Inspiron 530) mitac Mitac 8252D clevo-m720 Clevo M720 laptop series fujitsu-pi2515 Fujitsu AMILO Pi2515 + 3stack-6ch-intel Intel DG33* boards auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) ALC861/660 -- cgit v1.1 From 9f99a6386eb1ad1197a401495669315de2f19039 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Hiroshi Miura Date: Thu, 28 Aug 2008 16:09:06 +0200 Subject: ALSA: hda - Add support of Toshiba RX1 Added the support of Toshiba RX1 laptop with ALC262 codec chip. Related ALSA bug#3386: https://bugtrack.alsa-project.org/alsa-bug/view.php?id=3386 Signed-off-by: Hiroshi Miura Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai Signed-off-by: Jaroslav Kysela --- Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index 374cfc0..fd3de67 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -832,6 +832,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. hippo_1 Hippo (Benq) with jack detection sony-assamd Sony ASSAMD toshiba-s06 Toshiba S06 + toshiba-rx1 Toshiba RX1 ultra Samsung Q1 Ultra Vista model lenovo-3000 Lenovo 3000 y410 nec NEC Versa S9100 -- cgit v1.1 From 759ee81be6d87c150ea2b300c221b4fec8b5f646 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "David S. Miller" Date: Wed, 27 Aug 2008 00:33:26 -0700 Subject: alsa: Remove special SBUS dma support code. No longer used. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl | 3 +-- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl b/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl index e13c4e6..56723b4 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl @@ -5073,8 +5073,7 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime { with SNDRV_DMA_TYPE_CONTINUOUS type and the snd_dma_continuous_data(GFP_KERNEL) device pointer, where GFP_KERNEL is the kernel allocation flag to - use. For the SBUS, SNDRV_DMA_TYPE_SBUS and - snd_dma_sbus_data(sbus_dev) are used instead. + use. For the PCI scatter-gather buffers, use SNDRV_DMA_TYPE_DEV_SG with snd_dma_pci_data(pci) -- cgit v1.1 From 0c0db98b50ed1217c0dbf4051722034ba314d06e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "David S. Miller" Date: Wed, 27 Aug 2008 19:59:48 -0700 Subject: sparc: Remove Documentation/sparc/sbus_drivers.txt None of the text in this document is relevant any more. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/sparc/sbus_drivers.txt | 309 ----------------------------------- 1 file changed, 309 deletions(-) delete mode 100644 Documentation/sparc/sbus_drivers.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sparc/sbus_drivers.txt b/Documentation/sparc/sbus_drivers.txt deleted file mode 100644 index eb1e28a..0000000 --- a/Documentation/sparc/sbus_drivers.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,309 +0,0 @@ - - Writing SBUS Drivers - - David S. Miller (davem@redhat.com) - - The SBUS driver interfaces of the Linux kernel have been -revamped completely for 2.4.x for several reasons. Foremost were -performance and complexity concerns. This document details these -new interfaces and how they are used to write an SBUS device driver. - - SBUS drivers need to include to get access -to functions and structures described here. - - Probing and Detection - - Each SBUS device inside the machine is described by a -structure called "struct sbus_dev". Likewise, each SBUS bus -found in the system is described by a "struct sbus_bus". For -each SBUS bus, the devices underneath are hung in a tree-like -fashion off of the bus structure. - - The SBUS device structure contains enough information -for you to implement your device probing algorithm and obtain -the bits necessary to run your device. The most commonly -used members of this structure, and their typical usage, -will be detailed below. - - Here is a piece of skeleton code for performing a device -probe in an SBUS driver under Linux: - - static int __devinit mydevice_probe_one(struct sbus_dev *sdev) - { - struct mysdevice *mp = kzalloc(sizeof(*mp), GFP_KERNEL); - - if (!mp) - return -ENODEV; - - ... - dev_set_drvdata(&sdev->ofdev.dev, mp); - return 0; - ... - } - - static int __devinit mydevice_probe(struct of_device *dev, - const struct of_device_id *match) - { - struct sbus_dev *sdev = to_sbus_device(&dev->dev); - - return mydevice_probe_one(sdev); - } - - static int __devexit mydevice_remove(struct of_device *dev) - { - struct sbus_dev *sdev = to_sbus_device(&dev->dev); - struct mydevice *mp = dev_get_drvdata(&dev->dev); - - return mydevice_remove_one(sdev, mp); - } - - static struct of_device_id mydevice_match[] = { - { - .name = "mydevice", - }, - {}, - }; - - MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(of, mydevice_match); - - static struct of_platform_driver mydevice_driver = { - .match_table = mydevice_match, - .probe = mydevice_probe, - .remove = __devexit_p(mydevice_remove), - .driver = { - .name = "mydevice", - }, - }; - - static int __init mydevice_init(void) - { - return of_register_driver(&mydevice_driver, &sbus_bus_type); - } - - static void __exit mydevice_exit(void) - { - of_unregister_driver(&mydevice_driver); - } - - module_init(mydevice_init); - module_exit(mydevice_exit); - - The mydevice_match table is a series of entries which -describes what SBUS devices your driver is meant for. In the -simplest case you specify a string for the 'name' field. Every -SBUS device with a 'name' property matching your string will -be passed one-by-one to your .probe method. - - You should store away your device private state structure -pointer in the drvdata area so that you can retrieve it later on -in your .remove method. - - Any memory allocated, registers mapped, IRQs registered, -etc. must be undone by your .remove method so that all resources -of your device are released by the time it returns. - - You should _NOT_ use the for_each_sbus(), for_each_sbusdev(), -and for_all_sbusdev() interfaces. They are deprecated, will be -removed, and no new driver should reference them ever. - - Mapping and Accessing I/O Registers - - Each SBUS device structure contains an array of descriptors -which describe each register set. We abuse struct resource for that. -They each correspond to the "reg" properties provided by the OBP firmware. - - Before you can access your device's registers you must map -them. And later if you wish to shutdown your driver (for module -unload or similar) you must unmap them. You must treat them as -a resource, which you allocate (map) before using and free up -(unmap) when you are done with it. - - The mapping information is stored in an opaque value -typed as an "unsigned long". This is the type of the return value -of the mapping interface, and the arguments to the unmapping -interface. Let's say you want to map the first set of registers. -Perhaps part of your driver software state structure looks like: - - struct mydevice { - unsigned long control_regs; - ... - struct sbus_dev *sdev; - ... - }; - - At initialization time you then use the sbus_ioremap -interface to map in your registers, like so: - - static void init_one_mydevice(struct sbus_dev *sdev) - { - struct mydevice *mp; - ... - - mp->control_regs = sbus_ioremap(&sdev->resource[0], 0, - CONTROL_REGS_SIZE, "mydevice regs"); - if (!mp->control_regs) { - /* Failure, cleanup and return. */ - } - } - - Second argument to sbus_ioremap is an offset for -cranky devices with broken OBP PROM. The sbus_ioremap uses only -a start address and flags from the resource structure. -Therefore it is possible to use the same resource to map -several sets of registers or even to fabricate a resource -structure if driver gets physical address from some private place. -This practice is discouraged though. Use whatever OBP PROM -provided to you. - - And here is how you might unmap these registers later at -driver shutdown or module unload time, using the sbus_iounmap -interface: - - static void mydevice_unmap_regs(struct mydevice *mp) - { - sbus_iounmap(mp->control_regs, CONTROL_REGS_SIZE); - } - - Finally, to actually access your registers there are 6 -interface routines at your disposal. Accesses are byte (8 bit), -word (16 bit), or longword (32 bit) sized. Here they are: - - u8 sbus_readb(unsigned long reg) /* read byte */ - u16 sbus_readw(unsigned long reg) /* read word */ - u32 sbus_readl(unsigned long reg) /* read longword */ - void sbus_writeb(u8 value, unsigned long reg) /* write byte */ - void sbus_writew(u16 value, unsigned long reg) /* write word */ - void sbus_writel(u32 value, unsigned long reg) /* write longword */ - - So, let's say your device has a control register of some sort -at offset zero. The following might implement resetting your device: - - #define CONTROL 0x00UL - - #define CONTROL_RESET 0x00000001 /* Reset hardware */ - - static void mydevice_reset(struct mydevice *mp) - { - sbus_writel(CONTROL_RESET, mp->regs + CONTROL); - } - - Or perhaps there is a data port register at an offset of -16 bytes which allows you to read bytes from a fifo in the device: - - #define DATA 0x10UL - - static u8 mydevice_get_byte(struct mydevice *mp) - { - return sbus_readb(mp->regs + DATA); - } - - It's pretty straightforward, and clueful readers may have -noticed that these interfaces mimick the PCI interfaces of the -Linux kernel. This was not by accident. - - WARNING: - - DO NOT try to treat these opaque register mapping - values as a memory mapped pointer to some structure - which you can dereference. - - It may be memory mapped, it may not be. In fact it - could be a physical address, or it could be the time - of day xor'd with 0xdeadbeef. :-) - - Whatever it is, it's an implementation detail. The - interface was done this way to shield the driver - author from such complexities. - - Doing DVMA - - SBUS devices can perform DMA transactions in a way similar -to PCI but dissimilar to ISA, e.g. DMA masters supply address. -In contrast to PCI, however, that address (a bus address) is -translated by IOMMU before a memory access is performed and therefore -it is virtual. Sun calls this procedure DVMA. - - Linux supports two styles of using SBUS DVMA: "consistent memory" -and "streaming DVMA". CPU view of consistent memory chunk is, well, -consistent with a view of a device. Think of it as an uncached memory. -Typically this way of doing DVMA is not very fast and drivers use it -mostly for control blocks or queues. On some CPUs we cannot flush or -invalidate individual pages or cache lines and doing explicit flushing -over ever little byte in every control block would be wasteful. - -Streaming DVMA is a preferred way to transfer large amounts of data. -This process works in the following way: -1. a CPU stops accessing a certain part of memory, - flushes its caches covering that memory; -2. a device does DVMA accesses, then posts an interrupt; -3. CPU invalidates its caches and starts to access the memory. - -A single streaming DVMA operation can touch several discontiguous -regions of a virtual bus address space. This is called a scatter-gather -DVMA. - -[TBD: Why do not we neither Solaris attempt to map disjoint pages -into a single virtual chunk with the help of IOMMU, so that non SG -DVMA masters would do SG? It'd be very helpful for RAID.] - - In order to perform a consistent DVMA a driver does something -like the following: - - char *mem; /* Address in the CPU space */ - u32 busa; /* Address in the SBus space */ - - mem = (char *) sbus_alloc_consistent(sdev, MYMEMSIZE, &busa); - - Then mem is used when CPU accesses this memory and u32 -is fed to the device so that it can do DVMA. This is typically -done with an sbus_writel() into some device register. - - Do not forget to free the DVMA resources once you are done: - - sbus_free_consistent(sdev, MYMEMSIZE, mem, busa); - - Streaming DVMA is more interesting. First you allocate some -memory suitable for it or pin down some user pages. Then it all works -like this: - - char *mem = argumen1; - unsigned int size = argument2; - u32 busa; /* Address in the SBus space */ - - *mem = 1; /* CPU can access */ - busa = sbus_map_single(sdev, mem, size); - if (busa == 0) ....... - - /* Tell the device to use busa here */ - /* CPU cannot access the memory without sbus_dma_sync_single() */ - - sbus_unmap_single(sdev, busa, size); - if (*mem == 0) .... /* CPU can access again */ - - It is possible to retain mappings and ask the device to -access data again and again without calling sbus_unmap_single. -However, CPU caches must be invalidated with sbus_dma_sync_single -before such access. - -[TBD but what about writeback caches here... do we have any?] - - There is an equivalent set of functions doing the same thing -only with several memory segments at once for devices capable of -scatter-gather transfers. Use the Source, Luke. - - Examples - - drivers/net/sunhme.c - This is a complicated driver which illustrates many concepts -discussed above and plus it handles both PCI and SBUS boards. - - drivers/scsi/esp.c - Check it out for scatter-gather DVMA. - - drivers/sbus/char/bpp.c - A non-DVMA device. - - drivers/net/sunlance.c - Lance driver abuses consistent mappings for data transfer. -It is a nifty trick which we do not particularly recommend... -Just check it out and know that it's legal. -- cgit v1.1 From 71bb49596bbf4e5a3328e1704d18604e822ba181 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Gerrit Renker Date: Thu, 4 Sep 2008 07:30:19 +0200 Subject: dccp: Query supported CCIDs This provides a data structure to record which CCIDs are locally supported and three accessor functions: - a test function for internal use which is used to validate CCID requests made by the user; - a copy function so that the list can be used for feature-negotiation; - documented getsockopt() support so that the user can query capabilities. The data structure is a table which is filled in at compile-time with the list of available CCIDs (which in turn depends on the Kconfig choices). Using the copy function for cloning the list of supported CCIDs is useful for feature negotiation, since the negotiation is now with the full list of available CCIDs (e.g. {2, 3}) instead of the default value {2}. This means negotiation will not fail if the peer requests to use CCID3 instead of CCID2. Signed-off-by: Gerrit Renker Acked-by: Ian McDonald --- Documentation/networking/dccp.txt | 4 ++++ 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt index 39131a3..f0aeb20 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt @@ -57,6 +57,10 @@ can be set before calling bind(). DCCP_SOCKOPT_GET_CUR_MPS is read-only and retrieves the current maximum packet size (application payload size) in bytes, see RFC 4340, section 14. +DCCP_SOCKOPT_AVAILABLE_CCIDS is also read-only and returns the list of CCIDs +supported by the endpoint (see include/linux/dccp.h for symbolic constants). +The caller needs to provide a sufficiently large (> 2) array of type uint8_t. + DCCP_SOCKOPT_SERVER_TIMEWAIT enables the server (listening socket) to hold timewait state when closing the connection (RFC 4340, 8.3). The usual case is that the closing server sends a CloseReq, whereupon the client holds timewait -- cgit v1.1 From 17c30b40ed79e9f3955e884632c8f01e577b204a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Gerrit Renker Date: Thu, 4 Sep 2008 07:30:19 +0200 Subject: dccp: Deprecate Ack Ratio sysctl This patch deprecates the Ack Ratio sysctl, since * Ack Ratio is entirely ignored by CCID-3 and CCID-4, * Ack Ratio currently doesn't work in CCID-2 (i.e. is always set to 1); * even if it would work in CCID-2, there is no point for a user to change it: - Ack Ratio is constrained by cwnd (RFC 4341, 6.1.2), - if Ack Ratio > cwnd, the system resorts to spurious RTO timeouts (since waiting for Acks which will never arrive in this window), - cwnd is not a user-configurable value. The only reasonable place for Ack Ratio is to print it for debugging. It is planned to do this later on, as part of e.g. dccp_probe. With this patch Ack Ratio is now under full control of feature negotiation: * Ack Ratio is resolved as a dependency of the selected CCID; * if the chosen CCID supports it (i.e. CCID == CCID-2), Ack Ratio is set to the default of 2, following RFC 4340, 11.3 - "New connections start with Ack Ratio 2 for both endpoints"; * what happens then is part of another patch set, since it concerns the dynamic update of Ack Ratio while the connection is in full flight. Thanks to Tomasz Grobelny for discussion leading up to this patch. Signed-off-by: Gerrit Renker Acked-by: Arnaldo Carvalho de Melo --- Documentation/networking/dccp.txt | 3 --- 1 file changed, 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt index f0aeb20..43df448 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt @@ -125,9 +125,6 @@ send_ndp = 1 send_ackvec = 1 Whether or not to send Ack Vector options (sec. 11.5). -ack_ratio = 2 - The default Ack Ratio (sec. 11.3) to use. - tx_ccid = 2 Default CCID for the sender-receiver half-connection. -- cgit v1.1 From fade756f18d42694e3acb00e3471ab43002cba16 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Gerrit Renker Date: Thu, 4 Sep 2008 07:30:19 +0200 Subject: dccp: Set per-connection CCIDs via socket options With this patch, TX/RX CCIDs can now be changed on a per-connection basis, which overrides the defaults set by the global sysctl variables for TX/RX CCIDs. To make full use of this facility, the remaining patches of this patch set are needed, which track dependencies and activate negotiated feature values. Note on the maximum number of CCIDs that can be registered: ----------------------------------------------------------- The maximum number of CCIDs that can be registered on the socket is constrained by the space in a Confirm/Change feature negotiation option. The space in these in turn depends on the size of header options as defined in RFC 4340, 5.8. Since this is a recurring constant, it has been moved from ackvec.h into linux/dccp.h, clarifying its purpose. Relative to this size, the maximum number of CCID identifiers that can be present in a Confirm option (which always consumes 1 byte more than a Change option, cf. 6.1) is 2 bytes less than the maximum TLV size: one for the CCID-feature-type and one for the selected value. Signed-off-by: Gerrit Renker --- Documentation/networking/dccp.txt | 14 ++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 14 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt index 43df448..610083f 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt @@ -61,6 +61,20 @@ DCCP_SOCKOPT_AVAILABLE_CCIDS is also read-only and returns the list of CCIDs supported by the endpoint (see include/linux/dccp.h for symbolic constants). The caller needs to provide a sufficiently large (> 2) array of type uint8_t. +DCCP_SOCKOPT_CCID is write-only and sets both the TX and RX CCIDs at the same +time, combining the operation of the next two socket options. This option is +preferrable over the latter two, since often applications will use the same +type of CCID for both directions; and mixed use of CCIDs is not currently well +understood. This socket option takes as argument at least one uint8_t value, or +an array of uint8_t values, which must match available CCIDS (see above). CCIDs +must be registered on the socket before calling connect() or listen(). + +DCCP_SOCKOPT_TX_CCID is read/write. It returns the current CCID (if set) or sets +the preference list for the TX CCID, using the same format as DCCP_SOCKOPT_CCID. +Please note that the getsockopt argument type here is `int', not uint8_t. + +DCCP_SOCKOPT_RX_CCID is analogous to DCCP_SOCKOPT_TX_CCID, but for the RX CCID. + DCCP_SOCKOPT_SERVER_TIMEWAIT enables the server (listening socket) to hold timewait state when closing the connection (RFC 4340, 8.3). The usual case is that the closing server sends a CloseReq, whereupon the client holds timewait -- cgit v1.1 From 78673e24df27c76ec75565f4024d45c2c74ef148 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Gerrit Renker Date: Thu, 4 Sep 2008 07:30:19 +0200 Subject: dccp: Remove obsolete parts of the old CCID interface The TX/RX CCIDs of the minisock are now redundant: similar to the Ack Vector case, their value equals initially that of the sysctl, but at the end of feature negotiation may be something different. The old interface removed by this patch thus has been replaced by the newer interface to dynamically query the currently loaded CCIDs earlier in this patch set. Also removed the constructors for the TX CCID and the RX CCID, since the switch rx/non-rx is done by the handler in minisocks.c (and the handler is the only place in the code where CCIDs are loaded). Signed-off-by: Gerrit Renker Acked-by: Ian McDonald --- Documentation/networking/dccp.txt | 5 +++-- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt index 610083f..a203d13 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt @@ -140,10 +140,11 @@ send_ackvec = 1 Whether or not to send Ack Vector options (sec. 11.5). tx_ccid = 2 - Default CCID for the sender-receiver half-connection. + Default CCID for the sender-receiver half-connection. Depending on the + choice of CCID, the Send Ack Vector feature is enabled automatically. rx_ccid = 2 - Default CCID for the receiver-sender half-connection. + Default CCID for the receiver-sender half-connection; see tx_ccid. seq_window = 100 The initial sequence window (sec. 7.5.2). -- cgit v1.1 From 68e074bfcef269bc61006c2740d7f89ccbbd93d7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Gerrit Renker Date: Thu, 4 Sep 2008 07:30:19 +0200 Subject: dccp: Remove manual influence on NDP Count feature Updating the NDP count feature is handled automatically now: * for CCID-2 it is disabled, since the code does not use NDP counts; * for CCID-3 it is enabled, as NDP counts are used to determine loss lengths. Allowing the user to change NDP values leads to unpredictable and failing behaviour, since it is then possible to disable NDP counts even when they are needed (e.g. in CCID-3). This means that only those user settings are sensible that agree with the values for Send NDP Count implied by the choice of CCID. But those settings are already activated by the feature negotiation (CCID dependency tracking), hence this form of support is redundant. At startup the initialisation of the NDP count feature is with the default value of 0, which is done implicitly by the zeroing-out of the socket when it is allocated. If the choice of CCID or feature negotiation enables NDP count, this will then be updated via the NDP activation handler. Signed-off-by: Gerrit Renker Acked-by: Ian McDonald --- Documentation/networking/dccp.txt | 3 --- 1 file changed, 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt index a203d13..1403745 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt @@ -133,9 +133,6 @@ retries2 importance for retransmitted acknowledgments and feature negotiation, data packets are never retransmitted. Analogue of tcp_retries2. -send_ndp = 1 - Whether or not to send NDP count options (sec. 7.7.2). - send_ackvec = 1 Whether or not to send Ack Vector options (sec. 11.5). -- cgit v1.1 From b235dc4abbc1356284bd0dc730efa711f394e0e2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Gerrit Renker Date: Thu, 4 Sep 2008 07:30:19 +0200 Subject: dccp ccid-2: Phase out the use of boolean Ack Vector sysctl This removes the use of the sysctl and the minisock variable for the Send Ack Vector feature, which is now handled fully dynamically via feature negotiation; i.e. when CCID2 is enabled, Ack Vectors are automatically enabled (as per RFC 4341, 4.). Using a sysctl in parallel to this implementation would open the door to crashes, since much of the code relies on tests of the boolean minisock / sysctl variable. Thus, this patch replaces all tests of type if (dccp_msk(sk)->dccpms_send_ack_vector) /* ... */ with if (dp->dccps_hc_rx_ackvec != NULL) /* ... */ The dccps_hc_rx_ackvec is allocated by the dccp_hdlr_ackvec() when feature negotiation concluded that Ack Vectors are to be used on the half-connection. Otherwise, it is NULL (due to dccp_init_sock/dccp_create_openreq_child), so that the test is a valid one. The activation handler for Ack Vectors is called as soon as the feature negotiation has concluded at the * server when the Ack marking the transition RESPOND => OPEN arrives; * client after it has sent its ACK, marking the transition REQUEST => PARTOPEN. Adding the sequence number of the Response packet to the Ack Vector has been removed, since (a) connection establishment implies that the Response has been received; (b) the CCIDs only look at packets received in the (PART)OPEN state, i.e. this entry will always be ignored; (c) it can not be used for anything useful - to detect loss for instance, only packets received after the loss can serve as pseudo-dupacks. Signed-off-by: Gerrit Renker Acked-by: Ian McDonald --- Documentation/networking/dccp.txt | 3 --- 1 file changed, 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt index 1403745..7a3bb1a 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt @@ -133,9 +133,6 @@ retries2 importance for retransmitted acknowledgments and feature negotiation, data packets are never retransmitted. Analogue of tcp_retries2. -send_ackvec = 1 - Whether or not to send Ack Vector options (sec. 11.5). - tx_ccid = 2 Default CCID for the sender-receiver half-connection. Depending on the choice of CCID, the Send Ack Vector feature is enabled automatically. -- cgit v1.1 From 51c7d4fa2675c106a980ddcdbe308b54b5151945 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Gerrit Renker Date: Thu, 4 Sep 2008 07:30:19 +0200 Subject: dccp: Implement both feature-local and feature-remote Sequence Window feature This adds full support for local/remote Sequence Window feature, from which the * sequence-number-validity (W) and * acknowledgment-number-validity (W') windows derive as specified in RFC 4340, 7.5.3. Specifically, the following changes are introduced: * integrated new socket fields into dccp_sk; * updated the update_gsr/gss routines with regard to these fields; * updated handler code: the Sequence Window feature is located at the TX side, so the local feature is meant if the handler-rx flag is false; * the initialisation of `rcv_wnd' in reqsk is removed, since - rcv_wnd is not used by the code anywhere; - sequence number checks are not done in the LISTEN state (cf. 7.5.3); - dccp_check_req checks the Ack number validity more rigorously; * the `struct dccp_minisock' became empty and is now removed. Until the handshake completes with activating negotiated values, the local/remote Sequence-Window values are undefined and thus can not reliably be estimated. This issue is addressed in a separate patch. Signed-off-by: Gerrit Renker Acked-by: Ian McDonald --- Documentation/networking/dccp.txt | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt index 7a3bb1a..b132e4a 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt @@ -141,7 +141,8 @@ rx_ccid = 2 Default CCID for the receiver-sender half-connection; see tx_ccid. seq_window = 100 - The initial sequence window (sec. 7.5.2). + The initial sequence window (sec. 7.5.2) of the sender. This influences + the local ackno validity and the remote seqno validity windows (7.5.1). tx_qlen = 5 The size of the transmit buffer in packets. A value of 0 corresponds -- cgit v1.1 From d6da3511d6b558d0b017777b61dc08b8fbc06ea4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Tomasz Grobelny Date: Thu, 4 Sep 2008 07:30:19 +0200 Subject: dccp: Policy-based packet dequeueing infrastructure This patch adds a generic infrastructure for policy-based dequeueing of TX packets and provides two policies: * a simple FIFO policy (which is the default) and * a priority based policy (set via socket options). Both policies honour the tx_qlen sysctl for the maximum size of the write queue (can be overridden via socket options). The priority policy uses skb->priority internally to assign an u32 priority identifier, using the same ranking as SO_PRIORITY. The skb->priority field is set to 0 when the packet leaves DCCP. The priority is supplied as ancillary data using cmsg(3), the patch also provides the requisite parsing routines. Signed-off-by: Tomasz Grobelny Signed-off-by: Gerrit Renker --- Documentation/networking/dccp.txt | 19 +++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 19 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt index b132e4a..fcfc125 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt @@ -45,6 +45,25 @@ http://linux-net.osdl.org/index.php/DCCP_Testing#Experimental_DCCP_source_tree Socket options ============== +DCCP_SOCKOPT_QPOLICY_ID sets the dequeuing policy for outgoing packets. It takes +a policy ID as argument and can only be set before the connection (i.e. changes +during an established connection are not supported). Currently, two policies are +defined: the "simple" policy (DCCPQ_POLICY_SIMPLE), which does nothing special, +and a priority-based variant (DCCPQ_POLICY_PRIO). The latter allows to pass an +u32 priority value as ancillary data to sendmsg(), where higher numbers indicate +a higher packet priority (similar to SO_PRIORITY). This ancillary data needs to +be formatted using a cmsg(3) message header filled in as follows: + cmsg->cmsg_level = SOL_DCCP; + cmsg->cmsg_type = DCCP_SCM_PRIORITY; + cmsg->cmsg_len = CMSG_LEN(sizeof(uint32_t)); /* or CMSG_LEN(4) */ + +DCCP_SOCKOPT_QPOLICY_TXQLEN sets the maximum length of the output queue. A zero +value is always interpreted as unbounded queue length. If different from zero, +the interpretation of this parameter depends on the current dequeuing policy +(see above): the "simple" policy will enforce a fixed queue size by returning +EAGAIN, whereas the "prio" policy enforces a fixed queue length by dropping the +lowest-priority packet first. The default value for this parameter is +initialised from /proc/sys/net/dccp/default/tx_qlen. DCCP_SOCKOPT_SERVICE sets the service. The specification mandates use of service codes (RFC 4340, sec. 8.1.2); if this socket option is not set, -- cgit v1.1 From 90f31e382b9bb4313327ab504874385654b501fe Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Kerrisk Date: Mon, 1 Sep 2008 14:03:50 +0200 Subject: ALSA: Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt: fix typo As noted by Gu Rui in http://bugzilla.kernel.org/show_bug.cgi?id=11444, there is a typo in Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt. After checking the source (sound/pci/hda/hda_intel.c), the report looks correct to me. Signed-off-by: Michael Kerrisk Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai Signed-off-by: Jaroslav Kysela --- Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index fd3de67..30499cf 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -1098,7 +1098,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. register value without FIFO size correction as the current DMA pointer. position_fix=2 will make the driver to use the position buffer instead of reading SD_LPIB register. - (Usually SD_LPLIB register is more accurate than the + (Usually SD_LPIB register is more accurate than the position buffer.) NB: If you get many "azx_get_response timeout" messages at -- cgit v1.1 From 5394f80f92642c61fc2a95385be85f2fdcfb5adb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jeremy Fitzhardinge Date: Sun, 7 Sep 2008 01:51:32 -0700 Subject: x86: check for and defend against BIOS memory corruption Some BIOSes have been observed to corrupt memory in the low 64k. This change: - Reserves all memory which does not have to be in that area, to prevent it from being used as general memory by the kernel. Things like the SMP trampoline are still in the memory, however. - Clears the reserved memory so we can observe changes to it. - Adds a function check_for_bios_corruption() which checks and reports on memory becoming unexpectedly non-zero. Currently it's called in the x86 fault handler, and the powermanagement debug output. Signed-off-by: Jeremy Fitzhardinge Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 5 +++++ 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 1150444..df48af5 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -360,6 +360,11 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file Format: ,, See header of drivers/net/hamradio/baycom_ser_hdx.c. + bios_corruption_check=0/1 [X86] + Some BIOSes seem to corrupt the first 64k of memory + when doing things like suspend/resume. Setting this + option will scan the memory looking for corruption. + boot_delay= Milliseconds to delay each printk during boot. Values larger than 10 seconds (10000) are changed to no delay (0). -- cgit v1.1 From 9f077871ce7237e2387fc76542b3b4033cb05e49 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jeremy Fitzhardinge Date: Sun, 7 Sep 2008 01:51:34 -0700 Subject: x86: clean up memory corruption check and add more kernel parameters The corruption check is enabled in Kconfig by default, but disabled at runtime. This patch adds several kernel parameters to control the corruption check's behaviour; these are documented in kernel-parameters.txt. Signed-off-by: Jeremy Fitzhardinge Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 28 +++++++++++++++++++++++----- 1 file changed, 23 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index df48af5..6a2629d 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -360,11 +360,6 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file Format: ,, See header of drivers/net/hamradio/baycom_ser_hdx.c. - bios_corruption_check=0/1 [X86] - Some BIOSes seem to corrupt the first 64k of memory - when doing things like suspend/resume. Setting this - option will scan the memory looking for corruption. - boot_delay= Milliseconds to delay each printk during boot. Values larger than 10 seconds (10000) are changed to no delay (0). @@ -1233,6 +1228,29 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file or memmap=0x10000$0x18690000 + memory_corruption_check=0/1 [X86] + Some BIOSes seem to corrupt the first 64k of + memory when doing things like suspend/resume. + Setting this option will scan the memory + looking for corruption. Enabling this will + both detect corruption and prevent the kernel + from using the memory being corrupted. + However, its intended as a diagnostic tool; if + repeatable BIOS-originated corruption always + affects the same memory, you can use memmap= + to prevent the kernel from using that memory. + + memory_corruption_check_size=size [X86] + By default it checks for corruption in the low + 64k, making this memory unavailable for normal + use. Use this parameter to scan for + corruption in more or less memory. + + memory_corruption_check_period=seconds [X86] + By default it checks for corruption every 60 + seconds. Use this parameter to check at some + other rate. 0 disables periodic checking. + memtest= [KNL,X86] Enable memtest Format: range: 0,4 : pattern number -- cgit v1.1 From 410e27a49bb98bc7fa3ff5fc05cc313817b9f253 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Gerrit Renker Date: Tue, 9 Sep 2008 13:27:22 +0200 Subject: This reverts "Merge branch 'dccp' of git://eden-feed.erg.abdn.ac.uk/dccp_exp" as it accentally contained the wrong set of patches. These will be submitted separately. Signed-off-by: Gerrit Renker --- Documentation/networking/dccp.txt | 54 +++++++++------------------------------ 1 file changed, 12 insertions(+), 42 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt index fcfc125..39131a3 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt @@ -45,25 +45,6 @@ http://linux-net.osdl.org/index.php/DCCP_Testing#Experimental_DCCP_source_tree Socket options ============== -DCCP_SOCKOPT_QPOLICY_ID sets the dequeuing policy for outgoing packets. It takes -a policy ID as argument and can only be set before the connection (i.e. changes -during an established connection are not supported). Currently, two policies are -defined: the "simple" policy (DCCPQ_POLICY_SIMPLE), which does nothing special, -and a priority-based variant (DCCPQ_POLICY_PRIO). The latter allows to pass an -u32 priority value as ancillary data to sendmsg(), where higher numbers indicate -a higher packet priority (similar to SO_PRIORITY). This ancillary data needs to -be formatted using a cmsg(3) message header filled in as follows: - cmsg->cmsg_level = SOL_DCCP; - cmsg->cmsg_type = DCCP_SCM_PRIORITY; - cmsg->cmsg_len = CMSG_LEN(sizeof(uint32_t)); /* or CMSG_LEN(4) */ - -DCCP_SOCKOPT_QPOLICY_TXQLEN sets the maximum length of the output queue. A zero -value is always interpreted as unbounded queue length. If different from zero, -the interpretation of this parameter depends on the current dequeuing policy -(see above): the "simple" policy will enforce a fixed queue size by returning -EAGAIN, whereas the "prio" policy enforces a fixed queue length by dropping the -lowest-priority packet first. The default value for this parameter is -initialised from /proc/sys/net/dccp/default/tx_qlen. DCCP_SOCKOPT_SERVICE sets the service. The specification mandates use of service codes (RFC 4340, sec. 8.1.2); if this socket option is not set, @@ -76,24 +57,6 @@ can be set before calling bind(). DCCP_SOCKOPT_GET_CUR_MPS is read-only and retrieves the current maximum packet size (application payload size) in bytes, see RFC 4340, section 14. -DCCP_SOCKOPT_AVAILABLE_CCIDS is also read-only and returns the list of CCIDs -supported by the endpoint (see include/linux/dccp.h for symbolic constants). -The caller needs to provide a sufficiently large (> 2) array of type uint8_t. - -DCCP_SOCKOPT_CCID is write-only and sets both the TX and RX CCIDs at the same -time, combining the operation of the next two socket options. This option is -preferrable over the latter two, since often applications will use the same -type of CCID for both directions; and mixed use of CCIDs is not currently well -understood. This socket option takes as argument at least one uint8_t value, or -an array of uint8_t values, which must match available CCIDS (see above). CCIDs -must be registered on the socket before calling connect() or listen(). - -DCCP_SOCKOPT_TX_CCID is read/write. It returns the current CCID (if set) or sets -the preference list for the TX CCID, using the same format as DCCP_SOCKOPT_CCID. -Please note that the getsockopt argument type here is `int', not uint8_t. - -DCCP_SOCKOPT_RX_CCID is analogous to DCCP_SOCKOPT_TX_CCID, but for the RX CCID. - DCCP_SOCKOPT_SERVER_TIMEWAIT enables the server (listening socket) to hold timewait state when closing the connection (RFC 4340, 8.3). The usual case is that the closing server sends a CloseReq, whereupon the client holds timewait @@ -152,16 +115,23 @@ retries2 importance for retransmitted acknowledgments and feature negotiation, data packets are never retransmitted. Analogue of tcp_retries2. +send_ndp = 1 + Whether or not to send NDP count options (sec. 7.7.2). + +send_ackvec = 1 + Whether or not to send Ack Vector options (sec. 11.5). + +ack_ratio = 2 + The default Ack Ratio (sec. 11.3) to use. + tx_ccid = 2 - Default CCID for the sender-receiver half-connection. Depending on the - choice of CCID, the Send Ack Vector feature is enabled automatically. + Default CCID for the sender-receiver half-connection. rx_ccid = 2 - Default CCID for the receiver-sender half-connection; see tx_ccid. + Default CCID for the receiver-sender half-connection. seq_window = 100 - The initial sequence window (sec. 7.5.2) of the sender. This influences - the local ackno validity and the remote seqno validity windows (7.5.1). + The initial sequence window (sec. 7.5.2). tx_qlen = 5 The size of the transmit buffer in packets. A value of 0 corresponds -- cgit v1.1 From e8aed68614c81f24d8c4cbcb4923f848ece846e1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Lai Jiangshan Date: Wed, 10 Sep 2008 11:01:07 +0800 Subject: doc/RCU: fix pseudocode in rcuref.txt atomic_inc_not_zero(v) return 0 if *v = 0. use spin_lock instead of write_lock for update lock. Signed-off-by: Lai Jiangshan Cc: "Paul E. McKenney" Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt | 16 ++++++++-------- 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt b/Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt index 451de2a..4202ad0 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt @@ -29,9 +29,9 @@ release_referenced() delete() } If this list/array is made lock free using RCU as in changing the -write_lock() in add() and delete() to spin_lock and changing read_lock -in search_and_reference to rcu_read_lock(), the atomic_get in -search_and_reference could potentially hold reference to an element which +write_lock() in add() and delete() to spin_lock() and changing read_lock() +in search_and_reference() to rcu_read_lock(), the atomic_inc() in +search_and_reference() could potentially hold reference to an element which has already been deleted from the list/array. Use atomic_inc_not_zero() in this scenario as follows: @@ -40,20 +40,20 @@ add() search_and_reference() { { alloc_object rcu_read_lock(); ... search_for_element - atomic_set(&el->rc, 1); if (atomic_inc_not_zero(&el->rc)) { - write_lock(&list_lock); rcu_read_unlock(); + atomic_set(&el->rc, 1); if (!atomic_inc_not_zero(&el->rc)) { + spin_lock(&list_lock); rcu_read_unlock(); return FAIL; add_element } ... ... - write_unlock(&list_lock); rcu_read_unlock(); + spin_unlock(&list_lock); rcu_read_unlock(); } } 3. 4. release_referenced() delete() { { - ... write_lock(&list_lock); + ... spin_lock(&list_lock); if (atomic_dec_and_test(&el->rc)) ... call_rcu(&el->head, el_free); delete_element - ... write_unlock(&list_lock); + ... spin_unlock(&list_lock); } ... if (atomic_dec_and_test(&el->rc)) call_rcu(&el->head, el_free); -- cgit v1.1 From 92651940ab00dbe64722e908f70d816713d677b7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Alexander Duyck Date: Fri, 12 Sep 2008 16:29:34 -0700 Subject: pkt_sched: Add multiqueue scheduler support This patch is intended to add a qdisc to support the new tx multiqueue architecture by providing a band for each hardware queue. By doing this it is possible to support a different qdisc per physical hardware queue. This qdisc uses the skb->queue_mapping to select which band to place the traffic onto. It then uses a round robin w/ a check to see if the subqueue is stopped to determine which band to dequeue the packet from. Signed-off-by: Alexander Duyck Signed-off-by: Jeff Kirsher Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt | 47 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++- 1 file changed, 46 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt b/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt index d391ea6..5787ee6 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt @@ -24,4 +24,49 @@ netif_{start|stop|wake}_subqueue() functions to manage each queue while the device is still operational. netdev->queue_lock is still used when the device comes online or when it's completely shut down (unregister_netdev(), etc.). -Author: Peter P. Waskiewicz Jr. + +Section 2: Qdisc support for multiqueue devices + +----------------------------------------------- + +Currently two qdiscs support multiqueue devices. The first is the default +pfifo_fast qdisc. This qdisc supports one qdisc per hardware queue. A new +round-robin qdisc, sch_multiq also supports multiple hardware queues. The +qdisc is responsible for classifying the skb's and then directing the skb's to +bands and queues based on the value in skb->queue_mapping. Use this field in +the base driver to determine which queue to send the skb to. + +sch_multiq has been added for hardware that wishes to avoid unnecessary +requeuing. It will cycle though the bands and verify that the hardware queue +associated with the band is not stopped prior to dequeuing a packet. + +On qdisc load, the number of bands is based on the number of queues on the +hardware. Once the association is made, any skb with skb->queue_mapping set, +will be queued to the band associated with the hardware queue. + + +Section 3: Brief howto using MULTIQ for multiqueue devices +--------------------------------------------------------------- + +The userspace command 'tc,' part of the iproute2 package, is used to configure +qdiscs. To add the MULTIQ qdisc to your network device, assuming the device +is called eth0, run the following command: + +# tc qdisc add dev eth0 root handle 1: multiq + +The qdisc will allocate the number of bands to equal the number of queues that +the device reports, and bring the qdisc online. Assuming eth0 has 4 Tx +queues, the band mapping would look like: + +band 0 => queue 0 +band 1 => queue 1 +band 2 => queue 2 +band 3 => queue 3 + +Traffic will begin flowing through each queue if your base device has either +the default simple_tx_hash or a custom netdev->select_queue() defined. + +The behavior of tc filters remains the same. + +Author: Alexander Duyck +Original Author: Peter P. Waskiewicz Jr. -- cgit v1.1 From ca9b0e27e072be4cef2f5f0cbc0b0fd94eae3520 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Alexander Duyck Date: Fri, 12 Sep 2008 16:30:20 -0700 Subject: pkt_action: add new action skbedit This new action will have the ability to change the priority and/or queue_mapping fields on an sk_buff. Signed-off-by: Alexander Duyck Signed-off-by: Jeff Kirsher Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt | 9 ++++++++- 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt b/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt index 5787ee6..10113ff 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt @@ -66,7 +66,14 @@ band 3 => queue 3 Traffic will begin flowing through each queue if your base device has either the default simple_tx_hash or a custom netdev->select_queue() defined. -The behavior of tc filters remains the same. +The behavior of tc filters remains the same. However a new tc action, +skbedit, has been added. Assuming you wanted to route all traffic to a +specific host, for example 192.168.0.3, though a specific queue you could use +this action and establish a filter such as: + +tc filter add dev eth0 parent 1: protocol ip prio 1 u32 \ + match ip dst 192.168.0.3 \ + action skbedit queue_mapping 3 Author: Alexander Duyck Original Author: Peter P. Waskiewicz Jr. -- cgit v1.1 From 67333bb5679325db310bb612c1de3e6e47bb0043 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Alexander Duyck Date: Fri, 12 Sep 2008 17:56:50 -0700 Subject: skbedit: Fix a typo in the documentation Signed-off-by: Alexander Duyck Signed-off-by: Jeff Kirsher Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt b/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt index 10113ff..8c2b06b 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ the default simple_tx_hash or a custom netdev->select_queue() defined. The behavior of tc filters remains the same. However a new tc action, skbedit, has been added. Assuming you wanted to route all traffic to a -specific host, for example 192.168.0.3, though a specific queue you could use +specific host, for example 192.168.0.3, through a specific queue you could use this action and establish a filter such as: tc filter add dev eth0 parent 1: protocol ip prio 1 u32 \ -- cgit v1.1 From f07d1501292b3b0d3276ee0e537005526a45e242 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Alexander Duyck Date: Fri, 12 Sep 2008 17:57:23 -0700 Subject: multiq: Further multiqueue cleanup This patch resolves a few issues found with multiq including wording suggestions and a problem seen in the allocation of queues. Signed-off-by: Alexander Duyck Signed-off-by: Jeff Kirsher Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt | 14 +++++++------- 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+), 7 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt b/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt index 8c2b06b..4caa0e3 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt @@ -29,15 +29,15 @@ Section 2: Qdisc support for multiqueue devices ----------------------------------------------- -Currently two qdiscs support multiqueue devices. The first is the default -pfifo_fast qdisc. This qdisc supports one qdisc per hardware queue. A new -round-robin qdisc, sch_multiq also supports multiple hardware queues. The +Currently two qdiscs are optimized for multiqueue devices. The first is the +default pfifo_fast qdisc. This qdisc supports one qdisc per hardware queue. +A new round-robin qdisc, sch_multiq also supports multiple hardware queues. The qdisc is responsible for classifying the skb's and then directing the skb's to bands and queues based on the value in skb->queue_mapping. Use this field in the base driver to determine which queue to send the skb to. -sch_multiq has been added for hardware that wishes to avoid unnecessary -requeuing. It will cycle though the bands and verify that the hardware queue +sch_multiq has been added for hardware that wishes to avoid head-of-line +blocking. It will cycle though the bands and verify that the hardware queue associated with the band is not stopped prior to dequeuing a packet. On qdisc load, the number of bands is based on the number of queues on the @@ -63,8 +63,8 @@ band 1 => queue 1 band 2 => queue 2 band 3 => queue 3 -Traffic will begin flowing through each queue if your base device has either -the default simple_tx_hash or a custom netdev->select_queue() defined. +Traffic will begin flowing through each queue based on either the simple_tx_hash +function or based on netdev->select_queue() if you have it defined. The behavior of tc filters remains the same. However a new tc action, skbedit, has been added. Assuming you wanted to route all traffic to a -- cgit v1.1 From b2e1b30290539b344cbaff0d9da38012e03aa347 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Luis R. Rodriguez" Date: Tue, 9 Sep 2008 23:19:48 -0700 Subject: cfg80211: Add new wireless regulatory infrastructure This adds the new wireless regulatory infrastructure. The main motiviation behind this was to centralize regulatory code as each driver was implementing their own regulatory solution, and to replace the initial centralized code we have where: * only 3 regulatory domains are supported: US, JP and EU * regulatory domains can only be changed through module parameter * all rules were built statically in the kernel We now have support for regulatory domains for many countries and regulatory domains are now queried through a userspace agent through udev allowing distributions to update regulatory rules without updating the kernel. Each driver can regulatory_hint() a regulatory domain based on either their EEPROM mapped regulatory domain value to a respective ISO/IEC 3166-1 country code or pass an internally built regulatory domain. We also add support to let the user set the regulatory domain through userspace in case of faulty EEPROMs to further help compliance. Support for world roaming will be added soon for cards capable of this. For more information see: http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory/CRDA For now we leave an option to enable the old module parameter, ieee80211_regdom, and to build the 3 old regdomains statically (US, JP and EU). This option is CONFIG_WIRELESS_OLD_REGULATORY. These old static definitions and the module parameter is being scheduled for removal for 2.6.29. Note that if you use this you won't make use of a world regulatory domain as its pointless. If you leave this option enabled and if CRDA is present and you use US or JP we will try to ask CRDA to update us a regulatory domain for us. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez Signed-off-by: John W. Linville --- Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt | 18 +++ Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt | 194 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 2 files changed, 212 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index eb1a47b..c93fcde 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt @@ -6,6 +6,24 @@ be removed from this file. --------------------------- +What: old static regulatory information and ieee80211_regdom module parameter +When: 2.6.29 +Why: The old regulatory infrastructure has been replaced with a new one + which does not require statically defined regulatory domains. We do + not want to keep static regulatory domains in the kernel due to the + the dynamic nature of regulatory law and localization. We kept around + the old static definitions for the regulatory domains of: + * US + * JP + * EU + and used by default the US when CONFIG_WIRELESS_OLD_REGULATORY was + set. We also kept around the ieee80211_regdom module parameter in case + some applications were relying on it. Changing regulatory domains + can now be done instead by using nl80211, as is done with iw. +Who: Luis R. Rodriguez + +--------------------------- + What: dev->power.power_state When: July 2007 Why: Broken design for runtime control over driver power states, confusing diff --git a/Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt b/Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a96989a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt @@ -0,0 +1,194 @@ +Linux wireless regulatory documentation +--------------------------------------- + +This document gives a brief review over how the Linux wireless +regulatory infrastructure works. + +More up to date information can be obtained at the project's web page: + +http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory + +Keeping regulatory domains in userspace +--------------------------------------- + +Due to the dynamic nature of regulatory domains we keep them +in userspace and provide a framework for userspace to upload +to the kernel one regulatory domain to be used as the central +core regulatory domain all wireless devices should adhere to. + +How to get regulatory domains to the kernel +------------------------------------------- + +Userspace gets a regulatory domain in the kernel by having +a userspace agent build it and send it via nl80211. Only +expected regulatory domains will be respected by the kernel. + +A currently available userspace agent which can accomplish this +is CRDA - central regulatory domain agent. Its documented here: + +http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory/CRDA + +Essentially the kernel will send a udev event when it knows +it needs a new regulatory domain. A udev rule can be put in place +to trigger crda to send the respective regulatory domain for a +specific ISO/IEC 3166 alpha2. + +Below is an example udev rule which can be used: + +# Example file, should be put in /etc/udev/rules.d/regulatory.rules +KERNEL=="regulatory*", ACTION=="change", SUBSYSTEM=="platform", RUN+="/sbin/crda" + +The alpha2 is passed as an environment variable under the variable COUNTRY. + +Who asks for regulatory domains? +-------------------------------- + +* Users + +Users can use iw: + +http://wireless.kernel.org/en/users/Documentation/iw + +An example: + + # set regulatory domain to "Costa Rica" + iw reg set CR + +This will request the kernel to set the regulatory domain to +the specificied alpha2. The kernel in turn will then ask userspace +to provide a regulatory domain for the alpha2 specified by the user +by sending a uevent. + +* Wireless subsystems for Country Information elements + +The kernel will send a uevent to inform userspace a new +regulatory domain is required. More on this to be added +as its integration is added. + +* Drivers + +If drivers determine they need a specific regulatory domain +set they can inform the wireless core using regulatory_hint(). +They have two options -- they either provide an alpha2 so that +crda can provide back a regulatory domain for that country or +they can build their own regulatory domain based on internal +custom knowledge so the wireless core can respect it. + +*Most* drivers will rely on the first mechanism of providing a +regulatory hint with an alpha2. For these drivers there is an additional +check that can be used to ensure compliance based on custom EEPROM +regulatory data. This additional check can be used by drivers by +registering on its struct wiphy a reg_notifier() callback. This notifier +is called when the core's regulatory domain has been changed. The driver +can use this to review the changes made and also review who made them +(driver, user, country IE) and determine what to allow based on its +internal EEPROM data. Devices drivers wishing to be capable of world +roaming should use this callback. More on world roaming will be +added to this document when its support is enabled. + +Device drivers who provide their own built regulatory domain +do not need a callback as the channels registered by them are +the only ones that will be allowed and therefore *additional* +cannels cannot be enabled. + +Example code - drivers hinting an alpha2: +------------------------------------------ + +This example comes from the zd1211rw device driver. You can start +by having a mapping of your device's EEPROM country/regulatory +domain value to to a specific alpha2 as follows: + +static struct zd_reg_alpha2_map reg_alpha2_map[] = { + { ZD_REGDOMAIN_FCC, "US" }, + { ZD_REGDOMAIN_IC, "CA" }, + { ZD_REGDOMAIN_ETSI, "DE" }, /* Generic ETSI, use most restrictive */ + { ZD_REGDOMAIN_JAPAN, "JP" }, + { ZD_REGDOMAIN_JAPAN_ADD, "JP" }, + { ZD_REGDOMAIN_SPAIN, "ES" }, + { ZD_REGDOMAIN_FRANCE, "FR" }, + +Then you can define a routine to map your read EEPROM value to an alpha2, +as follows: + +static int zd_reg2alpha2(u8 regdomain, char *alpha2) +{ + unsigned int i; + struct zd_reg_alpha2_map *reg_map; + for (i = 0; i < ARRAY_SIZE(reg_alpha2_map); i++) { + reg_map = ®_alpha2_map[i]; + if (regdomain == reg_map->reg) { + alpha2[0] = reg_map->alpha2[0]; + alpha2[1] = reg_map->alpha2[1]; + return 0; + } + } + return 1; +} + +Lastly, you can then hint to the core of your discovered alpha2, if a match +was found. You need to do this after you have registered your wiphy. You +are expected to do this during initialization. + + r = zd_reg2alpha2(mac->regdomain, alpha2); + if (!r) + regulatory_hint(hw->wiphy, alpha2, NULL); + +Example code - drivers providing a built in regulatory domain: +-------------------------------------------------------------- + +If you have regulatory information you can obtain from your +driver and you *need* to use this we let you build a regulatory domain +structure and pass it to the wireless core. To do this you should +kmalloc() a structure big enough to hold your regulatory domain +structure and you should then fill it with your data. Finally you simply +call regulatory_hint() with the regulatory domain structure in it. + +Bellow is a simple example, with a regulatory domain cached using the stack. +Your implementation may vary (read EEPROM cache instead, for example). + +Example cache of some regulatory domain + +struct ieee80211_regdomain mydriver_jp_regdom = { + .n_reg_rules = 3, + .alpha2 = "JP", + //.alpha2 = "99", /* If I have no alpha2 to map it to */ + .reg_rules = { + /* IEEE 802.11b/g, channels 1..14 */ + REG_RULE(2412-20, 2484+20, 40, 6, 20, 0), + /* IEEE 802.11a, channels 34..48 */ + REG_RULE(5170-20, 5240+20, 40, 6, 20, + NL80211_RRF_PASSIVE_SCAN), + /* IEEE 802.11a, channels 52..64 */ + REG_RULE(5260-20, 5320+20, 40, 6, 20, + NL80211_RRF_NO_IBSS | + NL80211_RRF_DFS), + } +}; + +Then in some part of your code after your wiphy has been registered: + + int r; + struct ieee80211_regdomain *rd; + int size_of_regd; + int num_rules = mydriver_jp_regdom.n_reg_rules; + unsigned int i; + + size_of_regd = sizeof(struct ieee80211_regdomain) + + (num_rules * sizeof(struct ieee80211_reg_rule)); + + rd = kzalloc(size_of_regd, GFP_KERNEL); + if (!rd) + return -ENOMEM; + + memcpy(rd, &mydriver_jp_regdom, sizeof(struct ieee80211_regdomain)); + + for (i=0; i < num_rules; i++) { + memcpy(&rd->reg_rules[i], &mydriver_jp_regdom.reg_rules[i], + sizeof(struct ieee80211_reg_rule)); + } + r = regulatory_hint(hw->wiphy, NULL, rd); + if (r) { + kfree(rd); + return r; + } + -- cgit v1.1 From bed7aac9416f50425d2200df32bcc9bf248ff8cb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Henrique de Moraes Holschuh Date: Tue, 26 Aug 2008 11:58:01 -0300 Subject: rfkill: remove transmitter blocking on suspend Currently, rfkill would stand in the way of properly supporting wireless devices that are capable of waking the system up from sleep or hibernation when they receive a special wireless message. It would also get in the way of mesh devices that need to remain operational even during platform suspend. To avoid that, stop trying to block the transmitters on the rfkill class suspend handler. Drivers that need rfkill's older behaviour will have to implement it by themselves in their own suspend handling. Do note that rfkill *will* attempt to restore the transmitter state on resume in any situation. This happens after the driver's resume method is called by the suspend core (class devices resume after the devices they are attached to have been resumed). The following drivers need to check if they need to explicitly block their transmitters in their own suspend handlers (maintainers Cc'd): arch/arm/mach-pxa/tosa-bt.c drivers/net/usb/hso.c drivers/net/wireless/rt2x00/* (USB might need it?) drivers/net/wireless/b43/ (SSB over USB might need it?) drivers/misc/hp-wmi.c eeepc-laptop w/rfkill support (not in mainline yet) Compal laptop w/rfkill support (not in mainline yet) toshiba-acpi w/rfkill support (not in mainline yet) Signed-off-by: Henrique de Moraes Holschuh Cc: Ivo van Doorn Cc: Matthew Garrett Cc: Andrew Bird Cc: Greg Kroah-Hartman Cc: Cezary Jackiewicz Cc: Philip Langdale Signed-off-by: John W. Linville --- Documentation/rfkill.txt | 32 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++---- 1 file changed, 28 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/rfkill.txt b/Documentation/rfkill.txt index 6fcb306..b65f079 100644 --- a/Documentation/rfkill.txt +++ b/Documentation/rfkill.txt @@ -341,6 +341,8 @@ key that does nothing by itself, as well as any hot key that is type-specific 3.1 Guidelines for wireless device drivers ------------------------------------------ +(in this text, rfkill->foo means the foo field of struct rfkill). + 1. Each independent transmitter in a wireless device (usually there is only one transmitter per device) should have a SINGLE rfkill class attached to it. @@ -363,10 +365,32 @@ This rule exists because users of the rfkill subsystem expect to get (and set, when possible) the overall transmitter rfkill state, not of a particular rfkill line. -5. During suspend, the rfkill class will attempt to soft-block the radio -through a call to rfkill->toggle_radio, and will try to restore its previous -state during resume. After a rfkill class is suspended, it will *not* call -rfkill->toggle_radio until it is resumed. +5. The wireless device driver MUST NOT leave the transmitter enabled during +suspend and hibernation unless: + + 5.1. The transmitter has to be enabled for some sort of functionality + like wake-on-wireless-packet or autonomous packed forwarding in a mesh + network, and that functionality is enabled for this suspend/hibernation + cycle. + +AND + + 5.2. The device was not on a user-requested BLOCKED state before + the suspend (i.e. the driver must NOT unblock a device, not even + to support wake-on-wireless-packet or remain in the mesh). + +In other words, there is absolutely no allowed scenario where a driver can +automatically take action to unblock a rfkill controller (obviously, this deals +with scenarios where soft-blocking or both soft and hard blocking is happening. +Scenarios where hardware rfkill lines are the only ones blocking the +transmitter are outside of this rule, since the wireless device driver does not +control its input hardware rfkill lines in the first place). + +6. During resume, rfkill will try to restore its previous state. + +7. After a rfkill class is suspended, it will *not* call rfkill->toggle_radio +until it is resumed. + Example of a WLAN wireless driver connected to the rfkill subsystem: -------------------------------------------------------------------- -- cgit v1.1 From 62c1f95e3993480ae451c322588f7cbf5a58db28 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Johannes Berg Date: Fri, 12 Sep 2008 10:18:44 +0200 Subject: mac80211: clean up kdoc A few errors sneaked in over time, some functions no longer exist, for some alternatives exist. This changes the docbook template to include the right things. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg Signed-off-by: John W. Linville --- Documentation/DocBook/mac80211.tmpl | 12 ++++-------- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/mac80211.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/mac80211.tmpl index b651e0a..77c3c20 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/mac80211.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/mac80211.tmpl @@ -145,7 +145,6 @@ usage should require reading the full document. this though and the recommendation to allow only a single interface in STA mode at first! -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_if_types !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_if_init_conf !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_if_conf @@ -177,8 +176,7 @@ usage should require reading the full document. functions/definitions !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_status !Finclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211_rx_flags -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_control -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status_flags +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_info !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_irqsafe !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status @@ -189,12 +187,11 @@ usage should require reading the full document. !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_ctstoself_duration !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_generic_frame_duration !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_hdrlen_from_skb -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_hdrlen +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_hdrlen !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_wake_queue !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queue -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_start_queues -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queues !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_wake_queues +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queues @@ -230,8 +227,7 @@ usage should require reading the full document. Multiple queues and QoS support TBD !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_queue_params -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_queue_stats_data -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_queue +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_queue_stats -- cgit v1.1 From c2fe59444e1827ecd2713a1e6ecfd1ab1fc548ae Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Timur Tabi Date: Wed, 6 Aug 2008 11:48:25 -0500 Subject: powerpc: add SSI-to-DMA properties to Freescale MPC8610 HPCD device tree Add the fsl,playback-dma and fsl,capture-dma properties to the Freescale MPC8610 HPCD device tree. These properties connect the SSI nodes to the DMA nodes for the DMA channels that the SSI should use. Also update the ssi.txt documentation. These properties will be needed when the ASoC V2 version of the Freescale MPC8610 device drivers are merged into the mainline. Signed-off-by: Timur Tabi Signed-off-by: Kumar Gala --- Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/ssi.txt | 15 +++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 15 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/ssi.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/ssi.txt index d100555..5d98413 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/ssi.txt +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/ssi.txt @@ -24,6 +24,12 @@ Required properties: "rj-master" - r.j., SSI is clock master "ac97-slave" - AC97 mode, SSI is clock slave "ac97-master" - AC97 mode, SSI is clock master +- fsl,playback-dma: phandle to a DMA node for the DMA channel to use for + playback of audio. This is typically dictated by SOC + design. See the notes below. +- fsl,capture-dma: phandle to a DMA node for the DMA channel to use for + capture (recording) of audio. This is typically dictated + by SOC design. See the notes below. Optional properties: - codec-handle : phandle to a 'codec' node that defines an audio @@ -36,3 +42,12 @@ Child 'codec' node required properties: Child 'codec' node optional properties: - clock-frequency : The frequency of the input clock, which typically comes from an on-board dedicated oscillator. + +Notes on fsl,playback-dma and fsl,capture-dma: + +On SOCs that have an SSI, specific DMA channels are hard-wired for playback +and capture. On the MPC8610, for example, SSI1 must use DMA channel 0 for +playback and DMA channel 1 for capture. SSI2 must use DMA channel 2 for +playback and DMA channel 3 for capture. The developer can choose which +DMA controller to use, but the channels themselves are hard-wired. The +purpose of these two properties is to represent this hardware design. -- cgit v1.1 From c4e84bde1d595d857d3c74b49b9c45cc770df792 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Ron Mercer Date: Thu, 18 Sep 2008 11:56:28 -0400 Subject: qlge: New Qlogic 10Gb Ethernet Driver. Signed-off-by: Ron Mercer Signed-off-by: Jeff Garzik --- Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlge | 46 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 46 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlge (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlge b/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlge new file mode 100644 index 0000000..123b6ed --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlge @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +Copyright (c) 2003-2008 QLogic Corporation +QLogic Linux Networking HBA Driver + +This program includes a device driver for Linux 2.6 that may be +distributed with QLogic hardware specific firmware binary file. +You may modify and redistribute the device driver code under the +GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software +Foundation (version 2 or a later version). + +You may redistribute the hardware specific firmware binary file +under the following terms: + + 1. Redistribution of source code (only if applicable), + must retain the above copyright notice, this list of + conditions and the following disclaimer. + + 2. Redistribution in binary form must reproduce the above + copyright notice, this list of conditions and the + following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other + materials provided with the distribution. + + 3. The name of QLogic Corporation may not be used to + endorse or promote products derived from this software + without specific prior written permission + +REGARDLESS OF WHAT LICENSING MECHANISM IS USED OR APPLICABLE, +THIS PROGRAM IS PROVIDED BY QLOGIC CORPORATION "AS IS'' AND ANY +EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE +IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR +BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, +EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED +TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, +DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON +ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, +OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY +OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. + +USER ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT USE OF THIS PROGRAM WILL NOT +CREATE OR GIVE GROUNDS FOR A LICENSE BY IMPLICATION, ESTOPPEL, OR +OTHERWISE IN ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (PATENT, COPYRIGHT, +TRADE SECRET, MASK WORK, OR OTHER PROPRIETARY RIGHT) EMBODIED IN +ANY OTHER QLOGIC HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE EITHER SOLELY OR IN +COMBINATION WITH THIS PROGRAM. + -- cgit v1.1 From 2842e5bf3115193f05dc9dac20f940e7abf44c1a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Joerg Roedel Date: Thu, 18 Sep 2008 15:23:43 +0200 Subject: x86: move GART TLB flushing options to generic code The GART currently implements the iommu=[no]fullflush command line parameters which influence its IO/TLB flushing strategy. This patch makes these parameters generic so that they can be used by the AMD IOMMU too. Signed-off-by: Joerg Roedel Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 4 ++++ Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt | 2 -- 2 files changed, 4 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 1150444..40066ce 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -893,6 +893,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file nomerge forcesac soft + fullflush + Flush IO/TLB at every deallocation + nofullflush + Flush IO/TLB only when addresses are reused (default) intel_iommu= [DMAR] Intel IOMMU driver (DMAR) option diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt index b0c7b6c..c83c8e4 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt @@ -233,8 +233,6 @@ IOMMU (input/output memory management unit) iommu options only relevant to the AMD GART hardware IOMMU: Set the size of the remapping area in bytes. allowed Overwrite iommu off workarounds for specific chipsets. - fullflush Flush IOMMU on each allocation (default). - nofullflush Don't use IOMMU fullflush. leak Turn on simple iommu leak tracing (only when CONFIG_IOMMU_LEAK is on). Default number of leak pages is 20. -- cgit v1.1 From 7407a2e4b9e1fb3528bb355a571ee3eb7e32c386 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Clemens Ladisch Date: Mon, 22 Sep 2008 09:12:11 +0200 Subject: ALSA: virtuoso: add Xonar HDAV1.3 support Add support for the Asus Xonar HDAV1.3 and the Xonar HDAV1.3 Deluxe. Signed-off-by: Clemens Ladisch --- Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index 30499cf..e0e54a2 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -2120,7 +2120,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. ------------------- Module for sound cards based on the Asus AV100/AV200 chips, - i.e., Xonar D1, DX, D2 and D2X. + i.e., Xonar D1, DX, D2, D2X and HDAV1.3 (Deluxe). This module supports autoprobe and multiple cards. -- cgit v1.1 From afa9fdc2f5f8e4d98f3e77bfa204412cbc181346 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: FUJITA Tomonori Date: Sat, 20 Sep 2008 01:23:30 +0900 Subject: iommu: remove fullflush and nofullflush in IOMMU generic option This patch against tip/x86/iommu virtually reverts 2842e5bf3115193f05dc9dac20f940e7abf44c1a. But just reverting the commit breaks AMD IOMMU so this patch also includes some fixes. The above commit adds new two options to x86 IOMMU generic kernel boot options, fullflush and nofullflush. But such change that affects all the IOMMUs needs more discussion (all IOMMU parties need the chance to discuss it): http://lkml.org/lkml/2008/9/19/106 Signed-off-by: FUJITA Tomonori Acked-by: Joerg Roedel Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 9 +++++---- Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt | 2 ++ 2 files changed, 7 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 40066ce..040ce30 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -284,6 +284,11 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file isolate - enable device isolation (each device, as far as possible, will get its own protection domain) + fullflush - enable flushing of IO/TLB entries when + they are unmapped. Otherwise they are + flushed before they will be reused, which + is a lot of faster + amd_iommu_size= [HW,X86-64] Define the size of the aperture for the AMD IOMMU driver. Possible values are: @@ -893,10 +898,6 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file nomerge forcesac soft - fullflush - Flush IO/TLB at every deallocation - nofullflush - Flush IO/TLB only when addresses are reused (default) intel_iommu= [DMAR] Intel IOMMU driver (DMAR) option diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt index c83c8e4..b0c7b6c 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt @@ -233,6 +233,8 @@ IOMMU (input/output memory management unit) iommu options only relevant to the AMD GART hardware IOMMU: Set the size of the remapping area in bytes. allowed Overwrite iommu off workarounds for specific chipsets. + fullflush Flush IOMMU on each allocation (default). + nofullflush Don't use IOMMU fullflush. leak Turn on simple iommu leak tracing (only when CONFIG_IOMMU_LEAK is on). Default number of leak pages is 20. -- cgit v1.1 From 953f551756a1275d9bfdbb70697323449305161a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Remi Denis-Courmont Date: Mon, 22 Sep 2008 20:09:46 -0700 Subject: Phonet: kernel documentation MIME-Version: 1.0 Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit Signed-off-by: Rémi Denis-Courmont Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/phonet.txt | 111 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 111 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/phonet.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt b/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f3c72e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +Linux Phonet protocol family +============================ + +Introduction +------------ + +Phonet is a packet protocol used by Nokia cellular modems for both IPC +and RPC. With the Linux Phonet socket family, Linux host processes can +receive and send messages from/to the modem, or any other external +device attached to the modem. The modem takes care of routing. + +Phonet packets can be exchanged through various hardware connections +depending on the device, such as: + - USB with the CDC Phonet interface, + - infrared, + - Bluetooth, + - an RS232 serial port (with a dedicated "FBUS" line discipline), + - the SSI bus with some TI OMAP processors. + + +Packets format +-------------- + +Phonet packet have a common header as follow: + + struct phonethdr { + uint8_t pn_media; /* Media type (link-layer identifier) */ + uint8_t pn_rdev; /* Receiver device ID */ + uint8_t pn_sdev; /* Sender device ID */ + uint8_t pn_res; /* Resource ID or function */ + uint16_t pn_length; /* Big-endian message byte length (minus 6) */ + uint8_t pn_robj; /* Receiver object ID */ + uint8_t pn_sobj; /* Sender object ID */ + }; + +The device ID is split: the 6 higher order bits consitutes the device +address, while the 2 lower order bits are used for multiplexing, as are +the 8-bits object identifiers. As such, Phonet can be considered as a +network layer with 6 bits of address space and 10 bits for transport +protocol (much like port numbers in IP world). + +The modem always has address number zero. Each other device has a its +own 6-bits address. + + +Link layer +---------- + +Phonet links are always point-to-point links. The link layer header +consists of a single Phonet media type byte. It uniquely identifies the +link through which the packet is transmitted, from the modem's +perspective. + +Linux Phonet network interfaces use a dedicated link layer type +(ETH_P_PHONET) which is out of the Ethernet type range. They can only +send and receive Phonet packets. + +Note that Phonet interfaces are not allowed to re-order packets, so +only the (default) Linux FIFO qdisc should be used with them. + + +Network layer +------------- + +The Phonet socket address family maps the Phonet packet header: + + struct sockaddr_pn { + sa_family_t spn_family; /* AF_PHONET */ + uint8_t spn_obj; /* Object ID */ + uint8_t spn_dev; /* Device ID */ + uint8_t spn_resource; /* Resource or function */ + uint8_t spn_zero[...]; /* Padding */ + }; + +The resource field is only used when sending and receiving; +It is ignored by bind() and getsockname(). + + +Low-level datagram protocol +--------------------------- + +Applications can send Phonet messages using the Phonet datagram socket +protocol from the PF_PHONET family. Each socket is bound to one of the +2^10 object IDs available, and can send and receive packets with any +other peer. + + struct sockaddr_pn addr = { .spn_family = AF_PHONET, }; + ssize_t len; + socklen_t addrlen = sizeof(addr); + int fd; + + fd = socket(PF_PHONET, SOCK_DGRAM, 0); + bind(fd, (struct sockaddr *)&addr, sizeof(addr)); + /* ... */ + + sendto(fd, msg, msglen, 0, (struct sockaddr *)&addr, sizeof(addr)); + len = recvfrom(fd, buf, sizeof(buf), 0, + (struct sockaddr *)&addr, &addrlen); + +This protocol follows the SOCK_DGRAM connection-less semantics. +However, connect() and getpeername() are not supported, as they did +not seem useful with Phonet usages (could be added easily). + + +Authors +------- + +Linux Phonet was initially written by Sakari Ailus. +Other contributors include Mikä Liljeberg, Andras Domokos, +Carlos Chinea and Rémi Denis-Courmont. +Copyright (C) 2008 Nokia Corporation. -- cgit v1.1 From 1a73ef6ac3f4b44abc9d1875eb9240d7524a7cf7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Martin Steigerwald Date: Tue, 23 Sep 2008 13:48:44 +0200 Subject: CFS scheduler: documentation about scheduling policies The documentation about the CFS scheduler is scarse when it comes to scheduling policies. This patch adds a chapter about the scheduling policies it supports. Peter Zijlstra provided most of the information for it in http://marc.info/?l=linux-kernel&m=122210038326356&w=2 Signed-off-by: Martin Steigerwald Acked-by: Peter Zijlstra Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt | 28 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++-- 1 file changed, 26 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt index b2aa856..9d8eb55 100644 --- a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt +++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt @@ -114,7 +114,31 @@ result. -5. SCHEDULING CLASSES +5. Scheduling policies + +CFS implements three scheduling policies: + + - SCHED_NORMAL (traditionally called SCHED_OTHER): The scheduling + policy that is used for regular tasks. + + - SCHED_BATCH: Does not preempt nearly as often as regular tasks + would, thereby allowing tasks to run longer and make better use of + caches but at the cost of interactivity. This is well suited for + batch jobs. + + - SCHED_IDLE: This is even weaker than nice 19, but its not a true + idle timer scheduler in order to avoid to get into priority + inversion problems which would deadlock the machine. + +SCHED_FIFO/_RR are implemented in sched_rt.c and are as specified by +POSIX. + +The command chrt from util-linux-ng 2.13.1.1 can set all of these except +SCHED_IDLE. + + + +6. SCHEDULING CLASSES The new CFS scheduler has been designed in such a way to introduce "Scheduling Classes," an extensible hierarchy of scheduler modules. These modules @@ -179,7 +203,7 @@ This is the (partial) list of the hooks: -6. GROUP SCHEDULER EXTENSIONS TO CFS +7. GROUP SCHEDULER EXTENSIONS TO CFS Normally, the scheduler operates on individual tasks and strives to provide fair CPU time to each task. Sometimes, it may be desirable to group tasks and -- cgit v1.1 From 1e16dfc1baa745dd89b95f6e33e4142df6218066 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Peter Korsgaard Date: Tue, 23 Sep 2008 17:35:38 +0200 Subject: powerpc: gpio driver for mpc8349/8572/8610 and compatible Structured similar to the existing QE GPIO support. Signed-off-by: Peter Korsgaard Acked-by: Anton Vorontsov Signed-off-by: Kumar Gala --- .../powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/8xxx_gpio.txt | 40 ++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 40 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/8xxx_gpio.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/8xxx_gpio.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/8xxx_gpio.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d015dce --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/8xxx_gpio.txt @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +GPIO controllers on MPC8xxx SoCs + +This is for the non-QE/CPM/GUTs GPIO controllers as found on +8349, 8572, 8610 and compatible. + +Every GPIO controller node must have #gpio-cells property defined, +this information will be used to translate gpio-specifiers. + +Required properties: +- compatible : "fsl,-gpio" followed by "fsl,mpc8349-gpio" for + 83xx, "fsl,mpc8572-gpio" for 85xx and "fsl,mpc8610-gpio" for 86xx. +- #gpio-cells : Should be two. The first cell is the pin number and the + second cell is used to specify optional parameters (currently unused). + - interrupts : Interrupt mapping for GPIO IRQ (currently unused). + - interrupt-parent : Phandle for the interrupt controller that + services interrupts for this device. +- gpio-controller : Marks the port as GPIO controller. + +Example of gpio-controller nodes for a MPC8347 SoC: + + gpio1: gpio-controller@c00 { + #gpio-cells = <2>; + compatible = "fsl,mpc8347-gpio", "fsl,mpc8349-gpio"; + reg = <0xc00 0x100>; + interrupts = <74 0x8>; + interrupt-parent = <&ipic>; + gpio-controller; + }; + + gpio2: gpio-controller@d00 { + #gpio-cells = <2>; + compatible = "fsl,mpc8347-gpio", "fsl,mpc8349-gpio"; + reg = <0xd00 0x100>; + interrupts = <75 0x8>; + interrupt-parent = <&ipic>; + gpio-controller; + }; + +See booting-without-of.txt for details of how to specify GPIO +information for devices. -- cgit v1.1 From e5d2304802a63304a54cff010209c4a717a2509f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Oliver Hartkopp Date: Tue, 23 Sep 2008 14:53:14 -0700 Subject: can: Add documentation for virtual CAN driver usage This patch adds a usage documentation for the virtual CAN driver (vcan). Signed-off-by: Oliver Hartkopp Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/can.txt | 44 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++---- 1 file changed, 40 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/can.txt b/Documentation/networking/can.txt index 297ba7b..2035bc4 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/can.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/can.txt @@ -35,8 +35,9 @@ This file contains 6.1 general settings 6.2 local loopback of sent frames 6.3 CAN controller hardware filters - 6.4 currently supported CAN hardware - 6.5 todo + 6.4 The virtual CAN driver (vcan) + 6.5 currently supported CAN hardware + 6.6 todo 7 Credits @@ -584,7 +585,42 @@ solution for a couple of reasons: @133MHz with four SJA1000 CAN controllers from 2002 under heavy bus load without any problems ... - 6.4 currently supported CAN hardware (September 2007) + 6.4 The virtual CAN driver (vcan) + + Similar to the network loopback devices, vcan offers a virtual local + CAN interface. A full qualified address on CAN consists of + + - a unique CAN Identifier (CAN ID) + - the CAN bus this CAN ID is transmitted on (e.g. can0) + + so in common use cases more than one virtual CAN interface is needed. + + The virtual CAN interfaces allow the transmission and reception of CAN + frames without real CAN controller hardware. Virtual CAN network + devices are usually named 'vcanX', like vcan0 vcan1 vcan2 ... + When compiled as a module the virtual CAN driver module is called vcan.ko + + Since Linux Kernel version 2.6.24 the vcan driver supports the Kernel + netlink interface to create vcan network devices. The creation and + removal of vcan network devices can be managed with the ip(8) tool: + + - Create a virtual CAN network interface: + ip link add type vcan + + - Create a virtual CAN network interface with a specific name 'vcan42': + ip link add dev vcan42 type vcan + + - Remove a (virtual CAN) network interface 'vcan42': + ip link del vcan42 + + The tool 'vcan' from the SocketCAN SVN repository on BerliOS is obsolete. + + Virtual CAN network device creation in older Kernels: + In Linux Kernel versions < 2.6.24 the vcan driver creates 4 vcan + netdevices at module load time by default. This value can be changed + with the module parameter 'numdev'. E.g. 'modprobe vcan numdev=8' + + 6.5 currently supported CAN hardware On the project website http://developer.berlios.de/projects/socketcan there are different drivers available: @@ -603,7 +639,7 @@ solution for a couple of reasons: Please check the Mailing Lists on the berlios OSS project website. - 6.5 todo (September 2007) + 6.6 todo The configuration interface for CAN network drivers is still an open issue that has not been finalized in the socketcan project. Also the -- cgit v1.1 From fec12a62d74dc93a36c9ce1c3bce9ba045e44846 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Eric Miao Date: Fri, 19 Sep 2008 02:15:08 +0800 Subject: Documentation: fix the now deprecated reference to {set,reset}_scoop_gpio Due to recent patches removing the now deprecated references to {set,reset}_scoop_gpio() and converting them to the generic GPIO API, the references in the documentation also need to be fixed. Signed-off-by: Eric Miao Cc: Liam Girdwood Signed-off-by: Russell King --- Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt | 12 ++---------- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 10 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt index b2ed698..46f9684 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt @@ -135,11 +135,7 @@ when the Mic is inserted:- static int spitz_mic_bias(struct snd_soc_dapm_widget* w, int event) { - if(SND_SOC_DAPM_EVENT_ON(event)) - set_scoop_gpio(&spitzscoop2_device.dev, SPITZ_SCP2_MIC_BIAS); - else - reset_scoop_gpio(&spitzscoop2_device.dev, SPITZ_SCP2_MIC_BIAS); - + gpio_set_value(SPITZ_GPIO_MIC_BIAS, SND_SOC_DAPM_EVENT_ON(event)); return 0; } @@ -269,11 +265,7 @@ powered only when the spk is in use. /* turn speaker amplifier on/off depending on use */ static int corgi_amp_event(struct snd_soc_dapm_widget *w, int event) { - if (SND_SOC_DAPM_EVENT_ON(event)) - set_scoop_gpio(&corgiscoop_device.dev, CORGI_SCP_APM_ON); - else - reset_scoop_gpio(&corgiscoop_device.dev, CORGI_SCP_APM_ON); - + gpio_set_value(CORGI_GPIO_APM_ON, SND_SOC_DAPM_EVENT_ON(event)); return 0; } -- cgit v1.1 From ac2dc8ca14fb9028b160d89fdef04ecc66add3a2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: =?UTF-8?q?R=C3=A9mi=20Denis-Courmont?= Date: Tue, 30 Sep 2008 02:52:01 -0700 Subject: Phonet: improve documentation Fix grammar errors spotted by Randy Dunlap, and adds some more details. Signed-off-by: Remi Denis-Courmont Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/phonet.txt | 32 +++++++++++++++++++++----------- 1 file changed, 21 insertions(+), 11 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt b/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt index f3c72e0..57d3e59 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ depending on the device, such as: Packets format -------------- -Phonet packet have a common header as follow: +Phonet packets have a common header as follows: struct phonethdr { uint8_t pn_media; /* Media type (link-layer identifier) */ @@ -33,14 +33,17 @@ Phonet packet have a common header as follow: uint8_t pn_sobj; /* Sender object ID */ }; -The device ID is split: the 6 higher order bits consitutes the device -address, while the 2 lower order bits are used for multiplexing, as are -the 8-bits object identifiers. As such, Phonet can be considered as a +On Linux, the link-layer header includes the pn_media byte (see below). +The next 7 bytes are part of the network-layer header. + +The device ID is split: the 6 higher-order bits consitute the device +address, while the 2 lower-order bits are used for multiplexing, as are +the 8-bit object identifiers. As such, Phonet can be considered as a network layer with 6 bits of address space and 10 bits for transport protocol (much like port numbers in IP world). -The modem always has address number zero. Each other device has a its -own 6-bits address. +The modem always has address number zero. All other device have a their +own 6-bit address. Link layer @@ -49,11 +52,18 @@ Link layer Phonet links are always point-to-point links. The link layer header consists of a single Phonet media type byte. It uniquely identifies the link through which the packet is transmitted, from the modem's -perspective. - -Linux Phonet network interfaces use a dedicated link layer type -(ETH_P_PHONET) which is out of the Ethernet type range. They can only -send and receive Phonet packets. +perspective. Each Phonet network device shall prepend and set the media +type byte as appropriate. For convenience, a common phonet_header_ops +link-layer header operations structure is provided. It sets the +media type according to the network device hardware address. + +Linux Phonet network interfaces support a dedicated link layer packets +type (ETH_P_PHONET) which is out of the Ethernet type range. They can +only send and receive Phonet packets. + +The virtual TUN tunnel device driver can also be used for Phonet. This +requires IFF_TUN mode, _without_ the IFF_NO_PI flag. In this case, +there is no link-layer header, so there is no Phonet media type byte. Note that Phonet interfaces are not allowed to re-order packets, so only the (default) Linux FIFO qdisc should be used with them. -- cgit v1.1 From a30c3f69e6336cb9b09a989595e417367e4e9b1b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Andrew Vasquez Date: Fri, 18 Jul 2008 08:32:52 -0700 Subject: [SCSI] fc_transport: Add an API to allow an LLD to create vports There's already a fc_vport_termintate() call exported by the transport. This patch adds a symmetric call to the API to allow an NPIV-capable LLD to instantiate vports sans user intervention. Additional comments/updates: Re: scsi_fc_transport.txt Add a function prototype for fc_vport_terminate similar to what's done for fc_vport_create Re: fc_vport_create I recommend we pass the channel number in fc_vport_create rather than fixing it at zero. Also, ids->vport_type should be set to FC_PORTTYPE_NPIV prior to calling fc_vport_create. The comment is also meaningless. Added-by and Signed-off-by: James Smart Signed-off-by: Andrew Vasquez Signed-off-by: James Bottomley --- Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt | 36 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 36 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt index 75143f0..38d324d 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt @@ -436,6 +436,42 @@ Other: was updated to remove all vports for the fc_host as well. +Transport supplied functions +---------------------------- + +The following functions are supplied by the FC-transport for use by LLDs. + + fc_vport_create - create a vport + fc_vport_terminate - detach and remove a vport + +Details: + +/** + * fc_vport_create - Admin App or LLDD requests creation of a vport + * @shost: scsi host the virtual port is connected to. + * @ids: The world wide names, FC4 port roles, etc for + * the virtual port. + * + * Notes: + * This routine assumes no locks are held on entry. + */ +struct fc_vport * +fc_vport_create(struct Scsi_Host *shost, struct fc_vport_identifiers *ids) + +/** + * fc_vport_terminate - Admin App or LLDD requests termination of a vport + * @vport: fc_vport to be terminated + * + * Calls the LLDD vport_delete() function, then deallocates and removes + * the vport from the shost and object tree. + * + * Notes: + * This routine assumes no locks are held on entry. + */ +int +fc_vport_terminate(struct fc_vport *vport) + + Credits ======= The following people have contributed to this document: -- cgit v1.1 From 37515facd001942221d68171c81c1f46d54ffdd0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Theodore Ts'o Date: Thu, 9 Oct 2008 23:21:54 -0400 Subject: ext4: Improve the documentation for ext4's /proc tunables Signed-off-by: "Theodore Ts'o" Cc: Alex Tomas Cc: Andreas Dilger --- Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt | 70 ++++++++++++++++++-------------------- 1 file changed, 33 insertions(+), 37 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index f566ad9..d9ac970 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt @@ -923,45 +923,41 @@ CPUs. The "procs_blocked" line gives the number of processes currently blocked, waiting for I/O to complete. + 1.9 Ext4 file system parameters ------------------------------ -Ext4 file system have one directory per partition under /proc/fs/ext4/ -# ls /proc/fs/ext4/hdc/ -group_prealloc max_to_scan mb_groups mb_history min_to_scan order2_req -stats stream_req - -mb_groups: -This file gives the details of multiblock allocator buddy cache of free blocks - -mb_history: -Multiblock allocation history. - -stats: -This file indicate whether the multiblock allocator should start collecting -statistics. The statistics are shown during unmount - -group_prealloc: -The multiblock allocator normalize the block allocation request to -group_prealloc filesystem blocks if we don't have strip value set. -The stripe value can be specified at mount time or during mke2fs. - -max_to_scan: -How long multiblock allocator can look for a best extent (in found extents) - -min_to_scan: -How long multiblock allocator must look for a best extent - -order2_req: -Multiblock allocator use 2^N search using buddies only for requests greater -than or equal to order2_req. The request size is specfied in file system -blocks. A value of 2 indicate only if the requests are greater than or equal -to 4 blocks. - -stream_req: -Files smaller than stream_req are served by the stream allocator, whose -purpose is to pack requests as close each to other as possible to -produce smooth I/O traffic. Avalue of 16 indicate that file smaller than 16 -filesystem block size will use group based preallocation. + +Information about mounted ext4 file systems can be found in +/proc/fs/ext4. Each mounted filesystem will have a directory in +/proc/fs/ext4 based on its device name (i.e., /proc/fs/ext4/hdc or +/proc/fs/ext4/dm-0). The files in each per-device directory are shown +in Table 1-10, below. + +Table 1-10: Files in /proc/fs/ext4/ +.............................................................................. + File Content + mb_groups details of multiblock allocator buddy cache of free blocks + mb_history multiblock allocation history + stats controls whether the multiblock allocator should start + collecting statistics, which are shown during the unmount + group_prealloc the multiblock allocator will round up allocation + requests to a multiple of this tuning parameter if the + stripe size is not set in the ext4 superblock + max_to_scan The maximum number of extents the multiblock allocator + will search to find the best extent + min_to_scan The minimum number of extents the multiblock allocator + will search to find the best extent + order2_req Tuning parameter which controls the minimum size for + requests (as a power of 2) where the buddy cache is + used + stream_req Files which have fewer blocks than this tunable + parameter will have their blocks allocated out of a + block group specific preallocation pool, so that small + files are packed closely together. Each large file + will have its blocks allocated out of its own unique + preallocation pool. +.............................................................................. + ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Summary -- cgit v1.1 From 240799cdf22bd789ea6852653c3b879d35ad0a6c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Theodore Ts'o Date: Thu, 9 Oct 2008 23:53:47 -0400 Subject: ext4: Use readahead when reading an inode from the inode table With modern hard drives, reading 64k takes roughly the same time as reading a 4k block. So request readahead for adjacent inode table blocks to reduce the time it takes when iterating over directories (especially when doing this in htree sort order) in a cold cache case. With this patch, the time it takes to run "git status" on a kernel tree after flushing the caches via "echo 3 > /proc/sys/vm/drop_caches" is reduced by 21%. Signed-off-by: "Theodore Ts'o" --- Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt | 6 ++++++ Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt | 3 +++ 2 files changed, 9 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt index 0d53949..2890579 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt @@ -177,6 +177,11 @@ barrier=<0|1(*)> This enables/disables the use of write barriers in your disks are battery-backed in one way or another, disabling barriers may safely improve performance. +inode_readahead=n This tuning parameter controls the maximum + number of inode table blocks that ext4's inode + table readahead algorithm will pre-read into + the buffer cache. The default value is 32 blocks. + orlov (*) This enables the new Orlov block allocator. It is enabled by default. @@ -252,6 +257,7 @@ stripe=n Number of filesystem blocks that mballoc will try delalloc (*) Deferring block allocation until write-out time. nodelalloc Disable delayed allocation. Blocks are allocation when data is copied from user to page cache. + Data Mode ========= There are 3 different data modes: diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index d9ac970..d831d24 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt @@ -956,6 +956,9 @@ Table 1-10: Files in /proc/fs/ext4/ files are packed closely together. Each large file will have its blocks allocated out of its own unique preallocation pool. +inode_readahead Tuning parameter which controls the maximum number of + inode table blocks that ext4's inode table readahead + algorithm will pre-read into the buffer cache .............................................................................. -- cgit v1.1 From c4b929b85bdb64afacbbf6453b1f2bf7e14c9e89 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mark Fasheh Date: Wed, 8 Oct 2008 19:44:18 -0400 Subject: vfs: vfs-level fiemap interface Basic vfs-level fiemap infrastructure, which sets up a new ->fiemap inode operation. Userspace can get extent information on a file via fiemap ioctl. As input, the fiemap ioctl takes a struct fiemap which includes an array of struct fiemap_extent (fm_extents). Size of the extent array is passed as fm_extent_count and number of extents returned will be written into fm_mapped_extents. Offset and length fields on the fiemap structure (fm_start, fm_length) describe a logical range which will be searched for extents. All extents returned will at least partially contain this range. The actual extent offsets and ranges returned will be unmodified from their offset and range on-disk. The fiemap ioctl returns '0' on success. On error, -1 is returned and errno is set. If errno is equal to EBADR, then fm_flags will contain those flags which were passed in which the kernel did not understand. On all other errors, the contents of fm_extents is undefined. As fiemap evolved, there have been many authors of the vfs patch. As far as I can tell, the list includes: Kalpak Shah Andreas Dilger Eric Sandeen Mark Fasheh Signed-off-by: Mark Fasheh Signed-off-by: "Theodore Ts'o" Cc: Michael Kerrisk Cc: linux-api@vger.kernel.org Cc: linux-fsdevel@vger.kernel.org --- Documentation/filesystems/fiemap.txt | 228 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 228 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/filesystems/fiemap.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/fiemap.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/fiemap.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1e3defc --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/fiemap.txt @@ -0,0 +1,228 @@ +============ +Fiemap Ioctl +============ + +The fiemap ioctl is an efficient method for userspace to get file +extent mappings. Instead of block-by-block mapping (such as bmap), fiemap +returns a list of extents. + + +Request Basics +-------------- + +A fiemap request is encoded within struct fiemap: + +struct fiemap { + __u64 fm_start; /* logical offset (inclusive) at + * which to start mapping (in) */ + __u64 fm_length; /* logical length of mapping which + * userspace cares about (in) */ + __u32 fm_flags; /* FIEMAP_FLAG_* flags for request (in/out) */ + __u32 fm_mapped_extents; /* number of extents that were + * mapped (out) */ + __u32 fm_extent_count; /* size of fm_extents array (in) */ + __u32 fm_reserved; + struct fiemap_extent fm_extents[0]; /* array of mapped extents (out) */ +}; + + +fm_start, and fm_length specify the logical range within the file +which the process would like mappings for. Extents returned mirror +those on disk - that is, the logical offset of the 1st returned extent +may start before fm_start, and the range covered by the last returned +extent may end after fm_length. All offsets and lengths are in bytes. + +Certain flags to modify the way in which mappings are looked up can be +set in fm_flags. If the kernel doesn't understand some particular +flags, it will return EBADR and the contents of fm_flags will contain +the set of flags which caused the error. If the kernel is compatible +with all flags passed, the contents of fm_flags will be unmodified. +It is up to userspace to determine whether rejection of a particular +flag is fatal to it's operation. This scheme is intended to allow the +fiemap interface to grow in the future but without losing +compatibility with old software. + +fm_extent_count specifies the number of elements in the fm_extents[] array +that can be used to return extents. If fm_extent_count is zero, then the +fm_extents[] array is ignored (no extents will be returned), and the +fm_mapped_extents count will hold the number of extents needed in +fm_extents[] to hold the file's current mapping. Note that there is +nothing to prevent the file from changing between calls to FIEMAP. + +The following flags can be set in fm_flags: + +* FIEMAP_FLAG_SYNC +If this flag is set, the kernel will sync the file before mapping extents. + +* FIEMAP_FLAG_XATTR +If this flag is set, the extents returned will describe the inodes +extended attribute lookup tree, instead of it's data tree. + + +Extent Mapping +-------------- + +Extent information is returned within the embedded fm_extents array +which userspace must allocate along with the fiemap structure. The +number of elements in the fiemap_extents[] array should be passed via +fm_extent_count. The number of extents mapped by kernel will be +returned via fm_mapped_extents. If the number of fiemap_extents +allocated is less than would be required to map the requested range, +the maximum number of extents that can be mapped in the fm_extent[] +array will be returned and fm_mapped_extents will be equal to +fm_extent_count. In that case, the last extent in the array will not +complete the requested range and will not have the FIEMAP_EXTENT_LAST +flag set (see the next section on extent flags). + +Each extent is described by a single fiemap_extent structure as +returned in fm_extents. + +struct fiemap_extent { + __u64 fe_logical; /* logical offset in bytes for the start of + * the extent */ + __u64 fe_physical; /* physical offset in bytes for the start + * of the extent */ + __u64 fe_length; /* length in bytes for the extent */ + __u64 fe_reserved64[2]; + __u32 fe_flags; /* FIEMAP_EXTENT_* flags for this extent */ + __u32 fe_reserved[3]; +}; + +All offsets and lengths are in bytes and mirror those on disk. It is valid +for an extents logical offset to start before the request or it's logical +length to extend past the request. Unless FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED is +returned, fe_logical, fe_physical, and fe_length will be aligned to the +block size of the file system. With the exception of extents flagged as +FIEMAP_EXTENT_MERGED, adjacent extents will not be merged. + +The fe_flags field contains flags which describe the extent returned. +A special flag, FIEMAP_EXTENT_LAST is always set on the last extent in +the file so that the process making fiemap calls can determine when no +more extents are available, without having to call the ioctl again. + +Some flags are intentionally vague and will always be set in the +presence of other more specific flags. This way a program looking for +a general property does not have to know all existing and future flags +which imply that property. + +For example, if FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_INLINE or FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_TAIL +are set, FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED will also be set. A program looking +for inline or tail-packed data can key on the specific flag. Software +which simply cares not to try operating on non-aligned extents +however, can just key on FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED, and not have to +worry about all present and future flags which might imply unaligned +data. Note that the opposite is not true - it would be valid for +FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED to appear alone. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_LAST +This is the last extent in the file. A mapping attempt past this +extent will return nothing. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_UNKNOWN +The location of this extent is currently unknown. This may indicate +the data is stored on an inaccessible volume or that no storage has +been allocated for the file yet. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_DELALLOC + - This will also set FIEMAP_EXTENT_UNKNOWN. +Delayed allocation - while there is data for this extent, it's +physical location has not been allocated yet. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_ENCODED +This extent does not consist of plain filesystem blocks but is +encoded (e.g. encrypted or compressed). Reading the data in this +extent via I/O to the block device will have undefined results. + +Note that it is *always* undefined to try to update the data +in-place by writing to the indicated location without the +assistance of the filesystem, or to access the data using the +information returned by the FIEMAP interface while the filesystem +is mounted. In other words, user applications may only read the +extent data via I/O to the block device while the filesystem is +unmounted, and then only if the FIEMAP_EXTENT_ENCODED flag is +clear; user applications must not try reading or writing to the +filesystem via the block device under any other circumstances. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_ENCRYPTED + - This will also set FIEMAP_EXTENT_ENCODED +The data in this extent has been encrypted by the file system. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED +Extent offsets and length are not guaranteed to be block aligned. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_INLINE + This will also set FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED +Data is located within a meta data block. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_TAIL + This will also set FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED +Data is packed into a block with data from other files. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_UNWRITTEN +Unwritten extent - the extent is allocated but it's data has not been +initialized. This indicates the extent's data will be all zero if read +through the filesystem but the contents are undefined if read directly from +the device. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_MERGED +This will be set when a file does not support extents, i.e., it uses a block +based addressing scheme. Since returning an extent for each block back to +userspace would be highly inefficient, the kernel will try to merge most +adjacent blocks into 'extents'. + + +VFS -> File System Implementation +--------------------------------- + +File systems wishing to support fiemap must implement a ->fiemap callback on +their inode_operations structure. The fs ->fiemap call is responsible for +defining it's set of supported fiemap flags, and calling a helper function on +each discovered extent: + +struct inode_operations { + ... + + int (*fiemap)(struct inode *, struct fiemap_extent_info *, u64 start, + u64 len); + +->fiemap is passed struct fiemap_extent_info which describes the +fiemap request: + +struct fiemap_extent_info { + unsigned int fi_flags; /* Flags as passed from user */ + unsigned int fi_extents_mapped; /* Number of mapped extents */ + unsigned int fi_extents_max; /* Size of fiemap_extent array */ + struct fiemap_extent *fi_extents_start; /* Start of fiemap_extent array */ +}; + +It is intended that the file system should not need to access any of this +structure directly. + + +Flag checking should be done at the beginning of the ->fiemap callback via the +fiemap_check_flags() helper: + +int fiemap_check_flags(struct fiemap_extent_info *fieinfo, u32 fs_flags); + +The struct fieinfo should be passed in as recieved from ioctl_fiemap(). The +set of fiemap flags which the fs understands should be passed via fs_flags. If +fiemap_check_flags finds invalid user flags, it will place the bad values in +fieinfo->fi_flags and return -EBADR. If the file system gets -EBADR, from +fiemap_check_flags(), it should immediately exit, returning that error back to +ioctl_fiemap(). + + +For each extent in the request range, the file system should call +the helper function, fiemap_fill_next_extent(): + +int fiemap_fill_next_extent(struct fiemap_extent_info *info, u64 logical, + u64 phys, u64 len, u32 flags, u32 dev); + +fiemap_fill_next_extent() will use the passed values to populate the +next free extent in the fm_extents array. 'General' extent flags will +automatically be set from specific flags on behalf of the calling file +system so that the userspace API is not broken. + +fiemap_fill_next_extent() returns 0 on success, and 1 when the +user-supplied fm_extents array is full. If an error is encountered +while copying the extent to user memory, -EFAULT will be returned. -- cgit v1.1 From 95430c0b140c31cb9e39f876afe1c0e9947d1aaf Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: =?UTF-8?q?R=C3=A9mi=20Denis-Courmont?= Date: Sun, 5 Oct 2008 11:16:36 -0700 Subject: Phonet: pipe end-point protocol documentation MIME-Version: 1.0 Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit Signed-off-by: Rémi Denis-Courmont Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/phonet.txt | 54 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 54 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt b/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt index 57d3e59..0e6e592 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt @@ -112,6 +112,60 @@ However, connect() and getpeername() are not supported, as they did not seem useful with Phonet usages (could be added easily). +Phonet Pipe protocol +-------------------- + +The Phonet Pipe protocol is a simple sequenced packets protocol +with end-to-end congestion control. It uses the passive listening +socket paradigm. The listening socket is bound to an unique free object +ID. Each listening socket can handle up to 255 simultaneous +connections, one per accept()'d socket. + + int lfd, cfd; + + lfd = socket(PF_PHONET, SOCK_SEQPACKET, PN_PROTO_PIPE); + listen (lfd, INT_MAX); + + /* ... */ + cfd = accept(lfd, NULL, NULL); + for (;;) + { + char buf[...]; + ssize_t len = read(cfd, buf, sizeof(buf)); + + /* ... */ + + write(cfd, msg, msglen); + } + +Connections are established between two endpoints by a "third party" +application. This means that both endpoints are passive; so connect() +is not possible. + +WARNING: +When polling a connected pipe socket for writability, there is an +intrinsic race condition whereby writability might be lost between the +polling and the writing system calls. In this case, the socket will +block until write because possible again, unless non-blocking mode +becomes enabled. + + +The pipe protocol provides two socket options at the SOL_PNPIPE level: + + PNPIPE_ENCAP accepts one integer value (int) of: + + PNPIPE_ENCAP_NONE: The socket operates normally (default). + + PNPIPE_ENCAP_IP: The socket is used as a backend for a virtual IP + interface. This requires CAP_NET_ADMIN capability. GPRS data + support on Nokia modems can use this. Note that the socket cannot + be reliably poll()'d or read() from while in this mode. + + PNPIPE_IFINDEX is a read-only integer value. It contains the + interface index of the network interface created by PNPIPE_ENCAP, + or zero if encapsulation is off. + + Authors ------- -- cgit v1.1 From 1b483a6a7b2998e9c98ad985d7494b9b725bd228 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Geert Uytterhoeven Date: Mon, 15 Sep 2008 23:09:08 +0000 Subject: powerpc: Remove remains of /proc/ppc_htab commit 14cf11af6cf608eb8c23e989ddb17a715ddce109 ("powerpc: Merge enough to start building in arch/powerpc.") unwired /proc/ppc_htab, and commit 917f0af9e5a9ceecf9e72537fabb501254ba321d ("powerpc: Remove arch/ppc and include/asm-ppc") removed the rest of the /proc/ppc_htab support, but there are still a few references left. Kill them for good. Signed-off-by: Geert Uytterhoeven Signed-off-by: Benjamin Herrenschmidt --- Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX | 2 - Documentation/powerpc/ppc_htab.txt | 118 ------------------------------------- 2 files changed, 120 deletions(-) delete mode 100644 Documentation/powerpc/ppc_htab.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX b/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX index 29d839c..2f31853 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX @@ -18,8 +18,6 @@ mpc52xx.txt - Linux 2.6.x on MPC52xx family mpc52xx-device-tree-bindings.txt - MPC5200 Device Tree Bindings -ppc_htab.txt - - info about the Linux/PPC /proc/ppc_htab entry smp.txt - use and state info about Linux/PPC on MP machines sound.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/ppc_htab.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/ppc_htab.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 8b8c7df..0000000 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/ppc_htab.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,118 +0,0 @@ - Information about /proc/ppc_htab -===================================================================== - -This document and the related code was written by me (Cort Dougan), please -email me (cort@fsmlabs.com) if you have questions, comments or corrections. - -Last Change: 2.16.98 - -This entry in the proc directory is readable by all users but only -writable by root. - -The ppc_htab interface is a user level way of accessing the -performance monitoring registers as well as providing information -about the PTE hash table. - -1. Reading - - Reading this file will give you information about the memory management - hash table that serves as an extended tlb for page translation on the - powerpc. It will also give you information about performance measurement - specific to the cpu that you are using. - - Explanation of the 604 Performance Monitoring Fields: - MMCR0 - the current value of the MMCR0 register - PMC1 - PMC2 - the value of the performance counters and a - description of what events they are counting - which are based on MMCR0 bit settings. - Explanation of the PTE Hash Table fields: - - Size - hash table size in Kb. - Buckets - number of buckets in the table. - Address - the virtual kernel address of the hash table base. - Entries - the number of ptes that can be stored in the hash table. - User/Kernel - how many pte's are in use by the kernel or user at that time. - Overflows - How many of the entries are in their secondary hash location. - Percent full - ratio of free pte entries to in use entries. - Reloads - Count of how many hash table misses have occurred - that were fixed with a reload from the linux tables. - Should always be 0 on 603 based machines. - Non-error Misses - Count of how many hash table misses have occurred - that were completed with the creation of a pte in the linux - tables with a call to do_page_fault(). - Error Misses - Number of misses due to errors such as bad address - and permission violations. This includes kernel access of - bad user addresses that are fixed up by the trap handler. - - Note that calculation of the data displayed from /proc/ppc_htab takes - a long time and spends a great deal of time in the kernel. It would - be quite hard on performance to read this file constantly. In time - there may be a counter in the kernel that allows successive reads from - this file only after a given amount of time has passed to reduce the - possibility of a user slowing the system by reading this file. - -2. Writing - - Writing to the ppc_htab allows you to change the characteristics of - the powerpc PTE hash table and setup performance monitoring. - - Resizing the PTE hash table is not enabled right now due to many - complications with moving the hash table, rehashing the entries - and many many SMP issues that would have to be dealt with. - - Write options to ppc_htab: - - - To set the size of the hash table to 64Kb: - - echo 'size 64' > /proc/ppc_htab - - The size must be a multiple of 64 and must be greater than or equal to - 64. - - - To turn off performance monitoring: - - echo 'off' > /proc/ppc_htab - - - To reset the counters without changing what they're counting: - - echo 'reset' > /proc/ppc_htab - - Note that counting will continue after the reset if it is enabled. - - - To count only events in user mode or only in kernel mode: - - echo 'user' > /proc/ppc_htab - ...or... - echo 'kernel' > /proc/ppc_htab - - Note that these two options are exclusive of one another and the - lack of either of these options counts user and kernel. - Using 'reset' and 'off' reset these flags. - - - The 604 has 2 performance counters which can each count events from - a specific set of events. These sets are disjoint so it is not - possible to count _any_ combination of 2 events. One event can - be counted by PMC1 and one by PMC2. - - To start counting a particular event use: - - echo 'event' > /proc/ppc_htab - - and choose from these events: - - PMC1 - ---- - 'ic miss' - instruction cache misses - 'dtlb' - data tlb misses (not hash table misses) - - PMC2 - ---- - 'dc miss' - data cache misses - 'itlb' - instruction tlb misses (not hash table misses) - 'load miss time' - cycles to complete a load miss - -3. Bugs - - The PMC1 and PMC2 counters can overflow and give no indication of that - in /proc/ppc_htab. -- cgit v1.1 From 94576b22ce1ad346cb09f05bf4f06be33e0eef49 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Geert Uytterhoeven Date: Mon, 15 Sep 2008 23:10:54 +0000 Subject: powerpc: Remove outdated Documentation/powerpc/smp.txt Documentation/powerpc/smp.txt is so outdated that it makes sense to just remove it. Signed-off-by: Geert Uytterhoeven Signed-off-by: Benjamin Herrenschmidt --- Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX | 2 -- Documentation/powerpc/smp.txt | 34 ---------------------------------- 2 files changed, 36 deletions(-) delete mode 100644 Documentation/powerpc/smp.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX b/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX index 2f31853..e3960b8 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX @@ -18,8 +18,6 @@ mpc52xx.txt - Linux 2.6.x on MPC52xx family mpc52xx-device-tree-bindings.txt - MPC5200 Device Tree Bindings -smp.txt - - use and state info about Linux/PPC on MP machines sound.txt - info on sound support under Linux/PPC zImage_layout.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/smp.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/smp.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 5b581b8..0000000 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/smp.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ - Information about Linux/PPC SMP mode -===================================================================== - -This document and the related code was written by me -(Cort Dougan, cort@fsmlabs.com) please email me if you have questions, -comments or corrections. - -Last Change: 3.31.99 - -If you want to help by writing code or testing different hardware please -email me! - -1. State of Supported Hardware - - PowerSurge Architecture - tested on UMAX s900, Apple 9600 - The second processor on this machine boots up just fine and - enters its idle loop. Hopefully a completely working SMP kernel - on this machine will be done shortly. - - The code makes the assumption of only two processors. The changes - necessary to work with any number would not be overly difficult but - I don't have any machines with >2 processors so it's not high on my - list of priorities. If anyone else would like do to the work email - me and I can point out the places that need changed. If you have >2 - processors and don't want to add support yourself let me know and I - can take a look into it. - - BeBox - BeBox support hasn't been added to the 2.1.X kernels from 2.0.X - but work is being done and SMP support for BeBox is in the works. - - CHRP - CHRP SMP works and is fairly solid. It's been tested on the IBM F50 - with 4 processors for quite some time now. -- cgit v1.1 From a5ac0129249611fc4a35e6d7cd9b8462d67e5798 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Sonic Zhang Date: Mon, 13 Oct 2008 14:07:19 +0800 Subject: Blackfin arch: add supporting for kgdb Signed-off-by: Sonic Zhang Signed-off-by: Bryan Wu --- Documentation/blackfin/kgdb.txt | 155 ---------------------------------------- 1 file changed, 155 deletions(-) delete mode 100644 Documentation/blackfin/kgdb.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/blackfin/kgdb.txt b/Documentation/blackfin/kgdb.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 84f6a48..0000000 --- a/Documentation/blackfin/kgdb.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,155 +0,0 @@ - A Simple Guide to Configure KGDB - - Sonic Zhang - Aug. 24th 2006 - - -This KGDB patch enables the kernel developer to do source level debugging on -the kernel for the Blackfin architecture. The debugging works over either the -ethernet interface or one of the uarts. Both software breakpoints and -hardware breakpoints are supported in this version. -http://docs.blackfin.uclinux.org/doku.php?id=kgdb - - -2 known issues: -1. This bug: - http://blackfin.uclinux.org/tracker/index.php?func=detail&aid=544&group_id=18&atid=145 - The GDB client for Blackfin uClinux causes incorrect values of local - variables to be displayed when the user breaks the running of kernel in GDB. -2. Because of a hardware bug in Blackfin 533 v1.0.3: - 05000067 - Watchpoints (Hardware Breakpoints) are not supported - Hardware breakpoints cannot be set properly. - - -Debug over Ethernet: - -1. Compile and install the cross platform version of gdb for blackfin, which - can be found at $(BINROOT)/bfin-elf-gdb. - -2. Apply this patch to the 2.6.x kernel. Select the menuconfig option under - "Kernel hacking" -> "Kernel debugging" -> "KGDB: kernel debug with remote gdb". - With this selected, option "Full Symbolic/Source Debugging support" and - "Compile the kernel with frame pointers" are also selected. - -3. Select option "KGDB: connect over (Ethernet)". Add "kgdboe=@target-IP/,@host-IP/" to - the option "Compiled-in Kernel Boot Parameter" under "Kernel hacking". - -4. Connect minicom to the serial port and boot the kernel image. - -5. Configure the IP "/> ifconfig eth0 target-IP" - -6. Start GDB client "bfin-elf-gdb vmlinux". - -7. Connect to the target "(gdb) target remote udp:target-IP:6443". - -8. Set software breakpoint "(gdb) break sys_open". - -9. Continue "(gdb) c". - -10. Run ls in the target console "/> ls". - -11. Breakpoint hits. "Breakpoint 1: sys_open(..." - -12. Display local variables and function paramters. - (*) This operation gives wrong results, see known issue 1. - -13. Single stepping "(gdb) si". - -14. Remove breakpoint 1. "(gdb) del 1" - -15. Set hardware breakpoint "(gdb) hbreak sys_open". - -16. Continue "(gdb) c". - -17. Run ls in the target console "/> ls". - -18. Hardware breakpoint hits. "Breakpoint 1: sys_open(...". - (*) This hardware breakpoint will not be hit, see known issue 2. - -19. Continue "(gdb) c". - -20. Interrupt the target in GDB "Ctrl+C". - -21. Detach from the target "(gdb) detach". - -22. Exit GDB "(gdb) quit". - - -Debug over the UART: - -1. Compile and install the cross platform version of gdb for blackfin, which - can be found at $(BINROOT)/bfin-elf-gdb. - -2. Apply this patch to the 2.6.x kernel. Select the menuconfig option under - "Kernel hacking" -> "Kernel debugging" -> "KGDB: kernel debug with remote gdb". - With this selected, option "Full Symbolic/Source Debugging support" and - "Compile the kernel with frame pointers" are also selected. - -3. Select option "KGDB: connect over (UART)". Set "KGDB: UART port number" to be - a different one from the console. Don't forget to change the mode of - blackfin serial driver to PIO. Otherwise kgdb works incorrectly on UART. - -4. If you want connect to kgdb when the kernel boots, enable - "KGDB: Wait for gdb connection early" - -5. Compile kernel. - -6. Connect minicom to the serial port of the console and boot the kernel image. - -7. Start GDB client "bfin-elf-gdb vmlinux". - -8. Set the baud rate in GDB "(gdb) set remotebaud 57600". - -9. Connect to the target on the second serial port "(gdb) target remote /dev/ttyS1". - -10. Set software breakpoint "(gdb) break sys_open". - -11. Continue "(gdb) c". - -12. Run ls in the target console "/> ls". - -13. A breakpoint is hit. "Breakpoint 1: sys_open(..." - -14. All other operations are the same as that in KGDB over Ethernet. - - -Debug over the same UART as console: - -1. Compile and install the cross platform version of gdb for blackfin, which - can be found at $(BINROOT)/bfin-elf-gdb. - -2. Apply this patch to the 2.6.x kernel. Select the menuconfig option under - "Kernel hacking" -> "Kernel debugging" -> "KGDB: kernel debug with remote gdb". - With this selected, option "Full Symbolic/Source Debugging support" and - "Compile the kernel with frame pointers" are also selected. - -3. Select option "KGDB: connect over UART". Set "KGDB: UART port number" to console. - Don't forget to change the mode of blackfin serial driver to PIO. - Otherwise kgdb works incorrectly on UART. - -4. If you want connect to kgdb when the kernel boots, enable - "KGDB: Wait for gdb connection early" - -5. Connect minicom to the serial port and boot the kernel image. - -6. (Optional) Ask target to wait for gdb connection by entering Ctrl+A. In minicom, you should enter Ctrl+A+A. - -7. Start GDB client "bfin-elf-gdb vmlinux". - -8. Set the baud rate in GDB "(gdb) set remotebaud 57600". - -9. Connect to the target "(gdb) target remote /dev/ttyS0". - -10. Set software breakpoint "(gdb) break sys_open". - -11. Continue "(gdb) c". Then enter Ctrl+C twice to stop GDB connection. - -12. Run ls in the target console "/> ls". Dummy string can be seen on the console. - -13. Then connect the gdb to target again. "(gdb) target remote /dev/ttyS0". - Now you will find a breakpoint is hit. "Breakpoint 1: sys_open(..." - -14. All other operations are the same as that in KGDB over Ethernet. The only - difference is that after continue command in GDB, please stop GDB - connection by 2 "Ctrl+C"s and connect again after breakpoints are hit or - Ctrl+A is entered. -- cgit v1.1 From 079aa88fe7172b7650c7cf2c0bc01662bafea236 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jan Engelhardt Date: Wed, 8 Oct 2008 11:35:00 +0200 Subject: netfilter: xt_recent: IPv6 support This updates xt_recent to support the IPv6 address family. The new /proc/net/xt_recent directory must be used for this. The old proc interface can also be configured out. Signed-off-by: Jan Engelhardt Signed-off-by: Patrick McHardy --- Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt | 3 +++ 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index d0f22fa..3d2d0c2 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt @@ -250,6 +250,9 @@ What (Why): - xt_mark match revision 0 (superseded by xt_mark match revision 1) + - xt_recent: the old ipt_recent proc dir + (superseded by /proc/net/xt_recent) + When: January 2009 or Linux 2.7.0, whichever comes first Why: Superseded by newer revisions or modules Who: Jan Engelhardt -- cgit v1.1 From d2f26037a38ada4a5d40d1cf0b32bc5289f50312 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: KOVACS Krisztian Date: Wed, 8 Oct 2008 11:35:12 +0200 Subject: netfilter: Add documentation for tproxy Add basic usage instructions to Documentation/networking. Signed-off-by: KOVACS Krisztian Signed-off-by: Patrick McHardy --- Documentation/networking/tproxy.txt | 85 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 85 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/tproxy.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/tproxy.txt b/Documentation/networking/tproxy.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7b5996d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/tproxy.txt @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ +Transparent proxy support +========================= + +This feature adds Linux 2.2-like transparent proxy support to current kernels. +To use it, enable NETFILTER_TPROXY, the socket match and the TPROXY target in +your kernel config. You will need policy routing too, so be sure to enable that +as well. + + +1. Making non-local sockets work +================================ + +The idea is that you identify packets with destination address matching a local +socket on your box, set the packet mark to a certain value, and then match on that +value using policy routing to have those packets delivered locally: + +# iptables -t mangle -N DIVERT +# iptables -t mangle -A PREROUTING -p tcp -m socket -j DIVERT +# iptables -t mangle -A DIVERT -j MARK --set-mark 1 +# iptables -t mangle -A DIVERT -j ACCEPT + +# ip rule add fwmark 1 lookup 100 +# ip route add local 0.0.0.0/0 dev lo table 100 + +Because of certain restrictions in the IPv4 routing output code you'll have to +modify your application to allow it to send datagrams _from_ non-local IP +addresses. All you have to do is enable the (SOL_IP, IP_TRANSPARENT) socket +option before calling bind: + +fd = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_STREAM, 0); +/* - 8< -*/ +int value = 1; +setsockopt(fd, SOL_IP, IP_TRANSPARENT, &value, sizeof(value)); +/* - 8< -*/ +name.sin_family = AF_INET; +name.sin_port = htons(0xCAFE); +name.sin_addr.s_addr = htonl(0xDEADBEEF); +bind(fd, &name, sizeof(name)); + +A trivial patch for netcat is available here: +http://people.netfilter.org/hidden/tproxy/netcat-ip_transparent-support.patch + + +2. Redirecting traffic +====================== + +Transparent proxying often involves "intercepting" traffic on a router. This is +usually done with the iptables REDIRECT target; however, there are serious +limitations of that method. One of the major issues is that it actually +modifies the packets to change the destination address -- which might not be +acceptable in certain situations. (Think of proxying UDP for example: you won't +be able to find out the original destination address. Even in case of TCP +getting the original destination address is racy.) + +The 'TPROXY' target provides similar functionality without relying on NAT. Simply +add rules like this to the iptables ruleset above: + +# iptables -t mangle -A PREROUTING -p tcp --dport 80 -j TPROXY \ + --tproxy-mark 0x1/0x1 --on-port 50080 + +Note that for this to work you'll have to modify the proxy to enable (SOL_IP, +IP_TRANSPARENT) for the listening socket. + + +3. Iptables extensions +====================== + +To use tproxy you'll need to have the 'socket' and 'TPROXY' modules +compiled for iptables. A patched version of iptables is available +here: http://git.balabit.hu/?p=bazsi/iptables-tproxy.git + + +4. Application support +====================== + +4.1. Squid +---------- + +Squid 3.HEAD has support built-in. To use it, pass +'--enable-linux-netfilter' to configure and set the 'tproxy' option on +the HTTP listener you redirect traffic to with the TPROXY iptables +target. + +For more information please consult the following page on the Squid +wiki: http://wiki.squid-cache.org/Features/Tproxy4 -- cgit v1.1 From 36d9573928f9ab126d0089ead7ea5d2ab18fbfa9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jiri Kosina Date: Mon, 6 Oct 2008 02:51:09 -0400 Subject: Input: document i8042.debug in kernel-parameters.txt i8042.debug parameter was missing in Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt. Add it. Signed-off-by: Jiri Kosina Signed-off-by: Dmitry Torokhov --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index e7bea3e..88600fe 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -794,6 +794,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file Defaults to the default architecture's huge page size if not specified. + i8042.debug [HW] Toggle i8042 debug mode i8042.direct [HW] Put keyboard port into non-translated mode i8042.dumbkbd [HW] Pretend that controller can only read data from keyboard and cannot control its state -- cgit v1.1 From 6a421c1dc94b12923294a359822346f12492de5e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Aaron Carroll Date: Thu, 14 Aug 2008 18:17:15 +1000 Subject: block: update documentation for deadline fifo_batch tunable Update the description of fifo_batch to match the current implementation, and include a description of how to tune it. Signed-off-by: Aaron Carroll Signed-off-by: Jens Axboe --- Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt | 14 ++++++++++---- 1 file changed, 10 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt b/Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt index c23cab1..7257676 100644 --- a/Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt +++ b/Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt @@ -30,12 +30,18 @@ write_expire (in ms) Similar to read_expire mentioned above, but for writes. -fifo_batch +fifo_batch (number of requests) ---------- -When a read request expires its deadline, we must move some requests from -the sorted io scheduler list to the block device dispatch queue. fifo_batch -controls how many requests we move. +Requests are grouped into ``batches'' of a particular data direction (read or +write) which are serviced in increasing sector order. To limit extra seeking, +deadline expiries are only checked between batches. fifo_batch controls the +maximum number of requests per batch. + +This parameter tunes the balance between per-request latency and aggregate +throughput. When low latency is the primary concern, smaller is better (where +a value of 1 yields first-come first-served behaviour). Increasing fifo_batch +generally improves throughput, at the cost of latency variation. writes_starved (number of dispatches) -- cgit v1.1 From 710027a48ede75428cc68eaa8ae2269b1e356e2c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Randy Dunlap Date: Tue, 19 Aug 2008 20:13:11 +0200 Subject: Add some block/ source files to the kernel-api docbook. Fix kernel-doc notation in them as needed. Fix changed function parameter names. Fix typos/spellos. In comments, change REQ_SPECIAL to REQ_TYPE_SPECIAL and REQ_BLOCK_PC to REQ_TYPE_BLOCK_PC. Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Signed-off-by: Jens Axboe --- Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl | 4 ++++ 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl index b7b1482..f5696ba 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl @@ -364,6 +364,10 @@ X!Edrivers/pnp/system.c !Eblock/blk-barrier.c !Eblock/blk-tag.c !Iblock/blk-tag.c +!Eblock/blk-integrity.c +!Iblock/blktrace.c +!Iblock/genhd.c +!Eblock/genhd.c -- cgit v1.1 From 79eb014578b79fcfb9d9e7dc979d1316079220aa Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: FUJITA Tomonori Date: Thu, 18 Sep 2008 09:35:28 -0700 Subject: fix an example of scatterlists handling in DMA-API.txt This example isn't the proper way to handle scatterlists (can't handle sg chaining). Signed-off-by: FUJITA Tomonori Signed-off-by: Jens Axboe --- Documentation/DMA-API.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt index d8b63d1..b8e8646 100644 --- a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt +++ b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt @@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ With scatterlists, you use the resulting mapping like this: int i, count = dma_map_sg(dev, sglist, nents, direction); struct scatterlist *sg; - for (i = 0, sg = sglist; i < count; i++, sg++) { + for_each_sg(sglist, sg, count, i) { hw_address[i] = sg_dma_address(sg); hw_len[i] = sg_dma_len(sg); } -- cgit v1.1 From 3bbfe0596746e1590888a6e1e6a07583265238b7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Alexey Dobriyan Date: Fri, 10 Oct 2008 03:27:16 +0400 Subject: proc: remove kernel.maps_protect After commit 831830b5a2b5d413407adf380ef62fe17d6fcbf2 aka "restrict reading from /proc//maps to those who share ->mm or can ptrace" sysctl stopped being relevant because commit moved security checks from ->show time to ->start time (mm_for_maps()). Signed-off-by: Alexey Dobriyan Acked-by: Kees Cook --- Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt | 7 ------- 1 file changed, 7 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index f566ad9..63ed861 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt @@ -1332,13 +1332,6 @@ determine whether or not they are still functioning properly. Because the NMI watchdog shares registers with oprofile, by disabling the NMI watchdog, oprofile may have more registers to utilize. -maps_protect ------------- - -Enables/Disables the protection of the per-process proc entries "maps" and -"smaps". When enabled, the contents of these files are visible only to -readers that are allowed to ptrace() the given process. - msgmni ------ -- cgit v1.1 From b911e473d24633c19414b54b82b9ff0b1a2419d7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Randy Dunlap Date: Fri, 10 Oct 2008 08:22:44 +0200 Subject: doc/cdrom: Trvial documentation error, file not present The sbpcd tester program is not included in the kernel source tree, so remove the reference to it. Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Reported-by: Nick Warne Signed-off-by: Jens Axboe --- Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd | 3 +-- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd b/Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd index 91c0dcc..2c558cd 100644 --- a/Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd +++ b/Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd @@ -145,8 +145,7 @@ useful for reading photocds. To play an audio CD, you should first unmount and remove any data CDROM. Any of the CDROM player programs should then work (workman, -workbone, cdplayer, etc.). Lacking anything else, you could use the -cdtester program in Documentation/cdrom/sbpcd. +workbone, cdplayer, etc.). On a few drives, you can read digital audio directly using a program such as cdda2wav. The only types of drive which I've heard support -- cgit v1.1 From d45387d8bce2674fd21369a394933a02b8125878 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Cornelia Huck Date: Fri, 10 Oct 2008 21:33:07 +0200 Subject: [S390] cio: Update cio_ignore documentation. Add documentation for the new "purge" cio_ignore parameter. Signed-off-by: Cornelia Huck Signed-off-by: Martin Schwidefsky --- Documentation/s390/CommonIO | 8 +++++++- 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/s390/CommonIO b/Documentation/s390/CommonIO index bf0baa1..428e5c8 100644 --- a/Documentation/s390/CommonIO +++ b/Documentation/s390/CommonIO @@ -70,13 +70,19 @@ Command line parameters Note: While already known devices can be added to the list of devices to be ignored, there will be no effect on then. However, if such a device - disappears and then reappears, it will then be ignored. + disappears and then reappears, it will then be ignored. To make + known devices go away, you need the "purge" command (see below). For example, "echo add 0.0.a000-0.0.accc, 0.0.af00-0.0.afff > /proc/cio_ignore" will add 0.0.a000-0.0.accc and 0.0.af00-0.0.afff to the list of ignored devices. + You can remove already known but now ignored devices via + "echo purge > /proc/cio_ignore" + All devices ignored but still registered and not online (= not in use) + will be deregistered and thus removed from the system. + The devices can be specified either by bus id (0.x.abcd) or, for 2.4 backward compatibility, by the device number in hexadecimal (0xabcd or abcd). Device numbers given as 0xabcd will be interpreted as 0.0.abcd. -- cgit v1.1 From e4a1afaeb1d9ebc09f46d8b229ac96116974b1b8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Cornelia Huck Date: Fri, 10 Oct 2008 21:33:08 +0200 Subject: [S390] cio: Exorcise cio_msg= from documentation. Signed-off-by: Cornelia Huck Signed-off-by: Martin Schwidefsky --- Documentation/s390/CommonIO | 3 +-- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/s390/CommonIO b/Documentation/s390/CommonIO index 428e5c8..339207d 100644 --- a/Documentation/s390/CommonIO +++ b/Documentation/s390/CommonIO @@ -104,8 +104,7 @@ debugfs entries handling). - /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/cio_msg/sprintf - Various debug messages from the common I/O-layer, including messages - printed when cio_msg=yes. + Various debug messages from the common I/O-layer. - /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/cio_trace/hex_ascii Logs the calling of functions in the common I/O-layer and, if applicable, -- cgit v1.1 From 061b1bd394ca8628b7c24eb4658ba3535da4249a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Greg Kroah-Hartman Date: Wed, 24 Sep 2008 14:46:44 -0700 Subject: Staging: add TAINT_CRAP for all drivers/staging code We need to add a flag for all code that is in the drivers/staging/ directory to prevent all other kernel developers from worrying about issues here, and to notify users that the drivers might not be as good as they are normally used to. Based on code from Andreas Gruenbacher and Jeff Mahoney to provide a TAINT flag for the support level of a kernel module in the Novell enterprise kernel release. This is the kernel portion of this feature, the ability for the flag to be set needs to be done in the build process and will happen in a follow-up patch. Cc: Andreas Gruenbacher Cc: Jeff Mahoney Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt index e1ff0d9..bde799e 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt @@ -369,4 +369,5 @@ can be ORed together: 2 - A module was force loaded by insmod -f. Set by modutils >= 2.4.9 and module-init-tools. 4 - Unsafe SMP processors: SMP with CPUs not designed for SMP. + 64 - A module from drivers/staging was loaded. -- cgit v1.1 From 03010a3350301baac2154fa66de925ae2981b7e3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Theodore Ts'o Date: Fri, 10 Oct 2008 20:02:48 -0400 Subject: ext4: Rename ext4dev to ext4 The ext4 filesystem is getting stable enough that it's time to drop the "dev" prefix. Also remove the requirement for the TEST_FILESYS flag. Signed-off-by: "Theodore Ts'o" --- Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt index 2890579..74484e6 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt @@ -32,9 +32,9 @@ Mailing list: linux-ext4@vger.kernel.org you will need to merge your changes with the version from e2fsprogs 1.41.x. - - Create a new filesystem using the ext4dev filesystem type: + - Create a new filesystem using the ext4 filesystem type: - # mke2fs -t ext4dev /dev/hda1 + # mke2fs -t ext4 /dev/hda1 Or configure an existing ext3 filesystem to support extents and set the test_fs flag to indicate that it's ok for an in-development @@ -47,13 +47,13 @@ Mailing list: linux-ext4@vger.kernel.org # tune2fs -I 256 /dev/hda1 - (Note: we currently do not have tools to convert an ext4dev + (Note: we currently do not have tools to convert an ext4 filesystem back to ext3; so please do not do try this on production filesystems.) - Mounting: - # mount -t ext4dev /dev/hda1 /wherever + # mount -t ext4 /dev/hda1 /wherever - When comparing performance with other filesystems, remember that ext3/4 by default offers higher data integrity guarantees than most. -- cgit v1.1 From 5bf5683a33f3584da6eced480967c4f7e11515a8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Hidehiro Kawai Date: Fri, 10 Oct 2008 22:12:43 -0400 Subject: ext4: add an option to control error handling on file data If the journal doesn't abort when it gets an IO error in file data blocks, the file data corruption will spread silently. Because most of applications and commands do buffered writes without fsync(), they don't notice the IO error. It's scary for mission critical systems. On the other hand, if the journal aborts whenever it gets an IO error in file data blocks, the system will easily become inoperable. So this patch introduces a filesystem option to determine whether it aborts the journal or just call printk() when it gets an IO error in file data. If you mount an ext4 fs with data_err=abort option, it aborts on file data write error. If you mount it with data_err=ignore, it doesn't abort, just call printk(). data_err=ignore is the default. Here is the corresponding patch of the ext3 version: http://kerneltrap.org/mailarchive/linux-kernel/2008/9/9/3239374 Signed-off-by: Hidehiro Kawai Signed-off-by: Theodore Ts'o --- Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt | 5 +++++ 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt index 74484e6..eb154ef 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt @@ -223,6 +223,11 @@ errors=remount-ro(*) Remount the filesystem read-only on an error. errors=continue Keep going on a filesystem error. errors=panic Panic and halt the machine if an error occurs. +data_err=ignore(*) Just print an error message if an error occurs + in a file data buffer in ordered mode. +data_err=abort Abort the journal if an error occurs in a file + data buffer in ordered mode. + grpid Give objects the same group ID as their creator. bsdgroups -- cgit v1.1 From 9bed90c6a46f10c2d3052c0585057a5cb7392b92 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Florian Fainelli Date: Sat, 23 Aug 2008 18:54:37 +0200 Subject: Documentation: Document the RB532 specific kmac tag The Routerboard 532 bootloader passes the korina ethernet MAC adapter address to the kernel on the command line. Document this in the kernel-parameters file. Signed-off-by: Florian Fainelli Signed-off-by: Ralf Baechle --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 4 ++++ 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 329dcab..d0fff63 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -1014,6 +1014,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file (only serial suported for now) Format: [,baud] + kmac= [MIPS] korina ethernet MAC address. + Configure the RouterBoard 532 series on-chip + Ethernet adapter MAC address. + l2cr= [PPC] l3cr= [PPC] -- cgit v1.1 From 8f2b7b70600212f8c809a7bc2d17d33561842440 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab Date: Tue, 5 Aug 2008 10:11:25 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (8626): Add support for TCL tuner MF02GIP-5N-E Thanks to Sistema Fenix (http://www.sistemafenix.com.br/) and CDI Brasil (www.cdibrasil.com.br/) for sponsoring this development. Signed-off-by: Gilberto Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner index 0e23946..30bbdda 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner @@ -74,3 +74,4 @@ tuner=72 - Thomson FE6600 tuner=73 - Samsung TCPG 6121P30A tuner=75 - Philips TEA5761 FM Radio tuner=76 - Xceive 5000 tuner +tuner=77 - TCL tuner MF02GIP-5N-E -- cgit v1.1 From 7d341a6a52f115512d60b2de89b2ebde54da8eff Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab Date: Tue, 5 Aug 2008 10:14:13 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (8628): bttv: Add support for Encore ENLTV2-FM Thanks to Sistema Fenix (http://www.sistemafenix.com.br/) and CDI Brasil (www.cdibrasil.com.br/) for sponsoring this development. Signed-off-by: Gilberto Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv index f32efb6..60ba668 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv @@ -150,3 +150,4 @@ 149 -> Typhoon TV-Tuner PCI (50684) 150 -> Geovision GV-600 [008a:763c] 151 -> Kozumi KTV-01C +152 -> Encore ENL TV-FM-2 [1000:1801] -- cgit v1.1 From aef2d186e381816733fa15d67ad63bd99254cb9e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Steven Toth Date: Mon, 4 Aug 2008 21:39:53 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (8644): Add support for DViCO FusionHDTV DVB-T Dual Express Add support for the DViCO FusionHDTV DVB-T Dual Express card, based on work by Chris Pascoe and Stephen Backway. Signed-off-by: Steven Toth Signed-off-by: Anton Blanchard Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 index f0e613b..bccafd3 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 @@ -9,3 +9,4 @@ 8 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1700 [0070:8101] 9 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1400 [0070:8010] 10 -> DViCO FusionHDTV7 Dual Express [18ac:d618] + 11 -> DViCO FusionHDTV DVB-T Dual Express [18ac:db78] -- cgit v1.1 From 28531558006d5c525b19a207a7ab4ec0643191c9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Guennadi Liakhovetski Date: Fri, 29 Aug 2008 15:16:31 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (8799): soc-camera: add API documentation Signed-off-by: Guennadi Liakhovetski Acked-by: Hans Verkuil Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/soc-camera.txt | 120 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 120 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/video4linux/soc-camera.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/soc-camera.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/soc-camera.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..178ef3c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/soc-camera.txt @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ + Soc-Camera Subsystem + ==================== + +Terminology +----------- + +The following terms are used in this document: + - camera / camera device / camera sensor - a video-camera sensor chip, capable + of connecting to a variety of systems and interfaces, typically uses i2c for + control and configuration, and a parallel or a serial bus for data. + - camera host - an interface, to which a camera is connected. Typically a + specialised interface, present on many SoCs, e.g., PXA27x and PXA3xx, SuperH, + AVR32, i.MX27, i.MX31. + - camera host bus - a connection between a camera host and a camera. Can be + parallel or serial, consists of data and control lines, e.g., clock, vertical + and horizontal synchronization signals. + +Purpose of the soc-camera subsystem +----------------------------------- + +The soc-camera subsystem provides a unified API between camera host drivers and +camera sensor drivers. It implements a V4L2 interface to the user, currently +only the mmap method is supported. + +This subsystem has been written to connect drivers for System-on-Chip (SoC) +video capture interfaces with drivers for CMOS camera sensor chips to enable +the reuse of sensor drivers with various hosts. The subsystem has been designed +to support multiple camera host interfaces and multiple cameras per interface, +although most applications have only one camera sensor. + +Existing drivers +---------------- + +As of 2.6.27-rc4 there are two host drivers in the mainline: pxa_camera.c for +PXA27x SoCs and sh_mobile_ceu_camera.c for SuperH SoCs, and four sensor drivers: +mt9m001.c, mt9m111.c, mt9v022.c and a generic soc_camera_platform.c driver. This +list is not supposed to be updated, look for more examples in your tree. + +Camera host API +--------------- + +A host camera driver is registered using the + +soc_camera_host_register(struct soc_camera_host *); + +function. The host object can be initialized as follows: + +static struct soc_camera_host pxa_soc_camera_host = { + .drv_name = PXA_CAM_DRV_NAME, + .ops = &pxa_soc_camera_host_ops, +}; + +All camera host methods are passed in a struct soc_camera_host_ops: + +static struct soc_camera_host_ops pxa_soc_camera_host_ops = { + .owner = THIS_MODULE, + .add = pxa_camera_add_device, + .remove = pxa_camera_remove_device, + .suspend = pxa_camera_suspend, + .resume = pxa_camera_resume, + .set_fmt_cap = pxa_camera_set_fmt_cap, + .try_fmt_cap = pxa_camera_try_fmt_cap, + .init_videobuf = pxa_camera_init_videobuf, + .reqbufs = pxa_camera_reqbufs, + .poll = pxa_camera_poll, + .querycap = pxa_camera_querycap, + .try_bus_param = pxa_camera_try_bus_param, + .set_bus_param = pxa_camera_set_bus_param, +}; + +.add and .remove methods are called when a sensor is attached to or detached +from the host, apart from performing host-internal tasks they shall also call +sensor driver's .init and .release methods respectively. .suspend and .resume +methods implement host's power-management functionality and its their +responsibility to call respective sensor's methods. .try_bus_param and +.set_bus_param are used to negotiate physical connection parameters between the +host and the sensor. .init_videobuf is called by soc-camera core when a +video-device is opened, further video-buffer management is implemented completely +by the specific camera host driver. The rest of the methods are called from +respective V4L2 operations. + +Camera API +---------- + +Sensor drivers can use struct soc_camera_link, typically provided by the +platform, and used to specify to which camera host bus the sensor is connected, +and arbitrarily provide platform .power and .reset methods for the camera. +soc_camera_device_register() and soc_camera_device_unregister() functions are +used to add a sensor driver to or remove one from the system. The registration +function takes a pointer to struct soc_camera_device as the only parameter. +This struct can be initialized as follows: + + /* link to driver operations */ + icd->ops = &mt9m001_ops; + /* link to the underlying physical (e.g., i2c) device */ + icd->control = &client->dev; + /* window geometry */ + icd->x_min = 20; + icd->y_min = 12; + icd->x_current = 20; + icd->y_current = 12; + icd->width_min = 48; + icd->width_max = 1280; + icd->height_min = 32; + icd->height_max = 1024; + icd->y_skip_top = 1; + /* camera bus ID, typically obtained from platform data */ + icd->iface = icl->bus_id; + +struct soc_camera_ops provides .probe and .remove methods, which are called by +the soc-camera core, when a camera is matched against or removed from a camera +host bus, .init, .release, .suspend, and .resume are called from the camera host +driver as discussed above. Other members of this struct provide respective V4L2 +functionality. + +struct soc_camera_device also links to an array of struct soc_camera_data_format, +listing pixel formats, supported by the camera. + +-- +Author: Guennadi Liakhovetski -- cgit v1.1 From 4c56b04af67211c4311dd9961ce5aba86b96ba9c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Steven Toth Date: Tue, 12 Aug 2008 13:30:03 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (8807): Add DVB support for the Leadtek Winfast PxDVR3200 H This patch is on behalf of Stephen Backway , and represents two patches I received (and some subsequent whitespace cleanup I had due to how I pulled the patches). From the original author: a) Add DVB support for the Leadtek Winfast PxDVR3200 H. b) The tuner callback previously checked the command 3 times: 1) To see if it was the XC2028_RESET_CLK 2) To see if it was not the XC2028_RESET_TUNER 3) To see if it was the XC2028_RESET_TUNER This patch removes the third check. Signed-off-by: Steven Toth Signed-off-by: Stephen Backway Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 index bccafd3..64823cc 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 @@ -10,3 +10,4 @@ 9 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1400 [0070:8010] 10 -> DViCO FusionHDTV7 Dual Express [18ac:d618] 11 -> DViCO FusionHDTV DVB-T Dual Express [18ac:db78] + 12 -> Leadtek Winfast PxDVR3200 H [107d:6681] -- cgit v1.1 From d654dca7bca79dd3981267e398b6a7df34d3d047 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean-Francois Moine Date: Sat, 6 Sep 2008 04:18:48 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (8927): gspca: PAC 207 webcam 093a:2476 added. Signed-off-by: Jean-Francois Moine Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index 9a3e4d7..89fed5c 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -181,6 +181,7 @@ pac207 093a:2468 PAC207 pac207 093a:2470 Genius GF112 pac207 093a:2471 Genius VideoCam ge111 pac207 093a:2472 Genius VideoCam ge110 +pac207 093a:2476 Genius e-Messenger 112 pac7311 093a:2600 PAC7311 Typhoon pac7311 093a:2601 Philips SPC 610 NC pac7311 093a:2603 PAC7312 -- cgit v1.1 From 7b537391dde35d7f412417a95f02f89af08dd2d3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean-Francois Moine Date: Sun, 7 Sep 2008 11:56:49 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (8929): gspca: sonixj webcam 0458:702e added. Signed-off-by: Jean-Francois Moine Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index 89fed5c..308ce4e 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -42,6 +42,7 @@ zc3xx 0458:7007 Genius VideoCam V2 zc3xx 0458:700c Genius VideoCam V3 zc3xx 0458:700f Genius VideoCam Web V2 sonixj 0458:7025 Genius Eye 311Q +sonixj 0458:702e Genius Slim 310 NB sonixj 045e:00f5 MicroSoft VX3000 sonixj 045e:00f7 MicroSoft VX1000 ov519 045e:028c Micro$oft xbox cam -- cgit v1.1 From a50f4a444a14a116e2eb077e01c2eaf58ddb7c6a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Douglas Schilling Landgraf Date: Mon, 8 Sep 2008 03:23:55 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (8936): em28xx-cards: Add vendor/product id for EM2820_BOARD_PROLINK_PLAYTV_USB2 Added vendor/product id for EM2820_BOARD_PROLINK_PLAYTV_USB2 Signed-off-by: Douglas Schilling Landgraf Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx index 53449cb..187cc48 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ 0 -> Unknown EM2800 video grabber (em2800) [eb1a:2800] - 1 -> Unknown EM2750/28xx video grabber (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2820,eb1a:2821,eb1a:2860,eb1a:2861,eb1a:2870,eb1a:2881,eb1a:2883] + 1 -> Unknown EM2750/28xx video grabber (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2820,eb1a:2860,eb1a:2861,eb1a:2870,eb1a:2881,eb1a:2883] 2 -> Terratec Cinergy 250 USB (em2820/em2840) [0ccd:0036] 3 -> Pinnacle PCTV USB 2 (em2820/em2840) [2304:0208] 4 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB 2 (em2820/em2840) [2040:4200,2040:4201] @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ 11 -> Terratec Hybrid XS (em2880) [0ccd:0042] 12 -> Kworld PVR TV 2800 RF (em2820/em2840) 13 -> Terratec Prodigy XS (em2880) [0ccd:0047] - 14 -> Pixelview Prolink PlayTV USB 2.0 (em2820/em2840) + 14 -> Pixelview Prolink PlayTV USB 2.0 (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2821] 15 -> V-Gear PocketTV (em2800) 16 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 950 (em2883) [2040:6513,2040:6517,2040:651b,2040:651f] 17 -> Pinnacle PCTV HD Pro Stick (em2880) [2304:0227] -- cgit v1.1 From 5bd1b66359437864e6b46420ba6770c2b1c4362c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Steven Toth Date: Thu, 4 Sep 2008 01:17:33 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (8987): cx88: Add support for the Hauppauge HVR4000 and HVR4000-LITE (S2) boards Adding support for Hauppauge's cx88 S2 based products, based on the cx24116 DVB-S2 demodulator. Signed-off-by: Steven Toth Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 index 7cf5685..c95a2fb 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 @@ -66,3 +66,5 @@ 65 -> DViCO FusionHDTV 7 Gold [18ac:d610] 66 -> Prolink Pixelview MPEG 8000GT [1554:4935] 67 -> Kworld PlusTV HD PCI 120 (ATSC 120) [17de:08c1] + 68 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR4000 DVB-S/S2/T/Hybrid [0070:6900,0070:6904,0070:6902] + 69 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR4000(Lite) DVB-S/S2 [0070:6905,0070:6906] -- cgit v1.1 From 2cf801e3e38f649d25fe3b4e236976f45e26289f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Steven Toth Date: Mon, 8 Sep 2008 12:07:06 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (8990): S2API: DVB-S/S2 voltage selection bug fix Thanks to Hans Werner for finding the problem. Signed-off-by: Steven Toth Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 index c95a2fb..b51485c 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 @@ -68,3 +68,4 @@ 67 -> Kworld PlusTV HD PCI 120 (ATSC 120) [17de:08c1] 68 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR4000 DVB-S/S2/T/Hybrid [0070:6900,0070:6904,0070:6902] 69 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR4000(Lite) DVB-S/S2 [0070:6905,0070:6906] + 70 -> TeVii S460 DVB-S/S2 [D460:9022] -- cgit v1.1 From 5bacea3b9db1b88eeae5427f41efe65138f056da Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Steven Toth Date: Mon, 22 Sep 2008 01:45:01 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9021): S2API: Add Kconf dependency Patch provided by Darron Broad Signed-off-by: Steven Toth Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 index b51485c..8fea297 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 @@ -69,3 +69,5 @@ 68 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR4000 DVB-S/S2/T/Hybrid [0070:6900,0070:6904,0070:6902] 69 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR4000(Lite) DVB-S/S2 [0070:6905,0070:6906] 70 -> TeVii S460 DVB-S/S2 [D460:9022] + 71 -> Omicom SS4 DVB-S/S2 PCI [A044:2011] + 72 -> TBS 8920 DVB-S/S2 [8920:8888] -- cgit v1.1 From 301e9d64e0bb00c557d9385474cc9d79db0485d9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: hermann pitton Date: Sun, 14 Sep 2008 17:49:14 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9028): saa7134: add support for the triple Asus Tiger 3in1 after looking it up, all rants about the 80 columns restriction seem to be in vain. After changing the card's name it are now "only" seven new lines in the tiny DVB-T/DVB-S switch function. saa7130/34: v4l2 driver version 0.2.14 loaded saa7133[0]: found at 0000:02:08.0, rev: 209, irq: 18, latency: 32, mmio: 0xfdef7000 saa7133[0]: subsystem: 1043:4878, board: Asus Tiger 3in1 [card=147,autodetected] saa7133[0]: board init: gpio is 200000 tuner' 2-004b: chip found @ 0x96 (saa7133[0]) saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom 00: 43 10 78 48 54 20 1c 00 43 43 a9 1c 55 d2 b2 92 saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom 10: ff ff ff 0f ff 20 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom 20: 01 40 01 02 03 01 01 03 08 ff 00 d7 ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom 30: ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom 40: ff 28 00 c2 96 16 03 02 c0 1c ff ff ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom 50: ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom 60: ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom 70: ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom 80: ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom 90: ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom a0: ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom b0: ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom c0: ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom d0: ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom e0: ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c eeprom f0: ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff saa7133[0]: i2c scan: found device @ 0x10 [???] saa7133[0]: i2c scan: found device @ 0x16 [???] saa7133[0]: i2c scan: found device @ 0x1c [???] saa7133[0]: i2c scan: found device @ 0x96 [???] saa7133[0]: i2c scan: found device @ 0xa0 [eeprom] tda829x 2-004b: setting tuner address to 61 tda829x 2-004b: type set to tda8290+75a saa7133[0]: registered device video0 [v4l2] saa7133[0]: registered device vbi0 saa7133[0]: registered device radio0 DVB: registering new adapter (saa7133[0]) DVB: registering frontend 0 (Philips TDA10086 DVB-S)... The board init gpio is 0x0, 0x200000 is from previously unloading with antenna_switch = 1. It needs firmware for the tda10046 and analog sound needs saa7134-alsa. I have support for one more board and need to fix the first revision of the Asus Tiger DVB-T hybrid. DVB-T currently hangs on the male radio antenna input, also some small other stuff. Please report any issues with this patch, the next are depending on this one. saa7134: add support for the triple Asus Tiger 3in1 Signed-off-by: Hermann Pitton Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 | 3 ++- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 | 1 + 2 files changed, 3 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 index 8fea297..075650c 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 @@ -68,6 +68,7 @@ 67 -> Kworld PlusTV HD PCI 120 (ATSC 120) [17de:08c1] 68 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR4000 DVB-S/S2/T/Hybrid [0070:6900,0070:6904,0070:6902] 69 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR4000(Lite) DVB-S/S2 [0070:6905,0070:6906] - 70 -> TeVii S460 DVB-S/S2 [D460:9022] + 70 -> TeVii S460 DVB-S/S2 [d460:9022] 71 -> Omicom SS4 DVB-S/S2 PCI [A044:2011] 72 -> TBS 8920 DVB-S/S2 [8920:8888] + 73 -> TeVii S420 DVB-S [d420:9022] diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 index 39868af..c121f44 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 @@ -145,3 +145,4 @@ 144 -> Beholder BeholdTV M6 Extra [5ace:6193] 145 -> AVerMedia MiniPCI DVB-T Hybrid M103 [1461:f636] 146 -> ASUSTeK P7131 Analog +147 -> Asus Tiger 3in1 [1043:4878] -- cgit v1.1 From bf1ece6a4f30f05b227f2ec59fa0d45b5db186d2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab Date: Thu, 26 Jun 2008 17:03:00 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9059): saa7134: Add support for Encore version 5.3 board Thanks to Sistema Fenix (http://www.sistemafenix.com.br/) for sponsoring this development. Signed-off-by: Gilberto Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 index c121f44..1438364 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 @@ -146,3 +146,4 @@ 145 -> AVerMedia MiniPCI DVB-T Hybrid M103 [1461:f636] 146 -> ASUSTeK P7131 Analog 147 -> Asus Tiger 3in1 [1043:4878] +148 -> Encore ENLTV-FM v5.3 [1a7f:2008] -- cgit v1.1 From 36f6bb97caa772d7dc42250db74253e0867a444a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab Date: Thu, 26 Jun 2008 17:03:00 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9060): saa7134: Add support for Avermedia PCI pure analog (M135A) Thanks to Sistema Fenix (http://www.sistemafenix.com.br/) for sponsoring this development. Signed-off-by: Gilberto Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 index 1438364..2023c40 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 @@ -147,3 +147,4 @@ 146 -> ASUSTeK P7131 Analog 147 -> Asus Tiger 3in1 [1043:4878] 148 -> Encore ENLTV-FM v5.3 [1a7f:2008] +149 -> Avermedia PCI pure analog (M135A) [1461:f11d] -- cgit v1.1 From 9b0001913983de65af17eee8baf02283160f5a69 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab Date: Thu, 26 Jun 2008 17:03:00 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9061): saa7134: Add support for Real Audio 220 Thanks to Sistema Fenix (http://www.sistemafenix.com.br/) for sponsoring this development. Signed-off-by: Gilberto Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 index 2023c40..aa06151 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 @@ -146,5 +146,6 @@ 145 -> AVerMedia MiniPCI DVB-T Hybrid M103 [1461:f636] 146 -> ASUSTeK P7131 Analog 147 -> Asus Tiger 3in1 [1043:4878] +147 -> Zogis Real Angel 220 148 -> Encore ENLTV-FM v5.3 [1a7f:2008] 149 -> Avermedia PCI pure analog (M135A) [1461:f11d] -- cgit v1.1 From a31d2bb773f23f55cc6713f2d1a9b60977bb8f89 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab Date: Mon, 29 Sep 2008 12:08:29 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9062): Add support for Prolink Pixelview Global Extreme Thanks to Sidney Matias for getting GPIO values and testing on this device. Cc: Sidney Matias Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 index 075650c..50d0b1c 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 @@ -72,3 +72,4 @@ 71 -> Omicom SS4 DVB-S/S2 PCI [A044:2011] 72 -> TBS 8920 DVB-S/S2 [8920:8888] 73 -> TeVii S420 DVB-S [d420:9022] + 74 -> Prolink Pixelview Global Extreme [1554:4976] -- cgit v1.1 From f689d9083a3a46ae3801c37d0dbcb170fc6a9608 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Adam Glover Date: Tue, 6 May 2008 03:20:27 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9063): Add ADS Tech Instant HDTV PCI support Add PCI ID and device specific tables for ADS Tech Instant HDTV. [mchehab@redhat.com: make checkpatch happy and fix merge conflicts] Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 index aa06151..727b5f2 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 @@ -146,6 +146,7 @@ 145 -> AVerMedia MiniPCI DVB-T Hybrid M103 [1461:f636] 146 -> ASUSTeK P7131 Analog 147 -> Asus Tiger 3in1 [1043:4878] -147 -> Zogis Real Angel 220 148 -> Encore ENLTV-FM v5.3 [1a7f:2008] 149 -> Avermedia PCI pure analog (M135A) [1461:f11d] +150 -> Zogis Real Angel 220 +151 -> ADS Tech Instant HDTV [1421:0380] -- cgit v1.1 From 9f4c0617edcc676a5281c04bf48a305b80dd5397 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean-Francois Moine Date: Mon, 22 Sep 2008 02:57:56 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9081): gspca: Bad webcam name of 046d:092f in documentation. Signed-off-by: Jean-Francois Moine Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index 308ce4e..a845667 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ spca561 046d:092b Labtec Webcam Plus spca561 046d:092c Logitech QC chat Elch2 spca561 046d:092d Logitech QC Elch2 spca561 046d:092e Logitech QC Elch2 -spca561 046d:092f Logitech QC Elch2 +spca561 046d:092f Logitech QuickCam Express Plus sunplus 046d:0960 Logitech ClickSmart 420 sunplus 0471:0322 Philips DMVC1300K zc3xx 0471:0325 Philips SPC 200 NC -- cgit v1.1 From 97076859590ada76dc4bee46b6ccad86d89e82cf Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Frank Zago Date: Mon, 29 Sep 2008 06:59:36 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9088): gspca: New subdriver 'finepix' added. Signed-off-by: Frank Zago Signed-off-by: Jean-Francois Moine Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt | 23 +++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 23 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index a845667..04c612e 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -97,6 +97,29 @@ sunplus 04a5:3003 Benq DC 1300 sunplus 04a5:3008 Benq DC 1500 sunplus 04a5:300a Benq DC 3410 spca500 04a5:300c Benq DC 1016 +finepix 04cb:0104 Fujifilm FinePix 4800 +finepix 04cb:0109 Fujifilm FinePix A202 +finepix 04cb:010b Fujifilm FinePix A203 +finepix 04cb:010f Fujifilm FinePix A204 +finepix 04cb:0111 Fujifilm FinePix A205 +finepix 04cb:0113 Fujifilm FinePix A210 +finepix 04cb:0115 Fujifilm FinePix A303 +finepix 04cb:0117 Fujifilm FinePix A310 +finepix 04cb:0119 Fujifilm FinePix F401 +finepix 04cb:011b Fujifilm FinePix F402 +finepix 04cb:011d Fujifilm FinePix F410 +finepix 04cb:0121 Fujifilm FinePix F601 +finepix 04cb:0123 Fujifilm FinePix F700 +finepix 04cb:0125 Fujifilm FinePix M603 +finepix 04cb:0127 Fujifilm FinePix S300 +finepix 04cb:0129 Fujifilm FinePix S304 +finepix 04cb:012b Fujifilm FinePix S500 +finepix 04cb:012d Fujifilm FinePix S602 +finepix 04cb:012f Fujifilm FinePix S700 +finepix 04cb:0131 Fujifilm FinePix unknown model +finepix 04cb:013b Fujifilm FinePix unknown model +finepix 04cb:013d Fujifilm FinePix unknown model +finepix 04cb:013f Fujifilm FinePix F420 sunplus 04f1:1001 JVC GC A50 spca561 04fc:0561 Flexcam 100 sunplus 04fc:500c Sunplus CA500C -- cgit v1.1 From c109f8168f259ea1f1ab7009c6b99dbe8ea0e2b2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Erik Andren Date: Wed, 1 Oct 2008 04:51:53 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9091): gspca: Subdriver m5602 (ALi) added. This patch adds support for the ALi m5602 usb bridge and is based on the gspca framework. It contains code for communicating with 5 different sensors: OmniVision OV9650, Pixel Plus PO1030, Samsung S5K83A, S5K4AA and finally Micron MT9M111. Signed-off-by: Erik Andren Signed-off-by: Jean-Francois Moine [mchehab@redhat.com: fix m5602/Makefile] [mchehab@redhat.com: extern debug caused conflicts. Renamed to m5602_debug] Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt | 1 + Documentation/video4linux/m5602.txt | 12 ++++++++++++ 2 files changed, 13 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/video4linux/m5602.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index 04c612e..004818f 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ The modules are: xxxx vend:prod ---- spca501 0000:0000 MystFromOri Unknow Camera +m5602 0402:5602 ALi Video Camera Controller spca501 040a:0002 Kodak DVC-325 spca500 040a:0300 Kodak EZ200 zc3xx 041e:041e Creative WebCam Live! diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/m5602.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/m5602.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4450ab1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/m5602.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +This document describes the ALi m5602 bridge connected +to the following supported sensors: +OmniVision OV9650, +Samsung s5k83a, +Samsung s5k4aa, +Micron mt9m111, +Pixel plus PO1030 + +This driver mimics the windows drivers, which have a braindead implementation sending bayer-encoded frames at VGA resolution. +In a perfect world we should be able to reprogram the m5602 and the connected sensor in hardware instead, supporting a range of resolutions and pixelformats + +Anyway, have fun and please report any bugs to m560x-driver-devel@lists.sourceforge.net -- cgit v1.1 From 028165a336ab7d097d23e2af936dea373e3d3afc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Hermann Pitton Date: Sat, 4 Oct 2008 21:37:36 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9113): saa7134: fixes for the Asus Tiger Revision 1.00 In opposite to the P7131 Dual this early OEM card has a male radio antenna connector and also no remote. We currently switch the DVB-T RF feed to the radio input, like on the P7131 with female radio connector used also for DVB-T and should improve this. Signed-off-by: Hermann Pitton Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 index 727b5f2..dc67eef 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ 75 -> AVerMedia AVerTVHD MCE A180 [1461:1044] 76 -> SKNet MonsterTV Mobile [1131:4ee9] 77 -> Pinnacle PCTV 40i/50i/110i (saa7133) [11bd:002e] - 78 -> ASUSTeK P7131 Dual [1043:4862,1043:4857] + 78 -> ASUSTeK P7131 Dual [1043:4862] 79 -> Sedna/MuchTV PC TV Cardbus TV/Radio (ITO25 Rev:2B) 80 -> ASUS Digimatrix TV [1043:0210] 81 -> Philips Tiger reference design [1131:2018] @@ -150,3 +150,4 @@ 149 -> Avermedia PCI pure analog (M135A) [1461:f11d] 150 -> Zogis Real Angel 220 151 -> ADS Tech Instant HDTV [1421:0380] +152 -> Asus Tiger Rev:1.00 [1043:4857] -- cgit v1.1 From 57f51dbc45f65f7ee1e8c8f77200bb8000e3e271 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Oleg Roitburd Date: Wed, 8 Oct 2008 06:48:08 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9186): Added support for Prof 7300 DVB-S/S2 cards Added support for Prof 7300 DVB-S/S2 card. The card based on cx24116 demodulator. Signed-off-by: Oleg Roitburd Signed-off-by: Steven Toth [mchehab@redhat.com: fixed CARDLIST.cx88 entry] Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 index 50d0b1c..a5227e3 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 @@ -73,3 +73,4 @@ 72 -> TBS 8920 DVB-S/S2 [8920:8888] 73 -> TeVii S420 DVB-S [d420:9022] 74 -> Prolink Pixelview Global Extreme [1554:4976] + 75 -> PROF 7300 DVB-S/S2 [B033:3033] -- cgit v1.1 From 5b70a097052fff3831d8b94541452e7c29426777 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: John Rigby Date: Tue, 7 Oct 2008 13:00:18 -0600 Subject: powerpc: 83xx: pci: Remove need for get_immrbase from mpc83xx_add_bridge. Modify mpc83xx_add_bridge to get config space register base address from the device tree instead of immr + hardcoded offset. 83xx pci nodes have this change: register properties now contain two address length tuples: First is the pci bridge register base, this has always been there. Second is the config base, this is new. This is documented in dts-bindings/fsl/83xx-512x-pci.txt The changes accomplish these things: mpc83xx_add_bridge no longer needs to call get_immrbase it uses hard coded addresses if the second register value is missing Signed-off-by: John Rigby Signed-off-by: Kumar Gala --- .../powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/83xx-512x-pci.txt | 40 ++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 40 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/83xx-512x-pci.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/83xx-512x-pci.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/83xx-512x-pci.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..35a4653 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/83xx-512x-pci.txt @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +* Freescale 83xx and 512x PCI bridges + +Freescale 83xx and 512x SOCs include the same pci bridge core. + +83xx/512x specific notes: +- reg: should contain two address length tuples + The first is for the internal pci bridge registers + The second is for the pci config space access registers + +Example (MPC8313ERDB) + pci0: pci@e0008500 { + cell-index = <1>; + interrupt-map-mask = <0xf800 0x0 0x0 0x7>; + interrupt-map = < + /* IDSEL 0x0E -mini PCI */ + 0x7000 0x0 0x0 0x1 &ipic 18 0x8 + 0x7000 0x0 0x0 0x2 &ipic 18 0x8 + 0x7000 0x0 0x0 0x3 &ipic 18 0x8 + 0x7000 0x0 0x0 0x4 &ipic 18 0x8 + + /* IDSEL 0x0F - PCI slot */ + 0x7800 0x0 0x0 0x1 &ipic 17 0x8 + 0x7800 0x0 0x0 0x2 &ipic 18 0x8 + 0x7800 0x0 0x0 0x3 &ipic 17 0x8 + 0x7800 0x0 0x0 0x4 &ipic 18 0x8>; + interrupt-parent = <&ipic>; + interrupts = <66 0x8>; + bus-range = <0x0 0x0>; + ranges = <0x02000000 0x0 0x90000000 0x90000000 0x0 0x10000000 + 0x42000000 0x0 0x80000000 0x80000000 0x0 0x10000000 + 0x01000000 0x0 0x00000000 0xe2000000 0x0 0x00100000>; + clock-frequency = <66666666>; + #interrupt-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <2>; + #address-cells = <3>; + reg = <0xe0008500 0x100 /* internal registers */ + 0xe0008300 0x8>; /* config space access registers */ + compatible = "fsl,mpc8349-pci"; + device_type = "pci"; + }; -- cgit v1.1 From b56c2768d28425783f895971854577f412ae486f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Timur Tabi Date: Fri, 10 Oct 2008 11:52:31 -0500 Subject: powerpc: document the "fsl,ssi-dma-channel" compatible property The "fsl,ssi-dma-channel" compatible property is used to specify a DMA channel on the Freescale Elo DMA controller that should be used exclusively by the Freescale SSI audio controller. When a property is marked as such, the Elo DMA driver will ignore it, and so it will be available for the sound drivers. Signed-off-by: Timur Tabi Signed-off-by: Kumar Gala --- Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/dma.txt | 13 +++++++++++-- Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/ssi.txt | 20 ++++++++++++++------ 2 files changed, 25 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/dma.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/dma.txt index 86826df..cc45311 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/dma.txt +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/dma.txt @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ Required properties: - compatible : compatible list, contains 2 entries, first is "fsl,CHIP-dma-channel", where CHIP is the processor (mpc8349, mpc8350, etc.) and the second is - "fsl,elo-dma-channel" + "fsl,elo-dma-channel". However, see note below. - reg : - cell-index : dma channel index starts at 0. @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Required properties: - compatible : compatible list, contains 2 entries, first is "fsl,CHIP-dma-channel", where CHIP is the processor (mpc8540, mpc8560, etc.) and the second is - "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel" + "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel". However, see note below. - cell-index : dma channel index starts at 0. - reg : - interrupts : @@ -125,3 +125,12 @@ Example: interrupts = <17 2>; }; }; + +Note on DMA channel compatible properties: The compatible property must say +"fsl,elo-dma-channel" or "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel" to be used by the Elo DMA +driver (fsldma). Any DMA channel used by fsldma cannot be used by another +DMA driver, such as the SSI sound drivers for the MPC8610. Therefore, any DMA +channel that should be used for another driver should not use +"fsl,elo-dma-channel" or "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel". For the SSI drivers, for +example, the compatible property should be "fsl,ssi-dma-channel". See ssi.txt +for more information. diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/ssi.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/ssi.txt index 5d98413..a2d9639 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/ssi.txt +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/ssi.txt @@ -24,12 +24,12 @@ Required properties: "rj-master" - r.j., SSI is clock master "ac97-slave" - AC97 mode, SSI is clock slave "ac97-master" - AC97 mode, SSI is clock master -- fsl,playback-dma: phandle to a DMA node for the DMA channel to use for - playback of audio. This is typically dictated by SOC - design. See the notes below. -- fsl,capture-dma: phandle to a DMA node for the DMA channel to use for - capture (recording) of audio. This is typically dictated - by SOC design. See the notes below. +- fsl,playback-dma: phandle to a node for the DMA channel to use for + playback of audio. This is typically dictated by SOC + design. See the notes below. +- fsl,capture-dma: phandle to a node for the DMA channel to use for + capture (recording) of audio. This is typically dictated + by SOC design. See the notes below. Optional properties: - codec-handle : phandle to a 'codec' node that defines an audio @@ -51,3 +51,11 @@ playback and DMA channel 1 for capture. SSI2 must use DMA channel 2 for playback and DMA channel 3 for capture. The developer can choose which DMA controller to use, but the channels themselves are hard-wired. The purpose of these two properties is to represent this hardware design. + +The device tree nodes for the DMA channels that are referenced by +"fsl,playback-dma" and "fsl,capture-dma" must be marked as compatible with +"fsl,ssi-dma-channel". The SOC-specific compatible string (e.g. +"fsl,mpc8610-dma-channel") can remain. If these nodes are left as +"fsl,elo-dma-channel" or "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel", then the generic Elo DMA +drivers (fsldma) will attempt to use them, and it will conflict with the +sound drivers. -- cgit v1.1 From 02f11f392434656f00fdcc8c51348d52bd39afe8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Adrian Bunk Date: Mon, 13 Oct 2008 10:31:59 +0100 Subject: coldfire: scheduled SERIAL_COLDFIRE removal This patch contains the scheduled removal of the obsolete SERIAL_COLDFIRE driver. Signed-off-by: Adrian Bunk Signed-off-by: Alan Cox Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt | 8 -------- 1 file changed, 8 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index 3d2d0c2..cc8093c 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt @@ -287,14 +287,6 @@ Who: Glauber Costa --------------------------- -What: old style serial driver for ColdFire (CONFIG_SERIAL_COLDFIRE) -When: 2.6.28 -Why: This driver still uses the old interface and has been replaced - by CONFIG_SERIAL_MCF. -Who: Sebastian Siewior - ---------------------------- - What: /sys/o2cb symlink When: January 2010 Why: /sys/fs/o2cb is the proper location for this information - /sys/o2cb -- cgit v1.1 From 9c6102d446985bca9c426cb2d9b478ed21d2b024 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Elias Oltmanns Date: Mon, 13 Oct 2008 21:39:50 +0200 Subject: ata: Add documentation for hard disk shock protection interface (v3) Put some information (and pointers to more) into the kernel's doc tree, describing briefly the interface to the kernel's disk head unloading facility. Information about how to set up a complete shock protection system under GNU/Linux can be found on the web and is referenced accordingly. v3: Here is some final polish including various spelling corrections pointed out by Grant Grundler and Peter Moulder. Also, I have added some information about the timing constraints related to disk head parking. The patch looks more impressive than it really is and I think it would be alright just to incorporate it into the original patch so as not to clutter up the git log. Signed-off-by: Elias Oltmanns Cc: Jeff Garzik Cc: Randy Dunlap Cc: Tejun Heo Signed-off-by: Bartlomiej Zolnierkiewicz --- Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.txt | 149 ++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 149 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.txt b/Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0e6ba26 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.txt @@ -0,0 +1,149 @@ +Hard disk shock protection +========================== + +Author: Elias Oltmanns +Last modified: 2008-10-03 + + +0. Contents +----------- + +1. Intro +2. The interface +3. References +4. CREDITS + + +1. Intro +-------- + +ATA/ATAPI-7 specifies the IDLE IMMEDIATE command with unload feature. +Issuing this command should cause the drive to switch to idle mode and +unload disk heads. This feature is being used in modern laptops in +conjunction with accelerometers and appropriate software to implement +a shock protection facility. The idea is to stop all I/O operations on +the internal hard drive and park its heads on the ramp when critical +situations are anticipated. The desire to have such a feature +available on GNU/Linux systems has been the original motivation to +implement a generic disk head parking interface in the Linux kernel. +Please note, however, that other components have to be set up on your +system in order to get disk shock protection working (see +section 3. References below for pointers to more information about +that). + + +2. The interface +---------------- + +For each ATA device, the kernel exports the file +block/*/device/unload_heads in sysfs (here assumed to be mounted under +/sys). Access to /sys/block/*/device/unload_heads is denied with +-EOPNOTSUPP if the device does not support the unload feature. +Otherwise, writing an integer value to this file will take the heads +of the respective drive off the platter and block all I/O operations +for the specified number of milliseconds. When the timeout expires and +no further disk head park request has been issued in the meantime, +normal operation will be resumed. The maximal value accepted for a +timeout is 30000 milliseconds. Exceeding this limit will return +-EOVERFLOW, but heads will be parked anyway and the timeout will be +set to 30 seconds. However, you can always change a timeout to any +value between 0 and 30000 by issuing a subsequent head park request +before the timeout of the previous one has expired. In particular, the +total timeout can exceed 30 seconds and, more importantly, you can +cancel a previously set timeout and resume normal operation +immediately by specifying a timeout of 0. Values below -2 are rejected +with -EINVAL (see below for the special meaning of -1 and -2). If the +timeout specified for a recent head park request has not yet expired, +reading from /sys/block/*/device/unload_heads will report the number +of milliseconds remaining until normal operation will be resumed; +otherwise, reading the unload_heads attribute will return 0. + +For example, do the following in order to park the heads of drive +/dev/sda and stop all I/O operations for five seconds: + +# echo 5000 > /sys/block/sda/device/unload_heads + +A simple + +# cat /sys/block/sda/device/unload_heads + +will show you how many milliseconds are left before normal operation +will be resumed. + +A word of caution: The fact that the interface operates on a basis of +milliseconds may raise expectations that cannot be satisfied in +reality. In fact, the ATA specs clearly state that the time for an +unload operation to complete is vendor specific. The hint in ATA-7 +that this will typically be within 500 milliseconds apparently has +been dropped in ATA-8. + +There is a technical detail of this implementation that may cause some +confusion and should be discussed here. When a head park request has +been issued to a device successfully, all I/O operations on the +controller port this device is attached to will be deferred. That is +to say, any other device that may be connected to the same port will +be affected too. The only exception is that a subsequent head unload +request to that other device will be executed immediately. Further +operations on that port will be deferred until the timeout specified +for either device on the port has expired. As far as PATA (old style +IDE) configurations are concerned, there can only be two devices +attached to any single port. In SATA world we have port multipliers +which means that a user-issued head parking request to one device may +actually result in stopping I/O to a whole bunch of devices. However, +since this feature is supposed to be used on laptops and does not seem +to be very useful in any other environment, there will be mostly one +device per port. Even if the CD/DVD writer happens to be connected to +the same port as the hard drive, it generally *should* recover just +fine from the occasional buffer under-run incurred by a head park +request to the HD. Actually, when you are using an ide driver rather +than its libata counterpart (i.e. your disk is called /dev/hda +instead of /dev/sda), then parking the heads of one drive (drive X) +will generally not affect the mode of operation of another drive +(drive Y) on the same port as described above. It is only when a port +reset is required to recover from an exception on drive Y that further +I/O operations on that drive (and the reset itself) will be delayed +until drive X is no longer in the parked state. + +Finally, there are some hard drives that only comply with an earlier +version of the ATA standard than ATA-7, but do support the unload +feature nonetheless. Unfortunately, there is no safe way Linux can +detect these devices, so you won't be able to write to the +unload_heads attribute. If you know that your device really does +support the unload feature (for instance, because the vendor of your +laptop or the hard drive itself told you so), then you can tell the +kernel to enable the usage of this feature for that drive by writing +the special value -1 to the unload_heads attribute: + +# echo -1 > /sys/block/sda/device/unload_heads + +will enable the feature for /dev/sda, and giving -2 instead of -1 will +disable it again. + + +3. References +------------- + +There are several laptops from different vendors featuring shock +protection capabilities. As manufacturers have refused to support open +source development of the required software components so far, Linux +support for shock protection varies considerably between different +hardware implementations. Ideally, this section should contain a list +of pointers at different projects aiming at an implementation of shock +protection on different systems. Unfortunately, I only know of a +single project which, although still considered experimental, is fit +for use. Please feel free to add projects that have been the victims +of my ignorance. + +- http://www.thinkwiki.org/wiki/HDAPS + See this page for information about Linux support of the hard disk + active protection system as implemented in IBM/Lenovo Thinkpads. + + +4. CREDITS +---------- + +This implementation of disk head parking has been inspired by a patch +originally published by Jon Escombe . My efforts +to develop an implementation of this feature that is fit to be merged +into mainline have been aided by various kernel developers, in +particular by Tejun Heo and Bartlomiej Zolnierkiewicz. -- cgit v1.1 From a5766f11cfd3a0c03450d99c8fe548c2940be884 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Liam Girdwood Date: Fri, 10 Oct 2008 13:22:20 +0100 Subject: regulator: core - Rework machine API to remove string based functions. This improves the machine level API in order to configure regulator constraints and consumers as platform data and removes the old string based API that required several calls to set up each regulator. The intention is to create a struct regulator_init_data, populate it's fields with constraints, consumers devices, etc and then register the regulator device from board.c in the standard Linux way. e.g. regulator LDO2 (supplying codec and sim) platform data. /* regulator LDO2 consumer devices */ static struct regulator_consumer_supply ldo2_consumers[] = { { .dev = &platform_audio_device.dev, .supply = "codec_avdd", }, { .dev = &platform_sim_device.dev, .supply = "sim_vcc", } }; /* regulator LDO2 constraints */ static struct regulator_init_data ldo2_data = { .constraints = { .min_uV = 3300000, .max_uV = 3300000, .valid_modes_mask = REGULATOR_MODE_NORMAL, .apply_uV = 1, }, .num_consumer_supplies = ARRAY_SIZE(ldo2_consumers), .consumer_supplies = ldo2_consumers, }; /* machine regulator devices with thier consumers and constraints */ static struct platform_device wm8350_regulator_devices[] = { { .name = "wm8350-regulator", .id = WM8350_LDO_2, .dev = { .platform_data = &ldo2_data, }, }, }; Changes in detail:- o Removed all const char* regulator config functions in machine API. o Created new struct regulator_init_data to contain regulator machine configuration constraints and consmuers. o Changed set_supply(), set_machine_constraints(), set_consumer_device_supply() to remove their string identifier parameters. Also made them static and moved functions nearer top of core.c. o Removed no longer used inline func to_rdev() o Added regulator_get_init_drvdata() to retrieve init data. o Added struct device* as parameter to regulator_register(). o Changed my email address. Signed-off-by: Eric Miao Signed-off-by: Mark Brown Signed-off-by: Liam Girdwood --- Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt | 140 +++++++++++++--------------- Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt | 8 +- 2 files changed, 70 insertions(+), 78 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt index c9a3566..ce3487d 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt @@ -2,17 +2,8 @@ Regulator Machine Driver Interface =================================== The regulator machine driver interface is intended for board/machine specific -initialisation code to configure the regulator subsystem. Typical things that -machine drivers would do are :- +initialisation code to configure the regulator subsystem. - 1. Regulator -> Device mapping. - 2. Regulator supply configuration. - 3. Power Domain constraint setting. - - - -1. Regulator -> device mapping -============================== Consider the following machine :- Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 --> [Consumer A @ 1.8 - 2.0V] @@ -21,81 +12,82 @@ Consider the following machine :- The drivers for consumers A & B must be mapped to the correct regulator in order to control their power supply. This mapping can be achieved in machine -initialisation code by calling :- +initialisation code by creating a struct regulator_consumer_supply for +each regulator. + +struct regulator_consumer_supply { + struct device *dev; /* consumer */ + const char *supply; /* consumer supply - e.g. "vcc" */ +}; -int regulator_set_device_supply(const char *regulator, struct device *dev, - const char *supply); +e.g. for the machine above -and is shown with the following code :- +static struct regulator_consumer_supply regulator1_consumers[] = { +{ + .dev = &platform_consumerB_device.dev, + .supply = "Vcc", +},}; -regulator_set_device_supply("Regulator-1", devB, "Vcc"); -regulator_set_device_supply("Regulator-2", devA, "Vcc"); +static struct regulator_consumer_supply regulator2_consumers[] = { +{ + .dev = &platform_consumerA_device.dev, + .supply = "Vcc", +},}; This maps Regulator-1 to the 'Vcc' supply for Consumer B and maps Regulator-2 to the 'Vcc' supply for Consumer A. - -2. Regulator supply configuration. -================================== -Consider the following machine (again) :- - - Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 --> [Consumer A @ 1.8 - 2.0V] - | - +-> [Consumer B @ 3.3V] +Constraints can now be registered by defining a struct regulator_init_data +for each regulator power domain. This structure also maps the consumers +to their supply regulator :- + +static struct regulator_init_data regulator1_data = { + .constraints = { + .min_uV = 3300000, + .max_uV = 3300000, + .valid_modes_mask = REGULATOR_MODE_NORMAL, + }, + .num_consumer_supplies = ARRAY_SIZE(regulator1_consumers), + .consumer_supplies = regulator1_consumers, +}; Regulator-1 supplies power to Regulator-2. This relationship must be registered with the core so that Regulator-1 is also enabled when Consumer A enables it's -supply (Regulator-2). - -This relationship can be register with the core via :- - -int regulator_set_supply(const char *regulator, const char *regulator_supply); - -In this example we would use the following code :- - -regulator_set_supply("Regulator-2", "Regulator-1"); - -Relationships can be queried by calling :- - -const char *regulator_get_supply(const char *regulator); - - -3. Power Domain constraint setting. -=================================== -Each power domain within a system has physical constraints on voltage and -current. This must be defined in software so that the power domain is always -operated within specifications. - -Consider the following machine (again) :- - - Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 --> [Consumer A @ 1.8 - 2.0V] - | - +-> [Consumer B @ 3.3V] - -This gives us two regulators and two power domains: - - Domain 1: Regulator-2, Consumer B. - Domain 2: Consumer A. - -Constraints can be registered by calling :- - -int regulator_set_platform_constraints(const char *regulator, - struct regulation_constraints *constraints); - -The example is defined as follows :- - -struct regulation_constraints domain_1 = { - .min_uV = 3300000, - .max_uV = 3300000, - .valid_modes_mask = REGULATOR_MODE_NORMAL, +supply (Regulator-2). The supply regulator is set by the supply_regulator_dev +field below:- + +static struct regulator_init_data regulator2_data = { + .supply_regulator_dev = &platform_regulator1_device.dev, + .constraints = { + .min_uV = 1800000, + .max_uV = 2000000, + .valid_ops_mask = REGULATOR_CHANGE_VOLTAGE, + .valid_modes_mask = REGULATOR_MODE_NORMAL, + }, + .num_consumer_supplies = ARRAY_SIZE(regulator2_consumers), + .consumer_supplies = regulator2_consumers, }; -struct regulation_constraints domain_2 = { - .min_uV = 1800000, - .max_uV = 2000000, - .valid_ops_mask = REGULATOR_CHANGE_VOLTAGE, - .valid_modes_mask = REGULATOR_MODE_NORMAL, +Finally the regulator devices must be registered in the usual manner. + +static struct platform_device regulator_devices[] = { +{ + .name = "regulator", + .id = DCDC_1, + .dev = { + .platform_data = ®ulator1_data, + }, +}, +{ + .name = "regulator", + .id = DCDC_2, + .dev = { + .platform_data = ®ulator2_data, + }, +}, }; +/* register regulator 1 device */ +platform_device_register(&wm8350_regulator_devices[0]); -regulator_set_platform_constraints("Regulator-1", &domain_1); -regulator_set_platform_constraints("Regulator-2", &domain_2); +/* register regulator 2 device */ +platform_device_register(&wm8350_regulator_devices[1]); diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt index a690501..4200acc 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt @@ -10,11 +10,11 @@ Registration Drivers can register a regulator by calling :- -struct regulator_dev *regulator_register(struct regulator_desc *regulator_desc, - void *reg_data); +struct regulator_dev *regulator_register(struct device *dev, + struct regulator_desc *regulator_desc); -This will register the regulators capabilities and operations the regulator -core. The core does not touch reg_data (private to regulator driver). +This will register the regulators capabilities and operations to the regulator +core. Regulators can be unregistered by calling :- -- cgit v1.1 From 8a62ab4c4eaf5bce4d9cc84b77d6402c4742d9ab Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Liam Girdwood Date: Sun, 14 Sep 2008 17:40:21 +0100 Subject: regulator: update email address for Liam Girdwood Additionally added another web resource for voltage regulators. Signed-off-by: Liam Girdwood --- Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator | 42 ++++++++++++------------- 1 file changed, 21 insertions(+), 21 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator index 79a4a75..84e66fd 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ What: /sys/class/regulator/.../state Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called state. This holds the regulator output state. @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../type Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called type. This holds the regulator type. @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../microvolts Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called microvolts. This holds the regulator output voltage setting @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../microamps Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called microamps. This holds the regulator output current limit @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../opmode Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called opmode. This holds the regulator operating mode setting. @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../min_microvolts Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called min_microvolts. This holds the minimum safe working regulator @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../max_microvolts Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called max_microvolts. This holds the maximum safe working regulator @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../min_microamps Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called min_microamps. This holds the minimum safe working regulator @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../max_microamps Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called max_microamps. This holds the maximum safe working regulator @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../num_users Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called num_users. This holds the number of consumer devices that @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../requested_microamps Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called requested_microamps. This holds the total requested load @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../parent Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Some regulator directories will contain a link called parent. This points to the parent or supply regulator if one exists. @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_microvolts Date: May 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called suspend_mem_microvolts. This holds the regulator output @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_microvolts Date: May 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called suspend_disk_microvolts. This holds the regulator output @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_microvolts Date: May 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called suspend_standby_microvolts. This holds the regulator output @@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_mode Date: May 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called suspend_mem_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode @@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_mode Date: May 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called suspend_disk_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_mode Date: May 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called suspend_standby_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_state Date: May 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called suspend_mem_state. This holds the regulator operating state @@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_state Date: May 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called suspend_disk_state. This holds the regulator operating state @@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_state Date: May 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -Contact: Liam Girdwood +Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: Each regulator directory will contain a field called suspend_standby_state. This holds the regulator operating -- cgit v1.1 From bc558a60b58f638ee0188affb627d4894a97b1c7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mark Brown Date: Fri, 10 Oct 2008 15:33:20 +0100 Subject: regulator: Export regulator name via sysfs Provide a new file 'name' in the regulator sysfs class with a human readable name for the regulator for use in applications. Signed-off-by: Mark Brown Signed-off-by: Liam Girdwood --- Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator | 13 +++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 13 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator index 84e66fd..3731f6f 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator @@ -157,6 +157,19 @@ Description: platform code. +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../name +Date: October 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.28 +Contact: Liam Girdwood +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + name. This holds a string identifying the regulator for + display purposes. + + NOTE: this will be empty if no suitable name is provided + by platform or regulator drivers. + + What: /sys/class/regulator/.../num_users Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 -- cgit v1.1 From 12462f1d9f0b96389497438dc2730c6f7410be82 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Joel Becker Date: Wed, 3 Sep 2008 20:03:40 -0700 Subject: ocfs2: Add the 'inode64' mount option. Now that ocfs2 limits inode numbers to 32bits, add a mount option to disable the limit. This parallels XFS. 64bit systems can handle the larger inode numbers. [ Added description of inode64 mount option in ocfs2.txt. --Mark ] Signed-off-by: Joel Becker Signed-off-by: Mark Fasheh --- Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt | 4 ++++ 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt index c318a8b..6acf1b4 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt @@ -76,3 +76,7 @@ localalloc=8(*) Allows custom localalloc size in MB. If the value is too large, the fs will silently revert it to the default. Localalloc is not enabled for local mounts. localflocks This disables cluster aware flock. +inode64 Indicates that Ocfs2 is allowed to create inodes at + any location in the filesystem, including those which + will result in inode numbers occupying more than 32 + bits of significance. -- cgit v1.1 From 696b55d768ea5ebf38a369da615f8c956750ab3f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mark Fasheh Date: Tue, 7 Oct 2008 11:09:24 -0700 Subject: ocfs2: Documentation update for user_xattr / nouser_xattr mount options Signed-off-by: Mark Fasheh --- Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt index 6acf1b4..4340cc8 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt @@ -80,3 +80,5 @@ inode64 Indicates that Ocfs2 is allowed to create inodes at any location in the filesystem, including those which will result in inode numbers occupying more than 32 bits of significance. +user_xattr (*) Enables Extended User Attributes. +nouser_xattr Disables Extended User Attributes. -- cgit v1.1 From b806a71a0e9dacb6763371561caa693c78b93d40 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Rudolf Marek Date: Tue, 14 Oct 2008 17:30:03 +0200 Subject: i2c-viapro: Add VX800/VX820 support Thanks to new datasheets published on http://linux.via.com.tw we can now add support for VX800/VX820 chipsets. Signed-off-by: Rudolf Marek Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare --- Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-viapro | 8 ++++++-- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-viapro b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-viapro index 1405fb6..22efedf 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-viapro +++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-viapro @@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ Supported adapters: * VIA Technologies, Inc. CX700 Datasheet: available on request and under NDA from VIA + * VIA Technologies, Inc. VX800/VX820 + Datasheet: available on http://linux.via.com.tw + Authors: Kyösti Mälkki , Mark D. Studebaker , @@ -49,6 +52,7 @@ Your lspci -n listing must show one of these : device 1106:3372 (VT8237S) device 1106:3287 (VT8251) device 1106:8324 (CX700) + device 1106:8353 (VX800/VX820) If none of these show up, you should look in the BIOS for settings like enable ACPI / SMBus or even USB. @@ -57,5 +61,5 @@ Except for the oldest chips (VT82C596A/B, VT82C686A and most probably VT8231), this driver supports I2C block transactions. Such transactions are mainly useful to read from and write to EEPROMs. -The CX700 additionally appears to support SMBus PEC, although this driver -doesn't implement it yet. +The CX700/VX800/VX820 additionally appears to support SMBus PEC, although +this driver doesn't implement it yet. -- cgit v1.1 From fceb2d06800ddae53095f63843d85fcff4f701ac Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean Delvare Date: Tue, 14 Oct 2008 17:30:05 +0200 Subject: i2c: Improve dev-interface documentation * Clarify some points. * Point developers to i2c-tools instead of lm_sensors. * Fix coding style in code examples. Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare --- Documentation/i2c/dev-interface | 65 +++++++++++++++++++++++++---------------- 1 file changed, 40 insertions(+), 25 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/dev-interface b/Documentation/i2c/dev-interface index 9dd7912..689a79e 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/dev-interface +++ b/Documentation/i2c/dev-interface @@ -4,6 +4,10 @@ the /dev interface. You need to load module i2c-dev for this. Each registered i2c adapter gets a number, counting from 0. You can examine /sys/class/i2c-dev/ to see what number corresponds to which adapter. +Alternatively, you can run "i2cdetect -l" to obtain a formated list of all +i2c adapters present on your system at a given time. i2cdetect is part of +the i2c-tools package. + I2C device files are character device files with major device number 89 and a minor device number corresponding to the number assigned as explained above. They should be called "i2c-%d" (i2c-0, i2c-1, ..., @@ -17,30 +21,34 @@ So let's say you want to access an i2c adapter from a C program. The first thing to do is "#include ". Please note that there are two files named "i2c-dev.h" out there, one is distributed with the Linux kernel and is meant to be included from kernel -driver code, the other one is distributed with lm_sensors and is +driver code, the other one is distributed with i2c-tools and is meant to be included from user-space programs. You obviously want the second one here. Now, you have to decide which adapter you want to access. You should -inspect /sys/class/i2c-dev/ to decide this. Adapter numbers are assigned -somewhat dynamically, so you can not even assume /dev/i2c-0 is the -first adapter. +inspect /sys/class/i2c-dev/ or run "i2cdetect -l" to decide this. +Adapter numbers are assigned somewhat dynamically, so you can not +assume much about them. They can even change from one boot to the next. Next thing, open the device file, as follows: + int file; int adapter_nr = 2; /* probably dynamically determined */ char filename[20]; - sprintf(filename,"/dev/i2c-%d",adapter_nr); - if ((file = open(filename,O_RDWR)) < 0) { + snprintf(filename, 19, "/dev/i2c-%d", adapter_nr); + file = open(filename, O_RDWR); + if (file < 0) { /* ERROR HANDLING; you can check errno to see what went wrong */ exit(1); } When you have opened the device, you must specify with what device address you want to communicate: + int addr = 0x40; /* The I2C address */ - if (ioctl(file,I2C_SLAVE,addr) < 0) { + + if (ioctl(file, I2C_SLAVE, addr) < 0) { /* ERROR HANDLING; you can check errno to see what went wrong */ exit(1); } @@ -48,31 +56,41 @@ address you want to communicate: Well, you are all set up now. You can now use SMBus commands or plain I2C to communicate with your device. SMBus commands are preferred if the device supports them. Both are illustrated below. + __u8 register = 0x10; /* Device register to access */ __s32 res; char buf[10]; + /* Using SMBus commands */ - res = i2c_smbus_read_word_data(file,register); + res = i2c_smbus_read_word_data(file, register); if (res < 0) { /* ERROR HANDLING: i2c transaction failed */ } else { /* res contains the read word */ } + /* Using I2C Write, equivalent of - i2c_smbus_write_word_data(file,register,0x6543) */ + i2c_smbus_write_word_data(file, register, 0x6543) */ buf[0] = register; buf[1] = 0x43; buf[2] = 0x65; - if ( write(file,buf,3) != 3) { + if (write(file, buf, 3) ! =3) { /* ERROR HANDLING: i2c transaction failed */ } + /* Using I2C Read, equivalent of i2c_smbus_read_byte(file) */ - if (read(file,buf,1) != 1) { + if (read(file, buf, 1) != 1) { /* ERROR HANDLING: i2c transaction failed */ } else { /* buf[0] contains the read byte */ } +Note that only a subset of the I2C and SMBus protocols can be achieved by +the means of read() and write() calls. In particular, so-called combined +transactions (mixing read and write messages in the same transaction) +aren't supported. For this reason, this interface is almost never used by +user-space programs. + IMPORTANT: because of the use of inline functions, you *have* to use '-O' or some variation when you compile your program! @@ -80,31 +98,29 @@ IMPORTANT: because of the use of inline functions, you *have* to use Full interface description ========================== -The following IOCTLs are defined and fully supported -(see also i2c-dev.h): +The following IOCTLs are defined: -ioctl(file,I2C_SLAVE,long addr) +ioctl(file, I2C_SLAVE, long addr) Change slave address. The address is passed in the 7 lower bits of the argument (except for 10 bit addresses, passed in the 10 lower bits in this case). -ioctl(file,I2C_TENBIT,long select) +ioctl(file, I2C_TENBIT, long select) Selects ten bit addresses if select not equals 0, selects normal 7 bit addresses if select equals 0. Default 0. This request is only valid if the adapter has I2C_FUNC_10BIT_ADDR. -ioctl(file,I2C_PEC,long select) +ioctl(file, I2C_PEC, long select) Selects SMBus PEC (packet error checking) generation and verification if select not equals 0, disables if select equals 0. Default 0. Used only for SMBus transactions. This request only has an effect if the the adapter has I2C_FUNC_SMBUS_PEC; it is still safe if not, it just doesn't have any effect. -ioctl(file,I2C_FUNCS,unsigned long *funcs) +ioctl(file, I2C_FUNCS, unsigned long *funcs) Gets the adapter functionality and puts it in *funcs. -ioctl(file,I2C_RDWR,struct i2c_rdwr_ioctl_data *msgset) - +ioctl(file, I2C_RDWR, struct i2c_rdwr_ioctl_data *msgset) Do combined read/write transaction without stop in between. Only valid if the adapter has I2C_FUNC_I2C. The argument is a pointer to a @@ -120,10 +136,9 @@ ioctl(file,I2C_RDWR,struct i2c_rdwr_ioctl_data *msgset) The slave address and whether to use ten bit address mode has to be set in each message, overriding the values set with the above ioctl's. - -Other values are NOT supported at this moment, except for I2C_SMBUS, -which you should never directly call; instead, use the access functions -below. +ioctl(file, I2C_SMBUS, struct i2c_smbus_ioctl_data *args) + Not meant to be called directly; instead, use the access functions + below. You can do plain i2c transactions by using read(2) and write(2) calls. You do not need to pass the address byte; instead, set it through @@ -148,7 +163,7 @@ what happened. The 'write' transactions return 0 on success; the returns the number of values read. The block buffers need not be longer than 32 bytes. -The above functions are all macros, that resolve to calls to the -i2c_smbus_access function, that on its turn calls a specific ioctl +The above functions are all inline functions, that resolve to calls to +the i2c_smbus_access function, that on its turn calls a specific ioctl with the data in a specific format. Read the source code if you want to know what happens behind the screens. -- cgit v1.1 From 7c15fd1249658e203b2ac8661e48da6c2102e563 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean Delvare Date: Tue, 14 Oct 2008 17:30:05 +0200 Subject: i2c: Document the implementation details of the /dev interface I wrote this explanation to answer a question on the i2c mailing list, and thought it would be good to have in the kernel documentation. Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare --- Documentation/i2c/dev-interface | 45 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 45 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/dev-interface b/Documentation/i2c/dev-interface index 689a79e..3e742ba 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/dev-interface +++ b/Documentation/i2c/dev-interface @@ -167,3 +167,48 @@ The above functions are all inline functions, that resolve to calls to the i2c_smbus_access function, that on its turn calls a specific ioctl with the data in a specific format. Read the source code if you want to know what happens behind the screens. + + +Implementation details +====================== + +For the interested, here's the code flow which happens inside the kernel +when you use the /dev interface to I2C: + +1* Your program opens /dev/i2c-N and calls ioctl() on it, as described in +section "C example" above. + +2* These open() and ioctl() calls are handled by the i2c-dev kernel +driver: see i2c-dev.c:i2cdev_open() and i2c-dev.c:i2cdev_ioctl(), +respectively. You can think of i2c-dev as a generic I2C chip driver +that can be programmed from user-space. + +3* Some ioctl() calls are for administrative tasks and are handled by +i2c-dev directly. Examples include I2C_SLAVE (set the address of the +device you want to access) and I2C_PEC (enable or disable SMBus error +checking on future transactions.) + +4* Other ioctl() calls are converted to in-kernel function calls by +i2c-dev. Examples include I2C_FUNCS, which queries the I2C adapter +functionality using i2c.h:i2c_get_functionality(), and I2C_SMBUS, which +performs an SMBus transaction using i2c-core.c:i2c_smbus_xfer(). + +The i2c-dev driver is responsible for checking all the parameters that +come from user-space for validity. After this point, there is no +difference between these calls that came from user-space through i2c-dev +and calls that would have been performed by kernel I2C chip drivers +directly. This means that I2C bus drivers don't need to implement +anything special to support access from user-space. + +5* These i2c-core.c/i2c.h functions are wrappers to the actual +implementation of your I2C bus driver. Each adapter must declare +callback functions implementing these standard calls. +i2c.h:i2c_get_functionality() calls i2c_adapter.algo->functionality(), +while i2c-core.c:i2c_smbus_xfer() calls either +adapter.algo->smbus_xfer() if it is implemented, or if not, +i2c-core.c:i2c_smbus_xfer_emulated() which in turn calls +i2c_adapter.algo->master_xfer(). + +After your I2C bus driver has processed these requests, execution runs +up the call chain, with almost no processing done, except by i2c-dev to +package the returned data, if any, in suitable format for the ioctl. -- cgit v1.1 From 596c88f4601e6245a15ea7619527674abbfdcf92 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Prakash Mortha Date: Tue, 14 Oct 2008 17:30:06 +0200 Subject: i2c: Restore i2c_smbus_process_call function Restore the i2c_smbus_process_call() as one driver (for the Micronas MAP5401) will need it soon. [JD: Update documentation accordingly.] Signed-off-by: Prakash Mortha Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare --- Documentation/i2c/smbus-protocol | 4 ++-- Documentation/i2c/writing-clients | 4 ++-- 2 files changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/smbus-protocol b/Documentation/i2c/smbus-protocol index 24bfb65..9df4744 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/smbus-protocol +++ b/Documentation/i2c/smbus-protocol @@ -109,8 +109,8 @@ specified through the Comm byte. S Addr Wr [A] Comm [A] DataLow [A] DataHigh [A] P -SMBus Process Call -================== +SMBus Process Call: i2c_smbus_process_call() +============================================= This command selects a device register (through the Comm byte), sends 16 bits of data to it, and reads 16 bits of data in return. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients b/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients index 6b61b3a..d73ee11 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients +++ b/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients @@ -606,6 +606,8 @@ SMBus communication extern s32 i2c_smbus_read_word_data(struct i2c_client * client, u8 command); extern s32 i2c_smbus_write_word_data(struct i2c_client * client, u8 command, u16 value); + extern s32 i2c_smbus_process_call(struct i2c_client *client, + u8 command, u16 value); extern s32 i2c_smbus_read_block_data(struct i2c_client * client, u8 command, u8 *values); extern s32 i2c_smbus_write_block_data(struct i2c_client * client, @@ -621,8 +623,6 @@ These ones were removed from i2c-core because they had no users, but could be added back later if needed: extern s32 i2c_smbus_write_quick(struct i2c_client * client, u8 value); - extern s32 i2c_smbus_process_call(struct i2c_client * client, - u8 command, u16 value); extern s32 i2c_smbus_block_process_call(struct i2c_client *client, u8 command, u8 length, u8 *values) -- cgit v1.1 From 3497b2f274b62292df67b6321d8947e24fce94a9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Randy Macleod Date: Tue, 14 Oct 2008 13:49:38 -0700 Subject: Phonet: Simple doc fix. From: "Randy Macleod" Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/phonet.txt | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt b/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt index 0e6e592..6a07e45 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt @@ -146,8 +146,8 @@ WARNING: When polling a connected pipe socket for writability, there is an intrinsic race condition whereby writability might be lost between the polling and the writing system calls. In this case, the socket will -block until write because possible again, unless non-blocking mode -becomes enabled. +block until write becomes possible again, unless non-blocking mode +is enabled. The pipe protocol provides two socket options at the SOL_PNPIPE level: -- cgit v1.1 From 02ae9a1a8bc1d08a8fd5f6a0b8bde400b0f891b9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jiri Slaby Date: Fri, 16 May 2008 11:49:22 +0200 Subject: HID: add compat support Add compat option to hid code to allow loading of all modules on systems which don't allow autoloading because of old userspace. Signed-off-by: Jiri Slaby Signed-off-by: Jiri Kosina --- Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt | 7 +++++++ 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index cc8093c..4d2566a 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt @@ -287,6 +287,13 @@ Who: Glauber Costa --------------------------- +What: remove HID compat support +When: 2.6.29 +Why: needed only as a temporary solution until distros fix themselves up +Who: Jiri Slaby + +--------------------------- + What: /sys/o2cb symlink When: January 2010 Why: /sys/fs/o2cb is the proper location for this information - /sys/o2cb -- cgit v1.1 From 346e15beb5343c2eb8216d820f2ed8f150822b08 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jason Baron Date: Tue, 12 Aug 2008 16:46:19 -0400 Subject: driver core: basic infrastructure for per-module dynamic debug messages Base infrastructure to enable per-module debug messages. I've introduced CONFIG_DYNAMIC_PRINTK_DEBUG, which when enabled centralizes control of debugging statements on a per-module basis in one /proc file, currently, /dynamic_printk/modules. When, CONFIG_DYNAMIC_PRINTK_DEBUG, is not set, debugging statements can still be enabled as before, often by defining 'DEBUG' for the proper compilation unit. Thus, this patch set has no affect when CONFIG_DYNAMIC_PRINTK_DEBUG is not set. The infrastructure currently ties into all pr_debug() and dev_dbg() calls. That is, if CONFIG_DYNAMIC_PRINTK_DEBUG is set, all pr_debug() and dev_dbg() calls can be dynamically enabled/disabled on a per-module basis. Future plans include extending this functionality to subsystems, that define their own debug levels and flags. Usage: Dynamic debugging is controlled by the debugfs file, /dynamic_printk/modules. This file contains a list of the modules that can be enabled. The format of the file is as follows: . . . : Name of the module in which the debug call resides : whether the messages are enabled or not For example: snd_hda_intel enabled=0 fixup enabled=1 driver enabled=0 Enable a module: $echo "set enabled=1 " > dynamic_printk/modules Disable a module: $echo "set enabled=0 " > dynamic_printk/modules Enable all modules: $echo "set enabled=1 all" > dynamic_printk/modules Disable all modules: $echo "set enabled=0 all" > dynamic_printk/modules Finally, passing "dynamic_printk" at the command line enables debugging for all modules. This mode can be turned off via the above disable command. [gkh: minor cleanups and tweaks to make the build work quietly] Signed-off-by: Jason Baron Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 5 +++++ 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 2443f5b..b429c84 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -1713,6 +1713,11 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file autoconfiguration. Ranges are in pairs (memory base and size). + dynamic_printk + Enables pr_debug()/dev_dbg() calls if + CONFIG_DYNAMIC_PRINTK_DEBUG has been enabled. These can also + be switched on/off via /dynamic_printk/modules + print-fatal-signals= [KNL] debug: print fatal signals print-fatal-signals=1: print segfault info to -- cgit v1.1 From 030c1d2bfcc2187650fb975456ca0b61a5bb77f4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Eric W. Biederman" Date: Thu, 8 May 2008 14:41:00 -0700 Subject: kobject: Fix kobject_rename and !CONFIG_SYSFS When looking at kobject_rename I found two bugs with that exist when sysfs support is disabled in the kernel. kobject_rename does not change the name on the kobject when sysfs support is not compiled in. kobject_rename without locking attempts to check the validity of a rename operation, which the kobject layer simply does not have the infrastructure to do. This patch documents the previously unstated requirement of kobject_rename that is the responsibility of the caller to provide mutual exclusion and to be certain that the new_name for the kobject is valid. This patch modifies sysfs_rename_dir in !CONFIG_SYSFS case to call kobject_set_name to actually change the kobject_name. This patch removes the bogus and misleading check in kobject_rename that attempts to see if a rename is valid. The check is bogus because we do not have the proper locking. The check is misleading because it looks like we can and do perform checking at the kobject level that we don't. Signed-off-by: Eric W. Biederman Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/kobject.txt | 4 ++++ 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kobject.txt b/Documentation/kobject.txt index 51a8021..f5d2aad 100644 --- a/Documentation/kobject.txt +++ b/Documentation/kobject.txt @@ -118,6 +118,10 @@ the name of the kobject, call kobject_rename(): int kobject_rename(struct kobject *kobj, const char *new_name); +Note kobject_rename does perform any locking or have a solid notion of +what names are valid so the provide must provide their own sanity checking +and serialization. + There is a function called kobject_set_name() but that is legacy cruft and is being removed. If your code needs to call this function, it is incorrect and needs to be fixed. -- cgit v1.1 From d86f4bc4bc34c63c90e5fd46a60c506b234f5708 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Alberto Bertogli Date: Fri, 26 Sep 2008 23:10:31 -0300 Subject: Documentation/block/data-integrity.txt: Fix section numbers Signed-off-by: Alberto Bertogli Signed-off-by: Jonathan Corbet --- Documentation/block/data-integrity.txt | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/block/data-integrity.txt b/Documentation/block/data-integrity.txt index e9dc8d8..e8ca040 100644 --- a/Documentation/block/data-integrity.txt +++ b/Documentation/block/data-integrity.txt @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ will require extra work due to the application tag. retrieve the tag buffer using bio_integrity_get_tag(). -6.3 PASSING EXISTING INTEGRITY METADATA +5.3 PASSING EXISTING INTEGRITY METADATA Filesystems that either generate their own integrity metadata or are capable of transferring IMD from user space can use the @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ will require extra work due to the application tag. integrity upon completion. -6.4 REGISTERING A BLOCK DEVICE AS CAPABLE OF EXCHANGING INTEGRITY +5.4 REGISTERING A BLOCK DEVICE AS CAPABLE OF EXCHANGING INTEGRITY METADATA To enable integrity exchange on a block device the gendisk must be -- cgit v1.1 From 75b021468368288ac8fec1a86a13f5cf2229139e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jonathan Corbet Date: Tue, 30 Sep 2008 15:15:56 -0600 Subject: Add the development process document This is an extended document intended to help interested developers, their managers, and their employers work with the kernel development process. This work was supported by the Linux Foundation. Signed-off-by: Jonathan Corbet --- Documentation/00-INDEX | 3 + Documentation/development-process/1.Intro | 274 ++++++++++++ Documentation/development-process/2.Process | 459 +++++++++++++++++++++ Documentation/development-process/3.Early-stage | 195 +++++++++ Documentation/development-process/4.Coding | 384 +++++++++++++++++ Documentation/development-process/5.Posting | 278 +++++++++++++ Documentation/development-process/6.Followthrough | 202 +++++++++ Documentation/development-process/7.AdvancedTopics | 173 ++++++++ Documentation/development-process/8.Conclusion | 74 ++++ 9 files changed, 2042 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/development-process/1.Intro create mode 100644 Documentation/development-process/2.Process create mode 100644 Documentation/development-process/3.Early-stage create mode 100644 Documentation/development-process/4.Coding create mode 100644 Documentation/development-process/5.Posting create mode 100644 Documentation/development-process/6.Followthrough create mode 100644 Documentation/development-process/7.AdvancedTopics create mode 100644 Documentation/development-process/8.Conclusion (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/00-INDEX b/Documentation/00-INDEX index 5b5aba4..1f3dbdf 100644 --- a/Documentation/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/00-INDEX @@ -21,6 +21,9 @@ Changes - list of changes that break older software packages. CodingStyle - how the boss likes the C code in the kernel to look. +development-process/ + - An extended tutorial on how to work with the kernel development + process. DMA-API.txt - DMA API, pci_ API & extensions for non-consistent memory machines. DMA-ISA-LPC.txt diff --git a/Documentation/development-process/1.Intro b/Documentation/development-process/1.Intro new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8cc2cba --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/development-process/1.Intro @@ -0,0 +1,274 @@ +1: A GUIDE TO THE KERNEL DEVELOPMENT PROCESS + +The purpose of this document is to help developers (and their managers) +work with the development community with a minimum of frustration. It is +an attempt to document how this community works in a way which is +accessible to those who are not intimately familiar with Linux kernel +development (or, indeed, free software development in general). While +there is some technical material here, this is very much a process-oriented +discussion which does not require a deep knowledge of kernel programming to +understand. + + +1.1: EXECUTIVE SUMMARY + +The rest of this section covers the scope of the kernel development process +and the kinds of frustrations that developers and their employers can +encounter there. There are a great many reasons why kernel code should be +merged into the official ("mainline") kernel, including automatic +availability to users, community support in many forms, and the ability to +influence the direction of kernel development. Code contributed to the +Linux kernel must be made available under a GPL-compatible license. + +Section 2 introduces the development process, the kernel release cycle, and +the mechanics of the merge window. The various phases in the patch +development, review, and merging cycle are covered. There is some +discussion of tools and mailing lists. Developers wanting to get started +with kernel development are encouraged to track down and fix bugs as an +initial exercise. + +Section 3 covers early-stage project planning, with an emphasis on +involving the development community as soon as possible. + +Section 4 is about the coding process; several pitfalls which have been +encountered by other developers are discussed. Some requirements for +patches are covered, and there is an introduction to some of the tools +which can help to ensure that kernel patches are correct. + +Section 5 talks about the process of posting patches for review. To be +taken seriously by the development community, patches must be properly +formatted and described, and they must be sent to the right place. +Following the advice in this section should help to ensure the best +possible reception for your work. + +Section 6 covers what happens after posting patches; the job is far from +done at that point. Working with reviewers is a crucial part of the +development process; this section offers a number of tips on how to avoid +problems at this important stage. Developers are cautioned against +assuming that the job is done when a patch is merged into the mainline. + +Section 7 introduces a couple of "advanced" topics: managing patches with +git and reviewing patches posted by others. + +Section 8 concludes the document with pointers to sources for more +information on kernel development. + + +1.2: WHAT THIS DOCUMENT IS ABOUT + +The Linux kernel, at over 6 million lines of code and well over 1000 active +contributors, is one of the largest and most active free software projects +in existence. Since its humble beginning in 1991, this kernel has evolved +into a best-of-breed operating system component which runs on pocket-sized +digital music players, desktop PCs, the largest supercomputers in +existence, and all types of systems in between. It is a robust, efficient, +and scalable solution for almost any situation. + +With the growth of Linux has come an increase in the number of developers +(and companies) wishing to participate in its development. Hardware +vendors want to ensure that Linux supports their products well, making +those products attractive to Linux users. Embedded systems vendors, who +use Linux as a component in an integrated product, want Linux to be as +capable and well-suited to the task at hand as possible. Distributors and +other software vendors who base their products on Linux have a clear +interest in the capabilities, performance, and reliability of the Linux +kernel. And end users, too, will often wish to change Linux to make it +better suit their needs. + +One of the most compelling features of Linux is that it is accessible to +these developers; anybody with the requisite skills can improve Linux and +influence the direction of its development. Proprietary products cannot +offer this kind of openness, which is a characteristic of the free software +process. But, if anything, the kernel is even more open than most other +free software projects. A typical three-month kernel development cycle can +involve over 1000 developers working for more than 100 different companies +(or for no company at all). + +Working with the kernel development community is not especially hard. But, +that notwithstanding, many potential contributors have experienced +difficulties when trying to do kernel work. The kernel community has +evolved its own distinct ways of operating which allow it to function +smoothly (and produce a high-quality product) in an environment where +thousands of lines of code are being changed every day. So it is not +surprising that Linux kernel development process differs greatly from +proprietary development methods. + +The kernel's development process may come across as strange and +intimidating to new developers, but there are good reasons and solid +experience behind it. A developer who does not understand the kernel +community's ways (or, worse, who tries to flout or circumvent them) will +have a frustrating experience in store. The development community, while +being helpful to those who are trying to learn, has little time for those +who will not listen or who do not care about the development process. + +It is hoped that those who read this document will be able to avoid that +frustrating experience. There is a lot of material here, but the effort +involved in reading it will be repaid in short order. The development +community is always in need of developers who will help to make the kernel +better; the following text should help you - or those who work for you - +join our community. + + +1.3: CREDITS + +This document was written by Jonathan Corbet, corbet@lwn.net. It has been +improved by comments from Johannes Berg, James Berry, Alex Chiang, Roland +Dreier, Randy Dunlap, Jake Edge, Jiri Kosina, Matt Mackall, Arthur Marsh, +Amanda McPherson, Andrew Morton, Andrew Price, Tsugikazu Shibata, and +Jochen Voß. + +This work was supported by the Linux Foundation; thanks especially to +Amanda McPherson, who saw the value of this effort and made it all happen. + + +1.4: THE IMPORTANCE OF GETTING CODE INTO THE MAINLINE + +Some companies and developers occasionally wonder why they should bother +learning how to work with the kernel community and get their code into the +mainline kernel (the "mainline" being the kernel maintained by Linus +Torvalds and used as a base by Linux distributors). In the short term, +contributing code can look like an avoidable expense; it seems easier to +just keep the code separate and support users directly. The truth of the +matter is that keeping code separate ("out of tree") is a false economy. + +As a way of illustrating the costs of out-of-tree code, here are a few +relevant aspects of the kernel development process; most of these will be +discussed in greater detail later in this document. Consider: + +- Code which has been merged into the mainline kernel is available to all + Linux users. It will automatically be present on all distributions which + enable it. There is no need for driver disks, downloads, or the hassles + of supporting multiple versions of multiple distributions; it all just + works, for the developer and for the user. Incorporation into the + mainline solves a large number of distribution and support problems. + +- While kernel developers strive to maintain a stable interface to user + space, the internal kernel API is in constant flux. The lack of a stable + internal interface is a deliberate design decision; it allows fundamental + improvements to be made at any time and results in higher-quality code. + But one result of that policy is that any out-of-tree code requires + constant upkeep if it is to work with new kernels. Maintaining + out-of-tree code requires significant amounts of work just to keep that + code working. + + Code which is in the mainline, instead, does not require this work as the + result of a simple rule requiring any developer who makes an API change + to also fix any code that breaks as the result of that change. So code + which has been merged into the mainline has significantly lower + maintenance costs. + +- Beyond that, code which is in the kernel will often be improved by other + developers. Surprising results can come from empowering your user + community and customers to improve your product. + +- Kernel code is subjected to review, both before and after merging into + the mainline. No matter how strong the original developer's skills are, + this review process invariably finds ways in which the code can be + improved. Often review finds severe bugs and security problems. This is + especially true for code which has been developed in a closed + environment; such code benefits strongly from review by outside + developers. Out-of-tree code is lower-quality code. + +- Participation in the development process is your way to influence the + direction of kernel development. Users who complain from the sidelines + are heard, but active developers have a stronger voice - and the ability + to implement changes which make the kernel work better for their needs. + +- When code is maintained separately, the possibility that a third party + will contribute a different implementation of a similar feature always + exists. Should that happen, getting your code merged will become much + harder - to the point of impossibility. Then you will be faced with the + unpleasant alternatives of either (1) maintaining a nonstandard feature + out of tree indefinitely, or (2) abandoning your code and migrating your + users over to the in-tree version. + +- Contribution of code is the fundamental action which makes the whole + process work. By contributing your code you can add new functionality to + the kernel and provide capabilities and examples which are of use to + other kernel developers. If you have developed code for Linux (or are + thinking about doing so), you clearly have an interest in the continued + success of this platform; contributing code is one of the best ways to + help ensure that success. + +All of the reasoning above applies to any out-of-tree kernel code, +including code which is distributed in proprietary, binary-only form. +There are, however, additional factors which should be taken into account +before considering any sort of binary-only kernel code distribution. These +include: + +- The legal issues around the distribution of proprietary kernel modules + are cloudy at best; quite a few kernel copyright holders believe that + most binary-only modules are derived products of the kernel and that, as + a result, their distribution is a violation of the GNU General Public + license (about which more will be said below). Your author is not a + lawyer, and nothing in this document can possibly be considered to be + legal advice. The true legal status of closed-source modules can only be + determined by the courts. But the uncertainty which haunts those modules + is there regardless. + +- Binary modules greatly increase the difficulty of debugging kernel + problems, to the point that most kernel developers will not even try. So + the distribution of binary-only modules will make it harder for your + users to get support from the community. + +- Support is also harder for distributors of binary-only modules, who must + provide a version of the module for every distribution and every kernel + version they wish to support. Dozens of builds of a single module can + be required to provide reasonably comprehensive coverage, and your users + will have to upgrade your module separately every time they upgrade their + kernel. + +- Everything that was said above about code review applies doubly to + closed-source code. Since this code is not available at all, it cannot + have been reviewed by the community and will, beyond doubt, have serious + problems. + +Makers of embedded systems, in particular, may be tempted to disregard much +of what has been said in this section in the belief that they are shipping +a self-contained product which uses a frozen kernel version and requires no +more development after its release. This argument misses the value of +widespread code review and the value of allowing your users to add +capabilities to your product. But these products, too, have a limited +commercial life, after which a new version must be released. At that +point, vendors whose code is in the mainline and well maintained will be +much better positioned to get the new product ready for market quickly. + + +1.5: LICENSING + +Code is contributed to the Linux kernel under a number of licenses, but all +code must be compatible with version 2 of the GNU General Public License +(GPLv2), which is the license covering the kernel distribution as a whole. +In practice, that means that all code contributions are covered either by +GPLv2 (with, optionally, language allowing distribution under later +versions of the GPL) or the three-clause BSD license. Any contributions +which are not covered by a compatible license will not be accepted into the +kernel. + +Copyright assignments are not required (or requested) for code contributed +to the kernel. All code merged into the mainline kernel retains its +original ownership; as a result, the kernel now has thousands of owners. + +One implication of this ownership structure is that any attempt to change +the licensing of the kernel is doomed to almost certain failure. There are +few practical scenarios where the agreement of all copyright holders could +be obtained (or their code removed from the kernel). So, in particular, +there is no prospect of a migration to version 3 of the GPL in the +foreseeable future. + +It is imperative that all code contributed to the kernel be legitimately +free software. For that reason, code from anonymous (or pseudonymous) +contributors will not be accepted. All contributors are required to "sign +off" on their code, stating that the code can be distributed with the +kernel under the GPL. Code which has not been licensed as free software by +its owner, or which risks creating copyright-related problems for the +kernel (such as code which derives from reverse-engineering efforts lacking +proper safeguards) cannot be contributed. + +Questions about copyright-related issues are common on Linux development +mailing lists. Such questions will normally receive no shortage of +answers, but one should bear in mind that the people answering those +questions are not lawyers and cannot provide legal advice. If you have +legal questions relating to Linux source code, there is no substitute for +talking with a lawyer who understands this field. Relying on answers +obtained on technical mailing lists is a risky affair. diff --git a/Documentation/development-process/2.Process b/Documentation/development-process/2.Process new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d750321 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/development-process/2.Process @@ -0,0 +1,459 @@ +2: HOW THE DEVELOPMENT PROCESS WORKS + +Linux kernel development in the early 1990's was a pretty loose affair, +with relatively small numbers of users and developers involved. With a +user base in the millions and with some 2,000 developers involved over the +course of one year, the kernel has since had to evolve a number of +processes to keep development happening smoothly. A solid understanding of +how the process works is required in order to be an effective part of it. + + +2.1: THE BIG PICTURE + +The kernel developers use a loosely time-based release process, with a new +major kernel release happening every two or three months. The recent +release history looks like this: + + 2.6.26 July 13, 2008 + 2.6.25 April 16, 2008 + 2.6.24 January 24, 2008 + 2.6.23 October 9, 2007 + 2.6.22 July 8, 2007 + 2.6.21 April 25, 2007 + 2.6.20 February 4, 2007 + +Every 2.6.x release is a major kernel release with new features, internal +API changes, and more. A typical 2.6 release can contain over 10,000 +changesets with changes to several hundred thousand lines of code. 2.6 is +thus the leading edge of Linux kernel development; the kernel uses a +rolling development model which is continually integrating major changes. + +A relatively straightforward discipline is followed with regard to the +merging of patches for each release. At the beginning of each development +cycle, the "merge window" is said to be open. At that time, code which is +deemed to be sufficiently stable (and which is accepted by the development +community) is merged into the mainline kernel. The bulk of changes for a +new development cycle (and all of the major changes) will be merged during +this time, at a rate approaching 1,000 changes ("patches," or "changesets") +per day. + +(As an aside, it is worth noting that the changes integrated during the +merge window do not come out of thin air; they have been collected, tested, +and staged ahead of time. How that process works will be described in +detail later on). + +The merge window lasts for two weeks. At the end of this time, Linus +Torvalds will declare that the window is closed and release the first of +the "rc" kernels. For the kernel which is destined to be 2.6.26, for +example, the release which happens at the end of the merge window will be +called 2.6.26-rc1. The -rc1 release is the signal that the time to merge +new features has passed, and that the time to stabilize the next kernel has +begun. + +Over the next six to ten weeks, only patches which fix problems should be +submitted to the mainline. On occasion a more significant change will be +allowed, but such occasions are rare; developers who try to merge new +features outside of the merge window tend to get an unfriendly reception. +As a general rule, if you miss the merge window for a given feature, the +best thing to do is to wait for the next development cycle. (An occasional +exception is made for drivers for previously-unsupported hardware; if they +touch no in-tree code, they cannot cause regressions and should be safe to +add at any time). + +As fixes make their way into the mainline, the patch rate will slow over +time. Linus releases new -rc kernels about once a week; a normal series +will get up to somewhere between -rc6 and -rc9 before the kernel is +considered to be sufficiently stable and the final 2.6.x release is made. +At that point the whole process starts over again. + +As an example, here is how the 2.6.25 development cycle went (all dates in +2008): + + January 24 2.6.24 stable release + February 10 2.6.25-rc1, merge window closes + February 15 2.6.25-rc2 + February 24 2.6.25-rc3 + March 4 2.6.25-rc4 + March 9 2.6.25-rc5 + March 16 2.6.25-rc6 + March 25 2.6.25-rc7 + April 1 2.6.25-rc8 + April 11 2.6.25-rc9 + April 16 2.6.25 stable release + +How do the developers decide when to close the development cycle and create +the stable release? The most significant metric used is the list of +regressions from previous releases. No bugs are welcome, but those which +break systems which worked in the past are considered to be especially +serious. For this reason, patches which cause regressions are looked upon +unfavorably and are quite likely to be reverted during the stabilization +period. + +The developers' goal is to fix all known regressions before the stable +release is made. In the real world, this kind of perfection is hard to +achieve; there are just too many variables in a project of this size. +There comes a point where delaying the final release just makes the problem +worse; the pile of changes waiting for the next merge window will grow +larger, creating even more regressions the next time around. So most 2.6.x +kernels go out with a handful of known regressions though, hopefully, none +of them are serious. + +Once a stable release is made, its ongoing maintenance is passed off to the +"stable team," currently comprised of Greg Kroah-Hartman and Chris Wright. +The stable team will release occasional updates to the stable release using +the 2.6.x.y numbering scheme. To be considered for an update release, a +patch must (1) fix a significant bug, and (2) already be merged into the +mainline for the next development kernel. Continuing our 2.6.25 example, +the history (as of this writing) is: + + May 1 2.6.25.1 + May 6 2.6.25.2 + May 9 2.6.25.3 + May 15 2.6.25.4 + June 7 2.6.25.5 + June 9 2.6.25.6 + June 16 2.6.25.7 + June 21 2.6.25.8 + June 24 2.6.25.9 + +Stable updates for a given kernel are made for approximately six months; +after that, the maintenance of stable releases is solely the responsibility +of the distributors which have shipped that particular kernel. + + +2.2: THE LIFECYCLE OF A PATCH + +Patches do not go directly from the developer's keyboard into the mainline +kernel. There is, instead, a somewhat involved (if somewhat informal) +process designed to ensure that each patch is reviewed for quality and that +each patch implements a change which is desirable to have in the mainline. +This process can happen quickly for minor fixes, or, in the case of large +and controversial changes, go on for years. Much developer frustration +comes from a lack of understanding of this process or from attempts to +circumvent it. + +In the hopes of reducing that frustration, this document will describe how +a patch gets into the kernel. What follows below is an introduction which +describes the process in a somewhat idealized way. A much more detailed +treatment will come in later sections. + +The stages that a patch goes through are, generally: + + - Design. This is where the real requirements for the patch - and the way + those requirements will be met - are laid out. Design work is often + done without involving the community, but it is better to do this work + in the open if at all possible; it can save a lot of time redesigning + things later. + + - Early review. Patches are posted to the relevant mailing list, and + developers on that list reply with any comments they may have. This + process should turn up any major problems with a patch if all goes + well. + + - Wider review. When the patch is getting close to ready for mainline + inclusion, it will be accepted by a relevant subsystem maintainer - + though this acceptance is not a guarantee that the patch will make it + all the way to the mainline. The patch will show up in the maintainer's + subsystem tree and into the staging trees (described below). When the + process works, this step leads to more extensive review of the patch and + the discovery of any problems resulting from the integration of this + patch with work being done by others. + + - Merging into the mainline. Eventually, a successful patch will be + merged into the mainline repository managed by Linus Torvalds. More + comments and/or problems may surface at this time; it is important that + the developer be responsive to these and fix any issues which arise. + + - Stable release. The number of users potentially affected by the patch + is now large, so, once again, new problems may arise. + + - Long-term maintenance. While it is certainly possible for a developer + to forget about code after merging it, that sort of behavior tends to + leave a poor impression in the development community. Merging code + eliminates some of the maintenance burden, in that others will fix + problems caused by API changes. But the original developer should + continue to take responsibility for the code if it is to remain useful + in the longer term. + +One of the largest mistakes made by kernel developers (or their employers) +is to try to cut the process down to a single "merging into the mainline" +step. This approach invariably leads to frustration for everybody +involved. + + +2.3: HOW PATCHES GET INTO THE KERNEL + +There is exactly one person who can merge patches into the mainline kernel +repository: Linus Torvalds. But, of the over 12,000 patches which went +into the 2.6.25 kernel, only 250 (around 2%) were directly chosen by Linus +himself. The kernel project has long since grown to a size where no single +developer could possibly inspect and select every patch unassisted. The +way the kernel developers have addressed this growth is through the use of +a lieutenant system built around a chain of trust. + +The kernel code base is logically broken down into a set of subsystems: +networking, specific architecture support, memory management, video +devices, etc. Most subsystems have a designated maintainer, a developer +who has overall responsibility for the code within that subsystem. These +subsystem maintainers are the gatekeepers (in a loose way) for the portion +of the kernel they manage; they are the ones who will (usually) accept a +patch for inclusion into the mainline kernel. + +Subsystem maintainers each manage their own version of the kernel source +tree, usually (but certainly not always) using the git source management +tool. Tools like git (and related tools like quilt or mercurial) allow +maintainers to track a list of patches, including authorship information +and other metadata. At any given time, the maintainer can identify which +patches in his or her repository are not found in the mainline. + +When the merge window opens, top-level maintainers will ask Linus to "pull" +the patches they have selected for merging from their repositories. If +Linus agrees, the stream of patches will flow up into his repository, +becoming part of the mainline kernel. The amount of attention that Linus +pays to specific patches received in a pull operation varies. It is clear +that, sometimes, he looks quite closely. But, as a general rule, Linus +trusts the subsystem maintainers to not send bad patches upstream. + +Subsystem maintainers, in turn, can pull patches from other maintainers. +For example, the networking tree is built from patches which accumulated +first in trees dedicated to network device drivers, wireless networking, +etc. This chain of repositories can be arbitrarily long, though it rarely +exceeds two or three links. Since each maintainer in the chain trusts +those managing lower-level trees, this process is known as the "chain of +trust." + +Clearly, in a system like this, getting patches into the kernel depends on +finding the right maintainer. Sending patches directly to Linus is not +normally the right way to go. + + +2.4: STAGING TREES + +The chain of subsystem trees guides the flow of patches into the kernel, +but it also raises an interesting question: what if somebody wants to look +at all of the patches which are being prepared for the next merge window? +Developers will be interested in what other changes are pending to see +whether there are any conflicts to worry about; a patch which changes a +core kernel function prototype, for example, will conflict with any other +patches which use the older form of that function. Reviewers and testers +want access to the changes in their integrated form before all of those +changes land in the mainline kernel. One could pull changes from all of +the interesting subsystem trees, but that would be a big and error-prone +job. + +The answer comes in the form of staging trees, where subsystem trees are +collected for testing and review. The older of these trees, maintained by +Andrew Morton, is called "-mm" (for memory management, which is how it got +started). The -mm tree integrates patches from a long list of subsystem +trees; it also has some patches aimed at helping with debugging. + +Beyond that, -mm contains a significant collection of patches which have +been selected by Andrew directly. These patches may have been posted on a +mailing list, or they may apply to a part of the kernel for which there is +no designated subsystem tree. As a result, -mm operates as a sort of +subsystem tree of last resort; if there is no other obvious path for a +patch into the mainline, it is likely to end up in -mm. Miscellaneous +patches which accumulate in -mm will eventually either be forwarded on to +an appropriate subsystem tree or be sent directly to Linus. In a typical +development cycle, approximately 10% of the patches going into the mainline +get there via -mm. + +The current -mm patch can always be found from the front page of + + http://kernel.org/ + +Those who want to see the current state of -mm can get the "-mm of the +moment" tree, found at: + + http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/mmotm/ + +Use of the MMOTM tree is likely to be a frustrating experience, though; +there is a definite chance that it will not even compile. + +The other staging tree, started more recently, is linux-next, maintained by +Stephen Rothwell. The linux-next tree is, by design, a snapshot of what +the mainline is expected to look like after the next merge window closes. +Linux-next trees are announced on the linux-kernel and linux-next mailing +lists when they are assembled; they can be downloaded from: + + http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/sfr/linux-next/ + +Some information about linux-next has been gathered at: + + http://linux.f-seidel.de/linux-next/pmwiki/ + +How the linux-next tree will fit into the development process is still +changing. As of this writing, the first full development cycle involving +linux-next (2.6.26) is coming to an end; thus far, it has proved to be a +valuable resource for finding and fixing integration problems before the +beginning of the merge window. See http://lwn.net/Articles/287155/ for +more information on how linux-next has worked to set up the 2.6.27 merge +window. + +Some developers have begun to suggest that linux-next should be used as the +target for future development as well. The linux-next tree does tend to be +far ahead of the mainline and is more representative of the tree into which +any new work will be merged. The downside to this idea is that the +volatility of linux-next tends to make it a difficult development target. +See http://lwn.net/Articles/289013/ for more information on this topic, and +stay tuned; much is still in flux where linux-next is involved. + + +2.5: TOOLS + +As can be seen from the above text, the kernel development process depends +heavily on the ability to herd collections of patches in various +directions. The whole thing would not work anywhere near as well as it +does without suitably powerful tools. Tutorials on how to use these tools +are well beyond the scope of this document, but there is space for a few +pointers. + +By far the dominant source code management system used by the kernel +community is git. Git is one of a number of distributed version control +systems being developed in the free software community. It is well tuned +for kernel development, in that it performs quite well when dealing with +large repositories and large numbers of patches. It also has a reputation +for being difficult to learn and use, though it has gotten better over +time. Some sort of familiarity with git is almost a requirement for kernel +developers; even if they do not use it for their own work, they'll need git +to keep up with what other developers (and the mainline) are doing. + +Git is now packaged by almost all Linux distributions. There is a home +page at + + http://git.or.cz/ + +That page has pointers to documentation and tutorials. One should be +aware, in particular, of the Kernel Hacker's Guide to git, which has +information specific to kernel development: + + http://linux.yyz.us/git-howto.html + +Among the kernel developers who do not use git, the most popular choice is +almost certainly Mercurial: + + http://www.selenic.com/mercurial/ + +Mercurial shares many features with git, but it provides an interface which +many find easier to use. + +The other tool worth knowing about is Quilt: + + http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/quilt/ + +Quilt is a patch management system, rather than a source code management +system. It does not track history over time; it is, instead, oriented +toward tracking a specific set of changes against an evolving code base. +Some major subsystem maintainers use quilt to manage patches intended to go +upstream. For the management of certain kinds of trees (-mm, for example), +quilt is the best tool for the job. + + +2.6: MAILING LISTS + +A great deal of Linux kernel development work is done by way of mailing +lists. It is hard to be a fully-functioning member of the community +without joining at least one list somewhere. But Linux mailing lists also +represent a potential hazard to developers, who risk getting buried under a +load of electronic mail, running afoul of the conventions used on the Linux +lists, or both. + +Most kernel mailing lists are run on vger.kernel.org; the master list can +be found at: + + http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html + +There are lists hosted elsewhere, though; a number of them are at +lists.redhat.com. + +The core mailing list for kernel development is, of course, linux-kernel. +This list is an intimidating place to be; volume can reach 500 messages per +day, the amount of noise is high, the conversation can be severely +technical, and participants are not always concerned with showing a high +degree of politeness. But there is no other place where the kernel +development community comes together as a whole; developers who avoid this +list will miss important information. + +There are a few hints which can help with linux-kernel survival: + +- Have the list delivered to a separate folder, rather than your main + mailbox. One must be able to ignore the stream for sustained periods of + time. + +- Do not try to follow every conversation - nobody else does. It is + important to filter on both the topic of interest (though note that + long-running conversations can drift away from the original subject + without changing the email subject line) and the people who are + participating. + +- Do not feed the trolls. If somebody is trying to stir up an angry + response, ignore them. + +- When responding to linux-kernel email (or that on other lists) preserve + the Cc: header for all involved. In the absence of a strong reason (such + as an explicit request), you should never remove recipients. Always make + sure that the person you are responding to is in the Cc: list. This + convention also makes it unnecessary to explicitly ask to be copied on + replies to your postings. + +- Search the list archives (and the net as a whole) before asking + questions. Some developers can get impatient with people who clearly + have not done their homework. + +- Avoid top-posting (the practice of putting your answer above the quoted + text you are responding to). It makes your response harder to read and + makes a poor impression. + +- Ask on the correct mailing list. Linux-kernel may be the general meeting + point, but it is not the best place to find developers from all + subsystems. + +The last point - finding the correct mailing list - is a common place for +beginning developers to go wrong. Somebody who asks a networking-related +question on linux-kernel will almost certainly receive a polite suggestion +to ask on the netdev list instead, as that is the list frequented by most +networking developers. Other lists exist for the SCSI, video4linux, IDE, +filesystem, etc. subsystems. The best place to look for mailing lists is +in the MAINTAINERS file packaged with the kernel source. + + +2.7: GETTING STARTED WITH KERNEL DEVELOPMENT + +Questions about how to get started with the kernel development process are +common - from both individuals and companies. Equally common are missteps +which make the beginning of the relationship harder than it has to be. + +Companies often look to hire well-known developers to get a development +group started. This can, in fact, be an effective technique. But it also +tends to be expensive and does not do much to grow the pool of experienced +kernel developers. It is possible to bring in-house developers up to speed +on Linux kernel development, given the investment of a bit of time. Taking +this time can endow an employer with a group of developers who understand +the kernel and the company both, and who can help to train others as well. +Over the medium term, this is often the more profitable approach. + +Individual developers are often, understandably, at a loss for a place to +start. Beginning with a large project can be intimidating; one often wants +to test the waters with something smaller first. This is the point where +some developers jump into the creation of patches fixing spelling errors or +minor coding style issues. Unfortunately, such patches create a level of +noise which is distracting for the development community as a whole, so, +increasingly, they are looked down upon. New developers wishing to +introduce themselves to the community will not get the sort of reception +they wish for by these means. + +Andrew Morton gives this advice for aspiring kernel developers + + The #1 project for all kernel beginners should surely be "make sure + that the kernel runs perfectly at all times on all machines which + you can lay your hands on". Usually the way to do this is to work + with others on getting things fixed up (this can require + persistence!) but that's fine - it's a part of kernel development. + +(http://lwn.net/Articles/283982/). + +In the absence of obvious problems to fix, developers are advised to look +at the current lists of regressions and open bugs in general. There is +never any shortage of issues in need of fixing; by addressing these issues, +developers will gain experience with the process while, at the same time, +building respect with the rest of the development community. diff --git a/Documentation/development-process/3.Early-stage b/Documentation/development-process/3.Early-stage new file mode 100644 index 0000000..307a159 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/development-process/3.Early-stage @@ -0,0 +1,195 @@ +3: EARLY-STAGE PLANNING + +When contemplating a Linux kernel development project, it can be tempting +to jump right in and start coding. As with any significant project, +though, much of the groundwork for success is best laid before the first +line of code is written. Some time spent in early planning and +communication can save far more time later on. + + +3.1: SPECIFYING THE PROBLEM + +Like any engineering project, a successful kernel enhancement starts with a +clear description of the problem to be solved. In some cases, this step is +easy: when a driver is needed for a specific piece of hardware, for +example. In others, though, it is tempting to confuse the real problem +with the proposed solution, and that can lead to difficulties. + +Consider an example: some years ago, developers working with Linux audio +sought a way to run applications without dropouts or other artifacts caused +by excessive latency in the system. The solution they arrived at was a +kernel module intended to hook into the Linux Security Module (LSM) +framework; this module could be configured to give specific applications +access to the realtime scheduler. This module was implemented and sent to +the linux-kernel mailing list, where it immediately ran into problems. + +To the audio developers, this security module was sufficient to solve their +immediate problem. To the wider kernel community, though, it was seen as a +misuse of the LSM framework (which is not intended to confer privileges +onto processes which they would not otherwise have) and a risk to system +stability. Their preferred solutions involved realtime scheduling access +via the rlimit mechanism for the short term, and ongoing latency reduction +work in the long term. + +The audio community, however, could not see past the particular solution +they had implemented; they were unwilling to accept alternatives. The +resulting disagreement left those developers feeling disillusioned with the +entire kernel development process; one of them went back to an audio list +and posted this: + + There are a number of very good Linux kernel developers, but they + tend to get outshouted by a large crowd of arrogant fools. Trying + to communicate user requirements to these people is a waste of + time. They are much too "intelligent" to listen to lesser mortals. + +(http://lwn.net/Articles/131776/). + +The reality of the situation was different; the kernel developers were far +more concerned about system stability, long-term maintenance, and finding +the right solution to the problem than they were with a specific module. +The moral of the story is to focus on the problem - not a specific solution +- and to discuss it with the development community before investing in the +creation of a body of code. + +So, when contemplating a kernel development project, one should obtain +answers to a short set of questions: + + - What, exactly, is the problem which needs to be solved? + + - Who are the users affected by this problem? Which use cases should the + solution address? + + - How does the kernel fall short in addressing that problem now? + +Only then does it make sense to start considering possible solutions. + + +3.2: EARLY DISCUSSION + +When planning a kernel development project, it makes great sense to hold +discussions with the community before launching into implementation. Early +communication can save time and trouble in a number of ways: + + - It may well be that the problem is addressed by the kernel in ways which + you have not understood. The Linux kernel is large and has a number of + features and capabilities which are not immediately obvious. Not all + kernel capabilities are documented as well as one might like, and it is + easy to miss things. Your author has seen the posting of a complete + driver which duplicated an existing driver that the new author had been + unaware of. Code which reinvents existing wheels is not only wasteful; + it will also not be accepted into the mainline kernel. + + - There may be elements of the proposed solution which will not be + acceptable for mainline merging. It is better to find out about + problems like this before writing the code. + + - It's entirely possible that other developers have thought about the + problem; they may have ideas for a better solution, and may be willing + to help in the creation of that solution. + +Years of experience with the kernel development community have taught a +clear lesson: kernel code which is designed and developed behind closed +doors invariably has problems which are only revealed when the code is +released into the community. Sometimes these problems are severe, +requiring months or years of effort before the code can be brought up to +the kernel community's standards. Some examples include: + + - The Devicescape network stack was designed and implemented for + single-processor systems. It could not be merged into the mainline + until it was made suitable for multiprocessor systems. Retrofitting + locking and such into code is a difficult task; as a result, the merging + of this code (now called mac80211) was delayed for over a year. + + - The Reiser4 filesystem included a number of capabilities which, in the + core kernel developers' opinion, should have been implemented in the + virtual filesystem layer instead. It also included features which could + not easily be implemented without exposing the system to user-caused + deadlocks. The late revelation of these problems - and refusal to + address some of them - has caused Reiser4 to stay out of the mainline + kernel. + + - The AppArmor security module made use of internal virtual filesystem + data structures in ways which were considered to be unsafe and + unreliable. This code has since been significantly reworked, but + remains outside of the mainline. + +In each of these cases, a great deal of pain and extra work could have been +avoided with some early discussion with the kernel developers. + + +3.3: WHO DO YOU TALK TO? + +When developers decide to take their plans public, the next question will +be: where do we start? The answer is to find the right mailing list(s) and +the right maintainer. For mailing lists, the best approach is to look in +the MAINTAINERS file for a relevant place to post. If there is a suitable +subsystem list, posting there is often preferable to posting on +linux-kernel; you are more likely to reach developers with expertise in the +relevant subsystem and the environment may be more supportive. + +Finding maintainers can be a bit harder. Again, the MAINTAINERS file is +the place to start. That file tends to not always be up to date, though, +and not all subsystems are represented there. The person listed in the +MAINTAINERS file may, in fact, not be the person who is actually acting in +that role currently. So, when there is doubt about who to contact, a +useful trick is to use git (and "git log" in particular) to see who is +currently active within the subsystem of interest. Look at who is writing +patches, and who, if anybody, is attaching Signed-off-by lines to those +patches. Those are the people who will be best placed to help with a new +development project. + +If all else fails, talking to Andrew Morton can be an effective way to +track down a maintainer for a specific piece of code. + + +3.4: WHEN TO POST? + +If possible, posting your plans during the early stages can only be +helpful. Describe the problem being solved and any plans that have been +made on how the implementation will be done. Any information you can +provide can help the development community provide useful input on the +project. + +One discouraging thing which can happen at this stage is not a hostile +reaction, but, instead, little or no reaction at all. The sad truth of the +matter is (1) kernel developers tend to be busy, (2) there is no shortage +of people with grand plans and little code (or even prospect of code) to +back them up, and (3) nobody is obligated to review or comment on ideas +posted by others. If a request-for-comments posting yields little in the +way of comments, do not assume that it means there is no interest in the +project. Unfortunately, you also cannot assume that there are no problems +with your idea. The best thing to do in this situation is to proceed, +keeping the community informed as you go. + + +3.5: GETTING OFFICIAL BUY-IN + +If your work is being done in a corporate environment - as most Linux +kernel work is - you must, obviously, have permission from suitably +empowered managers before you can post your company's plans or code to a +public mailing list. The posting of code which has not been cleared for +release under a GPL-compatible license can be especially problematic; the +sooner that a company's management and legal staff can agree on the posting +of a kernel development project, the better off everybody involved will be. + +Some readers may be thinking at this point that their kernel work is +intended to support a product which does not yet have an officially +acknowledged existence. Revealing their employer's plans on a public +mailing list may not be a viable option. In cases like this, it is worth +considering whether the secrecy is really necessary; there is often no real +need to keep development plans behind closed doors. + +That said, there are also cases where a company legitimately cannot +disclose its plans early in the development process. Companies with +experienced kernel developers may choose to proceed in an open-loop manner +on the assumption that they will be able to avoid serious integration +problems later. For companies without that sort of in-house expertise, the +best option is often to hire an outside developer to review the plans under +a non-disclosure agreement. The Linux Foundation operates an NDA program +designed to help with this sort of situation; more information can be found +at: + + http://www.linuxfoundation.org/en/NDA_program + +This kind of review is often enough to avoid serious problems later on +without requiring public disclosure of the project. diff --git a/Documentation/development-process/4.Coding b/Documentation/development-process/4.Coding new file mode 100644 index 0000000..014aca8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/development-process/4.Coding @@ -0,0 +1,384 @@ +4: GETTING THE CODE RIGHT + +While there is much to be said for a solid and community-oriented design +process, the proof of any kernel development project is in the resulting +code. It is the code which will be examined by other developers and merged +(or not) into the mainline tree. So it is the quality of this code which +will determine the ultimate success of the project. + +This section will examine the coding process. We'll start with a look at a +number of ways in which kernel developers can go wrong. Then the focus +will shift toward doing things right and the tools which can help in that +quest. + + +4.1: PITFALLS + +* Coding style + +The kernel has long had a standard coding style, described in +Documentation/CodingStyle. For much of that time, the policies described +in that file were taken as being, at most, advisory. As a result, there is +a substantial amount of code in the kernel which does not meet the coding +style guidelines. The presence of that code leads to two independent +hazards for kernel developers. + +The first of these is to believe that the kernel coding standards do not +matter and are not enforced. The truth of the matter is that adding new +code to the kernel is very difficult if that code is not coded according to +the standard; many developers will request that the code be reformatted +before they will even review it. A code base as large as the kernel +requires some uniformity of code to make it possible for developers to +quickly understand any part of it. So there is no longer room for +strangely-formatted code. + +Occasionally, the kernel's coding style will run into conflict with an +employer's mandated style. In such cases, the kernel's style will have to +win before the code can be merged. Putting code into the kernel means +giving up a degree of control in a number of ways - including control over +how the code is formatted. + +The other trap is to assume that code which is already in the kernel is +urgently in need of coding style fixes. Developers may start to generate +reformatting patches as a way of gaining familiarity with the process, or +as a way of getting their name into the kernel changelogs - or both. But +pure coding style fixes are seen as noise by the development community; +they tend to get a chilly reception. So this type of patch is best +avoided. It is natural to fix the style of a piece of code while working +on it for other reasons, but coding style changes should not be made for +their own sake. + +The coding style document also should not be read as an absolute law which +can never be transgressed. If there is a good reason to go against the +style (a line which becomes far less readable if split to fit within the +80-column limit, for example), just do it. + + +* Abstraction layers + +Computer Science professors teach students to make extensive use of +abstraction layers in the name of flexibility and information hiding. +Certainly the kernel makes extensive use of abstraction; no project +involving several million lines of code could do otherwise and survive. +But experience has shown that excessive or premature abstraction can be +just as harmful as premature optimization. Abstraction should be used to +the level required and no further. + +At a simple level, consider a function which has an argument which is +always passed as zero by all callers. One could retain that argument just +in case somebody eventually needs to use the extra flexibility that it +provides. By that time, though, chances are good that the code which +implements this extra argument has been broken in some subtle way which was +never noticed - because it has never been used. Or, when the need for +extra flexibility arises, it does not do so in a way which matches the +programmer's early expectation. Kernel developers will routinely submit +patches to remove unused arguments; they should, in general, not be added +in the first place. + +Abstraction layers which hide access to hardware - often to allow the bulk +of a driver to be used with multiple operating systems - are especially +frowned upon. Such layers obscure the code and may impose a performance +penalty; they do not belong in the Linux kernel. + +On the other hand, if you find yourself copying significant amounts of code +from another kernel subsystem, it is time to ask whether it would, in fact, +make sense to pull out some of that code into a separate library or to +implement that functionality at a higher level. There is no value in +replicating the same code throughout the kernel. + + +* #ifdef and preprocessor use in general + +The C preprocessor seems to present a powerful temptation to some C +programmers, who see it as a way to efficiently encode a great deal of +flexibility into a source file. But the preprocessor is not C, and heavy +use of it results in code which is much harder for others to read and +harder for the compiler to check for correctness. Heavy preprocessor use +is almost always a sign of code which needs some cleanup work. + +Conditional compilation with #ifdef is, indeed, a powerful feature, and it +is used within the kernel. But there is little desire to see code which is +sprinkled liberally with #ifdef blocks. As a general rule, #ifdef use +should be confined to header files whenever possible. +Conditionally-compiled code can be confined to functions which, if the code +is not to be present, simply become empty. The compiler will then quietly +optimize out the call to the empty function. The result is far cleaner +code which is easier to follow. + +C preprocessor macros present a number of hazards, including possible +multiple evaluation of expressions with side effects and no type safety. +If you are tempted to define a macro, consider creating an inline function +instead. The code which results will be the same, but inline functions are +easier to read, do not evaluate their arguments multiple times, and allow +the compiler to perform type checking on the arguments and return value. + + +* Inline functions + +Inline functions present a hazard of their own, though. Programmers can +become enamored of the perceived efficiency inherent in avoiding a function +call and fill a source file with inline functions. Those functions, +however, can actually reduce performance. Since their code is replicated +at each call site, they end up bloating the size of the compiled kernel. +That, in turn, creates pressure on the processor's memory caches, which can +slow execution dramatically. Inline functions, as a rule, should be quite +small and relatively rare. The cost of a function call, after all, is not +that high; the creation of large numbers of inline functions is a classic +example of premature optimization. + +In general, kernel programmers ignore cache effects at their peril. The +classic time/space tradeoff taught in beginning data structures classes +often does not apply to contemporary hardware. Space *is* time, in that a +larger program will run slower than one which is more compact. + + +* Locking + +In May, 2006, the "Devicescape" networking stack was, with great +fanfare, released under the GPL and made available for inclusion in the +mainline kernel. This donation was welcome news; support for wireless +networking in Linux was considered substandard at best, and the Devicescape +stack offered the promise of fixing that situation. Yet, this code did not +actually make it into the mainline until June, 2007 (2.6.22). What +happened? + +This code showed a number of signs of having been developed behind +corporate doors. But one large problem in particular was that it was not +designed to work on multiprocessor systems. Before this networking stack +(now called mac80211) could be merged, a locking scheme needed to be +retrofitted onto it. + +Once upon a time, Linux kernel code could be developed without thinking +about the concurrency issues presented by multiprocessor systems. Now, +however, this document is being written on a dual-core laptop. Even on +single-processor systems, work being done to improve responsiveness will +raise the level of concurrency within the kernel. The days when kernel +code could be written without thinking about locking are long past. + +Any resource (data structures, hardware registers, etc.) which could be +accessed concurrently by more than one thread must be protected by a lock. +New code should be written with this requirement in mind; retrofitting +locking after the fact is a rather more difficult task. Kernel developers +should take the time to understand the available locking primitives well +enough to pick the right tool for the job. Code which shows a lack of +attention to concurrency will have a difficult path into the mainline. + + +* Regressions + +One final hazard worth mentioning is this: it can be tempting to make a +change (which may bring big improvements) which causes something to break +for existing users. This kind of change is called a "regression," and +regressions have become most unwelcome in the mainline kernel. With few +exceptions, changes which cause regressions will be backed out if the +regression cannot be fixed in a timely manner. Far better to avoid the +regression in the first place. + +It is often argued that a regression can be justified if it causes things +to work for more people than it creates problems for. Why not make a +change if it brings new functionality to ten systems for each one it +breaks? The best answer to this question was expressed by Linus in July, +2007: + + So we don't fix bugs by introducing new problems. That way lies + madness, and nobody ever knows if you actually make any real + progress at all. Is it two steps forwards, one step back, or one + step forward and two steps back? + +(http://lwn.net/Articles/243460/). + +An especially unwelcome type of regression is any sort of change to the +user-space ABI. Once an interface has been exported to user space, it must +be supported indefinitely. This fact makes the creation of user-space +interfaces particularly challenging: since they cannot be changed in +incompatible ways, they must be done right the first time. For this +reason, a great deal of thought, clear documentation, and wide review for +user-space interfaces is always required. + + + +4.2: CODE CHECKING TOOLS + +For now, at least, the writing of error-free code remains an ideal that few +of us can reach. What we can hope to do, though, is to catch and fix as +many of those errors as possible before our code goes into the mainline +kernel. To that end, the kernel developers have put together an impressive +array of tools which can catch a wide variety of obscure problems in an +automated way. Any problem caught by the computer is a problem which will +not afflict a user later on, so it stands to reason that the automated +tools should be used whenever possible. + +The first step is simply to heed the warnings produced by the compiler. +Contemporary versions of gcc can detect (and warn about) a large number of +potential errors. Quite often, these warnings point to real problems. +Code submitted for review should, as a rule, not produce any compiler +warnings. When silencing warnings, take care to understand the real cause +and try to avoid "fixes" which make the warning go away without addressing +its cause. + +Note that not all compiler warnings are enabled by default. Build the +kernel with "make EXTRA_CFLAGS=-W" to get the full set. + +The kernel provides several configuration options which turn on debugging +features; most of these are found in the "kernel hacking" submenu. Several +of these options should be turned on for any kernel used for development or +testing purposes. In particular, you should turn on: + + - ENABLE_WARN_DEPRECATED, ENABLE_MUST_CHECK, and FRAME_WARN to get an + extra set of warnings for problems like the use of deprecated interfaces + or ignoring an important return value from a function. The output + generated by these warnings can be verbose, but one need not worry about + warnings from other parts of the kernel. + + - DEBUG_OBJECTS will add code to track the lifetime of various objects + created by the kernel and warn when things are done out of order. If + you are adding a subsystem which creates (and exports) complex objects + of its own, consider adding support for the object debugging + infrastructure. + + - DEBUG_SLAB can find a variety of memory allocation and use errors; it + should be used on most development kernels. + + - DEBUG_SPINLOCK, DEBUG_SPINLOCK_SLEEP, and DEBUG_MUTEXES will find a + number of common locking errors. + +There are quite a few other debugging options, some of which will be +discussed below. Some of them have a significant performance impact and +should not be used all of the time. But some time spent learning the +available options will likely be paid back many times over in short order. + +One of the heavier debugging tools is the locking checker, or "lockdep." +This tool will track the acquisition and release of every lock (spinlock or +mutex) in the system, the order in which locks are acquired relative to +each other, the current interrupt environment, and more. It can then +ensure that locks are always acquired in the same order, that the same +interrupt assumptions apply in all situations, and so on. In other words, +lockdep can find a number of scenarios in which the system could, on rare +occasion, deadlock. This kind of problem can be painful (for both +developers and users) in a deployed system; lockdep allows them to be found +in an automated manner ahead of time. Code with any sort of non-trivial +locking should be run with lockdep enabled before being submitted for +inclusion. + +As a diligent kernel programmer, you will, beyond doubt, check the return +status of any operation (such as a memory allocation) which can fail. The +fact of the matter, though, is that the resulting failure recovery paths +are, probably, completely untested. Untested code tends to be broken code; +you could be much more confident of your code if all those error-handling +paths had been exercised a few times. + +The kernel provides a fault injection framework which can do exactly that, +especially where memory allocations are involved. With fault injection +enabled, a configurable percentage of memory allocations will be made to +fail; these failures can be restricted to a specific range of code. +Running with fault injection enabled allows the programmer to see how the +code responds when things go badly. See +Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.text for more information on +how to use this facility. + +Other kinds of errors can be found with the "sparse" static analysis tool. +With sparse, the programmer can be warned about confusion between +user-space and kernel-space addresses, mixture of big-endian and +small-endian quantities, the passing of integer values where a set of bit +flags is expected, and so on. Sparse must be installed separately (it can +be found at http://www.kernel.org/pub/software/devel/sparse/ if your +distributor does not package it); it can then be run on the code by adding +"C=1" to your make command. + +Other kinds of portability errors are best found by compiling your code for +other architectures. If you do not happen to have an S/390 system or a +Blackfin development board handy, you can still perform the compilation +step. A large set of cross compilers for x86 systems can be found at + + http://www.kernel.org/pub/tools/crosstool/ + +Some time spent installing and using these compilers will help avoid +embarrassment later. + + +4.3: DOCUMENTATION + +Documentation has often been more the exception than the rule with kernel +development. Even so, adequate documentation will help to ease the merging +of new code into the kernel, make life easier for other developers, and +will be helpful for your users. In many cases, the addition of +documentation has become essentially mandatory. + +The first piece of documentation for any patch is its associated +changelog. Log entries should describe the problem being solved, the form +of the solution, the people who worked on the patch, any relevant +effects on performance, and anything else that might be needed to +understand the patch. + +Any code which adds a new user-space interface - including new sysfs or +/proc files - should include documentation of that interface which enables +user-space developers to know what they are working with. See +Documentation/ABI/README for a description of how this documentation should +be formatted and what information needs to be provided. + +The file Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt describes all of the kernel's +boot-time parameters. Any patch which adds new parameters should add the +appropriate entries to this file. + +Any new configuration options must be accompanied by help text which +clearly explains the options and when the user might want to select them. + +Internal API information for many subsystems is documented by way of +specially-formatted comments; these comments can be extracted and formatted +in a number of ways by the "kernel-doc" script. If you are working within +a subsystem which has kerneldoc comments, you should maintain them and add +them, as appropriate, for externally-available functions. Even in areas +which have not been so documented, there is no harm in adding kerneldoc +comments for the future; indeed, this can be a useful activity for +beginning kernel developers. The format of these comments, along with some +information on how to create kerneldoc templates can be found in the file +Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt. + +Anybody who reads through a significant amount of existing kernel code will +note that, often, comments are most notable by their absence. Once again, +the expectations for new code are higher than they were in the past; +merging uncommented code will be harder. That said, there is little desire +for verbosely-commented code. The code should, itself, be readable, with +comments explaining the more subtle aspects. + +Certain things should always be commented. Uses of memory barriers should +be accompanied by a line explaining why the barrier is necessary. The +locking rules for data structures generally need to be explained somewhere. +Major data structures need comprehensive documentation in general. +Non-obvious dependencies between separate bits of code should be pointed +out. Anything which might tempt a code janitor to make an incorrect +"cleanup" needs a comment saying why it is done the way it is. And so on. + + +4.4: INTERNAL API CHANGES + +The binary interface provided by the kernel to user space cannot be broken +except under the most severe circumstances. The kernel's internal +programming interfaces, instead, are highly fluid and can be changed when +the need arises. If you find yourself having to work around a kernel API, +or simply not using a specific functionality because it does not meet your +needs, that may be a sign that the API needs to change. As a kernel +developer, you are empowered to make such changes. + +There are, of course, some catches. API changes can be made, but they need +to be well justified. So any patch making an internal API change should be +accompanied by a description of what the change is and why it is +necessary. This kind of change should also be broken out into a separate +patch, rather than buried within a larger patch. + +The other catch is that a developer who changes an internal API is +generally charged with the task of fixing any code within the kernel tree +which is broken by the change. For a widely-used function, this duty can +lead to literally hundreds or thousands of changes - many of which are +likely to conflict with work being done by other developers. Needless to +say, this can be a large job, so it is best to be sure that the +justification is solid. + +When making an incompatible API change, one should, whenever possible, +ensure that code which has not been updated is caught by the compiler. +This will help you to be sure that you have found all in-tree uses of that +interface. It will also alert developers of out-of-tree code that there is +a change that they need to respond to. Supporting out-of-tree code is not +something that kernel developers need to be worried about, but we also do +not have to make life harder for out-of-tree developers than it it needs to +be. diff --git a/Documentation/development-process/5.Posting b/Documentation/development-process/5.Posting new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dd48132 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/development-process/5.Posting @@ -0,0 +1,278 @@ +5: POSTING PATCHES + +Sooner or later, the time comes when your work is ready to be presented to +the community for review and, eventually, inclusion into the mainline +kernel. Unsurprisingly, the kernel development community has evolved a set +of conventions and procedures which are used in the posting of patches; +following them will make life much easier for everybody involved. This +document will attempt to cover these expectations in reasonable detail; +more information can also be found in the files SubmittingPatches, +SubmittingDrivers, and SubmitChecklist in the kernel documentation +directory. + + +5.1: WHEN TO POST + +There is a constant temptation to avoid posting patches before they are +completely "ready." For simple patches, that is not a problem. If the +work being done is complex, though, there is a lot to be gained by getting +feedback from the community before the work is complete. So you should +consider posting in-progress work, or even making a git tree available so +that interested developers can catch up with your work at any time. + +When posting code which is not yet considered ready for inclusion, it is a +good idea to say so in the posting itself. Also mention any major work +which remains to be done and any known problems. Fewer people will look at +patches which are known to be half-baked, but those who do will come in +with the idea that they can help you drive the work in the right direction. + + +5.2: BEFORE CREATING PATCHES + +There are a number of things which should be done before you consider +sending patches to the development community. These include: + + - Test the code to the extent that you can. Make use of the kernel's + debugging tools, ensure that the kernel will build with all reasonable + combinations of configuration options, use cross-compilers to build for + different architectures, etc. + + - Make sure your code is compliant with the kernel coding style + guidelines. + + - Does your change have performance implications? If so, you should run + benchmarks showing what the impact (or benefit) of your change is; a + summary of the results should be included with the patch. + + - Be sure that you have the right to post the code. If this work was done + for an employer, the employer likely has a right to the work and must be + agreeable with its release under the GPL. + +As a general rule, putting in some extra thought before posting code almost +always pays back the effort in short order. + + +5.3: PATCH PREPARATION + +The preparation of patches for posting can be a surprising amount of work, +but, once again, attempting to save time here is not generally advisable +even in the short term. + +Patches must be prepared against a specific version of the kernel. As a +general rule, a patch should be based on the current mainline as found in +Linus's git tree. It may become necessary to make versions against -mm, +linux-next, or a subsystem tree, though, to facilitate wider testing and +review. Depending on the area of your patch and what is going on +elsewhere, basing a patch against these other trees can require a +significant amount of work resolving conflicts and dealing with API +changes. + +Only the most simple changes should be formatted as a single patch; +everything else should be made as a logical series of changes. Splitting +up patches is a bit of an art; some developers spend a long time figuring +out how to do it in the way that the community expects. There are a few +rules of thumb, however, which can help considerably: + + - The patch series you post will almost certainly not be the series of + changes found in your working revision control system. Instead, the + changes you have made need to be considered in their final form, then + split apart in ways which make sense. The developers are interested in + discrete, self-contained changes, not the path you took to get to those + changes. + + - Each logically independent change should be formatted as a separate + patch. These changes can be small ("add a field to this structure") or + large (adding a significant new driver, for example), but they should be + conceptually small and amenable to a one-line description. Each patch + should make a specific change which can be reviewed on its own and + verified to do what it says it does. + + - As a way of restating the guideline above: do not mix different types of + changes in the same patch. If a single patch fixes a critical security + bug, rearranges a few structures, and reformats the code, there is a + good chance that it will be passed over and the important fix will be + lost. + + - Each patch should yield a kernel which builds and runs properly; if your + patch series is interrupted in the middle, the result should still be a + working kernel. Partial application of a patch series is a common + scenario when the "git bisect" tool is used to find regressions; if the + result is a broken kernel, you will make life harder for developers and + users who are engaging in the noble work of tracking down problems. + + - Do not overdo it, though. One developer recently posted a set of edits + to a single file as 500 separate patches - an act which did not make him + the most popular person on the kernel mailing list. A single patch can + be reasonably large as long as it still contains a single *logical* + change. + + - It can be tempting to add a whole new infrastructure with a series of + patches, but to leave that infrastructure unused until the final patch + in the series enables the whole thing. This temptation should be + avoided if possible; if that series adds regressions, bisection will + finger the last patch as the one which caused the problem, even though + the real bug is elsewhere. Whenever possible, a patch which adds new + code should make that code active immediately. + +Working to create the perfect patch series can be a frustrating process +which takes quite a bit of time and thought after the "real work" has been +done. When done properly, though, it is time well spent. + + +5.4: PATCH FORMATTING + +So now you have a perfect series of patches for posting, but the work is +not done quite yet. Each patch needs to be formatted into a message which +quickly and clearly communicates its purpose to the rest of the world. To +that end, each patch will be composed of the following: + + - An optional "From" line naming the author of the patch. This line is + only necessary if you are passing on somebody else's patch via email, + but it never hurts to add it when in doubt. + + - A one-line description of what the patch does. This message should be + enough for a reader who sees it with no other context to figure out the + scope of the patch; it is the line that will show up in the "short form" + changelogs. This message is usually formatted with the relevant + subsystem name first, followed by the purpose of the patch. For + example: + + gpio: fix build on CONFIG_GPIO_SYSFS=n + + - A blank line followed by a detailed description of the contents of the + patch. This description can be as long as is required; it should say + what the patch does and why it should be applied to the kernel. + + - One or more tag lines, with, at a minimum, one Signed-off-by: line from + the author of the patch. Tags will be described in more detail below. + +The above three items should, normally, be the text used when committing +the change to a revision control system. They are followed by: + + - The patch itself, in the unified ("-u") patch format. Using the "-p" + option to diff will associate function names with changes, making the + resulting patch easier for others to read. + +You should avoid including changes to irrelevant files (those generated by +the build process, for example, or editor backup files) in the patch. The +file "dontdiff" in the Documentation directory can help in this regard; +pass it to diff with the "-X" option. + +The tags mentioned above are used to describe how various developers have +been associated with the development of this patch. They are described in +detail in the SubmittingPatches document; what follows here is a brief +summary. Each of these lines has the format: + + tag: Full Name optional-other-stuff + +The tags in common use are: + + - Signed-off-by: this is a developer's certification that he or she has + the right to submit the patch for inclusion into the kernel. It is an + agreement to the Developer's Certificate of Origin, the full text of + which can be found in Documentation/SubmittingPatches. Code without a + proper signoff cannot be merged into the mainline. + + - Acked-by: indicates an agreement by another developer (often a + maintainer of the relevant code) that the patch is appropriate for + inclusion into the kernel. + + - Tested-by: states that the named person has tested the patch and found + it to work. + + - Reviewed-by: the named developer has reviewed the patch for correctness; + see the reviewer's statement in Documentation/SubmittingPatches for more + detail. + + - Reported-by: names a user who reported a problem which is fixed by this + patch; this tag is used to give credit to the (often underappreciated) + people who test our code and let us know when things do not work + correctly. + + - Cc: the named person received a copy of the patch and had the + opportunity to comment on it. + +Be careful in the addition of tags to your patches: only Cc: is appropriate +for addition without the explicit permission of the person named. + + +5.5: SENDING THE PATCH + +Before you mail your patches, there are a couple of other things you should +take care of: + + - Are you sure that your mailer will not corrupt the patches? Patches + which have had gratuitous white-space changes or line wrapping performed + by the mail client will not apply at the other end, and often will not + be examined in any detail. If there is any doubt at all, mail the patch + to yourself and convince yourself that it shows up intact. + + Documentation/email-clients.txt has some helpful hints on making + specific mail clients work for sending patches. + + - Are you sure your patch is free of silly mistakes? You should always + run patches through scripts/checkpatch.pl and address the complaints it + comes up with. Please bear in mind that checkpatch.pl, while being the + embodiment of a fair amount of thought about what kernel patches should + look like, is not smarter than you. If fixing a checkpatch.pl complaint + would make the code worse, don't do it. + +Patches should always be sent as plain text. Please do not send them as +attachments; that makes it much harder for reviewers to quote sections of +the patch in their replies. Instead, just put the patch directly into your +message. + +When mailing patches, it is important to send copies to anybody who might +be interested in it. Unlike some other projects, the kernel encourages +people to err on the side of sending too many copies; don't assume that the +relevant people will see your posting on the mailing lists. In particular, +copies should go to: + + - The maintainer(s) of the affected subsystem(s). As described earlier, + the MAINTAINERS file is the first place to look for these people. + + - Other developers who have been working in the same area - especially + those who might be working there now. Using git to see who else has + modified the files you are working on can be helpful. + + - If you are responding to a bug report or a feature request, copy the + original poster as well. + + - Send a copy to the relevant mailing list, or, if nothing else applies, + the linux-kernel list. + + - If you are fixing a bug, think about whether the fix should go into the + next stable update. If so, stable@kernel.org should get a copy of the + patch. Also add a "Cc: stable@kernel.org" to the tags within the patch + itself; that will cause the stable team to get a notification when your + fix goes into the mainline. + +When selecting recipients for a patch, it is good to have an idea of who +you think will eventually accept the patch and get it merged. While it +is possible to send patches directly to Linus Torvalds and have him merge +them, things are not normally done that way. Linus is busy, and there are +subsystem maintainers who watch over specific parts of the kernel. Usually +you will be wanting that maintainer to merge your patches. If there is no +obvious maintainer, Andrew Morton is often the patch target of last resort. + +Patches need good subject lines. The canonical format for a patch line is +something like: + + [PATCH nn/mm] subsys: one-line description of the patch + +where "nn" is the ordinal number of the patch, "mm" is the total number of +patches in the series, and "subsys" is the name of the affected subsystem. +Clearly, nn/mm can be omitted for a single, standalone patch. + +If you have a significant series of patches, it is customary to send an +introductory description as part zero. This convention is not universally +followed though; if you use it, remember that information in the +introduction does not make it into the kernel changelogs. So please ensure +that the patches, themselves, have complete changelog information. + +In general, the second and following parts of a multi-part patch should be +sent as a reply to the first part so that they all thread together at the +receiving end. Tools like git and quilt have commands to mail out a set of +patches with the proper threading. If you have a long series, though, and +are using git, please provide the --no-chain-reply-to option to avoid +creating exceptionally deep nesting. diff --git a/Documentation/development-process/6.Followthrough b/Documentation/development-process/6.Followthrough new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a8fba3d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/development-process/6.Followthrough @@ -0,0 +1,202 @@ +6: FOLLOWTHROUGH + +At this point, you have followed the guidelines given so far and, with the +addition of your own engineering skills, have posted a perfect series of +patches. One of the biggest mistakes that even experienced kernel +developers can make is to conclude that their work is now done. In truth, +posting patches indicates a transition into the next stage of the process, +with, possibly, quite a bit of work yet to be done. + +It is a rare patch which is so good at its first posting that there is no +room for improvement. The kernel development process recognizes this fact, +and, as a result, is heavily oriented toward the improvement of posted +code. You, as the author of that code, will be expected to work with the +kernel community to ensure that your code is up to the kernel's quality +standards. A failure to participate in this process is quite likely to +prevent the inclusion of your patches into the mainline. + + +6.1: WORKING WITH REVIEWERS + +A patch of any significance will result in a number of comments from other +developers as they review the code. Working with reviewers can be, for +many developers, the most intimidating part of the kernel development +process. Life can be made much easier, though, if you keep a few things in +mind: + + - If you have explained your patch well, reviewers will understand its + value and why you went to the trouble of writing it. But that value + will not keep them from asking a fundamental question: what will it be + like to maintain a kernel with this code in it five or ten years later? + Many of the changes you may be asked to make - from coding style tweaks + to substantial rewrites - come from the understanding that Linux will + still be around and under development a decade from now. + + - Code review is hard work, and it is a relatively thankless occupation; + people remember who wrote kernel code, but there is little lasting fame + for those who reviewed it. So reviewers can get grumpy, especially when + they see the same mistakes being made over and over again. If you get a + review which seems angry, insulting, or outright offensive, resist the + impulse to respond in kind. Code review is about the code, not about + the people, and code reviewers are not attacking you personally. + + - Similarly, code reviewers are not trying to promote their employers' + agendas at the expense of your own. Kernel developers often expect to + be working on the kernel years from now, but they understand that their + employer could change. They truly are, almost without exception, + working toward the creation of the best kernel they can; they are not + trying to create discomfort for their employers' competitors. + +What all of this comes down to is that, when reviewers send you comments, +you need to pay attention to the technical observations that they are +making. Do not let their form of expression or your own pride keep that +from happening. When you get review comments on a patch, take the time to +understand what the reviewer is trying to say. If possible, fix the things +that the reviewer is asking you to fix. And respond back to the reviewer: +thank them, and describe how you will answer their questions. + +Note that you do not have to agree with every change suggested by +reviewers. If you believe that the reviewer has misunderstood your code, +explain what is really going on. If you have a technical objection to a +suggested change, describe it and justify your solution to the problem. If +your explanations make sense, the reviewer will accept them. Should your +explanation not prove persuasive, though, especially if others start to +agree with the reviewer, take some time to think things over again. It can +be easy to become blinded by your own solution to a problem to the point +that you don't realize that something is fundamentally wrong or, perhaps, +you're not even solving the right problem. + +One fatal mistake is to ignore review comments in the hope that they will +go away. They will not go away. If you repost code without having +responded to the comments you got the time before, you're likely to find +that your patches go nowhere. + +Speaking of reposting code: please bear in mind that reviewers are not +going to remember all the details of the code you posted the last time +around. So it is always a good idea to remind reviewers of previously +raised issues and how you dealt with them; the patch changelog is a good +place for this kind of information. Reviewers should not have to search +through list archives to familiarize themselves with what was said last +time; if you help them get a running start, they will be in a better mood +when they revisit your code. + +What if you've tried to do everything right and things still aren't going +anywhere? Most technical disagreements can be resolved through discussion, +but there are times when somebody simply has to make a decision. If you +honestly believe that this decision is going against you wrongly, you can +always try appealing to a higher power. As of this writing, that higher +power tends to be Andrew Morton. Andrew has a great deal of respect in the +kernel development community; he can often unjam a situation which seems to +be hopelessly blocked. Appealing to Andrew should not be done lightly, +though, and not before all other alternatives have been explored. And bear +in mind, of course, that he may not agree with you either. + + +6.2: WHAT HAPPENS NEXT + +If a patch is considered to be a good thing to add to the kernel, and once +most of the review issues have been resolved, the next step is usually +entry into a subsystem maintainer's tree. How that works varies from one +subsystem to the next; each maintainer has his or her own way of doing +things. In particular, there may be more than one tree - one, perhaps, +dedicated to patches planned for the next merge window, and another for +longer-term work. + +For patches applying to areas for which there is no obvious subsystem tree +(memory management patches, for example), the default tree often ends up +being -mm. Patches which affect multiple subsystems can also end up going +through the -mm tree. + +Inclusion into a subsystem tree can bring a higher level of visibility to a +patch. Now other developers working with that tree will get the patch by +default. Subsystem trees typically feed into -mm and linux-next as well, +making their contents visible to the development community as a whole. At +this point, there's a good chance that you will get more comments from a +new set of reviewers; these comments need to be answered as in the previous +round. + +What may also happen at this point, depending on the nature of your patch, +is that conflicts with work being done by others turn up. In the worst +case, heavy patch conflicts can result in some work being put on the back +burner so that the remaining patches can be worked into shape and merged. +Other times, conflict resolution will involve working with the other +developers and, possibly, moving some patches between trees to ensure that +everything applies cleanly. This work can be a pain, but count your +blessings: before the advent of the linux-next tree, these conflicts often +only turned up during the merge window and had to be addressed in a hurry. +Now they can be resolved at leisure, before the merge window opens. + +Some day, if all goes well, you'll log on and see that your patch has been +merged into the mainline kernel. Congratulations! Once the celebration is +complete (and you have added yourself to the MAINTAINERS file), though, it +is worth remembering an important little fact: the job still is not done. +Merging into the mainline brings its own challenges. + +To begin with, the visibility of your patch has increased yet again. There +may be a new round of comments from developers who had not been aware of +the patch before. It may be tempting to ignore them, since there is no +longer any question of your code being merged. Resist that temptation, +though; you still need to be responsive to developers who have questions or +suggestions. + +More importantly, though: inclusion into the mainline puts your code into +the hands of a much larger group of testers. Even if you have contributed +a driver for hardware which is not yet available, you will be surprised by +how many people will build your code into their kernels. And, of course, +where there are testers, there will be bug reports. + +The worst sort of bug reports are regressions. If your patch causes a +regression, you'll find an uncomfortable number of eyes upon you; +regressions need to be fixed as soon as possible. If you are unwilling or +unable to fix the regression (and nobody else does it for you), your patch +will almost certainly be removed during the stabilization period. Beyond +negating all of the work you have done to get your patch into the mainline, +having a patch pulled as the result of a failure to fix a regression could +well make it harder for you to get work merged in the future. + +After any regressions have been dealt with, there may be other, ordinary +bugs to deal with. The stabilization period is your best opportunity to +fix these bugs and ensure that your code's debut in a mainline kernel +release is as solid as possible. So, please, answer bug reports, and fix +the problems if at all possible. That's what the stabilization period is +for; you can start creating cool new patches once any problems with the old +ones have been taken care of. + +And don't forget that there are other milestones which may also create bug +reports: the next mainline stable release, when prominent distributors pick +up a version of the kernel containing your patch, etc. Continuing to +respond to these reports is a matter of basic pride in your work. If that +is insufficient motivation, though, it's also worth considering that the +development community remembers developers who lose interest in their code +after it's merged. The next time you post a patch, they will be evaluating +it with the assumption that you will not be around to maintain it +afterward. + + +6.3: OTHER THINGS THAT CAN HAPPEN + +One day, you may open your mail client and see that somebody has mailed you +a patch to your code. That is one of the advantages of having your code +out there in the open, after all. If you agree with the patch, you can +either forward it on to the subsystem maintainer (be sure to include a +proper From: line so that the attribution is correct, and add a signoff of +your own), or send an Acked-by: response back and let the original poster +send it upward. + +If you disagree with the patch, send a polite response explaining why. If +possible, tell the author what changes need to be made to make the patch +acceptable to you. There is a certain resistance to merging patches which +are opposed by the author and maintainer of the code, but it only goes so +far. If you are seen as needlessly blocking good work, those patches will +eventually flow around you and get into the mainline anyway. In the Linux +kernel, nobody has absolute veto power over any code. Except maybe Linus. + +On very rare occasion, you may see something completely different: another +developer posts a different solution to your problem. At that point, +chances are that one of the two patches will not be merged, and "mine was +here first" is not considered to be a compelling technical argument. If +somebody else's patch displaces yours and gets into the mainline, there is +really only one way to respond: be pleased that your problem got solved and +get on with your work. Having one's work shoved aside in this manner can +be hurtful and discouraging, but the community will remember your reaction +long after they have forgotten whose patch actually got merged. diff --git a/Documentation/development-process/7.AdvancedTopics b/Documentation/development-process/7.AdvancedTopics new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a2cf740 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/development-process/7.AdvancedTopics @@ -0,0 +1,173 @@ +7: ADVANCED TOPICS + +At this point, hopefully, you have a handle on how the development process +works. There is still more to learn, however! This section will cover a +number of topics which can be helpful for developers wanting to become a +regular part of the Linux kernel development process. + +7.1: MANAGING PATCHES WITH GIT + +The use of distributed version control for the kernel began in early 2002, +when Linus first started playing with the proprietary BitKeeper +application. While BitKeeper was controversial, the approach to software +version management it embodied most certainly was not. Distributed version +control enabled an immediate acceleration of the kernel development +project. In current times, there are several free alternatives to +BitKeeper. For better or for worse, the kernel project has settled on git +as its tool of choice. + +Managing patches with git can make life much easier for the developer, +especially as the volume of those patches grows. Git also has its rough +edges and poses certain hazards; it is a young and powerful tool which is +still being civilized by its developers. This document will not attempt to +teach the reader how to use git; that would be sufficient material for a +long document in its own right. Instead, the focus here will be on how git +fits into the kernel development process in particular. Developers who +wish to come up to speed with git will find more information at: + + http://git.or.cz/ + + http://www.kernel.org/pub/software/scm/git/docs/user-manual.html + +and on various tutorials found on the web. + +The first order of business is to read the above sites and get a solid +understanding of how git works before trying to use it to make patches +available to others. A git-using developer should be able to obtain a copy +of the mainline repository, explore the revision history, commit changes to +the tree, use branches, etc. An understanding of git's tools for the +rewriting of history (such as rebase) is also useful. Git comes with its +own terminology and concepts; a new user of git should know about refs, +remote branches, the index, fast-forward merges, pushes and pulls, detached +heads, etc. It can all be a little intimidating at the outset, but the +concepts are not that hard to grasp with a bit of study. + +Using git to generate patches for submission by email can be a good +exercise while coming up to speed. + +When you are ready to start putting up git trees for others to look at, you +will, of course, need a server that can be pulled from. Setting up such a +server with git-daemon is relatively straightforward if you have a system +which is accessible to the Internet. Otherwise, free, public hosting sites +(Github, for example) are starting to appear on the net. Established +developers can get an account on kernel.org, but those are not easy to come +by; see http://kernel.org/faq/ for more information. + +The normal git workflow involves the use of a lot of branches. Each line +of development can be separated into a separate "topic branch" and +maintained independently. Branches in git are cheap, there is no reason to +not make free use of them. And, in any case, you should not do your +development in any branch which you intend to ask others to pull from. +Publicly-available branches should be created with care; merge in patches +from development branches when they are in complete form and ready to go - +not before. + +Git provides some powerful tools which can allow you to rewrite your +development history. An inconvenient patch (one which breaks bisection, +say, or which has some other sort of obvious bug) can be fixed in place or +made to disappear from the history entirely. A patch series can be +rewritten as if it had been written on top of today's mainline, even though +you have been working on it for months. Changes can be transparently +shifted from one branch to another. And so on. Judicious use of git's +ability to revise history can help in the creation of clean patch sets with +fewer problems. + +Excessive use of this capability can lead to other problems, though, beyond +a simple obsession for the creation of the perfect project history. +Rewriting history will rewrite the changes contained in that history, +turning a tested (hopefully) kernel tree into an untested one. But, beyond +that, developers cannot easily collaborate if they do not have a shared +view of the project history; if you rewrite history which other developers +have pulled into their repositories, you will make life much more difficult +for those developers. So a simple rule of thumb applies here: history +which has been exported to others should generally be seen as immutable +thereafter. + +So, once you push a set of changes to your publicly-available server, those +changes should not be rewritten. Git will attempt to enforce this rule if +you try to push changes which do not result in a fast-forward merge +(i.e. changes which do not share the same history). It is possible to +override this check, and there may be times when it is necessary to rewrite +an exported tree. Moving changesets between trees to avoid conflicts in +linux-next is one example. But such actions should be rare. This is one +of the reasons why development should be done in private branches (which +can be rewritten if necessary) and only moved into public branches when +it's in a reasonably advanced state. + +As the mainline (or other tree upon which a set of changes is based) +advances, it is tempting to merge with that tree to stay on the leading +edge. For a private branch, rebasing can be an easy way to keep up with +another tree, but rebasing is not an option once a tree is exported to the +world. Once that happens, a full merge must be done. Merging occasionally +makes good sense, but overly frequent merges can clutter the history +needlessly. Suggested technique in this case is to merge infrequently, and +generally only at specific release points (such as a mainline -rc +release). If you are nervous about specific changes, you can always +perform test merges in a private branch. The git "rerere" tool can be +useful in such situations; it remembers how merge conflicts were resolved +so that you don't have to do the same work twice. + +One of the biggest recurring complaints about tools like git is this: the +mass movement of patches from one repository to another makes it easy to +slip in ill-advised changes which go into the mainline below the review +radar. Kernel developers tend to get unhappy when they see that kind of +thing happening; putting up a git tree with unreviewed or off-topic patches +can affect your ability to get trees pulled in the future. Quoting Linus: + + You can send me patches, but for me to pull a git patch from you, I + need to know that you know what you're doing, and I need to be able + to trust things *without* then having to go and check every + individual change by hand. + +(http://lwn.net/Articles/224135/). + +To avoid this kind of situation, ensure that all patches within a given +branch stick closely to the associated topic; a "driver fixes" branch +should not be making changes to the core memory management code. And, most +importantly, do not use a git tree to bypass the review process. Post an +occasional summary of the tree to the relevant list, and, when the time is +right, request that the tree be included in linux-next. + +If and when others start to send patches for inclusion into your tree, +don't forget to review them. Also ensure that you maintain the correct +authorship information; the git "am" tool does its best in this regard, but +you may have to add a "From:" line to the patch if it has been relayed to +you via a third party. + +When requesting a pull, be sure to give all the relevant information: where +your tree is, what branch to pull, and what changes will result from the +pull. The git request-pull command can be helpful in this regard; it will +format the request as other developers expect, and will also check to be +sure that you have remembered to push those changes to the public server. + + +7.2: REVIEWING PATCHES + +Some readers will certainly object to putting this section with "advanced +topics" on the grounds that even beginning kernel developers should be +reviewing patches. It is certainly true that there is no better way to +learn how to program in the kernel environment than by looking at code +posted by others. In addition, reviewers are forever in short supply; by +looking at code you can make a significant contribution to the process as a +whole. + +Reviewing code can be an intimidating prospect, especially for a new kernel +developer who may well feel nervous about questioning code - in public - +which has been posted by those with more experience. Even code written by +the most experienced developers can be improved, though. Perhaps the best +piece of advice for reviewers (all reviewers) is this: phrase review +comments as questions rather than criticisms. Asking "how does the lock +get released in this path?" will always work better than stating "the +locking here is wrong." + +Different developers will review code from different points of view. Some +are mostly concerned with coding style and whether code lines have trailing +white space. Others will focus primarily on whether the change implemented +by the patch as a whole is a good thing for the kernel or not. Yet others +will check for problematic locking, excessive stack usage, possible +security issues, duplication of code found elsewhere, adequate +documentation, adverse effects on performance, user-space ABI changes, etc. +All types of review, if they lead to better code going into the kernel, are +welcome and worthwhile. + + diff --git a/Documentation/development-process/8.Conclusion b/Documentation/development-process/8.Conclusion new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1990ab4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/development-process/8.Conclusion @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +8: FOR MORE INFORMATION + +There are numerous sources of information on Linux kernel development and +related topics. First among those will always be the Documentation +directory found in the kernel source distribution. The top-level HOWTO +file is an important starting point; SubmittingPatches and +SubmittingDrivers are also something which all kernel developers should +read. Many internal kernel APIs are documented using the kerneldoc +mechanism; "make htmldocs" or "make pdfdocs" can be used to generate those +documents in HTML or PDF format (though the version of TeX shipped by some +distributions runs into internal limits and fails to process the documents +properly). + +Various web sites discuss kernel development at all levels of detail. Your +author would like to humbly suggest http://lwn.net/ as a source; +information on many specific kernel topics can be found via the LWN kernel +index at: + + http://lwn.net/Kernel/Index/ + +Beyond that, a valuable resource for kernel developers is: + + http://kernelnewbies.org/ + +Information about the linux-next tree gathers at: + + http://linux.f-seidel.de/linux-next/pmwiki/ + +And, of course, one should not forget http://kernel.org/, the definitive +location for kernel release information. + +There are a number of books on kernel development: + + Linux Device Drivers, 3rd Edition (Jonathan Corbet, Alessandro + Rubini, and Greg Kroah-Hartman). Online at + http://lwn.net/Kernel/LDD3/. + + Linux Kernel Development (Robert Love). + + Understanding the Linux Kernel (Daniel Bovet and Marco Cesati). + +All of these books suffer from a common fault, though: they tend to be +somewhat obsolete by the time they hit the shelves, and they have been on +the shelves for a while now. Still, there is quite a bit of good +information to be found there. + +Documentation for git can be found at: + + http://www.kernel.org/pub/software/scm/git/docs/ + + http://www.kernel.org/pub/software/scm/git/docs/user-manual.html + + +9: CONCLUSION + +Congratulations to anybody who has made it through this long-winded +document. Hopefully it has provided a helpful understanding of how the +Linux kernel is developed and how you can participate in that process. + +In the end, it's the participation that matters. Any open source software +project is no more than the sum of what its contributors put into it. The +Linux kernel has progressed as quickly and as well as it has because it has +been helped by an impressively large group of developers, all of whom are +working to make it better. The kernel is a premier example of what can be +done when thousands of people work together toward a common goal. + +The kernel can always benefit from a larger developer base, though. There +is always more work to do. But, just as importantly, most other +participants in the Linux ecosystem can benefit through contributing to the +kernel. Getting code into the mainline is the key to higher code quality, +lower maintenance and distribution costs, a higher level of influence over +the direction of kernel development, and more. It is a situation where +everybody involved wins. Fire up your editor and come join us; you will be +more than welcome. -- cgit v1.1 From 58bae1f5cfd077f7f5f3af5d1ac50c3a82ac6411 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Hidetoshi Seto Date: Tue, 13 May 2008 13:36:55 +0900 Subject: doc: Test-by? Commonly used is "Tested-by." Signed-off-by: Hidetoshi Seto Signed-off-by: Jonathan Corbet --- Documentation/SubmittingPatches | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches index f79ad9f..0d601cb 100644 --- a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches +++ b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches @@ -405,7 +405,7 @@ person it names. This tag documents that potentially interested parties have been included in the discussion -14) Using Test-by: and Reviewed-by: +14) Using Tested-by: and Reviewed-by: A Tested-by: tag indicates that the patch has been successfully tested (in some environment) by the person named. This tag informs maintainers that -- cgit v1.1 From 7e3975617df8dd8b7fd94f14200abdec9f71729e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jonathan Corbet Date: Thu, 16 Oct 2008 11:53:20 -0600 Subject: Remove videobook.tmpl This document describes the long-deprecated V4L1 interface. In-tree, it can only serve to encourage developers to write drivers to the wrong API. Remove it in favor of the V4L2 documentation which must surely show up someday. Acked-by: Alan Cox Acked-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab Signed-off-by: Jonathan Corbet --- Documentation/DocBook/Makefile | 2 +- Documentation/DocBook/videobook.tmpl | 1654 ---------------------------------- 2 files changed, 1 insertion(+), 1655 deletions(-) delete mode 100644 Documentation/DocBook/videobook.tmpl (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile index 1615350..fabc064 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ # To add a new book the only step required is to add the book to the # list of DOCBOOKS. -DOCBOOKS := wanbook.xml z8530book.xml mcabook.xml videobook.xml \ +DOCBOOKS := wanbook.xml z8530book.xml mcabook.xml \ kernel-hacking.xml kernel-locking.xml deviceiobook.xml \ procfs-guide.xml writing_usb_driver.xml networking.xml \ kernel-api.xml filesystems.xml lsm.xml usb.xml kgdb.xml \ diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/videobook.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/videobook.tmpl deleted file mode 100644 index 0bc2594..0000000 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/videobook.tmpl +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1654 +0,0 @@ - - - - - - Video4Linux Programming - - - - Alan - Cox - -
- alan@redhat.com -
- - - - - - 2000 - Alan Cox - - - - - This documentation is free software; you can redistribute - it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public - License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either - version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later - version. - - - - This program is distributed in the hope that it will be - useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied - warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. - See the GNU General Public License for more details. - - - - You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public - License along with this program; if not, write to the Free - Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, - MA 02111-1307 USA - - - - For more details see the file COPYING in the source - distribution of Linux. - - - - - - - - Introduction - - Parts of this document first appeared in Linux Magazine under a - ninety day exclusivity. - - - Video4Linux is intended to provide a common programming interface - for the many TV and capture cards now on the market, as well as - parallel port and USB video cameras. Radio, teletext decoders and - vertical blanking data interfaces are also provided. - - - - Radio Devices - - There are a wide variety of radio interfaces available for PC's, and these - are generally very simple to program. The biggest problem with supporting - such devices is normally extracting documentation from the vendor. - - - The radio interface supports a simple set of control ioctls standardised - across all radio and tv interfaces. It does not support read or write, which - are used for video streams. The reason radio cards do not allow you to read - the audio stream into an application is that without exception they provide - a connection on to a soundcard. Soundcards can be used to read the radio - data just fine. - - - Registering Radio Devices - - The Video4linux core provides an interface for registering devices. The - first step in writing our radio card driver is to register it. - - - - -static struct video_device my_radio -{ - "My radio", - VID_TYPE_TUNER, - radio_open. - radio_close, - NULL, /* no read */ - NULL, /* no write */ - NULL, /* no poll */ - radio_ioctl, - NULL, /* no special init function */ - NULL /* no private data */ -}; - - - - - This declares our video4linux device driver interface. The VID_TYPE_ value - defines what kind of an interface we are, and defines basic capabilities. - - - The only defined value relevant for a radio card is VID_TYPE_TUNER which - indicates that the device can be tuned. Clearly our radio is going to have some - way to change channel so it is tuneable. - - - We declare an open and close routine, but we do not need read or write, - which are used to read and write video data to or from the card itself. As - we have no read or write there is no poll function. - - - The private initialise function is run when the device is registered. In - this driver we've already done all the work needed. The final pointer is a - private data pointer that can be used by the device driver to attach and - retrieve private data structures. We set this field "priv" to NULL for - the moment. - - - Having the structure defined is all very well but we now need to register it - with the kernel. - - - - -static int io = 0x320; - -int __init myradio_init(struct video_init *v) -{ - if(!request_region(io, MY_IO_SIZE, "myradio")) - { - printk(KERN_ERR - "myradio: port 0x%03X is in use.\n", io); - return -EBUSY; - } - - if(video_device_register(&my_radio, VFL_TYPE_RADIO)==-1) { - release_region(io, MY_IO_SIZE); - return -EINVAL; - } - return 0; -} - - - - The first stage of the initialisation, as is normally the case, is to check - that the I/O space we are about to fiddle with doesn't belong to some other - driver. If it is we leave well alone. If the user gives the address of the - wrong device then we will spot this. These policies will generally avoid - crashing the machine. - - - Now we ask the Video4Linux layer to register the device for us. We hand it - our carefully designed video_device structure and also tell it which group - of devices we want it registered with. In this case VFL_TYPE_RADIO. - - - The types available are - - Device Types - - - - VFL_TYPE_RADIO/dev/radio{n} - - Radio devices are assigned in this block. As with all of these - selections the actual number assignment is done by the video layer - accordijng to what is free. - - VFL_TYPE_GRABBER/dev/video{n} - Video capture devices and also -- counter-intuitively for the name -- - hardware video playback devices such as MPEG2 cards. - - VFL_TYPE_VBI/dev/vbi{n} - The VBI devices capture the hidden lines on a television picture - that carry further information like closed caption data, teletext - (primarily in Europe) and now Intercast and the ATVEC internet - television encodings. - - VFL_TYPE_VTX/dev/vtx[n} - VTX is 'Videotext' also known as 'Teletext'. This is a system for - sending numbered, 40x25, mostly textual page images over the hidden - lines. Unlike the /dev/vbi interfaces, this is for 'smart' decoder - chips. (The use of the word smart here has to be taken in context, - the smartest teletext chips are fairly dumb pieces of technology). - - - - -
- - We are most definitely a radio. - - - Finally we allocate our I/O space so that nobody treads on us and return 0 - to signify general happiness with the state of the universe. - - - - Opening And Closing The Radio - - - The functions we declared in our video_device are mostly very simple. - Firstly we can drop in what is basically standard code for open and close. - - - - -static int users = 0; - -static int radio_open(struct video_device *dev, int flags) -{ - if(users) - return -EBUSY; - users++; - return 0; -} - - - - At open time we need to do nothing but check if someone else is also using - the radio card. If nobody is using it we make a note that we are using it, - then we ensure that nobody unloads our driver on us. - - - - -static int radio_close(struct video_device *dev) -{ - users--; -} - - - - At close time we simply need to reduce the user count and allow the module - to become unloadable. - - - If you are sharp you will have noticed neither the open nor the close - routines attempt to reset or change the radio settings. This is intentional. - It allows an application to set up the radio and exit. It avoids a user - having to leave an application running all the time just to listen to the - radio. - - - - The Ioctl Interface - - This leaves the ioctl routine, without which the driver will not be - terribly useful to anyone. - - - - -static int radio_ioctl(struct video_device *dev, unsigned int cmd, void *arg) -{ - switch(cmd) - { - case VIDIOCGCAP: - { - struct video_capability v; - v.type = VID_TYPE_TUNER; - v.channels = 1; - v.audios = 1; - v.maxwidth = 0; - v.minwidth = 0; - v.maxheight = 0; - v.minheight = 0; - strcpy(v.name, "My Radio"); - if(copy_to_user(arg, &v, sizeof(v))) - return -EFAULT; - return 0; - } - - - - VIDIOCGCAP is the first ioctl all video4linux devices must support. It - allows the applications to find out what sort of a card they have found and - to figure out what they want to do about it. The fields in the structure are - - struct video_capability fields - - - - nameThe device text name. This is intended for the user. - - channelsThe number of different channels you can tune on - this card. It could even by zero for a card that has - no tuning capability. For our simple FM radio it is 1. - An AM/FM radio would report 2. - - audiosThe number of audio inputs on this device. For our - radio there is only one audio input. - - minwidth,minheightThe smallest size the card is capable of capturing - images in. We set these to zero. Radios do not - capture pictures - - maxwidth,maxheightThe largest image size the card is capable of - capturing. For our radio we report 0. - - - typeThis reports the capabilities of the device, and - matches the field we filled in in the struct - video_device when registering. - - - -
- - Having filled in the fields, we use copy_to_user to copy the structure into - the users buffer. If the copy fails we return an EFAULT to the application - so that it knows it tried to feed us garbage. - - - The next pair of ioctl operations select which tuner is to be used and let - the application find the tuner properties. We have only a single FM band - tuner in our example device. - - - - - case VIDIOCGTUNER: - { - struct video_tuner v; - if(copy_from_user(&v, arg, sizeof(v))!=0) - return -EFAULT; - if(v.tuner) - return -EINVAL; - v.rangelow=(87*16000); - v.rangehigh=(108*16000); - v.flags = VIDEO_TUNER_LOW; - v.mode = VIDEO_MODE_AUTO; - v.signal = 0xFFFF; - strcpy(v.name, "FM"); - if(copy_to_user(&v, arg, sizeof(v))!=0) - return -EFAULT; - return 0; - } - - - - The VIDIOCGTUNER ioctl allows applications to query a tuner. The application - sets the tuner field to the tuner number it wishes to query. The query does - not change the tuner that is being used, it merely enquires about the tuner - in question. - - - We have exactly one tuner so after copying the user buffer to our temporary - structure we complain if they asked for a tuner other than tuner 0. - - - The video_tuner structure has the following fields - - struct video_tuner fields - - - - int tunerThe number of the tuner in question - - char name[32]A text description of this tuner. "FM" will do fine. - This is intended for the application. - - u32 flags - Tuner capability flags - - - u16 modeThe current reception mode - - - u16 signalThe signal strength scaled between 0 and 65535. If - a device cannot tell the signal strength it should - report 65535. Many simple cards contain only a - signal/no signal bit. Such cards will report either - 0 or 65535. - - - u32 rangelow, rangehigh - The range of frequencies supported by the radio - or TV. It is scaled according to the VIDEO_TUNER_LOW - flag. - - - - -
- - struct video_tuner flags - - - - VIDEO_TUNER_PALA PAL TV tuner - - VIDEO_TUNER_NTSCAn NTSC (US) TV tuner - - VIDEO_TUNER_SECAMA SECAM (French) TV tuner - - VIDEO_TUNER_LOW - The tuner frequency is scaled in 1/16th of a KHz - steps. If not it is in 1/16th of a MHz steps - - - VIDEO_TUNER_NORMThe tuner can set its format - - VIDEO_TUNER_STEREO_ONThe tuner is currently receiving a stereo signal - - - -
- - struct video_tuner modes - - - - VIDEO_MODE_PALPAL Format - - VIDEO_MODE_NTSCNTSC Format (USA) - - VIDEO_MODE_SECAMFrench Format - - VIDEO_MODE_AUTOA device that does not need to do - TV format switching - - - -
- - The settings for the radio card are thus fairly simple. We report that we - are a tuner called "FM" for FM radio. In order to get the best tuning - resolution we report VIDEO_TUNER_LOW and select tuning to 1/16th of KHz. Its - unlikely our card can do that resolution but it is a fair bet the card can - do better than 1/16th of a MHz. VIDEO_TUNER_LOW is appropriate to almost all - radio usage. - - - We report that the tuner automatically handles deciding what format it is - receiving - true enough as it only handles FM radio. Our example card is - also incapable of detecting stereo or signal strengths so it reports a - strength of 0xFFFF (maximum) and no stereo detected. - - - To finish off we set the range that can be tuned to be 87-108Mhz, the normal - FM broadcast radio range. It is important to find out what the card is - actually capable of tuning. It is easy enough to simply use the FM broadcast - range. Unfortunately if you do this you will discover the FM broadcast - ranges in the USA, Europe and Japan are all subtly different and some users - cannot receive all the stations they wish. - - - The application also needs to be able to set the tuner it wishes to use. In - our case, with a single tuner this is rather simple to arrange. - - - - case VIDIOCSTUNER: - { - struct video_tuner v; - if(copy_from_user(&v, arg, sizeof(v))) - return -EFAULT; - if(v.tuner != 0) - return -EINVAL; - return 0; - } - - - - We copy the user supplied structure into kernel memory so we can examine it. - If the user has selected a tuner other than zero we reject the request. If - they wanted tuner 0 then, surprisingly enough, that is the current tuner already. - - - The next two ioctls we need to provide are to get and set the frequency of - the radio. These both use an unsigned long argument which is the frequency. - The scale of the frequency depends on the VIDEO_TUNER_LOW flag as I - mentioned earlier on. Since we have VIDEO_TUNER_LOW set this will be in - 1/16ths of a KHz. - - - -static unsigned long current_freq; - - - - case VIDIOCGFREQ: - if(copy_to_user(arg, &current_freq, - sizeof(unsigned long)) - return -EFAULT; - return 0; - - - - Querying the frequency in our case is relatively simple. Our radio card is - too dumb to let us query the signal strength so we remember our setting if - we know it. All we have to do is copy it to the user. - - - - - case VIDIOCSFREQ: - { - u32 freq; - if(copy_from_user(arg, &freq, - sizeof(unsigned long))!=0) - return -EFAULT; - if(hardware_set_freq(freq)<0) - return -EINVAL; - current_freq = freq; - return 0; - } - - - - Setting the frequency is a little more complex. We begin by copying the - desired frequency into kernel space. Next we call a hardware specific routine - to set the radio up. This might be as simple as some scaling and a few - writes to an I/O port. For most radio cards it turns out a good deal more - complicated and may involve programming things like a phase locked loop on - the card. This is what documentation is for. - - - The final set of operations we need to provide for our radio are the - volume controls. Not all radio cards can even do volume control. After all - there is a perfectly good volume control on the sound card. We will assume - our radio card has a simple 4 step volume control. - - - There are two ioctls with audio we need to support - - - -static int current_volume=0; - - case VIDIOCGAUDIO: - { - struct video_audio v; - if(copy_from_user(&v, arg, sizeof(v))) - return -EFAULT; - if(v.audio != 0) - return -EINVAL; - v.volume = 16384*current_volume; - v.step = 16384; - strcpy(v.name, "Radio"); - v.mode = VIDEO_SOUND_MONO; - v.balance = 0; - v.base = 0; - v.treble = 0; - - if(copy_to_user(arg. &v, sizeof(v))) - return -EFAULT; - return 0; - } - - - - Much like the tuner we start by copying the user structure into kernel - space. Again we check if the user has asked for a valid audio input. We have - only input 0 and we punt if they ask for another input. - - - Then we fill in the video_audio structure. This has the following format - - struct video_audio fields - - - - audioThe input the user wishes to query - - volumeThe volume setting on a scale of 0-65535 - - baseThe base level on a scale of 0-65535 - - trebleThe treble level on a scale of 0-65535 - - flagsThe features this audio device supports - - - nameA text name to display to the user. We picked - "Radio" as it explains things quite nicely. - - modeThe current reception mode for the audio - - We report MONO because our card is too stupid to know if it is in - mono or stereo. - - - balanceThe stereo balance on a scale of 0-65535, 32768 is - middle. - - stepThe step by which the volume control jumps. This is - used to help make it easy for applications to set - slider behaviour. - - - -
- - struct video_audio flags - - - - VIDEO_AUDIO_MUTEThe audio is currently muted. We - could fake this in our driver but we - choose not to bother. - - VIDEO_AUDIO_MUTABLEThe input has a mute option - - VIDEO_AUDIO_TREBLEThe input has a treble control - - VIDEO_AUDIO_BASSThe input has a base control - - - -
- - struct video_audio modes - - - - VIDEO_SOUND_MONOMono sound - - VIDEO_SOUND_STEREOStereo sound - - VIDEO_SOUND_LANG1Alternative language 1 (TV specific) - - VIDEO_SOUND_LANG2Alternative language 2 (TV specific) - - - -
- - Having filled in the structure we copy it back to user space. - - - The VIDIOCSAUDIO ioctl allows the user to set the audio parameters in the - video_audio structure. The driver does its best to honour the request. - - - - case VIDIOCSAUDIO: - { - struct video_audio v; - if(copy_from_user(&v, arg, sizeof(v))) - return -EFAULT; - if(v.audio) - return -EINVAL; - current_volume = v/16384; - hardware_set_volume(current_volume); - return 0; - } - - - - In our case there is very little that the user can set. The volume is - basically the limit. Note that we could pretend to have a mute feature - by rewriting this to - - - - case VIDIOCSAUDIO: - { - struct video_audio v; - if(copy_from_user(&v, arg, sizeof(v))) - return -EFAULT; - if(v.audio) - return -EINVAL; - current_volume = v/16384; - if(v.flags&VIDEO_AUDIO_MUTE) - hardware_set_volume(0); - else - hardware_set_volume(current_volume); - current_muted = v.flags & - VIDEO_AUDIO_MUTE; - return 0; - } - - - - This with the corresponding changes to the VIDIOCGAUDIO code to report the - state of the mute flag we save and to report the card has a mute function, - will allow applications to use a mute facility with this card. It is - questionable whether this is a good idea however. User applications can already - fake this themselves and kernel space is precious. - - - We now have a working radio ioctl handler. So we just wrap up the function - - - - - } - return -ENOIOCTLCMD; -} - - - - and pass the Video4Linux layer back an error so that it knows we did not - understand the request we got passed. - - - - Module Wrapper - - Finally we add in the usual module wrapping and the driver is done. - - - -#ifndef MODULE - -static int io = 0x300; - -#else - -static int io = -1; - -#endif - -MODULE_AUTHOR("Alan Cox"); -MODULE_DESCRIPTION("A driver for an imaginary radio card."); -module_param(io, int, 0444); -MODULE_PARM_DESC(io, "I/O address of the card."); - -static int __init init(void) -{ - if(io==-1) - { - printk(KERN_ERR - "You must set an I/O address with io=0x???\n"); - return -EINVAL; - } - return myradio_init(NULL); -} - -static void __exit cleanup(void) -{ - video_unregister_device(&my_radio); - release_region(io, MY_IO_SIZE); -} - -module_init(init); -module_exit(cleanup); - - - - In this example we set the IO base by default if the driver is compiled into - the kernel: you can still set it using "my_radio.irq" if this file is called my_radio.c. For the module we require the - user sets the parameter. We set io to a nonsense port (-1) so that we can - tell if the user supplied an io parameter or not. - - - We use MODULE_ defines to give an author for the card driver and a - description. We also use them to declare that io is an integer and it is the - address of the card, and can be read by anyone from sysfs. - - - The clean-up routine unregisters the video_device we registered, and frees - up the I/O space. Note that the unregister takes the actual video_device - structure as its argument. Unlike the file operations structure which can be - shared by all instances of a device a video_device structure as an actual - instance of the device. If you are registering multiple radio devices you - need to fill in one structure per device (most likely by setting up a - template and copying it to each of the actual device structures). - - - - - Video Capture Devices - - Video Capture Device Types - - The video capture devices share the same interfaces as radio devices. In - order to explain the video capture interface I will use the example of a - camera that has no tuners or audio input. This keeps the example relatively - clean. To get both combine the two driver examples. - - - Video capture devices divide into four categories. A little technology - backgrounder. Full motion video even at television resolution (which is - actually fairly low) is pretty resource-intensive. You are continually - passing megabytes of data every second from the capture card to the display. - several alternative approaches have emerged because copying this through the - processor and the user program is a particularly bad idea . - - - The first is to add the television image onto the video output directly. - This is also how some 3D cards work. These basic cards can generally drop the - video into any chosen rectangle of the display. Cards like this, which - include most mpeg1 cards that used the feature connector, aren't very - friendly in a windowing environment. They don't understand windows or - clipping. The video window is always on the top of the display. - - - Chroma keying is a technique used by cards to get around this. It is an old - television mixing trick where you mark all the areas you wish to replace - with a single clear colour that isn't used in the image - TV people use an - incredibly bright blue while computing people often use a particularly - virulent purple. Bright blue occurs on the desktop. Anyone with virulent - purple windows has another problem besides their TV overlay. - - - The third approach is to copy the data from the capture card to the video - card, but to do it directly across the PCI bus. This relieves the processor - from doing the work but does require some smartness on the part of the video - capture chip, as well as a suitable video card. Programming this kind of - card and more so debugging it can be extremely tricky. There are some quite - complicated interactions with the display and you may also have to cope with - various chipset bugs that show up when PCI cards start talking to each - other. - - - To keep our example fairly simple we will assume a card that supports - overlaying a flat rectangular image onto the frame buffer output, and which - can also capture stuff into processor memory. - - - - Registering Video Capture Devices - - This time we need to add more functions for our camera device. - - -static struct video_device my_camera -{ - "My Camera", - VID_TYPE_OVERLAY|VID_TYPE_SCALES|\ - VID_TYPE_CAPTURE|VID_TYPE_CHROMAKEY, - camera_open. - camera_close, - camera_read, /* no read */ - NULL, /* no write */ - camera_poll, /* no poll */ - camera_ioctl, - NULL, /* no special init function */ - NULL /* no private data */ -}; - - - We need a read() function which is used for capturing data from - the card, and we need a poll function so that a driver can wait for the next - frame to be captured. - - - We use the extra video capability flags that did not apply to the - radio interface. The video related flags are - - Capture Capabilities - - - -VID_TYPE_CAPTUREWe support image capture - -VID_TYPE_TELETEXTA teletext capture device (vbi{n]) - -VID_TYPE_OVERLAYThe image can be directly overlaid onto the - frame buffer - -VID_TYPE_CHROMAKEYChromakey can be used to select which parts - of the image to display - -VID_TYPE_CLIPPINGIt is possible to give the board a list of - rectangles to draw around. - -VID_TYPE_FRAMERAMThe video capture goes into the video memory - and actually changes it. Applications need - to know this so they can clean up after the - card - -VID_TYPE_SCALESThe image can be scaled to various sizes, - rather than being a single fixed size. - -VID_TYPE_MONOCHROMEThe capture will be monochrome. This isn't a - complete answer to the question since a mono - camera on a colour capture card will still - produce mono output. - -VID_TYPE_SUBCAPTUREThe card allows only part of its field of - view to be captured. This enables - applications to avoid copying all of a large - image into memory when only some section is - relevant. - - - -
- - We set VID_TYPE_CAPTURE so that we are seen as a capture card, - VID_TYPE_CHROMAKEY so the application knows it is time to draw in virulent - purple, and VID_TYPE_SCALES because we can be resized. - - - Our setup is fairly similar. This time we also want an interrupt line - for the 'frame captured' signal. Not all cards have this so some of them - cannot handle poll(). - - - - -static int io = 0x320; -static int irq = 11; - -int __init mycamera_init(struct video_init *v) -{ - if(!request_region(io, MY_IO_SIZE, "mycamera")) - { - printk(KERN_ERR - "mycamera: port 0x%03X is in use.\n", io); - return -EBUSY; - } - - if(video_device_register(&my_camera, - VFL_TYPE_GRABBER)==-1) { - release_region(io, MY_IO_SIZE); - return -EINVAL; - } - return 0; -} - - - - This is little changed from the needs of the radio card. We specify - VFL_TYPE_GRABBER this time as we want to be allocated a /dev/video name. - - - - Opening And Closing The Capture Device - - - -static int users = 0; - -static int camera_open(struct video_device *dev, int flags) -{ - if(users) - return -EBUSY; - if(request_irq(irq, camera_irq, 0, "camera", dev)<0) - return -EBUSY; - users++; - return 0; -} - - -static int camera_close(struct video_device *dev) -{ - users--; - free_irq(irq, dev); -} - - - The open and close routines are also quite similar. The only real change is - that we now request an interrupt for the camera device interrupt line. If we - cannot get the interrupt we report EBUSY to the application and give up. - - - - Interrupt Handling - - Our example handler is for an ISA bus device. If it was PCI you would be - able to share the interrupt and would have set IRQF_SHARED to indicate a - shared IRQ. We pass the device pointer as the interrupt routine argument. We - don't need to since we only support one card but doing this will make it - easier to upgrade the driver for multiple devices in the future. - - - Our interrupt routine needs to do little if we assume the card can simply - queue one frame to be read after it captures it. - - - - -static struct wait_queue *capture_wait; -static int capture_ready = 0; - -static void camera_irq(int irq, void *dev_id, - struct pt_regs *regs) -{ - capture_ready=1; - wake_up_interruptible(&capture_wait); -} - - - The interrupt handler is nice and simple for this card as we are assuming - the card is buffering the frame for us. This means we have little to do but - wake up anybody interested. We also set a capture_ready flag, as we may - capture a frame before an application needs it. In this case we need to know - that a frame is ready. If we had to collect the frame on the interrupt life - would be more complex. - - - The two new routines we need to supply are camera_read which returns a - frame, and camera_poll which waits for a frame to become ready. - - - - -static int camera_poll(struct video_device *dev, - struct file *file, struct poll_table *wait) -{ - poll_wait(file, &capture_wait, wait); - if(capture_read) - return POLLIN|POLLRDNORM; - return 0; -} - - - - Our wait queue for polling is the capture_wait queue. This will cause the - task to be woken up by our camera_irq routine. We check capture_read to see - if there is an image present and if so report that it is readable. - - - - Reading The Video Image - - - -static long camera_read(struct video_device *dev, char *buf, - unsigned long count) -{ - struct wait_queue wait = { current, NULL }; - u8 *ptr; - int len; - int i; - - add_wait_queue(&capture_wait, &wait); - - while(!capture_ready) - { - if(file->flags&O_NDELAY) - { - remove_wait_queue(&capture_wait, &wait); - current->state = TASK_RUNNING; - return -EWOULDBLOCK; - } - if(signal_pending(current)) - { - remove_wait_queue(&capture_wait, &wait); - current->state = TASK_RUNNING; - return -ERESTARTSYS; - } - schedule(); - current->state = TASK_INTERRUPTIBLE; - } - remove_wait_queue(&capture_wait, &wait); - current->state = TASK_RUNNING; - - - - The first thing we have to do is to ensure that the application waits until - the next frame is ready. The code here is almost identical to the mouse code - we used earlier in this chapter. It is one of the common building blocks of - Linux device driver code and probably one which you will find occurs in any - drivers you write. - - - We wait for a frame to be ready, or for a signal to interrupt our waiting. If a - signal occurs we need to return from the system call so that the signal can - be sent to the application itself. We also check to see if the user actually - wanted to avoid waiting - ie if they are using non-blocking I/O and have other things - to get on with. - - - Next we copy the data from the card to the user application. This is rarely - as easy as our example makes out. We will add capture_w, and capture_h here - to hold the width and height of the captured image. We assume the card only - supports 24bit RGB for now. - - - - - - capture_ready = 0; - - ptr=(u8 *)buf; - len = capture_w * 3 * capture_h; /* 24bit RGB */ - - if(len>count) - len=count; /* Doesn't all fit */ - - for(i=0; i<len; i++) - { - put_user(inb(io+IMAGE_DATA), ptr); - ptr++; - } - - hardware_restart_capture(); - - return i; -} - - - - For a real hardware device you would try to avoid the loop with put_user(). - Each call to put_user() has a time overhead checking whether the accesses to user - space are allowed. It would be better to read a line into a temporary buffer - then copy this to user space in one go. - - - Having captured the image and put it into user space we can kick the card to - get the next frame acquired. - - - - Video Ioctl Handling - - As with the radio driver the major control interface is via the ioctl() - function. Video capture devices support the same tuner calls as a radio - device and also support additional calls to control how the video functions - are handled. In this simple example the card has no tuners to avoid making - the code complex. - - - - - -static int camera_ioctl(struct video_device *dev, unsigned int cmd, void *arg) -{ - switch(cmd) - { - case VIDIOCGCAP: - { - struct video_capability v; - v.type = VID_TYPE_CAPTURE|\ - VID_TYPE_CHROMAKEY|\ - VID_TYPE_SCALES|\ - VID_TYPE_OVERLAY; - v.channels = 1; - v.audios = 0; - v.maxwidth = 640; - v.minwidth = 16; - v.maxheight = 480; - v.minheight = 16; - strcpy(v.name, "My Camera"); - if(copy_to_user(arg, &v, sizeof(v))) - return -EFAULT; - return 0; - } - - - - - The first ioctl we must support and which all video capture and radio - devices are required to support is VIDIOCGCAP. This behaves exactly the same - as with a radio device. This time, however, we report the extra capabilities - we outlined earlier on when defining our video_dev structure. - - - We now set the video flags saying that we support overlay, capture, - scaling and chromakey. We also report size limits - our smallest image is - 16x16 pixels, our largest is 640x480. - - - To keep things simple we report no audio and no tuning capabilities at all. - - - - case VIDIOCGCHAN: - { - struct video_channel v; - if(copy_from_user(&v, arg, sizeof(v))) - return -EFAULT; - if(v.channel != 0) - return -EINVAL; - v.flags = 0; - v.tuners = 0; - v.type = VIDEO_TYPE_CAMERA; - v.norm = VIDEO_MODE_AUTO; - strcpy(v.name, "Camera Input");break; - if(copy_to_user(&v, arg, sizeof(v))) - return -EFAULT; - return 0; - } - - - - - This follows what is very much the standard way an ioctl handler looks - in Linux. We copy the data into a kernel space variable and we check that the - request is valid (in this case that the input is 0). Finally we copy the - camera info back to the user. - - - The VIDIOCGCHAN ioctl allows a user to ask about video channels (that is - inputs to the video card). Our example card has a single camera input. The - fields in the structure are - - struct video_channel fields - - - - - channelThe channel number we are selecting - - nameThe name for this channel. This is intended - to describe the port to the user. - Appropriate names are therefore things like - "Camera" "SCART input" - - flagsChannel properties - - typeInput type - - normThe current television encoding being used - if relevant for this channel. - - - - -
- struct video_channel flags - - - - VIDEO_VC_TUNERChannel has a tuner. - - VIDEO_VC_AUDIOChannel has audio. - - - -
- struct video_channel types - - - - VIDEO_TYPE_TVTelevision input. - - VIDEO_TYPE_CAMERAFixed camera input. - - 0Type is unknown. - - - -
- struct video_channel norms - - - - VIDEO_MODE_PALPAL encoded Television - - VIDEO_MODE_NTSCNTSC (US) encoded Television - - VIDEO_MODE_SECAMSECAM (French) Television - - VIDEO_MODE_AUTOAutomatic switching, or format does not - matter - - - -
- - The corresponding VIDIOCSCHAN ioctl allows a user to change channel and to - request the norm is changed - for example to switch between a PAL or an NTSC - format camera. - - - - - case VIDIOCSCHAN: - { - struct video_channel v; - if(copy_from_user(&v, arg, sizeof(v))) - return -EFAULT; - if(v.channel != 0) - return -EINVAL; - if(v.norm != VIDEO_MODE_AUTO) - return -EINVAL; - return 0; - } - - - - - The implementation of this call in our driver is remarkably easy. Because we - are assuming fixed format hardware we need only check that the user has not - tried to change anything. - - - The user also needs to be able to configure and adjust the picture they are - seeing. This is much like adjusting a television set. A user application - also needs to know the palette being used so that it knows how to display - the image that has been captured. The VIDIOCGPICT and VIDIOCSPICT ioctl - calls provide this information. - - - - - case VIDIOCGPICT - { - struct video_picture v; - v.brightness = hardware_brightness(); - v.hue = hardware_hue(); - v.colour = hardware_saturation(); - v.contrast = hardware_brightness(); - /* Not settable */ - v.whiteness = 32768; - v.depth = 24; /* 24bit */ - v.palette = VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB24; - if(copy_to_user(&v, arg, - sizeof(v))) - return -EFAULT; - return 0; - } - - - - - The brightness, hue, color, and contrast provide the picture controls that - are akin to a conventional television. Whiteness provides additional - control for greyscale images. All of these values are scaled between 0-65535 - and have 32768 as the mid point setting. The scaling means that applications - do not have to worry about the capability range of the hardware but can let - it make a best effort attempt. - - - Our depth is 24, as this is in bits. We will be returning RGB24 format. This - has one byte of red, then one of green, then one of blue. This then repeats - for every other pixel in the image. The other common formats the interface - defines are - - Framebuffer Encodings - - - - GREYLinear greyscale. This is for simple cameras and the - like - - RGB565The top 5 bits hold 32 red levels, the next six bits - hold green and the low 5 bits hold blue. - - RGB555The top bit is clear. The red green and blue levels - each occupy five bits. - - - -
- - Additional modes are support for YUV capture formats. These are common for - TV and video conferencing applications. - - - The VIDIOCSPICT ioctl allows a user to set some of the picture parameters. - Exactly which ones are supported depends heavily on the card itself. It is - possible to support many modes and effects in software. In general doing - this in the kernel is a bad idea. Video capture is a performance-sensitive - application and the programs can often do better if they aren't being - 'helped' by an overkeen driver writer. Thus for our device we will report - RGB24 only and refuse to allow a change. - - - - - case VIDIOCSPICT: - { - struct video_picture v; - if(copy_from_user(&v, arg, sizeof(v))) - return -EFAULT; - if(v.depth!=24 || - v.palette != VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB24) - return -EINVAL; - set_hardware_brightness(v.brightness); - set_hardware_hue(v.hue); - set_hardware_saturation(v.colour); - set_hardware_brightness(v.contrast); - return 0; - } - - - - - We check the user has not tried to change the palette or the depth. We do - not want to carry out some of the changes and then return an error. This may - confuse the application which will be assuming no change occurred. - - - In much the same way as you need to be able to set the picture controls to - get the right capture images, many cards need to know what they are - displaying onto when generating overlay output. In some cases getting this - wrong even makes a nasty mess or may crash the computer. For that reason - the VIDIOCSBUF ioctl used to set up the frame buffer information may well - only be usable by root. - - - We will assume our card is one of the old ISA devices with feature connector - and only supports a couple of standard video modes. Very common for older - cards although the PCI devices are way smarter than this. - - - - -static struct video_buffer capture_fb; - - case VIDIOCGFBUF: - { - if(copy_to_user(arg, &capture_fb, - sizeof(capture_fb))) - return -EFAULT; - return 0; - - } - - - - - We keep the frame buffer information in the format the ioctl uses. This - makes it nice and easy to work with in the ioctl calls. - - - - case VIDIOCSFBUF: - { - struct video_buffer v; - - if(!capable(CAP_SYS_ADMIN)) - return -EPERM; - - if(copy_from_user(&v, arg, sizeof(v))) - return -EFAULT; - if(v.width!=320 && v.width!=640) - return -EINVAL; - if(v.height!=200 && v.height!=240 - && v.height!=400 - && v.height !=480) - return -EINVAL; - memcpy(&capture_fb, &v, sizeof(v)); - hardware_set_fb(&v); - return 0; - } - - - - - - The capable() function checks a user has the required capability. The Linux - operating system has a set of about 30 capabilities indicating privileged - access to services. The default set up gives the superuser (uid 0) all of - them and nobody else has any. - - - We check that the user has the SYS_ADMIN capability, that is they are - allowed to operate as the machine administrator. We don't want anyone but - the administrator making a mess of the display. - - - Next we check for standard PC video modes (320 or 640 wide with either - EGA or VGA depths). If the mode is not a standard video mode we reject it as - not supported by our card. If the mode is acceptable we save it so that - VIDIOCFBUF will give the right answer next time it is called. The - hardware_set_fb() function is some undescribed card specific function to - program the card for the desired mode. - - - Before the driver can display an overlay window it needs to know where the - window should be placed, and also how large it should be. If the card - supports clipping it needs to know which rectangles to omit from the - display. The video_window structure is used to describe the way the image - should be displayed. - - struct video_window fields - - - - widthThe width in pixels of the desired image. The card - may use a smaller size if this size is not available - - heightThe height of the image. The card may use a smaller - size if this size is not available. - - x The X position of the top left of the window. This - is in pixels relative to the left hand edge of the - picture. Not all cards can display images aligned on - any pixel boundary. If the position is unsuitable - the card adjusts the image right and reduces the - width. - - y The Y position of the top left of the window. This - is counted in pixels relative to the top edge of the - picture. As with the width if the card cannot - display starting on this line it will adjust the - values. - - chromakeyThe colour (expressed in RGB32 format) for the - chromakey colour if chroma keying is being used. - - clipsAn array of rectangles that must not be drawn - over. - - clipcountThe number of clips in this array. - - - -
- - Each clip is a struct video_clip which has the following fields - - video_clip fields - - - - x, yCo-ordinates relative to the display - - width, heightWidth and height in pixels - - nextA spare field for the application to use - - - -
- - The driver is required to ensure it always draws in the area requested or a smaller area, and that it never draws in any of the areas that are clipped. - This may well mean it has to leave alone. small areas the application wished to be - drawn. - - - Our example card uses chromakey so does not have to address most of the - clipping. We will add a video_window structure to our global variables to - remember our parameters, as we did with the frame buffer. - - - - - case VIDIOCGWIN: - { - if(copy_to_user(arg, &capture_win, - sizeof(capture_win))) - return -EFAULT; - return 0; - } - - - case VIDIOCSWIN: - { - struct video_window v; - if(copy_from_user(&v, arg, sizeof(v))) - return -EFAULT; - if(v.width > 640 || v.height > 480) - return -EINVAL; - if(v.width < 16 || v.height < 16) - return -EINVAL; - hardware_set_key(v.chromakey); - hardware_set_window(v); - memcpy(&capture_win, &v, sizeof(v)); - capture_w = v.width; - capture_h = v.height; - return 0; - } - - - - - Because we are using Chromakey our setup is fairly simple. Mostly we have to - check the values are sane and load them into the capture card. - - - With all the setup done we can now turn on the actual capture/overlay. This - is done with the VIDIOCCAPTURE ioctl. This takes a single integer argument - where 0 is on and 1 is off. - - - - - case VIDIOCCAPTURE: - { - int v; - if(get_user(v, (int *)arg)) - return -EFAULT; - if(v==0) - hardware_capture_off(); - else - { - if(capture_fb.width == 0 - || capture_w == 0) - return -EINVAL; - hardware_capture_on(); - } - return 0; - } - - - - - We grab the flag from user space and either enable or disable according to - its value. There is one small corner case we have to consider here. Suppose - that the capture was requested before the video window or the frame buffer - had been set up. In those cases there will be unconfigured fields in our - card data, as well as unconfigured hardware settings. We check for this case and - return an error if the frame buffer or the capture window width is zero. - - - - - default: - return -ENOIOCTLCMD; - } -} - - - - We don't need to support any other ioctls, so if we get this far, it is time - to tell the video layer that we don't now what the user is talking about. - - - - Other Functionality - - The Video4Linux layer supports additional features, including a high - performance mmap() based capture mode and capturing part of the image. - These features are out of the scope of the book. You should however have enough - example code to implement most simple video4linux devices for radio and TV - cards. - - - - - Known Bugs And Assumptions - - - Multiple Opens - - - The driver assumes multiple opens should not be allowed. A driver - can work around this but not cleanly. - - - - API Deficiencies - - - The existing API poorly reflects compression capable devices. There - are plans afoot to merge V4L, V4L2 and some other ideas into a - better interface. - - - - - - - - - Public Functions Provided -!Edrivers/media/video/v4l2-dev.c - - - -- cgit v1.1 From 12caa1b6fc3a9772535227c723c11878b5ca618e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Andi Kleen Date: Tue, 7 Oct 2008 12:17:28 +0200 Subject: Add a reference to paper to SubmittingPatches Add a reference to paper to SubmittingPatches For this year's OLS I wrote a paper on successfull strategies to submit difficult kernel patches. Add a reference to it to SubmittingPatches. Signed-off-by: Andi Kleen Signed-off-by: Jonathan Corbet --- Documentation/SubmittingPatches | 5 +++++ 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches index 0d601cb..98aa8b1 100644 --- a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches +++ b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches @@ -672,4 +672,9 @@ Kernel Documentation/CodingStyle: Linus Torvalds's mail on the canonical patch format: + +Andi Kleen, "On submitting kernel patches" + Some strategies to get difficult or controversal changes in. + http://halobates.de/on-submitting-patches.pdf + -- -- cgit v1.1 From b25f29b0da23f4f784f9bcae954b157e1f45cc69 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Frans Pop Date: Wed, 15 Oct 2008 22:01:21 -0700 Subject: pm: document use of RTC in pm_trace As pm_trace uses the system's hardware clock to save its magic value, users of that option should be warned that using this debug option will result in an incorrect system time after resume. Signed-off-by: Frans Pop Acked-by: Pavel Machek Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/power/s2ram.txt | 18 ++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 18 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/power/s2ram.txt b/Documentation/power/s2ram.txt index b05f512..2ebdc60 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/s2ram.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/s2ram.txt @@ -54,3 +54,21 @@ used to run with "radeonfb" (it's an ATI Radeon mobility). It turns out that "radeonfb" simply cannot resume that device - it tries to set the PLL's, and it just _hangs_. Using the regular VGA console and letting X resume it instead works fine. + +NOTE +==== +pm_trace uses the system's Real Time Clock (RTC) to save the magic number. +Reason for this is that the RTC is the only reliably available piece of +hardware during resume operations where a value can be set that will +survive a reboot. + +Consequence is that after a resume (even if it is successful) your system +clock will have a value corresponding to the magic mumber instead of the +correct date/time! It is therefore advisable to use a program like ntp-date +or rdate to reset the correct date/time from an external time source when +using this trace option. + +As the clock keeps ticking it is also essential that the reboot is done +quickly after the resume failure. The trace option does not use the seconds +or the low order bits of the minutes of the RTC, but a too long delay will +corrupt the magic value. -- cgit v1.1 From dd1c53a64a48b6c16f349e46b71f0938d9a4fa1f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: frans Date: Wed, 15 Oct 2008 22:01:30 -0700 Subject: Fix Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt First a file hello.c is created, then the file hello2.c is compiled. Change this to hello.c Signed-off-by: Frans Meulenbroeks Signed-off-by: Rob Landley Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt index 7be232b..62fe9b1 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ User Mode Linux, like so: sleep(999999999); } EOF - gcc -static hello2.c -o init + gcc -static hello.c -o init echo init | cpio -o -H newc | gzip > test.cpio.gz # Testing external initramfs using the initrd loading mechanism. qemu -kernel /boot/vmlinuz -initrd test.cpio.gz /dev/zero -- cgit v1.1 From 404d0ae289f7a76ff233e8fbfde8b1e7b6e62ae3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Danny ter Haar Date: Wed, 15 Oct 2008 22:01:34 -0700 Subject: fix random typos Signed-off-by: Danny ter Haar Cc: Patrick McHardy Cc: Mikael Starvik Cc: Avi Kivity Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/cris/README | 2 +- Documentation/ia64/kvm.txt | 9 +++++---- 2 files changed, 6 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/cris/README b/Documentation/cris/README index 795a1da..d9b0868 100644 --- a/Documentation/cris/README +++ b/Documentation/cris/README @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ operating system. The ETRAX 100LX chip -------------------- -For reference, plase see the press-release: +For reference, please see the press-release: http://www.axis.com/news/us/001101_etrax.htm diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/kvm.txt b/Documentation/ia64/kvm.txt index 914d07f..84f7cb3 100644 --- a/Documentation/ia64/kvm.txt +++ b/Documentation/ia64/kvm.txt @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ -Currently, kvm module in EXPERIMENTAL stage on IA64. This means that -interfaces are not stable enough to use. So, plase had better don't run -critical applications in virtual machine. We will try our best to make it -strong in future versions! +Currently, kvm module is in EXPERIMENTAL stage on IA64. This means that +interfaces are not stable enough to use. So, please don't run critical +applications in virtual machine. +We will try our best to improve it in future versions! + Guide: How to boot up guests on kvm/ia64 This guide is to describe how to enable kvm support for IA-64 systems. -- cgit v1.1 From c80cfb0406c01bb5da91bfe30f5cb1fd96831138 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Bjorn Helgaas Date: Wed, 15 Oct 2008 22:01:35 -0700 Subject: vsprintf: use new vsprintf symbolic function pointer format Use the '%pF' format to get rid of an "#ifdef DEBUG" and make some printks atomic. This removes the last in-tree uses of print_fn_descriptor_symbol(). I marked print_fn_descriptor_symbol() deprecated and scheduled it for removal next year to give time for out-of-tree modules to be updated. parisc's print_fn_descriptor_symbol() is currently broken there (it needs to dereference the function pointer similar to ia64 and power). This patch shouldn't make anything worse, but it means we need to fix dereference_function_descriptor() instead of print_fn_descriptor_symbol() to get meaningful initcall_debug output. Signed-off-by: Bjorn Helgaas Cc: Jesse Barnes Cc: Kyle McMartin Cc: "Rafael J. Wysocki" Cc: Kay Sievers Cc: Greg KH Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt | 9 +++++++++ 1 file changed, 9 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index 4d2566a..f5f812d 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt @@ -294,6 +294,15 @@ Who: Jiri Slaby --------------------------- +What: print_fn_descriptor_symbol() +When: October 2009 +Why: The %pF vsprintf format provides the same functionality in a + simpler way. print_fn_descriptor_symbol() is deprecated but + still present to give out-of-tree modules time to change. +Who: Bjorn Helgaas + +--------------------------- + What: /sys/o2cb symlink When: January 2010 Why: /sys/fs/o2cb is the proper location for this information - /sys/o2cb -- cgit v1.1 From 22b8ce94708f7cdf0b04965c6f7443dfd374c35c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Dave Hansen Date: Wed, 15 Oct 2008 22:01:46 -0700 Subject: profiling: dynamically enable readprofile at runtime Way too often, I have a machine that exhibits some kind of crappy behavior. The CPU looks wedged in the kernel or it is spending way too much system time and I wonder what is responsible. I try to run readprofile. But, of course, Ubuntu doesn't enable it by default. Dang! The reason we boot-time enable it is that it takes a big bufffer that we generally can only bootmem alloc. But, does it hurt to at least try and runtime-alloc it? To use: echo 2 > /sys/kernel/profile Then run readprofile like normal. This should fix the compile issue with allmodconfig. I've compile-tested on a bunch more configs now including a few more architectures. Signed-off-by: Dave Hansen Acked-by: Ingo Molnar Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-profiling | 13 +++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 13 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-profiling (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-profiling b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-profiling new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b02d8b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-profiling @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ +What: /sys/kernel/profile +Date: September 2008 +Contact: Dave Hansen +Description: + /sys/kernel/profile is the runtime equivalent + of the boot-time profile= option. + + You can get the same effect running: + + echo 2 > /sys/kernel/profile + + as you would by issuing profile=2 on the boot + command line. -- cgit v1.1 From 1c828320d2e063dd1ec84e873e6399bfc3d85d6f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Shane McDonald Date: Wed, 15 Oct 2008 22:01:46 -0700 Subject: doc: typo in Documentation/filesystems/nfsroot.txt Add a missing word to the explanation of the purpose of the zdisk and bzdisk make targets. Signed-off-by: Shane McDonald Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/filesystems/nfsroot.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfsroot.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/nfsroot.txt index 31b3291..68baddf 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfsroot.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfsroot.txt @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ They depend on various facilities being available: 3.1) Booting from a floppy using syslinux When building kernels, an easy way to create a boot floppy that uses - syslinux is to use the zdisk or bzdisk make targets which use + syslinux is to use the zdisk or bzdisk make targets which use zimage and bzimage images respectively. Both targets accept the FDARGS parameter which can be used to set the kernel command line. -- cgit v1.1 From 929f37cb3c3e0f4d23d7106693b7067cf72f4dbc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Randy Dunlap Date: Wed, 15 Oct 2008 22:01:48 -0700 Subject: dontdiff: more updates to be closer to gitignore defkeymap.c_shipped should be diffed if it is changed. Reported-by: Mike Galbraith COPYING, CREDITS, .mailmap should be diffed if they are changed. keywords.c_shipped & lex.c_shipped should be diffed when changed. parse.[ch]_shipped should be diffed when changed. Reported-by: Sam Ravnborg vsyscall* updates from a .gitignore patch by "Denis V. Lunev" . *.so.dbg from a .gitignore patch by Thomas Gleixner . binoffset from a .gitignore patch by Uwe Kleine-Koenig . Module.markers from a .gitignore patch by Matthew Wilcox . vmlinux*.lds* should be diffed if changed. Reported-by: Etienne Lorrain vmlinux.lds from a .gitignore patch by Daniel Guilak . *.scr should be diffed if changed. Lots of updates from http://lkml.org/lkml/2008/5/20/32 Reported-by: Bart Van Assche Use ncscope.* instead of *cscope* since the latter may catch too many files. Add *.elf, from a .gitignore patch by Eduard - Gabriel Munteanu . Make firmware entries match .gitignore entries. Make some entries less greedy by removing trailing '*'. Remove "make_times_h" (no such file). Remove "filelist" (no such file). Remove "dummy_sym.c" (no such file). Remove "gen-kdb_cmds.c" (no such file). Remove "gentbl" (no such file). Remove "kconfig.tk" (no such file). Remove "tkparse" (no such file). Remove "sim710_d.h" (no such file). Remove "53c8xx_d.h" (no such file). Add "syscalltab.h" (generated file). Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/dontdiff | 59 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++---------------------- 1 file changed, 33 insertions(+), 26 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/dontdiff b/Documentation/dontdiff index 2780935..1e89a51 100644 --- a/Documentation/dontdiff +++ b/Documentation/dontdiff @@ -2,11 +2,13 @@ *.aux *.bin *.cpio -*.css +*.csp +*.dsp *.dvi +*.elf *.eps -*.fw.gen.S *.fw +*.gen.S *.gif *.grep *.grp @@ -30,6 +32,7 @@ *.s *.sgml *.so +*.so.dbg *.symtypes *.tab.c *.tab.h @@ -38,24 +41,17 @@ *.xml *_MODULES *_vga16.c -*cscope* *~ *.9 *.9.gz .* -.cscope -.gitignore -.mailmap .mm 53c700_d.h -53c8xx_d.h* -COPYING -CREDITS CVS ChangeSet Image Kerntypes -MODS.txt +Module.markers Module.symvers PENDING SCCS @@ -73,7 +69,9 @@ autoconf.h* bbootsect bin2c binkernel.spec +binoffset bootsect +bounds.h bsetup btfixupprep build @@ -89,39 +87,36 @@ config_data.h* config_data.gz* conmakehash consolemap_deftbl.c* +cpustr.h crc32table.h* cscope.* -defkeymap.c* +defkeymap.c devlist.h* docproc -dummy_sym.c* elf2ecoff elfconfig.h* -filelist fixdep fore200e_mkfirm fore200e_pca_fw.c* gconf gen-devlist -gen-kdb_cmds.c* gen_crc32table gen_init_cpio genksyms -gentbl *_gray256.c +ihex2fw ikconfig.h* initramfs_data.cpio initramfs_data.cpio.gz initramfs_list kallsyms kconfig -kconfig.tk -keywords.c* +keywords.c ksym.c* ksym.h* kxgettext lkc_defs.h -lex.c* +lex.c lex.*.c logo_*.c logo_*_clut224.c @@ -130,7 +125,6 @@ lxdialog mach-types mach-types.h machtypes.h -make_times_h map maui_boot.h mconf @@ -138,6 +132,7 @@ miboot* mk_elfconfig mkboot mkbugboot +mkcpustr mkdep mkprep mktables @@ -145,11 +140,12 @@ mktree modpost modules.order modversions.h* +ncscope.* offset.h offsets.h oui.c* -parse.c* -parse.h* +parse.c +parse.h patches* pca200e.bin pca200e_ecd.bin2 @@ -157,7 +153,7 @@ piggy.gz piggyback pnmtologo ppc_defs.h* -promcon_tbl.c* +promcon_tbl.c pss_boot.h qconf raid6altivec*.c @@ -168,27 +164,38 @@ series setup setup.bin setup.elf -sim710_d.h* sImage sm_tbl* split-include +syscalltab.h tags tftpboot.img timeconst.h times.h* -tkparse trix_boot.h utsrelease.h* +vdso-syms.lds vdso.lds +vdso32-int80-syms.lds +vdso32-syms.lds +vdso32-syscall-syms.lds +vdso32-sysenter-syms.lds +vdso32.lds +vdso32.so.dbg +vdso64.lds +vdso64.so.dbg version.h* vmlinux vmlinux-* vmlinux.aout -vmlinux*.lds* -vmlinux*.scr +vmlinux.lds vsyscall.lds +vsyscall_32.lds wanxlfw.inc uImage unifdef +wakeup.bin +wakeup.elf +wakeup.lds zImage* zconf.hash.c -- cgit v1.1 From 8033fe65a6d6c0e47ba9e3cb2e4e6902f9dfb8dd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Randy Dunlap Date: Wed, 15 Oct 2008 22:01:59 -0700 Subject: documentation: explain memory barriers We want all uses of memory barriers to be explained in the source code. Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/SubmitChecklist | 3 +++ 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/SubmitChecklist b/Documentation/SubmitChecklist index 21f0795..ac5e0b2 100644 --- a/Documentation/SubmitChecklist +++ b/Documentation/SubmitChecklist @@ -85,3 +85,6 @@ kernel patches. 23: Tested after it has been merged into the -mm patchset to make sure that it still works with all of the other queued patches and various changes in the VM, VFS, and other subsystems. + +24: All memory barriers {e.g., barrier(), rmb(), wmb()} need a comment in the + source code that explains the logic of what they are doing and why. -- cgit v1.1 From e1f8e87449147ffe5ea3de64a46af7de450ce279 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Francois Cami Date: Wed, 15 Oct 2008 22:01:59 -0700 Subject: Remove Andrew Morton's old email accounts People can use the real name an an index into MAINTAINERS to find the current email address. Signed-off-by: Francois Cami Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/SAK.txt | 2 +- Documentation/SubmittingDrivers | 2 +- Documentation/networking/cs89x0.txt | 4 ++-- Documentation/networking/vortex.txt | 4 ++-- Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid | 6 +++--- 5 files changed, 9 insertions(+), 9 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/SAK.txt b/Documentation/SAK.txt index b9019ca..74be146 100644 --- a/Documentation/SAK.txt +++ b/Documentation/SAK.txt @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Linux 2.4.2 Secure Attention Key (SAK) handling -18 March 2001, Andrew Morton +18 March 2001, Andrew Morton An operating system's Secure Attention Key is a security tool which is provided as protection against trojan password capturing programs. It diff --git a/Documentation/SubmittingDrivers b/Documentation/SubmittingDrivers index 24f2eb4..99e72a8 100644 --- a/Documentation/SubmittingDrivers +++ b/Documentation/SubmittingDrivers @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ Linux 2.4: Linux 2.6: The same rules apply as 2.4 except that you should follow linux-kernel to track changes in API's. The final contact point for Linux 2.6 - submissions is Andrew Morton . + submissions is Andrew Morton. What Criteria Determine Acceptance ---------------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/networking/cs89x0.txt b/Documentation/networking/cs89x0.txt index 6387d3d..c725d33 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/cs89x0.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/cs89x0.txt @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ NOTE ---- This document was contributed by Cirrus Logic for kernel 2.2.5. This version -has been updated for 2.3.48 by Andrew Morton +has been updated for 2.3.48 by Andrew Morton. Cirrus make a copy of this driver available at their website, as described below. In general, you should use the driver version which @@ -690,7 +690,7 @@ latest drivers and technical publications. 6.4 Current maintainer In February 2000 the maintenance of this driver was assumed by Andrew -Morton +Morton. 6.5 Kernel module parameters diff --git a/Documentation/networking/vortex.txt b/Documentation/networking/vortex.txt index 6356d3f..bd874da 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/vortex.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/vortex.txt @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Documentation/networking/vortex.txt -Andrew Morton +Andrew Morton 30 April 2000 @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ The driver was written by Donald Becker Don is no longer the prime maintainer of this version of the driver. Please report problems to one or more of: - Andrew Morton + Andrew Morton Netdev mailing list Linux kernel mailing list diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid index 37796fe..eaa4801 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid @@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ i. Function reordering so that inline functions are defined before they megaraid_mbox_prepare_pthru, megaraid_mbox_prepare_epthru, megaraid_busywait_mbox - - Andrew Morton , 08.19.2004 + - Andrew Morton, 08.19.2004 linux-scsi mailing list "Something else to clean up after inclusion: every instance of an @@ -471,13 +471,13 @@ vi. Add support for 64-bit applications. Current drivers assume only vii. Move the function declarations for the management module from megaraid_mm.h to megaraid_mm.c - - Andrew Morton , 08.19.2004 + - Andrew Morton, 08.19.2004 linux-scsi mailing list viii. Change default values for MEGARAID_NEWGEN, MEGARAID_MM, and MEGARAID_MAILBOX to 'n' in Kconfig.megaraid - - Andrew Morton , 08.19.2004 + - Andrew Morton, 08.19.2004 linux-scsi mailing list ix. replace udelay with msleep -- cgit v1.1 From 2223c65103d2aa8d0e9c48a956035a1e0353233d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: FD Cami Date: Wed, 15 Oct 2008 22:02:00 -0700 Subject: Remove Andrew Morton's http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/ Remove Andrew Morton's http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/ urls, update to new ones when necessary, delete references otherwise. There are still instances of that living in: Documentation/zh_CN/HOWTO Documentation/zh_CN/SubmittingPatches Documentation/ko_KR/HOWTO Documentation/ja_JP/SubmittingPatches Signed-off-by: Francois Cami Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/HOWTO | 4 ++-- Documentation/SubmittingPatches | 4 ++-- Documentation/filesystems/ext3.txt | 3 +-- Documentation/networking/vortex.txt | 5 ----- 4 files changed, 5 insertions(+), 11 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/HOWTO b/Documentation/HOWTO index 48a3955..8495fc9 100644 --- a/Documentation/HOWTO +++ b/Documentation/HOWTO @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ required reading: Other excellent descriptions of how to create patches properly are: "The Perfect Patch" - http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/patches/stuff/tpp.txt + http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt "Linux kernel patch submission format" http://linux.yyz.us/patch-format.html @@ -620,7 +620,7 @@ all time. It should describe the patch completely, containing: For more details on what this should all look like, please see the ChangeLog section of the document: "The Perfect Patch" - http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/patches/stuff/tpp.txt + http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt diff --git a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches index f79ad9f..bee87f2 100644 --- a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches +++ b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Quilt: http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/quilt Andrew Morton's patch scripts: -http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/patches/ +http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/stuff/patch-scripts.tar.gz Instead of these scripts, quilt is the recommended patch management tool (see above). @@ -653,7 +653,7 @@ SECTION 3 - REFERENCES ---------------------- Andrew Morton, "The perfect patch" (tpp). - + Jeff Garzik, "Linux kernel patch submission format". diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext3.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext3.txt index b45f3c1b..295f26c 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext3.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext3.txt @@ -193,6 +193,5 @@ kernel source: programs: http://e2fsprogs.sourceforge.net/ http://ext2resize.sourceforge.net -useful links: http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/ext3/ext3-usage.html - http://www-106.ibm.com/developerworks/linux/library/l-fs7/ +useful links: http://www-106.ibm.com/developerworks/linux/library/l-fs7/ http://www-106.ibm.com/developerworks/linux/library/l-fs8/ diff --git a/Documentation/networking/vortex.txt b/Documentation/networking/vortex.txt index bd874da..bd70976 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/vortex.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/vortex.txt @@ -305,11 +305,6 @@ Donald's wake-on-LAN page: ftp://ftp.3com.com/pub/nic/3c90x/3c90xx2.exe -Driver updates and a detailed changelog for the modifications which -were made for the 2.3/2,4 series kernel is available at - - http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/#3c59x-bc - Autonegotiation notes --------------------- -- cgit v1.1 From 22b8ab66deb2600f93d24d30df17b9d9e5273d05 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Bernhard Walle Date: Wed, 15 Oct 2008 22:02:01 -0700 Subject: Document panic_on_unrecovered_nmi sysctl This adds "panic_on_unrecovered_nmi" sysctl to Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt. The text is mainly taken from http://readlist.com/lists/vger.kernel.org/linux-kernel/43/217998.html. Signed-off-by: Bernhard Walle Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt | 12 ++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 12 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index b488eda..c032bf3 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt @@ -1321,6 +1321,18 @@ debugging information is displayed on console. NMI switch that most IA32 servers have fires unknown NMI up, for example. If a system hangs up, try pressing the NMI switch. +panic_on_unrecovered_nmi +------------------------ + +The default Linux behaviour on an NMI of either memory or unknown is to continue +operation. For many environments such as scientific computing it is preferable +that the box is taken out and the error dealt with than an uncorrected +parity/ECC error get propogated. + +A small number of systems do generate NMI's for bizarre random reasons such as +power management so the default is off. That sysctl works like the existing +panic controls already in that directory. + nmi_watchdog ------------ -- cgit v1.1 From 9536727ef696861b205834dd2e01456b91088cb7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Andi Kleen Date: Wed, 15 Oct 2008 22:02:02 -0700 Subject: SubmittingPatches: add a reference to Andi's OLS paper For this year's OLS I wrote a paper on successfull strategies to submit difficult kernel patches. Add a reference to it to SubmittingPatches. Signed-off-by: Andi Kleen Acked-by: KOSAKI Motohiro Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/SubmittingPatches | 5 +++++ 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches index bee87f2..7b67f3b 100644 --- a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches +++ b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches @@ -672,4 +672,9 @@ Kernel Documentation/CodingStyle: Linus Torvalds's mail on the canonical patch format: + +Andi Kleen, "On submitting kernel patches" + Some strategies to get difficult or controversal changes in. + http://halobates.de/on-submitting-patches.pdf + -- -- cgit v1.1 From f1f640a9c1d97a1a131879ab1efe3766443904d7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Vernon Sauder Date: Wed, 15 Oct 2008 22:02:43 -0700 Subject: pxa2xx_spi: fix chip_info defaults and documentation. Make the chip info structure data optional by providing reasonable defaults. Improve corresponding documentation, and highlight the drawback of not providing explicit chipselect control. DMA can determine appropriate dma_burst_size and thresholds automatically so use DMA even if dma_burst_size is not specified. Signed-off-by: Vernon Sauder Reviewed-by: Ned Forrester Signed-off-by: David Brownell Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/spi/pxa2xx | 34 +++++++++++++++++++++++----------- 1 file changed, 23 insertions(+), 11 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx index bbe8dee..6bb916d 100644 --- a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx +++ b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Each slave device attached to the PXA must provide slave specific configuration information via the structure "pxa2xx_spi_chip" found in "arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/pxa2xx_spi.h". The pxa2xx_spi master controller driver will uses the configuration whenever the driver communicates with the slave -device. +device. All fields are optional. struct pxa2xx_spi_chip { u8 tx_threshold; @@ -112,14 +112,17 @@ used to configure the SSP hardware fifo. These fields are critical to the performance of pxa2xx_spi driver and misconfiguration will result in rx fifo overruns (especially in PIO mode transfers). Good default values are - .tx_threshold = 12, - .rx_threshold = 4, + .tx_threshold = 8, + .rx_threshold = 8, + +The range is 1 to 16 where zero indicates "use default". The "pxa2xx_spi_chip.dma_burst_size" field is used to configure PXA2xx DMA engine and is related the "spi_device.bits_per_word" field. Read and understand the PXA2xx "Developer Manual" sections on the DMA controller and SSP Controllers to determine the correct value. An SSP configured for byte-wide transfers would -use a value of 8. +use a value of 8. The driver will determine a reasonable default if +dma_burst_size == 0. The "pxa2xx_spi_chip.timeout" fields is used to efficiently handle trailing bytes in the SSP receiver fifo. The correct value for this field is @@ -137,7 +140,13 @@ function for asserting/deasserting a slave device chip select. If the field is NULL, the pxa2xx_spi master controller driver assumes that the SSP port is configured to use SSPFRM instead. -NSSP SALVE SAMPLE +NOTE: the SPI driver cannot control the chip select if SSPFRM is used, so the +chipselect is dropped after each spi_transfer. Most devices need chip select +asserted around the complete message. Use SSPFRM as a GPIO (through cs_control) +to accomodate these chips. + + +NSSP SLAVE SAMPLE ----------------- The pxa2xx_spi_chip structure is passed to the pxa2xx_spi driver in the "spi_board_info.controller_data" field. Below is a sample configuration using @@ -206,18 +215,21 @@ static void __init streetracer_init(void) DMA and PIO I/O Support ----------------------- -The pxa2xx_spi driver support both DMA and interrupt driven PIO message -transfers. The driver defaults to PIO mode and DMA transfers must enabled by -setting the "enable_dma" flag in the "pxa2xx_spi_master" structure and -ensuring that the "pxa2xx_spi_chip.dma_burst_size" field is non-zero. The DMA -mode support both coherent and stream based DMA mappings. +The pxa2xx_spi driver supports both DMA and interrupt driven PIO message +transfers. The driver defaults to PIO mode and DMA transfers must be enabled +by setting the "enable_dma" flag in the "pxa2xx_spi_master" structure. The DMA +mode supports both coherent and stream based DMA mappings. The following logic is used to determine the type of I/O to be used on a per "spi_transfer" basis: -if !enable_dma or dma_burst_size == 0 then +if !enable_dma then always use PIO transfers +if spi_message.len > 8191 then + print "rate limited" warning + use PIO transfers + if spi_message.is_dma_mapped and rx_dma_buf != 0 and tx_dma_buf != 0 then use coherent DMA mode -- cgit v1.1 From 4b22ff13415fa30b6282c88da790c82b4c6e5127 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Ian Kent Date: Wed, 15 Oct 2008 22:02:53 -0700 Subject: autofs4: device node ioctl documentation Add documentation for the miscellaneous device module of autofs4. Signed-off-by: Ian Kent Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- .../filesystems/autofs4-mount-control.txt | 393 +++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 393 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/filesystems/autofs4-mount-control.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/autofs4-mount-control.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/autofs4-mount-control.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c634174 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/autofs4-mount-control.txt @@ -0,0 +1,393 @@ + +Miscellaneous Device control operations for the autofs4 kernel module +==================================================================== + +The problem +=========== + +There is a problem with active restarts in autofs (that is to say +restarting autofs when there are busy mounts). + +During normal operation autofs uses a file descriptor opened on the +directory that is being managed in order to be able to issue control +operations. Using a file descriptor gives ioctl operations access to +autofs specific information stored in the super block. The operations +are things such as setting an autofs mount catatonic, setting the +expire timeout and requesting expire checks. As is explained below, +certain types of autofs triggered mounts can end up covering an autofs +mount itself which prevents us being able to use open(2) to obtain a +file descriptor for these operations if we don't already have one open. + +Currently autofs uses "umount -l" (lazy umount) to clear active mounts +at restart. While using lazy umount works for most cases, anything that +needs to walk back up the mount tree to construct a path, such as +getcwd(2) and the proc file system /proc//cwd, no longer works +because the point from which the path is constructed has been detached +from the mount tree. + +The actual problem with autofs is that it can't reconnect to existing +mounts. Immediately one thinks of just adding the ability to remount +autofs file systems would solve it, but alas, that can't work. This is +because autofs direct mounts and the implementation of "on demand mount +and expire" of nested mount trees have the file system mounted directly +on top of the mount trigger directory dentry. + +For example, there are two types of automount maps, direct (in the kernel +module source you will see a third type called an offset, which is just +a direct mount in disguise) and indirect. + +Here is a master map with direct and indirect map entries: + +/- /etc/auto.direct +/test /etc/auto.indirect + +and the corresponding map files: + +/etc/auto.direct: + +/automount/dparse/g6 budgie:/autofs/export1 +/automount/dparse/g1 shark:/autofs/export1 +and so on. + +/etc/auto.indirect: + +g1 shark:/autofs/export1 +g6 budgie:/autofs/export1 +and so on. + +For the above indirect map an autofs file system is mounted on /test and +mounts are triggered for each sub-directory key by the inode lookup +operation. So we see a mount of shark:/autofs/export1 on /test/g1, for +example. + +The way that direct mounts are handled is by making an autofs mount on +each full path, such as /automount/dparse/g1, and using it as a mount +trigger. So when we walk on the path we mount shark:/autofs/export1 "on +top of this mount point". Since these are always directories we can +use the follow_link inode operation to trigger the mount. + +But, each entry in direct and indirect maps can have offsets (making +them multi-mount map entries). + +For example, an indirect mount map entry could also be: + +g1 \ + / shark:/autofs/export5/testing/test \ + /s1 shark:/autofs/export/testing/test/s1 \ + /s2 shark:/autofs/export5/testing/test/s2 \ + /s1/ss1 shark:/autofs/export1 \ + /s2/ss2 shark:/autofs/export2 + +and a similarly a direct mount map entry could also be: + +/automount/dparse/g1 \ + / shark:/autofs/export5/testing/test \ + /s1 shark:/autofs/export/testing/test/s1 \ + /s2 shark:/autofs/export5/testing/test/s2 \ + /s1/ss1 shark:/autofs/export2 \ + /s2/ss2 shark:/autofs/export2 + +One of the issues with version 4 of autofs was that, when mounting an +entry with a large number of offsets, possibly with nesting, we needed +to mount and umount all of the offsets as a single unit. Not really a +problem, except for people with a large number of offsets in map entries. +This mechanism is used for the well known "hosts" map and we have seen +cases (in 2.4) where the available number of mounts are exhausted or +where the number of privileged ports available is exhausted. + +In version 5 we mount only as we go down the tree of offsets and +similarly for expiring them which resolves the above problem. There is +somewhat more detail to the implementation but it isn't needed for the +sake of the problem explanation. The one important detail is that these +offsets are implemented using the same mechanism as the direct mounts +above and so the mount points can be covered by a mount. + +The current autofs implementation uses an ioctl file descriptor opened +on the mount point for control operations. The references held by the +descriptor are accounted for in checks made to determine if a mount is +in use and is also used to access autofs file system information held +in the mount super block. So the use of a file handle needs to be +retained. + + +The Solution +============ + +To be able to restart autofs leaving existing direct, indirect and +offset mounts in place we need to be able to obtain a file handle +for these potentially covered autofs mount points. Rather than just +implement an isolated operation it was decided to re-implement the +existing ioctl interface and add new operations to provide this +functionality. + +In addition, to be able to reconstruct a mount tree that has busy mounts, +the uid and gid of the last user that triggered the mount needs to be +available because these can be used as macro substitution variables in +autofs maps. They are recorded at mount request time and an operation +has been added to retrieve them. + +Since we're re-implementing the control interface, a couple of other +problems with the existing interface have been addressed. First, when +a mount or expire operation completes a status is returned to the +kernel by either a "send ready" or a "send fail" operation. The +"send fail" operation of the ioctl interface could only ever send +ENOENT so the re-implementation allows user space to send an actual +status. Another expensive operation in user space, for those using +very large maps, is discovering if a mount is present. Usually this +involves scanning /proc/mounts and since it needs to be done quite +often it can introduce significant overhead when there are many entries +in the mount table. An operation to lookup the mount status of a mount +point dentry (covered or not) has also been added. + +Current kernel development policy recommends avoiding the use of the +ioctl mechanism in favor of systems such as Netlink. An implementation +using this system was attempted to evaluate its suitability and it was +found to be inadequate, in this case. The Generic Netlink system was +used for this as raw Netlink would lead to a significant increase in +complexity. There's no question that the Generic Netlink system is an +elegant solution for common case ioctl functions but it's not a complete +replacement probably because it's primary purpose in life is to be a +message bus implementation rather than specifically an ioctl replacement. +While it would be possible to work around this there is one concern +that lead to the decision to not use it. This is that the autofs +expire in the daemon has become far to complex because umount +candidates are enumerated, almost for no other reason than to "count" +the number of times to call the expire ioctl. This involves scanning +the mount table which has proved to be a big overhead for users with +large maps. The best way to improve this is try and get back to the +way the expire was done long ago. That is, when an expire request is +issued for a mount (file handle) we should continually call back to +the daemon until we can't umount any more mounts, then return the +appropriate status to the daemon. At the moment we just expire one +mount at a time. A Generic Netlink implementation would exclude this +possibility for future development due to the requirements of the +message bus architecture. + + +autofs4 Miscellaneous Device mount control interface +==================================================== + +The control interface is opening a device node, typically /dev/autofs. + +All the ioctls use a common structure to pass the needed parameter +information and return operation results: + +struct autofs_dev_ioctl { + __u32 ver_major; + __u32 ver_minor; + __u32 size; /* total size of data passed in + * including this struct */ + __s32 ioctlfd; /* automount command fd */ + + __u32 arg1; /* Command parameters */ + __u32 arg2; + + char path[0]; +}; + +The ioctlfd field is a mount point file descriptor of an autofs mount +point. It is returned by the open call and is used by all calls except +the check for whether a given path is a mount point, where it may +optionally be used to check a specific mount corresponding to a given +mount point file descriptor, and when requesting the uid and gid of the +last successful mount on a directory within the autofs file system. + +The fields arg1 and arg2 are used to communicate parameters and results of +calls made as described below. + +The path field is used to pass a path where it is needed and the size field +is used account for the increased structure length when translating the +structure sent from user space. + +This structure can be initialized before setting specific fields by using +the void function call init_autofs_dev_ioctl(struct autofs_dev_ioctl *). + +All of the ioctls perform a copy of this structure from user space to +kernel space and return -EINVAL if the size parameter is smaller than +the structure size itself, -ENOMEM if the kernel memory allocation fails +or -EFAULT if the copy itself fails. Other checks include a version check +of the compiled in user space version against the module version and a +mismatch results in a -EINVAL return. If the size field is greater than +the structure size then a path is assumed to be present and is checked to +ensure it begins with a "/" and is NULL terminated, otherwise -EINVAL is +returned. Following these checks, for all ioctl commands except +AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_VERSION_CMD, AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_OPENMOUNT_CMD and +AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_CLOSEMOUNT_CMD the ioctlfd is validated and if it is +not a valid descriptor or doesn't correspond to an autofs mount point +an error of -EBADF, -ENOTTY or -EINVAL (not an autofs descriptor) is +returned. + + +The ioctls +========== + +An example of an implementation which uses this interface can be seen +in autofs version 5.0.4 and later in file lib/dev-ioctl-lib.c of the +distribution tar available for download from kernel.org in directory +/pub/linux/daemons/autofs/v5. + +The device node ioctl operations implemented by this interface are: + + +AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_VERSION +------------------------ + +Get the major and minor version of the autofs4 device ioctl kernel module +implementation. It requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl as an +input parameter and sets the version information in the passed in structure. +It returns 0 on success or the error -EINVAL if a version mismatch is +detected. + + +AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_PROTOVER_CMD and AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_PROTOSUBVER_CMD +------------------------------------------------------------------ + +Get the major and minor version of the autofs4 protocol version understood +by loaded module. This call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl +with the ioctlfd field set to a valid autofs mount point descriptor +and sets the requested version number in structure field arg1. These +commands return 0 on success or one of the negative error codes if +validation fails. + + +AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_OPENMOUNT and AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_CLOSEMOUNT +---------------------------------------------------------- + +Obtain and release a file descriptor for an autofs managed mount point +path. The open call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with +the the path field set and the size field adjusted appropriately as well +as the arg1 field set to the device number of the autofs mount. The +device number can be obtained from the mount options shown in +/proc/mounts. The close call requires an initialized struct +autofs_dev_ioct with the ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained +from the open call. The release of the file descriptor can also be done +with close(2) so any open descriptors will also be closed at process exit. +The close call is included in the implemented operations largely for +completeness and to provide for a consistent user space implementation. + + +AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_READY_CMD and AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_FAIL_CMD +-------------------------------------------------------- + +Return mount and expire result status from user space to the kernel. +Both of these calls require an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl +with the ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open +call and the arg1 field set to the wait queue token number, received +by user space in the foregoing mount or expire request. The arg2 field +is set to the status to be returned. For the ready call this is always +0 and for the fail call it is set to the errno of the operation. + + +AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_SETPIPEFD_CMD +------------------------------ + +Set the pipe file descriptor used for kernel communication to the daemon. +Normally this is set at mount time using an option but when reconnecting +to a existing mount we need to use this to tell the autofs mount about +the new kernel pipe descriptor. In order to protect mounts against +incorrectly setting the pipe descriptor we also require that the autofs +mount be catatonic (see next call). + +The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the +ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call and +the arg1 field set to descriptor of the pipe. On success the call +also sets the process group id used to identify the controlling process +(eg. the owning automount(8) daemon) to the process group of the caller. + + +AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_CATATONIC_CMD +------------------------------ + +Make the autofs mount point catatonic. The autofs mount will no longer +issue mount requests, the kernel communication pipe descriptor is released +and any remaining waits in the queue released. + +The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the +ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call. + + +AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_TIMEOUT_CMD +---------------------------- + +Set the expire timeout for mounts withing an autofs mount point. + +The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the +ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call. + + +AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_REQUESTER_CMD +------------------------------ + +Return the uid and gid of the last process to successfully trigger a the +mount on the given path dentry. + +The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the path +field set to the mount point in question and the size field adjusted +appropriately as well as the arg1 field set to the device number of the +containing autofs mount. Upon return the struct field arg1 contains the +uid and arg2 the gid. + +When reconstructing an autofs mount tree with active mounts we need to +re-connect to mounts that may have used the original process uid and +gid (or string variations of them) for mount lookups within the map entry. +This call provides the ability to obtain this uid and gid so they may be +used by user space for the mount map lookups. + + +AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_EXPIRE_CMD +--------------------------- + +Issue an expire request to the kernel for an autofs mount. Typically +this ioctl is called until no further expire candidates are found. + +The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the +ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call. In +addition an immediate expire, independent of the mount timeout, can be +requested by setting the arg1 field to 1. If no expire candidates can +be found the ioctl returns -1 with errno set to EAGAIN. + +This call causes the kernel module to check the mount corresponding +to the given ioctlfd for mounts that can be expired, issues an expire +request back to the daemon and waits for completion. + +AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_ASKUMOUNT_CMD +------------------------------ + +Checks if an autofs mount point is in use. + +The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the +ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call and +it returns the result in the arg1 field, 1 for busy and 0 otherwise. + + +AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_ISMOUNTPOINT_CMD +--------------------------------- + +Check if the given path is a mountpoint. + +The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl. There are two +possible variations. Both use the path field set to the path of the mount +point to check and the size field adjusted appropriately. One uses the +ioctlfd field to identify a specific mount point to check while the other +variation uses the path and optionaly arg1 set to an autofs mount type. +The call returns 1 if this is a mount point and sets arg1 to the device +number of the mount and field arg2 to the relevant super block magic +number (described below) or 0 if it isn't a mountpoint. In both cases +the the device number (as returned by new_encode_dev()) is returned +in field arg1. + +If supplied with a file descriptor we're looking for a specific mount, +not necessarily at the top of the mounted stack. In this case the path +the descriptor corresponds to is considered a mountpoint if it is itself +a mountpoint or contains a mount, such as a multi-mount without a root +mount. In this case we return 1 if the descriptor corresponds to a mount +point and and also returns the super magic of the covering mount if there +is one or 0 if it isn't a mountpoint. + +If a path is supplied (and the ioctlfd field is set to -1) then the path +is looked up and is checked to see if it is the root of a mount. If a +type is also given we are looking for a particular autofs mount and if +a match isn't found a fail is returned. If the the located path is the +root of a mount 1 is returned along with the super magic of the mount +or 0 otherwise. + -- cgit v1.1 From 0f6d504e73b49374c6093efe6aa60ab55058248a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: David Brownell Date: Wed, 15 Oct 2008 22:03:14 -0700 Subject: gpiolib: gpio_to_irq() hooks Add a new gpiolib mechanism: gpio_chip instances can provide mappings between their (input) GPIOs and any associated IRQs. This makes it easier for platforms to support IRQs that are provided by board-specific external chips instead of as part of their core (such as SOC-integrated GPIOs). Also update the irq_to_gpio() description, saying to avoid it because it's not always supported. Signed-off-by: David Brownell Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/gpio.txt | 5 +++-- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/gpio.txt b/Documentation/gpio.txt index 18022e2..8a7c459 100644 --- a/Documentation/gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/gpio.txt @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ map between them using calls like: /* map GPIO numbers to IRQ numbers */ int gpio_to_irq(unsigned gpio); - /* map IRQ numbers to GPIO numbers */ + /* map IRQ numbers to GPIO numbers (avoid using this) */ int irq_to_gpio(unsigned irq); Those return either the corresponding number in the other namespace, or @@ -284,7 +284,8 @@ system wakeup capabilities. Non-error values returned from irq_to_gpio() would most commonly be used with gpio_get_value(), for example to initialize or update driver state -when the IRQ is edge-triggered. +when the IRQ is edge-triggered. Note that some platforms don't support +this reverse mapping, so you should avoid using it. Emulating Open Drain Signals -- cgit v1.1 From 35e8bb5175c1a6ff6253f1a2acb30bfe52a2f500 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: David Brownell Date: Wed, 15 Oct 2008 22:03:16 -0700 Subject: gpiolib: request/free hooks Add a new internal mechanism to gpiolib to support low power operations by letting gpio_chip instances see when their GPIOs are in use. When no GPIOs are active, chips may be able to enter lower powered runtime states by disabling clocks and/or power domains. Signed-off-by: David Brownell Cc: "Magnus Damm" Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/gpio.txt | 4 ++++ 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/gpio.txt b/Documentation/gpio.txt index 8a7c459..b1b9887 100644 --- a/Documentation/gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/gpio.txt @@ -240,6 +240,10 @@ signal, or (b) something wrongly believes it's safe to remove drivers needed to manage a signal that's in active use. That is, requesting a GPIO can serve as a kind of lock. +Some platforms may also use knowledge about what GPIOs are active for +power management, such as by powering down unused chip sectors and, more +easily, gating off unused clocks. + These two calls are optional because not not all current Linux platforms offer such functionality in their GPIO support; a valid implementation could return success for all gpio_request() calls. Unlike the other calls, -- cgit v1.1 From 09a525ec1cf5a142f2e73f15527c169dafc6ff52 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Joseph Chan Date: Wed, 15 Oct 2008 22:03:19 -0700 Subject: viafb: viafb.modes, viafb.txt Correct via_fb_ to viafb_ and remove the Kconfig part in viafb.txt. viafb.modes: supported mode table viafb.txt: documentation of viafb driver Signed-off-by: Joseph Chan Cc: Krzysztof Helt Cc: Geert Uytterhoeven Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/fb/viafb.modes | 870 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Documentation/fb/viafb.txt | 214 +++++++++++ 2 files changed, 1084 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/fb/viafb.modes create mode 100644 Documentation/fb/viafb.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/fb/viafb.modes b/Documentation/fb/viafb.modes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..02e5b48 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/fb/viafb.modes @@ -0,0 +1,870 @@ +# +# +# These data are based on the CRTC parameters in +# +# VIA Integration Graphics Chip +# (C) 2004 VIA Technologies Inc. +# + +# +# 640x480, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (25.175 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 640 480 +# Scan Frequency 31.469 kHz 59.94 Hz +# Sync Width 3.813 us 0.064 ms +# 12 chars 2 lines +# Front Porch 0.636 us 0.318 ms +# 2 chars 10 lines +# Back Porch 1.907 us 1.048 ms +# 6 chars 33 lines +# Active Time 25.422 us 15.253 ms +# 80 chars 480 lines +# Blank Time 6.356 us 1.430 ms +# 20 chars 45 lines +# Polarity negative negative +# + +mode "640x480-60" +# D: 25.175 MHz, H: 31.469 kHz, V: 59.94 Hz + geometry 640 480 640 480 32 + timings 39722 48 16 33 10 96 2 endmode mode "480x640-60" +# D: 24.823 MHz, H: 39.780 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 480 640 480 640 32 timings 39722 72 24 19 1 48 3 endmode +# +# 640x480, 75 Hz, Non-Interlaced (31.50 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 640 480 +# Scan Frequency 37.500 kHz 75.00 Hz +# Sync Width 2.032 us 0.080 ms +# 8 chars 3 lines +# Front Porch 0.508 us 0.027 ms +# 2 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 3.810 us 0.427 ms +# 15 chars 16 lines +# Active Time 20.317 us 12.800 ms +# 80 chars 480 lines +# Blank Time 6.349 us 0.533 ms +# 25 chars 20 lines +# Polarity negative negative +# + mode "640x480-75" +# D: 31.50 MHz, H: 37.500 kHz, V: 75.00 Hz + geometry 640 480 640 480 32 timings 31747 120 16 16 1 64 3 endmode +# +# 640x480, 85 Hz, Non-Interlaced (36.000 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 640 480 +# Scan Frequency 43.269 kHz 85.00 Hz +# Sync Width 1.556 us 0.069 ms +# 7 chars 3 lines +# Front Porch 1.556 us 0.023 ms +# 7 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 2.222 us 0.578 ms +# 10 chars 25 lines +# Active Time 17.778 us 11.093 ms +# 80 chars 480 lines +# Blank Time 5.333 us 0.670 ms +# 24 chars 29 lines +# Polarity negative negative +# + mode "640x480-85" +# D: 36.000 MHz, H: 43.269 kHz, V: 85.00 Hz + geometry 640 480 640 480 32 timings 27777 80 56 25 1 56 3 endmode +# +# 640x480, 100 Hz, Non-Interlaced (43.163 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 640 480 +# Scan Frequency 50.900 kHz 100.00 Hz +# Sync Width 1.483 us 0.058 ms +# 8 chars 3 lines +# Front Porch 0.927 us 0.019 ms +# 5 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 2.409 us 0.475 ms +# 13 chars 25 lines +# Active Time 14.827 us 9.430 ms +# 80 chars 480 lines +# Blank Time 4.819 us 0.570 ms +# 26 chars 29 lines +# Polarity positive positive +# + mode "640x480-100" +# D: 43.163 MHz, H: 50.900 kHz, V: 100.00 Hz + geometry 640 480 640 480 32 timings 23168 104 40 25 1 64 3 endmode +# +# 640x480, 120 Hz, Non-Interlaced (52.406 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 640 480 +# Scan Frequency 61.800 kHz 120.00 Hz +# Sync Width 1.221 us 0.048 ms +# 8 chars 3 lines +# Front Porch 0.763 us 0.016 ms +# 5 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 1.984 us 0.496 ms +# 13 chars 31 lines +# Active Time 12.212 us 7.767 ms +# 80 chars 480 lines +# Blank Time 3.969 us 0.566 ms +# 26 chars 35 lines +# Polarity positive positive +# + mode "640x480-120" +# D: 52.406 MHz, H: 61.800 kHz, V: 120.00 Hz + geometry 640 480 640 480 32 timings 19081 104 40 31 1 64 3 endmode +# +# 720x480, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (26.880 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 720 480 +# Scan Frequency 30.000 kHz 60.241 Hz +# Sync Width 2.679 us 0.099 ms +# 9 chars 3 lines +# Front Porch 0.595 us 0.033 ms +# 2 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 3.274 us 0.462 ms +# 11 chars 14 lines +# Active Time 26.786 us 16.000 ms +# 90 chars 480 lines +# Blank Time 6.548 us 0.600 ms +# 22 chars 18 lines +# Polarity positive positive +# + mode "720x480-60" +# D: 26.880 MHz, H: 30.000 kHz, V: 60.24 Hz + geometry 720 480 720 480 32 timings 37202 88 16 14 1 72 3 endmode +# +# 800x480, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (29.581 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 800 480 +# Scan Frequency 29.892 kHz 60.00 Hz +# Sync Width 2.704 us 100.604 us +# 10 chars 3 lines +# Front Porch 0.541 us 33.535 us +# 2 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 3.245 us 435.949 us +# 12 chars 13 lines +# Active Time 27.044 us 16.097 ms +# 100 chars 480 lines +# Blank Time 6.491 us 0.570 ms +# 24 chars 17 lines +# Polarity positive positive +# + mode "800x480-60" +# D: 29.500 MHz, H: 29.738 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 800 480 800 480 32 timings 33805 96 24 10 3 72 7 endmode +# +# 720x576, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (32.668 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 720 576 +# Scan Frequency 35.820 kHz 60.00 Hz +# Sync Width 2.204 us 0.083 ms +# 9 chars 3 lines +# Front Porch 0.735 us 0.027 ms +# 3 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 2.939 us 0.459 ms +# 12 chars 17 lines +# Active Time 22.040 us 16.080 ms +# 90 chars 476 lines +# Blank Time 5.877 us 0.586 ms +# 24 chars 21 lines +# Polarity positive positive +# + mode "720x576-60" +# D: 32.668 MHz, H: 35.820 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 720 576 720 576 32 timings 30611 96 24 17 1 72 3 endmode +# +# 800x600, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (40.00 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 800 600 +# Scan Frequency 37.879 kHz 60.32 Hz +# Sync Width 3.200 us 0.106 ms +# 16 chars 4 lines +# Front Porch 1.000 us 0.026 ms +# 5 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 2.200 us 0.607 ms +# 11 chars 23 lines +# Active Time 20.000 us 15.840 ms +# 100 chars 600 lines +# Blank Time 6.400 us 0.739 ms +# 32 chars 28 lines +# Polarity positive positive +# + mode "800x600-60" +# D: 40.00 MHz, H: 37.879 kHz, V: 60.32 Hz + geometry 800 600 800 600 32 + timings 25000 88 40 23 1 128 4 hsync high vsync high endmode +# +# 800x600, 75 Hz, Non-Interlaced (49.50 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 800 600 +# Scan Frequency 46.875 kHz 75.00 Hz +# Sync Width 1.616 us 0.064 ms +# 10 chars 3 lines +# Front Porch 0.323 us 0.021 ms +# 2 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 3.232 us 0.448 ms +# 20 chars 21 lines +# Active Time 16.162 us 12.800 ms +# 100 chars 600 lines +# Blank Time 5.172 us 0.533 ms +# 32 chars 25 lines +# Polarity positive positive +# + mode "800x600-75" +# D: 49.50 MHz, H: 46.875 kHz, V: 75.00 Hz + geometry 800 600 800 600 32 + timings 20203 160 16 21 1 80 3 hsync high vsync high endmode +# +# 800x600, 85 Hz, Non-Interlaced (56.25 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 800 600 +# Scan Frequency 53.674 kHz 85.061 Hz +# Sync Width 1.138 us 0.056 ms +# 8 chars 3 lines +# Front Porch 0.569 us 0.019 ms +# 4 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 2.702 us 0.503 ms +# 19 chars 27 lines +# Active Time 14.222 us 11.179 ms +# 100 chars 600 lines +# Blank Time 4.409 us 0.578 ms +# 31 chars 31 lines +# Polarity positive positive +# + mode "800x600-85" +# D: 56.25 MHz, H: 53.674 kHz, V: 85.061 Hz + geometry 800 600 800 600 32 + timings 17777 152 32 27 1 64 3 hsync high vsync high endmode +# +# 800x600, 100 Hz, Non-Interlaced (67.50 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 800 600 +# Scan Frequency 62.500 kHz 100.00 Hz +# Sync Width 0.948 us 0.064 ms +# 8 chars 4 lines +# Front Porch 0.000 us 0.112 ms +# 0 chars 7 lines +# Back Porch 3.200 us 0.224 ms +# 27 chars 14 lines +# Active Time 11.852 us 9.600 ms +# 100 chars 600 lines +# Blank Time 4.148 us 0.400 ms +# 35 chars 25 lines +# Polarity positive positive +# + mode "800x600-100" +# D: 67.50 MHz, H: 62.500 kHz, V: 100.00 Hz + geometry 800 600 800 600 32 + timings 14667 216 0 14 7 64 4 hsync high vsync high endmode +# +# 800x600, 120 Hz, Non-Interlaced (83.950 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 800 600 +# Scan Frequency 77.160 kHz 120.00 Hz +# Sync Width 1.048 us 0.039 ms +# 11 chars 3 lines +# Front Porch 0.667 us 0.013 ms +# 7 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 1.715 us 0.507 ms +# 18 chars 39 lines +# Active Time 9.529 us 7.776 ms +# 100 chars 600 lines +# Blank Time 3.431 us 0.557 ms +# 36 chars 43 lines +# Polarity positive positive +# + mode "800x600-120" +# D: 83.950 MHz, H: 77.160 kHz, V: 120.00 Hz + geometry 800 600 800 600 32 + timings 11912 144 56 39 1 88 3 hsync high vsync high endmode +# +# 848x480, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (31.490 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 848 480 +# Scan Frequency 29.820 kHz 60.00 Hz +# Sync Width 2.795 us 0.099 ms +# 11 chars 3 lines +# Front Porch 0.508 us 0.033 ms +# 2 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 3.303 us 0.429 ms +# 13 chars 13 lines +# Active Time 26.929 us 16.097 ms +# 106 chars 480 lines +# Blank Time 6.605 us 0.570 ms +# 26 chars 17 lines +# Polarity positive positive +# + mode "848x480-60" +# D: 31.500 MHz, H: 29.830 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 848 480 848 480 32 + timings 31746 104 24 12 3 80 5 hsync high vsync high endmode +# +# 856x480, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (31.728 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 856 480 +# Scan Frequency 29.820 kHz 60.00 Hz +# Sync Width 2.774 us 0.099 ms +# 11 chars 3 lines +# Front Porch 0.504 us 0.033 ms +# 2 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 3.728 us 0.429 ms +# 13 chars 13 lines +# Active Time 26.979 us 16.097 ms +# 107 chars 480 lines +# Blank Time 6.556 us 0.570 ms +# 26 chars 17 lines +# Polarity positive positive +# + mode "856x480-60" +# D: 31.728 MHz, H: 29.820 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 856 480 856 480 32 + timings 31518 104 16 13 1 88 3 + hsync high vsync high endmode mode "960x600-60" +# D: 45.250 MHz, H: 37.212 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 960 600 960 600 32 timings 22099 128 32 15 3 96 6 endmode +# +# 1000x600, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (48.068 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 1000 600 +# Scan Frequency 37.320 kHz 60.00 Hz +# Sync Width 2.164 us 0.080 ms +# 13 chars 3 lines +# Front Porch 0.832 us 0.027 ms +# 5 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 2.996 us 0.483 ms +# 18 chars 18 lines +# Active Time 20.804 us 16.077 ms +# 125 chars 600 lines +# Blank Time 5.991 us 0.589 ms +# 36 chars 22 lines +# Polarity negative positive +# + mode "1000x600-60" +# D: 48.068 MHz, H: 37.320 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 1000 600 1000 600 32 + timings 20834 144 40 18 1 104 3 endmode mode "1024x576-60" +# D: 46.996 MHz, H: 35.820 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 1024 576 1024 576 32 + timings 21278 144 40 17 1 104 3 endmode mode "1024x600-60" +# D: 48.964 MHz, H: 37.320 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 1024 600 1024 600 32 + timings 20461 144 40 18 1 104 3 endmode mode "1088x612-60" +# D: 52.952 MHz, H: 38.040 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 1088 612 1088 612 32 timings 18877 152 48 16 3 104 5 endmode +# +# 1024x512, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (41.291 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 1024 512 +# Scan Frequency 31.860 kHz 60.00 Hz +# Sync Width 2.519 us 0.094 ms +# 13 chars 3 lines +# Front Porch 0.775 us 0.031 ms +# 4 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 3.294 us 0.465 ms +# 17 chars 15 lines +# Active Time 24.800 us 16.070 ms +# 128 chars 512 lines +# Blank Time 6.587 us 0.596 ms +# 34 chars 19 lines +# Polarity positive positive +# + mode "1024x512-60" +# D: 41.291 MHz, H: 31.860 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 1024 512 1024 512 32 + timings 24218 126 32 15 1 104 3 hsync high vsync high endmode +# +# 1024x600, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (48.875 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 1024 768 +# Scan Frequency 37.252 kHz 60.00 Hz +# Sync Width 2.128 us 80.532us +# 13 chars 3 lines +# Front Porch 0.818 us 26.844 us +# 5 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 2.946 us 483.192 us +# 18 chars 18 lines +# Active Time 20.951 us 16.697 ms +# 128 chars 622 lines +# Blank Time 5.893 us 0.591 ms +# 36 chars 22 lines +# Polarity negative positive +# +#mode "1024x600-60" +# # D: 48.875 MHz, H: 37.252 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz +# geometry 1024 600 1024 600 32 +# timings 20460 144 40 18 1 104 3 +# endmode +# +# 1024x768, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (65.00 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 1024 768 +# Scan Frequency 48.363 kHz 60.00 Hz +# Sync Width 2.092 us 0.124 ms +# 17 chars 6 lines +# Front Porch 0.369 us 0.062 ms +# 3 chars 3 lines +# Back Porch 2.462 us 0.601 ms +# 20 chars 29 lines +# Active Time 15.754 us 15.880 ms +# 128 chars 768 lines +# Blank Time 4.923 us 0.786 ms +# 40 chars 38 lines +# Polarity negative negative +# + mode "1024x768-60" +# D: 65.00 MHz, H: 48.363 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 1024 768 1024 768 32 timings 15385 160 24 29 3 136 6 endmode +# +# 1024x768, 75 Hz, Non-Interlaced (78.75 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 1024 768 +# Scan Frequency 60.023 kHz 75.03 Hz +# Sync Width 1.219 us 0.050 ms +# 12 chars 3 lines +# Front Porch 0.203 us 0.017 ms +# 2 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 2.235 us 0.466 ms +# 22 chars 28 lines +# Active Time 13.003 us 12.795 ms +# 128 chars 768 lines +# Blank Time 3.657 us 0.533 ms +# 36 chars 32 lines +# Polarity positive positive +# + mode "1024x768-75" +# D: 78.75 MHz, H: 60.023 kHz, V: 75.03 Hz + geometry 1024 768 1024 768 32 + timings 12699 176 16 28 1 96 3 hsync high vsync high endmode +# +# 1024x768, 85 Hz, Non-Interlaced (94.50 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 1024 768 +# Scan Frequency 68.677 kHz 85.00 Hz +# Sync Width 1.016 us 0.044 ms +# 12 chars 3 lines +# Front Porch 0.508 us 0.015 ms +# 6 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 2.201 us 0.524 ms +# 26 chars 36 lines +# Active Time 10.836 us 11.183 ms +# 128 chars 768 lines +# Blank Time 3.725 us 0.582 ms +# 44 chars 40 lines +# Polarity positive positive +# + mode "1024x768-85" +# D: 94.50 MHz, H: 68.677 kHz, V: 85.00 Hz + geometry 1024 768 1024 768 32 + timings 10582 208 48 36 1 96 3 hsync high vsync high endmode +# +# 1024x768, 100 Hz, Non-Interlaced (110.0 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 1024 768 +# Scan Frequency 79.023 kHz 99.78 Hz +# Sync Width 0.800 us 0.101 ms +# 11 chars 8 lines +# Front Porch 0.000 us 0.000 ms +# 0 chars 0 lines +# Back Porch 2.545 us 0.202 ms +# 35 chars 16 lines +# Active Time 9.309 us 9.719 ms +# 128 chars 768 lines +# Blank Time 3.345 us 0.304 ms +# 46 chars 24 lines +# Polarity negative negative +# + mode "1024x768-100" +# D: 113.3 MHz, H: 79.023 kHz, V: 99.78 Hz + geometry 1024 768 1024 768 32 + timings 8825 280 0 16 0 88 8 endmode mode "1152x720-60" +# D: 66.750 MHz, H: 44.859 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 1152 720 1152 720 32 timings 14981 168 56 19 3 112 6 endmode +# +# 1152x864, 75 Hz, Non-Interlaced (110.0 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 1152 864 +# Scan Frequency 75.137 kHz 74.99 Hz +# Sync Width 1.309 us 0.106 ms +# 18 chars 8 lines +# Front Porch 0.245 us 0.599 ms +# 3 chars 45 lines +# Back Porch 1.282 us 1.132 ms +# 18 chars 85 lines +# Active Time 10.473 us 11.499 ms +# 144 chars 864 lines +# Blank Time 2.836 us 1.837 ms +# 39 chars 138 lines +# Polarity positive positive +# + mode "1152x864-75" +# D: 110.0 MHz, H: 75.137 kHz, V: 74.99 Hz + geometry 1152 864 1152 864 32 + timings 9259 144 24 85 45 144 8 + hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1200x720-60" +# D: 70.184 MHz, H: 44.760 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 1200 720 1200 720 32 + timings 14253 184 28 22 1 128 3 endmode mode "1280x600-60" +# D: 61.503 MHz, H: 37.320 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 1280 600 1280 600 32 + timings 16260 184 28 18 1 128 3 endmode mode "1280x720-50" +# D: 60.466 MHz, H: 37.050 kHz, V: 50.00 Hz + geometry 1280 720 1280 720 32 + timings 16538 176 48 17 1 128 3 endmode mode "1280x768-50" +# D: 65.178 MHz, H: 39.550 kHz, V: 50.00 Hz + geometry 1280 768 1280 768 32 timings 15342 184 28 19 1 128 3 endmode +# +# 1280x768, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (80.136 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 1280 768 +# Scan Frequency 47.700 kHz 60.00 Hz +# Sync Width 1.697 us 0.063 ms +# 17 chars 3 lines +# Front Porch 0.799 us 0.021 ms +# 8 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 2.496 us 0.483 ms +# 25 chars 23 lines +# Active Time 15.973 us 16.101 ms +# 160 chars 768 lines +# Blank Time 4.992 us 0.566 ms +# 50 chars 27 lines +# Polarity positive positive +# + mode "1280x768-60" +# D: 80.13 MHz, H: 47.700 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 1280 768 1280 768 32 + timings 12480 200 48 23 1 126 3 hsync high vsync high endmode +# +# 1280x800, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (83.375 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 1280 800 +# Scan Frequency 49.628 kHz 60.00 Hz +# Sync Width 1.631 us 60.450 us +# 17 chars 3 lines +# Front Porch 0.768 us 20.15 us +# 8 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 2.399 us 0.483 ms +# 25 chars 24 lines +# Active Time 15.352 us 16.120 ms +# 160 chars 800 lines +# Blank Time 4.798 us 0.564 ms +# 50 chars 28 lines +# Polarity negtive positive +# + mode "1280x800-60" +# D: 83.500 MHz, H: 49.702 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 1280 800 1280 800 32 timings 11994 200 72 22 3 128 6 endmode +# +# 1280x960, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (108.00 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 1280 960 +# Scan Frequency 60.000 kHz 60.00 Hz +# Sync Width 1.037 us 0.050 ms +# 14 chars 3 lines +# Front Porch 0.889 us 0.017 ms +# 12 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 2.889 us 0.600 ms +# 39 chars 36 lines +# Active Time 11.852 us 16.000 ms +# 160 chars 960 lines +# Blank Time 4.815 us 0.667 ms +# 65 chars 40 lines +# Polarity positive positive +# + mode "1280x960-60" +# D: 108.00 MHz, H: 60.000 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 1280 960 1280 960 32 + timings 9259 312 96 36 1 112 3 hsync high vsync high endmode +# +# 1280x1024, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (108.00 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 1280 1024 +# Scan Frequency 63.981 kHz 60.02 Hz +# Sync Width 1.037 us 0.047 ms +# 14 chars 3 lines +# Front Porch 0.444 us 0.015 ms +# 6 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 2.297 us 0.594 ms +# 31 chars 38 lines +# Active Time 11.852 us 16.005 ms +# 160 chars 1024 lines +# Blank Time 3.778 us 0.656 ms +# 51 chars 42 lines +# Polarity positive positive +# + mode "1280x1024-60" +# D: 108.00 MHz, H: 63.981 kHz, V: 60.02 Hz + geometry 1280 1024 1280 1024 32 + timings 9260 248 48 38 1 112 3 hsync high vsync high endmode +# +# 1280x1024, 75 Hz, Non-Interlaced (135.00 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 1280 1024 +# Scan Frequency 79.976 kHz 75.02 Hz +# Sync Width 1.067 us 0.038 ms +# 18 chars 3 lines +# Front Porch 0.119 us 0.012 ms +# 2 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 1.837 us 0.475 ms +# 31 chars 38 lines +# Active Time 9.481 us 12.804 ms +# 160 chars 1024 lines +# Blank Time 3.022 us 0.525 ms +# 51 chars 42 lines +# Polarity positive positive +# + mode "1280x1024-75" +# D: 135.00 MHz, H: 79.976 kHz, V: 75.02 Hz + geometry 1280 1024 1280 1024 32 + timings 7408 248 16 38 1 144 3 hsync high vsync high endmode +# +# 1280x1024, 85 Hz, Non-Interlaced (157.50 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 1280 1024 +# Scan Frequency 91.146 kHz 85.02 Hz +# Sync Width 1.016 us 0.033 ms +# 20 chars 3 lines +# Front Porch 0.406 us 0.011 ms +# 8 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 1.422 us 0.483 ms +# 28 chars 44 lines +# Active Time 8.127 us 11.235 ms +# 160 chars 1024 lines +# Blank Time 2.844 us 0.527 ms +# 56 chars 48 lines +# Polarity positive positive +# + mode "1280x1024-85" +# D: 157.50 MHz, H: 91.146 kHz, V: 85.02 Hz + geometry 1280 1024 1280 1024 32 + timings 6349 224 64 44 1 160 3 + hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1440x900-60" +# D: 106.500 MHz, H: 55.935 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 1440 900 1440 900 32 + timings 9390 232 80 25 3 152 6 + hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1440x900-75" +# D: 136.750 MHz, H: 70.635 kHz, V: 75.00 Hz + geometry 1440 900 1440 900 32 + timings 7315 248 96 33 3 152 6 hsync high vsync high endmode +# +# 1440x1050, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (125.10 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 1440 1050 +# Scan Frequency 65.220 kHz 60.00 Hz +# Sync Width 1.204 us 0.046 ms +# 19 chars 3 lines +# Front Porch 0.760 us 0.015 ms +# 12 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 1.964 us 0.495 ms +# 31 chars 33 lines +# Active Time 11.405 us 16.099 ms +# 180 chars 1050 lines +# Blank Time 3.928 us 0.567 ms +# 62 chars 37 lines +# Polarity positive positive +# + mode "1440x1050-60" +# D: 125.10 MHz, H: 65.220 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 1440 1050 1440 1050 32 + timings 7993 248 96 33 1 152 3 + hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1600x900-60" +# D: 118.250 MHz, H: 55.990 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 1600 900 1600 900 32 + timings 8415 256 88 26 3 168 5 endmode mode "1600x1024-60" +# D: 136.358 MHz, H: 63.600 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 1600 1024 1600 1024 32 timings 7315 272 104 32 1 168 3 endmode +# +# 1600x1200, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (156.00 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 1600 1200 +# Scan Frequency 76.200 kHz 60.00 Hz +# Sync Width 1.026 us 0.105 ms +# 20 chars 8 lines +# Front Porch 0.205 us 0.131 ms +# 4 chars 10 lines +# Back Porch 1.636 us 0.682 ms +# 32 chars 52 lines +# Active Time 10.256 us 15.748 ms +# 200 chars 1200 lines +# Blank Time 2.872 us 0.866 ms +# 56 chars 66 lines +# Polarity negative negative +# + mode "1600x1200-60" +# D: 156.00 MHz, H: 76.200 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 1600 1200 1600 1200 32 timings 6172 256 32 52 10 160 8 endmode +# +# 1600x1200, 75 Hz, Non-Interlaced (202.50 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 1600 1200 +# Scan Frequency 93.750 kHz 75.00 Hz +# Sync Width 0.948 us 0.032 ms +# 24 chars 3 lines +# Front Porch 0.316 us 0.011 ms +# 8 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 1.501 us 0.491 ms +# 38 chars 46 lines +# Active Time 7.901 us 12.800 ms +# 200 chars 1200 lines +# Blank Time 2.765 us 0.533 ms +# 70 chars 50 lines +# Polarity positive positive +# + mode "1600x1200-75" +# D: 202.50 MHz, H: 93.750 kHz, V: 75.00 Hz + geometry 1600 1200 1600 1200 32 + timings 4938 304 64 46 1 192 3 + hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1680x1050-60" +# D: 146.250 MHz, H: 65.290 kHz, V: 59.954 Hz + geometry 1680 1050 1680 1050 32 + timings 6814 280 104 30 3 176 6 + hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1680x1050-75" +# D: 187.000 MHz, H: 82.306 kHz, V: 74.892 Hz + geometry 1680 1050 1680 1050 32 + timings 5348 296 120 40 3 176 6 + hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1792x1344-60" +# D: 202.975 MHz, H: 83.460 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 1792 1344 1792 1344 32 + timings 4902 320 128 43 1 192 3 + hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1856x1392-60" +# D: 218.571 MHz, H: 86.460 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 1856 1392 1856 1392 32 + timings 4577 336 136 45 1 200 3 + hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1920x1200-60" +# D: 193.250 MHz, H: 74.556 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 1920 1200 1920 1200 32 + timings 5173 336 136 36 3 200 6 + hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1920x1440-60" +# D: 234.000 MHz, H:90.000 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 1920 1440 1920 1440 32 + timings 4274 344 128 56 1 208 3 + hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1920x1440-75" +# D: 297.000 MHz, H:112.500 kHz, V: 75.00 Hz + geometry 1920 1440 1920 1440 32 + timings 3367 352 144 56 1 224 3 + hsync high vsync high endmode mode "2048x1536-60" +# D: 267.250 MHz, H: 95.446 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 2048 1536 2048 1536 32 + timings 3742 376 152 49 3 224 4 hsync high vsync high endmode +# +# 1280x720, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (74.481 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 1280 720 +# Scan Frequency 44.760 kHz 60.00 Hz +# Sync Width 1.826 us 67.024 ms +# 17 chars 3 lines +# Front Porch 0.752 us 22.341 ms +# 7 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 2.578 us 491.510 ms +# 24 chars 22 lines +# Active Time 17.186 us 16.086 ms +# 160 chars 720 lines +# Blank Time 5.156 us 0.581 ms +# 48 chars 26 lines +# Polarity negative negative +# + mode "1280x720-60" +# D: 74.481 MHz, H: 44.760 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 1280 720 1280 720 32 timings 13426 192 64 22 1 136 3 endmode +# +# 1920x1080, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (172.798 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 1920 1080 +# Scan Frequency 67.080 kHz 60.00 Hz +# Sync Width 1.204 us 44.723 ms +# 26 chars 3 lines +# Front Porch 0.694 us 14.908 ms +# 15 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 1.898 us 506.857 ms +# 41 chars 34 lines +# Active Time 11.111 us 16.100 ms +# 240 chars 1080 lines +# Blank Time 3.796 us 0.566 ms +# 82 chars 38 lines +# Polarity negative negative +# + mode "1920x1080-60" +# D: 74.481 MHz, H: 67.080 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 1920 1080 1920 1080 32 timings 5787 328 120 34 1 208 3 endmode +# +# 1400x1050, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (122.61 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 1400 1050 +# Scan Frequency 65.218 kHz 59.99 Hz +# Sync Width 1.037 us 0.047 ms +# 19 chars 3 lines +# Front Porch 0.444 us 0.015 ms +# 11 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 1.185 us 0.188 ms +# 30 chars 33 lines +# Active Time 12.963 us 16.411 ms +# 175 chars 1050 lines +# Blank Time 2.667 us 0.250 ms +# 60 chars 37 lines +# Polarity negative positive +# + mode "1400x1050-60" +# D: 122.750 MHz, H: 65.317 kHz, V: 59.99 Hz + geometry 1400 1050 1408 1050 32 + timings 8214 232 88 32 3 144 4 endmode mode "1400x1050-75" +# D: 156.000 MHz, H: 82.278 kHz, V: 74.867 Hz + geometry 1400 1050 1408 1050 32 timings 6410 248 104 42 3 144 4 endmode +# +# 1366x768, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (85.86 MHz dotclock) +# +# Horizontal Vertical +# Resolution 1366 768 +# Scan Frequency 47.700 kHz 60.00 Hz +# Sync Width 1.677 us 0.063 ms +# 18 chars 3 lines +# Front Porch 0.839 us 0.021 ms +# 9 chars 1 lines +# Back Porch 2.516 us 0.482 ms +# 27 chars 23 lines +# Active Time 15.933 us 16.101 ms +# 171 chars 768 lines +# Blank Time 5.031 us 0.566 ms +# 54 chars 27 lines +# Polarity negative positive +# + mode "1360x768-60" +# D: 84.750 MHz, H: 47.720 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 1360 768 1360 768 32 + timings 11799 208 72 22 3 136 5 endmode mode "1366x768-60" +# D: 85.86 MHz, H: 47.700 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz + geometry 1366 768 1366 768 32 + timings 11647 216 72 23 1 144 3 endmode mode "1366x768-50" +# D: 69,924 MHz, H: 39.550 kHz, V: 50.00 Hz + geometry 1366 768 1366 768 32 timings 14301 200 56 19 1 144 3 endmode diff --git a/Documentation/fb/viafb.txt b/Documentation/fb/viafb.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..67dbf44 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/fb/viafb.txt @@ -0,0 +1,214 @@ + + VIA Integration Graphic Chip Console Framebuffer Driver + +[Platform] +----------------------- + The console framebuffer driver is for graphics chips of + VIA UniChrome Family(CLE266, PM800 / CN400 / CN300, + P4M800CE / P4M800Pro / CN700 / VN800, + CX700 / VX700, K8M890, P4M890, + CN896 / P4M900, VX800) + +[Driver features] +------------------------ + Device: CRT, LCD, DVI + + Support viafb_mode: + CRT: + 640x480(60, 75, 85, 100, 120 Hz), 720x480(60 Hz), + 720x576(60 Hz), 800x600(60, 75, 85, 100, 120 Hz), + 848x480(60 Hz), 856x480(60 Hz), 1024x512(60 Hz), + 1024x768(60, 75, 85, 100 Hz), 1152x864(75 Hz), + 1280x768(60 Hz), 1280x960(60 Hz), 1280x1024(60, 75, 85 Hz), + 1440x1050(60 Hz), 1600x1200(60, 75 Hz), 1280x720(60 Hz), + 1920x1080(60 Hz), 1400x1050(60 Hz), 800x480(60 Hz) + + color depth: 8 bpp, 16 bpp, 32 bpp supports. + + Support 2D hardware accelerator. + +[Using the viafb module] +-- -- -------------------- + Start viafb with default settings: + #modprobe viafb + + Start viafb with with user options: + #modprobe viafb viafb_mode=800x600 viafb_bpp=16 viafb_refresh=60 + viafb_active_dev=CRT+DVI viafb_dvi_port=DVP1 + viafb_mode1=1024x768 viafb_bpp=16 viafb_refresh1=60 + viafb_SAMM_ON=1 + + viafb_mode: + 640x480 (default) + 720x480 + 800x600 + 1024x768 + ...... + + viafb_bpp: + 8, 16, 32 (default:32) + + viafb_refresh: + 60, 75, 85, 100, 120 (default:60) + + viafb_lcd_dsp_method: + 0 : expansion (default) + 1 : centering + + viafb_lcd_mode: + 0 : LCD panel with LSB data format input (default) + 1 : LCD panel with MSB data format input + + viafb_lcd_panel_id: + 0 : Resolution: 640x480, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable + 1 : Resolution: 800x600, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable + 2 : Resolution: 1024x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable (default) + 3 : Resolution: 1280x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable + 4 : Resolution: 1280x1024, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable + 5 : Resolution: 1400x1050, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable + 6 : Resolution: 1600x1200, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable + + 8 : Resolution: 800x480, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable + 9 : Resolution: 1024x768, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable + 10: Resolution: 1024x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Disable + 11: Resolution: 1024x768, Channel: dual, Dithering: Disable + 12: Resolution: 1280x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Disable + 13: Resolution: 1280x1024, Channel: dual, Dithering: Disable + 14: Resolution: 1400x1050, Channel: dual, Dithering: Disable + 15: Resolution: 1600x1200, Channel: dual, Dithering: Disable + 16: Resolution: 1366x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Disable + 17: Resolution: 1024x600, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable + 18: Resolution: 1280x768, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable + 19: Resolution: 1280x800, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable + + viafb_accel: + 0 : No 2D Hardware Acceleration + 1 : 2D Hardware Acceleration (default) + + viafb_SAMM_ON: + 0 : viafb_SAMM_ON disable (default) + 1 : viafb_SAMM_ON enable + + viafb_mode1: (secondary display device) + 640x480 (default) + 720x480 + 800x600 + 1024x768 + ... ... + + viafb_bpp1: (secondary display device) + 8, 16, 32 (default:32) + + viafb_refresh1: (secondary display device) + 60, 75, 85, 100, 120 (default:60) + + viafb_active_dev: + This option is used to specify active devices.(CRT, DVI, CRT+LCD...) + DVI stands for DVI or HDMI, E.g., If you want to enable HDMI, + set viafb_active_dev=DVI. In SAMM case, the previous of + viafb_active_dev is primary device, and the following is + secondary device. + + For example: + To enable one device, such as DVI only, we can use: + modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=DVI + To enable two devices, such as CRT+DVI: + modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=CRT+DVI; + + For DuoView case, we can use: + modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=CRT+DVI + OR + modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=DVI+CRT... + + For SAMM case: + If CRT is primary and DVI is secondary, we should use: + modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=CRT+DVI viafb_SAMM_ON=1... + If DVI is primary and CRT is secondary, we should use: + modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=DVI+CRT viafb_SAMM_ON=1... + + viafb_display_hardware_layout: + This option is used to specify display hardware layout for CX700 chip. + 1 : LCD only + 2 : DVI only + 3 : LCD+DVI (default) + 4 : LCD1+LCD2 (internal + internal) + 16: LCD1+ExternalLCD2 (internal + external) + + viafb_second_size: + This option is used to set second device memory size(MB) in SAMM case. + The minimal size is 16. + + viafb_platform_epia_dvi: + This option is used to enable DVI on EPIA - M + 0 : No DVI on EPIA - M (default) + 1 : DVI on EPIA - M + + viafb_bus_width: + When using 24 - Bit Bus Width Digital Interface, + this option should be set. + 12: 12-Bit LVDS or 12-Bit TMDS (default) + 24: 24-Bit LVDS or 24-Bit TMDS + + viafb_device_lcd_dualedge: + When using Dual Edge Panel, this option should be set. + 0 : No Dual Edge Panel (default) + 1 : Dual Edge Panel + + viafb_video_dev: + This option is used to specify video output devices(CRT, DVI, LCD) for + duoview case. + For example: + To output video on DVI, we should use: + modprobe viafb viafb_video_dev=DVI... + + viafb_lcd_port: + This option is used to specify LCD output port, + available values are "DVP0" "DVP1" "DFP_HIGHLOW" "DFP_HIGH" "DFP_LOW". + for external LCD + external DVI on CX700(External LCD is on DVP0), + we should use: + modprobe viafb viafb_lcd_port=DVP0... + +Notes: + 1. CRT may not display properly for DuoView CRT & DVI display at + the "640x480" PAL mode with DVI overscan enabled. + 2. SAMM stands for single adapter multi monitors. It is different from + multi-head since SAMM support multi monitor at driver layers, thus fbcon + layer doesn't even know about it; SAMM's second screen doesn't have a + device node file, thus a user mode application can't access it directly. + When SAMM is enabled, viafb_mode and viafb_mode1, viafb_bpp and + viafb_bpp1, viafb_refresh and viafb_refresh1 can be different. + 3. When console is depending on viafbinfo1, dynamically change resolution + and bpp, need to call VIAFB specified ioctl interface VIAFB_SET_DEVICE + instead of calling common ioctl function FBIOPUT_VSCREENINFO since + viafb doesn't support multi-head well, or it will cause screen crush. + 4. VX800 2D accelerator hasn't been supported in this driver yet. When + using driver on VX800, the driver will disable the acceleration + function as default. + + +[Configure viafb with "fbset" tool] +----------------------------------- + "fbset" is an inbox utility of Linux. + 1. Inquire current viafb information, type, + # fbset -i + + 2. Set various resolutions and viafb_refresh rates, + # fbset + + example, + # fbset "1024x768-75" + or + # fbset -g 1024 768 1024 768 32 + Check the file "/etc/fb.modes" to find display modes available. + + 3. Set the color depth, + # fbset -depth + + example, + # fbset -depth 16 + +[Bootup with viafb]: +-------------------- + Add the following line to your grub.conf: + append = "video=viafb:viafb_mode=1024x768,viafb_bpp=32,viafb_refresh=85" + -- cgit v1.1 From 3f7a26b4b9768fe31597d1af35106aa512dc3742 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Phil Endecott Date: Wed, 15 Oct 2008 22:03:35 -0700 Subject: intelfb: support 945GME (as used in ASUS Eee 901) Add support for Intel's 945GME graphics chip to the intelfb driver. I have assumed that the 945GME is identical to the already-supported 945GM apart from its PCI IDs; this is based on a quick look at the X driver for these chips which seems to treat them identically. The 945GME is used in the ASUS Eee 901, and I coded this in the hope that I'd be able to use it to get a console at the native 1024x600 resolution which is not known to the BIOS. I realised too late that the intelfb driver does not support mode changing on laptops, so it won't be any use for me. Signed-off-by: Phil Endecott Acked-by: Krzysztof Helt Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/fb/intelfb.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/fb/intelfb.txt b/Documentation/fb/intelfb.txt index 27a3160..dd9e944 100644 --- a/Documentation/fb/intelfb.txt +++ b/Documentation/fb/intelfb.txt @@ -14,6 +14,7 @@ graphics devices. These would include: Intel 915GM Intel 945G Intel 945GM + Intel 945GME Intel 965G Intel 965GM -- cgit v1.1 From c0dd504cea3703c3ec9bfd810e6bd649680afd37 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mike Pagano Date: Wed, 15 Oct 2008 22:03:46 -0700 Subject: uvesafb: document mode to mode_option parameter change Document the change from the old "mode" parameter to the "mode_option" parameter. Signed-off-by: Mike Pagano Cc: Krzysztof Halasa Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/fb/uvesafb.txt | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/fb/uvesafb.txt b/Documentation/fb/uvesafb.txt index bcfc233..7ac3c40 100644 --- a/Documentation/fb/uvesafb.txt +++ b/Documentation/fb/uvesafb.txt @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ are either given on the kernel command line or as module parameters, e.g.: video=uvesafb:1024x768-32,mtrr:3,ywrap (compiled into the kernel) - # modprobe uvesafb mode=1024x768-32 mtrr=3 scroll=ywrap (module) + # modprobe uvesafb mode_option=1024x768-32 mtrr=3 scroll=ywrap (module) Accepted options: @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ vtotal:n The mode you want to set, in the standard modedb format. Refer to modedb.txt for a detailed description. When uvesafb is compiled as a module, the mode string should be provided as a value of the - 'mode' option. + 'mode_option' option. vbemode:x Force the use of VBE mode x. The mode will only be set if it's -- cgit v1.1 From 758222f84261a6a808c4d1dcd443f90c1baaa875 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Randy Dunlap Date: Wed, 15 Oct 2008 22:04:14 -0700 Subject: docbook: update procfs credits Update Erik Mouw's email address & affiliation in DocBook. Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Acked-by: Erik Mouw Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/DocBook/procfs-guide.tmpl | 29 ++++++++++------------------- Documentation/DocBook/procfs_example.c | 20 ++++---------------- 2 files changed, 14 insertions(+), 35 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/procfs-guide.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/procfs-guide.tmpl index 8a5dc6e..9eba4b7 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/procfs-guide.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/procfs-guide.tmpl @@ -14,17 +14,20 @@ (J.A.K.) Mouw - Delft University of Technology - Faculty of Information Technology and Systems
- J.A.K.Mouw@its.tudelft.nl - PO BOX 5031 - 2600 GA - Delft - The Netherlands + mouw@nl.linux.org
+ + + This software and documentation were written while working on the + LART computing board + (http://www.lartmaker.nl/), + which was sponsored by the Delt University of Technology projects + Mobile Multi-media Communications and Ubiquitous Communications. + + @@ -109,18 +112,6 @@ - This documentation was written while working on the LART - computing board (http://www.lart.tudelft.nl/), - which is sponsored by the Mobile Multi-media Communications - (http://www.mmc.tudelft.nl/) - and Ubiquitous Communications (http://www.ubicom.tudelft.nl/) - projects. - - - Erik diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/procfs_example.c b/Documentation/DocBook/procfs_example.c index 2f3de0f..8c6396e 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/procfs_example.c +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/procfs_example.c @@ -1,28 +1,16 @@ /* * procfs_example.c: an example proc interface * - * Copyright (C) 2001, Erik Mouw (J.A.K.Mouw@its.tudelft.nl) + * Copyright (C) 2001, Erik Mouw (mouw@nl.linux.org) * * This file accompanies the procfs-guide in the Linux kernel * source. Its main use is to demonstrate the concepts and * functions described in the guide. * * This software has been developed while working on the LART - * computing board (http://www.lart.tudelft.nl/), which is - * sponsored by the Mobile Multi-media Communications - * (http://www.mmc.tudelft.nl/) and Ubiquitous Communications - * (http://www.ubicom.tudelft.nl/) projects. - * - * The author can be reached at: - * - * Erik Mouw - * Information and Communication Theory Group - * Faculty of Information Technology and Systems - * Delft University of Technology - * P.O. Box 5031 - * 2600 GA Delft - * The Netherlands - * + * computing board (http://www.lartmaker.nl), which was sponsored + * by the Delt University of Technology projects Mobile Multi-media + * Communications and Ubiquitous Communications. * * This program is free software; you can redistribute * it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General -- cgit v1.1 From 6cd159744eaf212f3729d154f3881230a7c19eb2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: David Fries Date: Wed, 15 Oct 2008 22:04:43 -0700 Subject: W1: feature, w1_therm.c use strong pullup and documentation Added strong pullup to thermal sensor driver and general documentation on the sensor. Signed-off-by: David Fries Signed-off-by: Evgeniy Polyakov Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/w1/00-INDEX | 2 ++ Documentation/w1/slaves/00-INDEX | 4 ++++ Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_therm | 41 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 3 files changed, 47 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/w1/slaves/00-INDEX create mode 100644 Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_therm (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/w1/00-INDEX b/Documentation/w1/00-INDEX index 5270cf4..cb49802 100644 --- a/Documentation/w1/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/w1/00-INDEX @@ -1,5 +1,7 @@ 00-INDEX - This file +slaves/ + - Drivers that provide support for specific family codes. masters/ - Individual chips providing 1-wire busses. w1.generic diff --git a/Documentation/w1/slaves/00-INDEX b/Documentation/w1/slaves/00-INDEX new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f8101d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/w1/slaves/00-INDEX @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +00-INDEX + - This file +w1_therm + - The Maxim/Dallas Semiconductor ds18*20 temperature sensor. diff --git a/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_therm b/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_therm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0403aaa --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_therm @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +Kernel driver w1_therm +==================== + +Supported chips: + * Maxim ds18*20 based temperature sensors. + +Author: Evgeniy Polyakov + + +Description +----------- + +w1_therm provides basic temperature conversion for ds18*20 devices. +supported family codes: +W1_THERM_DS18S20 0x10 +W1_THERM_DS1822 0x22 +W1_THERM_DS18B20 0x28 + +Support is provided through the sysfs w1_slave file. Each open and +read sequence will initiate a temperature conversion then provide two +lines of ASCII output. The first line contains the nine hex bytes +read along with a calculated crc value and YES or NO if it matched. +If the crc matched the returned values are retained. The second line +displays the retained values along with a temperature in millidegrees +Centigrade after t=. + +Parasite powered devices are limited to one slave performing a +temperature conversion at a time. If none of the devices are parasite +powered it would be possible to convert all the devices at the same +time and then go back to read individual sensors. That isn't +currently supported. The driver also doesn't support reduced +precision (which would also reduce the conversion time). + +The module parameter strong_pullup can be set to 0 to disable the +strong pullup or 1 to enable. If enabled the 5V strong pullup will be +enabled when the conversion is taking place provided the master driver +must support the strong pullup (or it falls back to a pullup +resistor). The DS18b20 temperature sensor specification lists a +maximum current draw of 1.5mA and that a 5k pullup resistor is not +sufficient. The strong pullup is designed to provide the additional +current required. -- cgit v1.1 From eba3b06da4bd8b79fe6c8ed922a319362c1a40c0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: David Fries Date: Wed, 15 Oct 2008 22:04:47 -0700 Subject: W1: Document add, remove, search_count, and pullup. Document w1_master_add, w1_master_remove, search_count, and pullup. Signed-off-by: David Fries Signed-off-by: Evgeniy Polyakov Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/w1/w1.generic | 11 ++++++++++- 1 file changed, 10 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/w1/w1.generic b/Documentation/w1/w1.generic index 4c6509d..e3333ee 100644 --- a/Documentation/w1/w1.generic +++ b/Documentation/w1/w1.generic @@ -79,10 +79,13 @@ w1 master sysfs interface - a directory for a found device. The format is family-serial bus - (standard) symlink to the w1 bus driver - (standard) symlink to the w1 driver +w1_master_add - Manually register a slave device w1_master_attempts - the number of times a search was attempted w1_master_max_slave_count - the maximum slaves that may be attached to a master w1_master_name - the name of the device (w1_bus_masterX) +w1_master_pullup - 5V strong pullup 0 enabled, 1 disabled +w1_master_remove - Manually remove a slave device w1_master_search - the number of searches left to do, -1=continual (default) w1_master_slave_count - the number of slaves found @@ -90,7 +93,13 @@ w1_master_slaves - the names of the slaves, one per line w1_master_timeout - the delay in seconds between searches If you have a w1 bus that never changes (you don't add or remove devices), -you can set w1_master_search to a positive value to disable searches. +you can set the module parameter search_count to a small positive number +for an initially small number of bus searches. Alternatively it could be +set to zero, then manually add the slave device serial numbers by +w1_master_add device file. The w1_master_add and w1_master_remove files +generally only make sense when searching is disabled, as a search will +redetect manually removed devices that are present and timeout manually +added devices that aren't on the bus. w1 slave sysfs interface -- cgit v1.1 From 3823ee44cfa8b0e6edbc0c21b81b49b95a27ca0d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: David Fries Date: Wed, 15 Oct 2008 22:05:09 -0700 Subject: W1: Documentation/w1/masters/ds2490 update Provide some additional details about the status of the driver and the ds2490 hardware. Signed-off-by: David Fries Signed-off-by: Evgeniy Polyakov Cc: Randy Dunlap Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/w1/masters/ds2490 | 52 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 52 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/w1/masters/ds2490 b/Documentation/w1/masters/ds2490 index 239f9ae..28176de 100644 --- a/Documentation/w1/masters/ds2490 +++ b/Documentation/w1/masters/ds2490 @@ -16,3 +16,55 @@ which allows to build USB <-> W1 bridges. DS9490(R) is a USB <-> W1 bus master device which has 0x81 family ID integrated chip and DS2490 low-level operational chip. + +Notes and limitations. +- The weak pullup current is a minimum of 0.9mA and maximum of 6.0mA. +- The 5V strong pullup is supported with a minimum of 5.9mA and a + maximum of 30.4 mA. (From DS2490.pdf) +- While the ds2490 supports a hardware search the code doesn't take + advantage of it (in tested case it only returned first device). +- The hardware will detect when devices are attached to the bus on the + next bus (reset?) operation, however only a message is printed as + the core w1 code doesn't make use of the information. Connecting + one device tends to give multiple new device notifications. +- The number of USB bus transactions could be reduced if w1_reset_send + was added to the API. The name is just a suggestion. It would take + a write buffer and a read buffer (along with sizes) as arguments. + The ds2490 block I/O command supports reset, write buffer, read + buffer, and strong pullup all in one command, instead of the current + 1 reset bus, 2 write the match rom command and slave rom id, 3 block + write and read data. The write buffer needs to have the match rom + command and slave rom id prepended to the front of the requested + write buffer, both of which are known to the driver. +- The hardware supports normal, flexible, and overdrive bus + communication speeds, but only the normal is supported. +- The registered w1_bus_master functions don't define error + conditions. If a bus search is in progress and the ds2490 is + removed it can produce a good amount of error output before the bus + search finishes. +- The hardware supports detecting some error conditions, such as + short, alarming presence on reset, and no presence on reset, but the + driver doesn't query those values. +- The ds2490 specification doesn't cover short bulk in reads in + detail, but my observation is if fewer bytes are requested than are + available, the bulk read will return an error and the hardware will + clear the entire bulk in buffer. It would be possible to read the + maximum buffer size to not run into this error condition, only extra + bytes in the buffer is a logic error in the driver. The code should + should match reads and writes as well as data sizes. Reads and + writes are serialized and the status verifies that the chip is idle + (and data is available) before the read is executed, so it should + not happen. +- Running x86_64 2.6.24 UHCI under qemu 0.9.0 under x86_64 2.6.22-rc6 + with a OHCI controller, ds2490 running in the guest would operate + normally the first time the module was loaded after qemu attached + the ds2490 hardware, but if the module was unloaded, then reloaded + most of the time one of the bulk out or in, and usually the bulk in + would fail. qemu sets a 50ms timeout and the bulk in would timeout + even when the status shows data available. A bulk out write would + show a successful completion, but the ds2490 status register would + show 0 bytes written. Detaching qemu from the ds2490 hardware and + reattaching would clear the problem. usbmon output in the guest and + host did not explain the problem. My guess is a bug in either qemu + or the host OS and more likely the host OS. +-- 03-06-2008 David Fries -- cgit v1.1 From 656e6c0050fd63ce42c55a6cb454a9b4b2f9ccf7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Bernhard Walle Date: Tue, 7 Oct 2008 13:21:56 +0200 Subject: Document panic_on_unrecovered_nmi sysctl This adds "panic_on_unrecovered_nmi" sysctl to Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt. The text is mainly taken from http://readlist.com/lists/vger.kernel.org/linux-kernel/43/217998.html. Signed-off-by: Bernhard Walle Signed-off-by: Jonathan Corbet --- Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt | 12 ++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 12 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index f566ad9..d2f77d9 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt @@ -1322,6 +1322,18 @@ debugging information is displayed on console. NMI switch that most IA32 servers have fires unknown NMI up, for example. If a system hangs up, try pressing the NMI switch. +panic_on_unrecovered_nmi +------------------------ + +The default Linux behaviour on an NMI of either memory or unknown is to continue +operation. For many environments such as scientific computing it is preferable +that the box is taken out and the error dealt with than an uncorrected +parity/ECC error get propogated. + +A small number of systems do generate NMI's for bizarre random reasons such as +power management so the default is off. That sysctl works like the existing +panic controls already in that directory. + nmi_watchdog ------------ -- cgit v1.1 From 22359f5745eb26bd3205a1ede7968c8944398220 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Diego Calleja Date: Fri, 17 Oct 2008 09:15:14 -0400 Subject: ext4: Update Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt Since Ext4 is supposed to be stable in 2.6.28-rc, ext4's documentation file should be updated. [ More updates also added by Theodore Ts'o. ] Signed-off-by: Diego Calleja Signed-off-by: "Theodore Ts'o" --- Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt | 32 +++++++++++++++----------------- 1 file changed, 15 insertions(+), 17 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt index eb154ef..174eaff 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt @@ -2,19 +2,24 @@ Ext4 Filesystem =============== -This is a development version of the ext4 filesystem, an advanced level -of the ext3 filesystem which incorporates scalability and reliability -enhancements for supporting large filesystems (64 bit) in keeping with -increasing disk capacities and state-of-the-art feature requirements. +Ext4 is an an advanced level of the ext3 filesystem which incorporates +scalability and reliability enhancements for supporting large filesystems +(64 bit) in keeping with increasing disk capacities and state-of-the-art +feature requirements. -Mailing list: linux-ext4@vger.kernel.org +Mailing list: linux-ext4@vger.kernel.org +Web site: http://ext4.wiki.kernel.org 1. Quick usage instructions: =========================== +Note: More extensive information for getting started with ext4 can be + found at the ext4 wiki site at the URL: + http://ext4.wiki.kernel.org/index.php/Ext4_Howto + - Compile and install the latest version of e2fsprogs (as of this - writing version 1.41) from: + writing version 1.41.3) from: http://sourceforge.net/project/showfiles.php?group_id=2406 @@ -36,11 +41,9 @@ Mailing list: linux-ext4@vger.kernel.org # mke2fs -t ext4 /dev/hda1 - Or configure an existing ext3 filesystem to support extents and set - the test_fs flag to indicate that it's ok for an in-development - filesystem to touch this filesystem: + Or to configure an existing ext3 filesystem to support extents: - # tune2fs -O extents -E test_fs /dev/hda1 + # tune2fs -O extents /dev/hda1 If the filesystem was created with 128 byte inodes, it can be converted to use 256 byte for greater efficiency via: @@ -104,8 +107,8 @@ exist yet so I'm not sure they're in the near-term roadmap. The big performance win will come with mballoc, delalloc and flex_bg grouping of bitmaps and inode tables. Some test results available here: - - http://www.bullopensource.org/ext4/20080530/ffsb-write-2.6.26-rc2.html - - http://www.bullopensource.org/ext4/20080530/ffsb-readwrite-2.6.26-rc2.html + - http://www.bullopensource.org/ext4/20080818-ffsb/ffsb-write-2.6.27-rc1.html + - http://www.bullopensource.org/ext4/20080818-ffsb/ffsb-readwrite-2.6.27-rc1.html 3. Options ========== @@ -214,9 +217,6 @@ noreservation bsddf (*) Make 'df' act like BSD. minixdf Make 'df' act like Minix. -check=none Don't do extra checking of bitmaps on mount. -nocheck - debug Extra debugging information is sent to syslog. errors=remount-ro(*) Remount the filesystem read-only on an error. @@ -253,8 +253,6 @@ nobh (a) cache disk block mapping information "nobh" option tries to avoid associating buffer heads (supported only for "writeback" mode). -mballoc (*) Use the multiple block allocator for block allocation -nomballoc disabled multiple block allocator for block allocation. stripe=n Number of filesystem blocks that mballoc will try to use for allocation size and alignment. For RAID5/6 systems this should be the number of data -- cgit v1.1 From f65e17086fc141bee1592bbf6e709e9c7a43541b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean Delvare Date: Fri, 17 Oct 2008 17:51:09 +0200 Subject: hwmon: (lm90) Support the extra resolution bits of MAX6657 The Maxim MAX6657, MAX6658 and MAX6659 have extra resolution bits for the local temperature measurement. Let the lm90 driver read them and export them to user-space. Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare Acked-by: Martyn Welch --- Documentation/hwmon/lm90 | 10 ++++++---- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 index aa4a0ec..0b3e8bb 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 @@ -86,9 +86,8 @@ family is that it features critical limits with hysteresis, and an increased resolution of the remote temperature measurement. The different chipsets of the family are not strictly identical, although -very similar. This driver doesn't handle any specific feature for now, -with the exception of SMBus PEC. For reference, here comes a non-exhaustive -list of specific features: +very similar. For reference, here comes a non-exhaustive list of specific +features: LM90: * Filter and alert configuration register at 0xBF. @@ -114,9 +113,11 @@ ADT7461: * Lower resolution for remote temperature MAX6657 and MAX6658: + * Better local resolution * Remote sensor type selection MAX6659: + * Better local resolution * Selectable address * Second critical temperature limit * Remote sensor type selection @@ -127,7 +128,8 @@ MAX6680 and MAX6681: All temperature values are given in degrees Celsius. Resolution is 1.0 degree for the local temperature, 0.125 degree for the remote -temperature. +temperature, except for the MAX6657, MAX6658 and MAX6659 which have a +resolution of 0.125 degree for both temperatures. Each sensor has its own high and low limits, plus a critical limit. Additionally, there is a relative hysteresis value common to both critical -- cgit v1.1 From a874a10cf0b7105ae5eeb98b4860eae0fc78fcdd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean Delvare Date: Fri, 17 Oct 2008 17:51:10 +0200 Subject: hwmon: (lm90) Update datasheet links Update the links to the datasheet of some of the devices supported by the lm90 driver. Also remove the links from the driver itself, so that we don't have to update them twice each time they change. Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare Acked-by: Martyn Welch --- Documentation/hwmon/lm90 | 12 ++++++------ 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 index 0b3e8bb..0c08c5c 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'lm99' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website - http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM89.html + http://www.national.com/mpf/LM/LM89.html * National Semiconductor LM99 Prefix: 'lm99' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d @@ -21,17 +21,17 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'lm86' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website - http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM86.html + http://www.national.com/mpf/LM/LM86.html * Analog Devices ADM1032 Prefix: 'adm1032' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d - Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website - http://www.analog.com/en/prod/0,2877,ADM1032,00.html + Datasheet: Publicly available at the ON Semiconductor website + http://www.onsemi.com/PowerSolutions/product.do?id=ADM1032 * Analog Devices ADT7461 Prefix: 'adt7461' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d - Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website - http://www.analog.com/en/prod/0,2877,ADT7461,00.html + Datasheet: Publicly available at the ON Semiconductor website + http://www.onsemi.com/PowerSolutions/product.do?id=ADT7461 Note: Only if in ADM1032 compatibility mode * Maxim MAX6657 Prefix: 'max6657' -- cgit v1.1 From 23b2d4778ad33ee6bfe60439fb73c16580f204f2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Nate Case Date: Fri, 17 Oct 2008 17:51:10 +0200 Subject: hwmon: (lm90) Support ADT7461 in extended mode Support ADT7461 in extended temperature range mode, which will change the range of readings from 0..127 to -64..191 degC. Adjust the register conversion functions accordingly. Signed-off-by: Nate Case Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare Tested-by: Martyn Welch --- Documentation/hwmon/lm90 | 8 ++------ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 index 0c08c5c..53cd829 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 @@ -32,7 +32,6 @@ Supported chips: Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d Datasheet: Publicly available at the ON Semiconductor website http://www.onsemi.com/PowerSolutions/product.do?id=ADT7461 - Note: Only if in ADM1032 compatibility mode * Maxim MAX6657 Prefix: 'max6657' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c @@ -70,16 +69,13 @@ Description The LM90 is a digital temperature sensor. It senses its own temperature as well as the temperature of up to one external diode. It is compatible -with many other devices such as the LM86, the LM89, the LM99, the ADM1032, -the MAX6657, MAX6658, MAX6659, MAX6680 and the MAX6681 all of which are -supported by this driver. +with many other devices, many of which are supported by this driver. Note that there is no easy way to differentiate between the MAX6657, MAX6658 and MAX6659 variants. The extra address and features of the MAX6659 are not supported by this driver. The MAX6680 and MAX6681 only differ in their pinout, therefore they obviously can't (and don't need to) -be distinguished. Additionally, the ADT7461 is supported if found in -ADM1032 compatibility mode. +be distinguished. The specificity of this family of chipsets over the ADM1021/LM84 family is that it features critical limits with hysteresis, and an -- cgit v1.1 From 271dabf5bbf6ae6e2792cd5cf6f0434230e5c18c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Ben Hutchings Date: Fri, 17 Oct 2008 17:51:11 +0200 Subject: hwmon: (lm90) Support MAX6646, MAX6647 and MAX6649 These Maxim chips are similar to MAX6657 but use unsigned temperature values to allow for readings up to 145 degrees. Signed-off-by: Ben Hutchings Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare --- Documentation/hwmon/lm90 | 15 +++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 15 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 index 53cd829..e0d5206 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 @@ -32,6 +32,21 @@ Supported chips: Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d Datasheet: Publicly available at the ON Semiconductor website http://www.onsemi.com/PowerSolutions/product.do?id=ADT7461 + * Maxim MAX6646 + Prefix: 'max6646' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4d + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website + http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/3497 + * Maxim MAX6647 + Prefix: 'max6646' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4e + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website + http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/3497 + * Maxim MAX6649 + Prefix: 'max6646' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website + http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/3497 * Maxim MAX6657 Prefix: 'max6657' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c -- cgit v1.1 From 47064d645bc55863c7887a7c96cde39c9a37ee5f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Ben Hutchings Date: Fri, 17 Oct 2008 17:51:12 +0200 Subject: hwmon: (lm87) Add support for configuration through platform_data The lm87 driver normally assumes that firmware configured the chip correctly. Since this is not always the case, alllow platform code to set the channel register value via platform_data. All other configuration registers can be changed after driver initialisation. Signed-off-by: Ben Hutchings Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare --- Documentation/hwmon/lm87 | 9 ++++----- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm87 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm87 index ec27aa1..6b47b67 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm87 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm87 @@ -65,11 +65,10 @@ The LM87 has four pins which can serve one of two possible functions, depending on the hardware configuration. Some functions share pins, so not all functions are available at the same -time. Which are depends on the hardware setup. This driver assumes that -the BIOS configured the chip correctly. In that respect, it differs from -the original driver (from lm_sensors for Linux 2.4), which would force the -LM87 to an arbitrary, compile-time chosen mode, regardless of the actual -chipset wiring. +time. Which are depends on the hardware setup. This driver normally +assumes that firmware configured the chip correctly. Where this is not +the case, platform code must set the I2C client's platform_data to point +to a u8 value to be written to the channel register. For reference, here is the list of exclusive functions: - in0+in5 (default) or temp3 -- cgit v1.1 From 34e7dc6ca4a663a1bb0a0a4e118426849dccd72d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean Delvare Date: Fri, 17 Oct 2008 17:51:13 +0200 Subject: hwmon: (lm85) Implement the standard PWM frequency interface Implement the standard PWM frequency interface: pwm[1-*]_freq in units of 1 Hz, instead of the non-standard pwm[1-*]_auto_pwm_freq in units of 0.1 Hz. The old naming was not only non-standard, it was also confusing, because it suggested that the frequency value only applied in automatic fan speed mode, which isn't true. Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare Acked-by: Herbert Poetzl --- Documentation/hwmon/lm85 | 10 ---------- 1 file changed, 10 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 index 6d41db7..4006207 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 @@ -163,16 +163,6 @@ configured individually according to the following options. * pwm#_auto_pwm_min - this specifies the PWM value for temp#_auto_temp_off temperature. (PWM value from 0 to 255) -* pwm#_auto_pwm_freq - select base frequency of PWM output. You can select - in range of 10.0 to 94.0 Hz in .1 Hz units. - (Values 100 to 940). - -The pwm#_auto_pwm_freq can be set to one of the following 8 values. Setting the -frequency to a value not on this list, will result in the next higher frequency -being selected. The actual device frequency may vary slightly from this -specification as designed by the manufacturer. Consult the datasheet for more -details. (PWM Frequency values: 100, 150, 230, 300, 380, 470, 620, 940) - * pwm#_auto_pwm_minctl - this flags selects for temp#_auto_temp_off temperature the bahaviour of fans. Write 1 to let fans spinning at pwm#_auto_pwm_min or write 0 to let them off. -- cgit v1.1 From 4ed1077953f531b3fef4af4b4ade48a828c48869 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean Delvare Date: Fri, 17 Oct 2008 17:51:16 +0200 Subject: hwmon: (it87) Fix thermal sensor type values The it87 driver doesn't follow the standard sensor type values as documented in Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface. It uses value 2 for thermistors instead of value 4. This causes "sensors" to tell the user that the chip is setup for a transistor while it is actually setup for a thermistor. Using value 4 for thermistors solves the problem. For compatibility reasons, we still accept value 2 but emit a warning message so that users update their configuration files. Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare Acked-by: Hans de Goede --- Documentation/hwmon/it87 | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/it87 b/Documentation/hwmon/it87 index 3496b70..042c041 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/it87 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/it87 @@ -136,10 +136,10 @@ once-only alarms. The IT87xx only updates its values each 1.5 seconds; reading it more often will do no harm, but will return 'old' values. -To change sensor N to a thermistor, 'echo 2 > tempN_type' where N is 1, 2, +To change sensor N to a thermistor, 'echo 4 > tempN_type' where N is 1, 2, or 3. To change sensor N to a thermal diode, 'echo 3 > tempN_type'. Give 0 for unused sensor. Any other value is invalid. To configure this at -startup, consult lm_sensors's /etc/sensors.conf. (2 = thermistor; +startup, consult lm_sensors's /etc/sensors.conf. (4 = thermistor; 3 = thermal diode) -- cgit v1.1 From 6495ce184033d5e70dfdf5bb8d149e9e02feaaa9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Marc Hulsman Date: Fri, 17 Oct 2008 17:51:17 +0200 Subject: hwmon: (w83791d) add manual PWM support Add PWM manual control. Signed-off-by: Marc Hulsman Acked-by: Hans de Goede Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare --- Documentation/hwmon/w83791d | 15 +++++++++------ 1 file changed, 9 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d b/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d index a67d3b7..49c0e94 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d @@ -58,29 +58,32 @@ internal state that allows no clean access (Bank with ID register is not currently selected). If you know the address of the chip, use a 'force' parameter; this will put it into a more well-behaved state first. -The driver implements three temperature sensors, five fan rotation speed -sensors, and ten voltage sensors. +The driver implements three temperature sensors, ten voltage sensors, +five fan rotation speed sensors and manual PWM control of each fan. Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius and measurement resolution is 1 degC for temp1 and 0.5 degC for temp2 and temp3. An alarm is triggered when the temperature gets higher than the Overtemperature Shutdown value; it stays on until the temperature falls below the Hysteresis value. +Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report their values in millivolts. +An alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable minimum +or maximum limit. + Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. Fan readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 or 128 for all fans) to give the readings more range or accuracy. -Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report their values in millivolts. -An alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable minimum -or maximum limit. +Each fan controlled is controlled by PWM. The PWM duty cycle can be read and +set for each fan separately. Valid values range from 0 (stop) to 255 (full). The w83791d has a global bit used to enable beeping from the speaker when an alarm is triggered as well as a bitmask to enable or disable the beep for specific alarms. You need both the global beep enable bit and the corresponding beep bit to be on for a triggered alarm to sound a beep. -The sysfs interface to the gloabal enable is via the sysfs beep_enable file. +The sysfs interface to the global enable is via the sysfs beep_enable file. This file is used for both legacy and new code. The sysfs interface to the beep bitmask has migrated from the original legacy -- cgit v1.1 From b5938f8c4a530b2fad18f2293ffaf79ac9f5a148 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Marc Hulsman Date: Fri, 17 Oct 2008 17:51:17 +0200 Subject: hwmon: (w83791d) add pwm_enable support Add support for pwm_enable. Signed-off-by: Marc Hulsman Acked-by: Hans de Goede Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare --- Documentation/hwmon/w83791d | 13 ++++++++++++- 1 file changed, 12 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d b/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d index 49c0e94..b1e4798 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d @@ -108,6 +108,17 @@ going forward. The driver reads the hardware chip values at most once every three seconds. User mode code requesting values more often will receive cached values. +/sys files +---------- +The sysfs-interface is documented in the 'sysfs-interface' file. Only +chip-specific options are documented here. + +pwm[1-3]_enable - this file controls mode of fan/temperature control for + fan 1-3. Fan/PWM 4-5 only support manual mode. + * 1 Manual mode + * 2 Thermal Cruise mode (no further support) + * 3 Fan Speed Cruise mode (no further support) + Alarms bitmap vs. beep_mask bitmask ------------------------------------ For legacy code using the alarms and beep_mask files: @@ -138,4 +149,4 @@ global_enable: alarms: -------- beep_mask: 0x800000 (modified via beep_enable) W83791D TODO: --------------- -Provide a patch for smart-fan control (still need appropriate motherboard/fans) +Provide a patch for Thermal Cruise registers. -- cgit v1.1 From a5a4598cd2e7cae456a7f2a100bf0e5c3c7811c7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Marc Hulsman Date: Fri, 17 Oct 2008 17:51:17 +0200 Subject: hwmon: (w83791d) add support for thermal cruise mode Add support to set target temperature and tolerance for thermal cruise mode. Signed-off-by: Marc Hulsman Acked-by: Hans de Goede Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare --- Documentation/hwmon/w83791d | 19 ++++++++++++++----- 1 file changed, 14 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d b/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d index b1e4798..5663e49 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d @@ -77,6 +77,9 @@ readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, Each fan controlled is controlled by PWM. The PWM duty cycle can be read and set for each fan separately. Valid values range from 0 (stop) to 255 (full). +PWM 1-3 support Thermal Cruise mode, in which the PWMs are automatically +regulated to keep respectively temp 1-3 at a certain target temperature. +See below for the description of the sysfs-interface. The w83791d has a global bit used to enable beeping from the speaker when an alarm is triggered as well as a bitmask to enable or disable the beep for @@ -116,9 +119,19 @@ chip-specific options are documented here. pwm[1-3]_enable - this file controls mode of fan/temperature control for fan 1-3. Fan/PWM 4-5 only support manual mode. * 1 Manual mode - * 2 Thermal Cruise mode (no further support) + * 2 Thermal Cruise mode * 3 Fan Speed Cruise mode (no further support) +temp[1-3]_target - defines the target temperature for Thermal Cruise mode. + Unit: millidegree Celsius + RW + +temp[1-3]_tolerance - temperature tolerance for Thermal Cruise mode. + Specifies an interval around the target temperature + in which the fan speed is not changed. + Unit: millidegree Celsius + RW + Alarms bitmap vs. beep_mask bitmask ------------------------------------ For legacy code using the alarms and beep_mask files: @@ -146,7 +159,3 @@ tart2 : alarms: 0x020000 beep_mask: 0x080000 <== mismatch tart3 : alarms: 0x040000 beep_mask: 0x100000 <== mismatch case_open : alarms: 0x001000 beep_mask: 0x001000 global_enable: alarms: -------- beep_mask: 0x800000 (modified via beep_enable) - -W83791D TODO: ---------------- -Provide a patch for Thermal Cruise registers. -- cgit v1.1 From 6aa693b85257cd41fdb3554016b663519dbf9d14 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean Delvare Date: Fri, 17 Oct 2008 17:51:17 +0200 Subject: hwmon: Drop dead links to old National Semiconductor chip datasheets Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare --- Documentation/hwmon/pc87360 | 7 +------ Documentation/hwmon/pc87427 | 2 +- 2 files changed, 2 insertions(+), 7 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/pc87360 b/Documentation/hwmon/pc87360 index 89a8fcf..cbac32b 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/pc87360 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/pc87360 @@ -5,12 +5,7 @@ Supported chips: * National Semiconductor PC87360, PC87363, PC87364, PC87365 and PC87366 Prefixes: 'pc87360', 'pc87363', 'pc87364', 'pc87365', 'pc87366' Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space - Datasheets: - http://www.national.com/pf/PC/PC87360.html - http://www.national.com/pf/PC/PC87363.html - http://www.national.com/pf/PC/PC87364.html - http://www.national.com/pf/PC/PC87365.html - http://www.national.com/pf/PC/PC87366.html + Datasheets: No longer available Authors: Jean Delvare diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/pc87427 b/Documentation/hwmon/pc87427 index 9a0708f..d1ebbe5 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/pc87427 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/pc87427 @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ Supported chips: * National Semiconductor PC87427 Prefix: 'pc87427' Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space - Datasheet: http://www.winbond.com.tw/E-WINBONDHTM/partner/apc_007.html + Datasheet: No longer available Author: Jean Delvare -- cgit v1.1 From 10c08f937d832e1d5a77e65767a6e2c05bc25c69 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean Delvare Date: Fri, 17 Oct 2008 17:51:18 +0200 Subject: hwmon: (w83781d) Additional information about AS99127F PWM This information was provided in lm-sensors ticket #2350: http://www.lm-sensors.org/ticket/2350 This is IMHO still not enough to be able to safely implement fan control support for the AS99127F, but this is valuable information so I am adding it to the documentation. Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare --- Documentation/hwmon/w83781d | 37 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++-- 1 file changed, 35 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83781d b/Documentation/hwmon/w83781d index 6f800a0..c91e0b6 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83781d +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83781d @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ in6=255 # PWM -Additional info about PWM on the AS99127F (may apply to other Asus +* Additional info about PWM on the AS99127F (may apply to other Asus chips as well) by Jean Delvare as of 2004-04-09: AS99127F revision 2 seems to have two PWM registers at 0x59 and 0x5A, @@ -396,7 +396,7 @@ Please contact us if you can figure out how it is supposed to work. As long as we don't know more, the w83781d driver doesn't handle PWM on AS99127F chips at all. -Additional info about PWM on the AS99127F rev.1 by Hector Martin: +* Additional info about PWM on the AS99127F rev.1 by Hector Martin: I've been fiddling around with the (in)famous 0x59 register and found out the following values do work as a form of coarse pwm: @@ -418,3 +418,36 @@ change. My mobo is an ASUS A7V266-E. This behavior is similar to what I got with speedfan under Windows, where 0-15% would be off, 15-2x% (can't remember the exact value) would be 70% and higher would be full on. + +* Additional info about PWM on the AS99127F rev.1 from lm-sensors + ticket #2350: + +I conducted some experiment on Asus P3B-F motherboard with AS99127F +(Ver. 1). + +I confirm that 0x59 register control the CPU_Fan Header on this +motherboard, and 0x5a register control PWR_Fan. + +In order to reduce the dependency of specific fan, the measurement is +conducted with a digital scope without fan connected. I found out that +P3B-F actually output variable DC voltage on fan header center pin, +looks like PWM is filtered on this motherboard. + +Here are some of measurements: + +0x80 20 mV +0x81 20 mV +0x82 232 mV +0x83 1.2 V +0x84 2.31 V +0x85 3.44 V +0x86 4.62 V +0x87 5.81 V +0x88 7.01 V +9x89 8.22 V +0x8a 9.42 V +0x8b 10.6 V +0x8c 11.9 V +0x8d 12.4 V +0x8e 12.4 V +0x8f 12.4 V -- cgit v1.1 From d664a4809e73c878a43607d584b2e2b60fd07468 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Darrick J. Wong" Date: Fri, 17 Oct 2008 17:51:20 +0200 Subject: hwmon: (adt7470) Add documentation Add at least the bare minimum of documentation for this chip. Signed-off-by: Darrick J. Wong Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare --- Documentation/hwmon/adt7470 | 76 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 76 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/hwmon/adt7470 (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adt7470 b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7470 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..75d13ca --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7470 @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ +Kernel driver adt7470 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Analog Devices ADT7470 + Prefix: 'adt7470' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2C, 0x2E, 0x2F + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website + +Author: Darrick J. Wong + +Description +----------- + +This driver implements support for the Analog Devices ADT7470 chip. There may +be other chips that implement this interface. + +The ADT7470 uses the 2-wire interface compatible with the SMBus 2.0 +specification. Using an analog to digital converter it measures up to ten (10) +external temperatures. It has four (4) 16-bit counters for measuring fan speed. +There are four (4) PWM outputs that can be used to control fan speed. + +A sophisticated control system for the PWM outputs is designed into the ADT7470 +that allows fan speed to be adjusted automatically based on any of the ten +temperature sensors. Each PWM output is individually adjustable and +programmable. Once configured, the ADT7470 will adjust the PWM outputs in +response to the measured temperatures with further host intervention. This +feature can also be disabled for manual control of the PWM's. + +Each of the measured inputs (temperature, fan speed) has corresponding high/low +limit values. The ADT7470 will signal an ALARM if any measured value exceeds +either limit. + +The ADT7470 DOES NOT sample all inputs continuously. A single pin on the +ADT7470 is connected to a multitude of thermal diodes, but the chip must be +instructed explicitly to read the multitude of diodes. If you want to use +automatic fan control mode, you must manually read any of the temperature +sensors or the fan control algorithm will not run. The chip WILL NOT DO THIS +AUTOMATICALLY; this must be done from userspace. This may be a bug in the chip +design, given that many other AD chips take care of this. The driver will not +read the registers more often than once every 5 seconds. Further, +configuration data is only read once per minute. + +Special Features +---------------- + +The ADT7470 has a 8-bit ADC and is capable of measuring temperatures with 1 +degC resolution. + +The Analog Devices datasheet is very detailed and describes a procedure for +determining an optimal configuration for the automatic PWM control. + +Configuration Notes +------------------- + +Besides standard interfaces driver adds the following: + +* PWM Control + +* pwm#_auto_point1_pwm and pwm#_auto_point1_temp and +* pwm#_auto_point2_pwm and pwm#_auto_point2_temp - + +point1: Set the pwm speed at a lower temperature bound. +point2: Set the pwm speed at a higher temperature bound. + +The ADT7470 will scale the pwm between the lower and higher pwm speed when +the temperature is between the two temperature boundaries. PWM values range +from 0 (off) to 255 (full speed). Fan speed will be set to maximum when the +temperature sensor associated with the PWM control exceeds +pwm#_auto_point2_temp. + +Notes +----- + +As stated above, the temperature inputs must be read periodically from +userspace in order for the automatic pwm algorithm to run. -- cgit v1.1 From a636da6bab3307fc8c6e6a22a63b0b25ba0687be Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Krufky Date: Wed, 15 Oct 2008 17:00:31 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9247): au0828: add support for another USB id for Hauppauge HVR950Q Add autodetection support for a new revision of the Hauppauge HVR950Q (2040:721e) Signed-off-by: Michael Krufky Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.au0828 | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.au0828 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.au0828 index aa05e5b..d5cb4ea 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.au0828 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.au0828 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ 0 -> Unknown board (au0828) - 1 -> Hauppauge HVR950Q (au0828) [2040:7200,2040:7210,2040:7217,2040:721b,2040:721f,2040:7280,0fd9:0008] + 1 -> Hauppauge HVR950Q (au0828) [2040:7200,2040:7210,2040:7217,2040:721b,2040:721e,2040:721f,2040:7280,0fd9:0008] 2 -> Hauppauge HVR850 (au0828) [2040:7240] 3 -> DViCO FusionHDTV USB (au0828) [0fe9:d620] 4 -> Hauppauge HVR950Q rev xxF8 (au0828) [2040:7201,2040:7211,2040:7281] -- cgit v1.1 From 953cafc04e9ef9d2fd9f8afb3b3bbde1f8bb9317 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Darron Broad Date: Wed, 15 Oct 2008 14:14:30 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9268): tuner: add FMD1216MEX tuner This tuner was already supported by proxy as an FMD1216ME, however, the MEX uses a different FM Radio IF so this addition is now required. Signed-off-by: Darron Broad Signed-off-by: Steven Toth Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner index 30bbdda..691d2f3 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner @@ -75,3 +75,4 @@ tuner=73 - Samsung TCPG 6121P30A tuner=75 - Philips TEA5761 FM Radio tuner=76 - Xceive 5000 tuner tuner=77 - TCL tuner MF02GIP-5N-E +tuner=78 - Philips FMD1216MEX MK3 Hybrid Tuner -- cgit v1.1 From eb86be5424d4c08e686d5e578b72a26c516ae58a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Harrison Metzger Date: Thu, 14 Aug 2008 11:29:32 -0500 Subject: USB: Added driver for a Delcom USB 7-segment LED Display Added basic support for a Delcom USB 7-segment LED Display Signed-off by: Harrison Metzger Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- .../ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb-devices-usbsevseg | 43 ++++++++++++++++++++ Documentation/usb/misc_usbsevseg.txt | 46 ++++++++++++++++++++++ 2 files changed, 89 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb-devices-usbsevseg create mode 100644 Documentation/usb/misc_usbsevseg.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb-devices-usbsevseg b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb-devices-usbsevseg new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cb830df --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb-devices-usbsevseg @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +Where: /sys/bus/usb/.../powered +Date: August 2008 +Kernel Version: 2.6.26 +Contact: Harrison Metzger +Description: Controls whether the device's display will powered. + A value of 0 is off and a non-zero value is on. + +Where: /sys/bus/usb/.../mode_msb +Where: /sys/bus/usb/.../mode_lsb +Date: August 2008 +Kernel Version: 2.6.26 +Contact: Harrison Metzger +Description: Controls the devices display mode. + For a 6 character display the values are + MSB 0x06; LSB 0x3F, and + for an 8 character display the values are + MSB 0x08; LSB 0xFF. + +Where: /sys/bus/usb/.../textmode +Date: August 2008 +Kernel Version: 2.6.26 +Contact: Harrison Metzger +Description: Controls the way the device interprets its text buffer. + raw: each character controls its segment manually + hex: each character is between 0-15 + ascii: each character is between '0'-'9' and 'A'-'F'. + +Where: /sys/bus/usb/.../text +Date: August 2008 +Kernel Version: 2.6.26 +Contact: Harrison Metzger +Description: The text (or data) for the device to display + +Where: /sys/bus/usb/.../decimals +Date: August 2008 +Kernel Version: 2.6.26 +Contact: Harrison Metzger +Description: Controls the decimal places on the device. + To set the nth decimal place, give this field + the value of 10 ** n. Assume this field has + the value k and has 1 or more decimal places set, + to set the mth place (where m is not already set), + change this fields value to k + 10 ** m. \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Documentation/usb/misc_usbsevseg.txt b/Documentation/usb/misc_usbsevseg.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0f6be4f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/usb/misc_usbsevseg.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +USB 7-Segment Numeric Display +Manufactured by Delcom Engineering + +Device Information +------------------ +USB VENDOR_ID 0x0fc5 +USB PRODUCT_ID 0x1227 +Both the 6 character and 8 character displays have PRODUCT_ID, +and according to Delcom Engineering no queryable information +can be obtained from the device to tell them apart. + +Device Modes +------------ +By default, the driver assumes the display is only 6 characters +The mode for 6 characters is: + MSB 0x06; LSB 0x3f +For the 8 character display: + MSB 0x08; LSB 0xff +The device can accept "text" either in raw, hex, or ascii textmode. +raw controls each segment manually, +hex expects a value between 0-15 per character, +ascii expects a value between '0'-'9' and 'A'-'F'. +The default is ascii. + +Device Operation +---------------- +1. Turn on the device: + echo 1 > /sys/bus/usb/.../powered +2. Set the device's mode: + echo $mode_msb > /sys/bus/usb/.../mode_msb + echo $mode_lsb > /sys/bus/usb/.../mode_lsb +3. Set the textmode: + echo $textmode > /sys/bus/usb/.../textmode +4. set the text (for example): + echo "123ABC" > /sys/bus/usb/.../text (ascii) + echo "A1B2" > /sys/bus/usb/.../text (ascii) + echo -ne "\x01\x02\x03" > /sys/bus/usb/.../text (hex) +5. Set the decimal places. + The device has either 6 or 8 decimal points. + to set the nth decimal place calculate 10 ** n + and echo it in to /sys/bus/usb/.../decimals + To set multiple decimals points sum up each power. + For example, to set the 0th and 3rd decimal place + echo 1001 > /sys/bus/usb/.../decimals + + -- cgit v1.1 From 5b775f672cc993ba9dba5626811ab1f2ac42883b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Greg Kroah-Hartman Date: Tue, 26 Aug 2008 16:22:06 -0700 Subject: USB: add USB test and measurement class driver This driver was originaly written by Stefan Kopp, but massively reworked by Greg for submission. Thanks to Felipe Balbi for lots of work in cleaning up this driver. Thanks to Oliver Neukum for reviewing previous versions and pointing out problems. Cc: Stefan Kopp Cc: Marcel Janssen Cc: Felipe Balbi Cc: Oliver Neukum Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-usb-usbtmc | 62 ++++++++++++++++++++++++ Documentation/devices.txt | 3 ++ Documentation/ioctl-number.txt | 2 + 3 files changed, 67 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-usb-usbtmc (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-usb-usbtmc b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-usb-usbtmc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9a75fb2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-usb-usbtmc @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/devices/*/interface_capabilities +What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/devices/*/device_capabilities +Date: August 2008 +Contact: Greg Kroah-Hartman +Description: + These files show the various USB TMC capabilities as described + by the device itself. The full description of the bitfields + can be found in the USB TMC documents from the USB-IF entitled + "Universal Serial Bus Test and Measurement Class Specification + (USBTMC) Revision 1.0" section 4.2.1.8. + + The files are read only. + + +What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/devices/*/usb488_interface_capabilities +What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/devices/*/usb488_device_capabilities +Date: August 2008 +Contact: Greg Kroah-Hartman +Description: + These files show the various USB TMC capabilities as described + by the device itself. The full description of the bitfields + can be found in the USB TMC documents from the USB-IF entitled + "Universal Serial Bus Test and Measurement Class, Subclass + USB488 Specification (USBTMC-USB488) Revision 1.0" section + 4.2.2. + + The files are read only. + + +What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/devices/*/TermChar +Date: August 2008 +Contact: Greg Kroah-Hartman +Description: + This file is the TermChar value to be sent to the USB TMC + device as described by the document, "Universal Serial Bus Test + and Measurement Class Specification + (USBTMC) Revision 1.0" as published by the USB-IF. + + Note that the TermCharEnabled file determines if this value is + sent to the device or not. + + +What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/devices/*/TermCharEnabled +Date: August 2008 +Contact: Greg Kroah-Hartman +Description: + This file determines if the TermChar is to be sent to the + device on every transaction or not. For more details about + this, please see the document, "Universal Serial Bus Test and + Measurement Class Specification (USBTMC) Revision 1.0" as + published by the USB-IF. + + +What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/devices/*/auto_abort +Date: August 2008 +Contact: Greg Kroah-Hartman +Description: + This file determines if the the transaction of the USB TMC + device is to be automatically aborted if there is any error. + For more details about this, please see the document, + "Universal Serial Bus Test and Measurement Class Specification + (USBTMC) Revision 1.0" as published by the USB-IF. diff --git a/Documentation/devices.txt b/Documentation/devices.txt index 05c8064..2be0824 100644 --- a/Documentation/devices.txt +++ b/Documentation/devices.txt @@ -2571,6 +2571,9 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated. 160 = /dev/usb/legousbtower0 1st USB Legotower device ... 175 = /dev/usb/legousbtower15 16th USB Legotower device + 176 = /dev/usb/usbtmc1 First USB TMC device + ... + 192 = /dev/usb/usbtmc16 16th USB TMC device 240 = /dev/usb/dabusb0 First daubusb device ... 243 = /dev/usb/dabusb3 Fourth dabusb device diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl-number.txt b/Documentation/ioctl-number.txt index 1c6b545..f8deb85 100644 --- a/Documentation/ioctl-number.txt +++ b/Documentation/ioctl-number.txt @@ -110,6 +110,8 @@ Code Seq# Include File Comments 'W' 00-1F linux/wanrouter.h conflict! 'X' all linux/xfs_fs.h 'Y' all linux/cyclades.h +'[' 00-07 linux/usb/usbtmc.h USB Test and Measurement Devices + 'a' all ATM on linux 'b' 00-FF bit3 vme host bridge -- cgit v1.1 From 3086775a4916b0fe128d924d83f4e7d7c39e4d0e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Felipe Balbi Date: Mon, 18 Aug 2008 17:39:30 -0700 Subject: usb gadget: cdc obex glue The following patch introduces a new f_obex.c function driver. It allows userspace obex servers to use usb as transport layer for their messages. [ dbrownell@users.sourceforge.net: various fixes and cleanups ] Signed-off-by: Felipe Balbi Signed-off-by: David Brownell Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/DocBook/gadget.tmpl | 3 +++ 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/gadget.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/gadget.tmpl index ea3bc95..6ef2f00 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/gadget.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/gadget.tmpl @@ -557,6 +557,9 @@ Near-term plans include converting all of them, except for "gadgetfs". !Edrivers/usb/gadget/f_acm.c +!Edrivers/usb/gadget/f_ecm.c +!Edrivers/usb/gadget/f_subset.c +!Edrivers/usb/gadget/f_obex.c !Edrivers/usb/gadget/f_serial.c -- cgit v1.1 From d1b1944085ab2345fae4a5fbb614f1a4d0732d3e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Oliver Neukum Date: Tue, 2 Sep 2008 14:16:11 +0200 Subject: USB: Documentation/usb/anchors.txt #2 This adds Documentation for the extensions of the anchor API. Signed-off-by: Oliver Neukum Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/usb/anchors.txt | 17 +++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 17 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/usb/anchors.txt b/Documentation/usb/anchors.txt index 5e6b64c..6f24f56 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/anchors.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/anchors.txt @@ -52,6 +52,11 @@ Therefore no guarantee is made that the URBs have been unlinked when the call returns. They may be unlinked later but will be unlinked in finite time. +usb_scuttle_anchored_urbs() +--------------------------- + +All URBs of an anchor are unanchored en masse. + usb_wait_anchor_empty_timeout() ------------------------------- @@ -59,4 +64,16 @@ This function waits for all URBs associated with an anchor to finish or a timeout, whichever comes first. Its return value will tell you whether the timeout was reached. +usb_anchor_empty() +------------------ + +Returns true if no URBs are associated with an anchor. Locking +is the caller's responsibility. + +usb_get_from_anchor() +--------------------- +Returns the oldest anchored URB of an anchor. The URB is unanchored +and returned with a reference. As you may mix URBs to several +destinations in one anchor you have no guarantee the chronologically +first submitted URB is returned. \ No newline at end of file -- cgit v1.1 From 81ab5b8ee6b8cd5fe8cfdf0eea84eea0aa7b4da9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Geoff Levand Date: Sat, 20 Sep 2008 14:41:47 -0700 Subject: USB: Fix doc for usb_autopm_enable Correct errors in the descriptions for usb_autopm_enable and usb_autopm_disable in the USB PM doc. Signed-off-by: Geoff Levand Acked-by: Alan Stern Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/usb/power-management.txt | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt index 9d31140..e48ea1d 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt @@ -350,12 +350,12 @@ without holding the mutex. There also are a couple of utility routines drivers can use: - usb_autopm_enable() sets pm_usage_cnt to 1 and then calls - usb_autopm_set_interface(), which will attempt an autoresume. - - usb_autopm_disable() sets pm_usage_cnt to 0 and then calls + usb_autopm_enable() sets pm_usage_cnt to 0 and then calls usb_autopm_set_interface(), which will attempt an autosuspend. + usb_autopm_disable() sets pm_usage_cnt to 1 and then calls + usb_autopm_set_interface(), which will attempt an autoresume. + The conventional usage pattern is that a driver calls usb_autopm_get_interface() in its open routine and usb_autopm_put_interface() in its close or release routine. But -- cgit v1.1 From cbc30118d7a376dab4113f299c0c8f035737a5c3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Stephen Ware Date: Tue, 30 Sep 2008 11:39:38 -0700 Subject: usb: vstusb.c : new driver for spectrometers used by Vernier Software & Technology, Inc. This patch adds the vstusb driver to the drivers/usb/misc directory. This driver provides support for Vernier Software & Technology spectrometers, all made by Ocean Optics. The driver provides both IOCTL and read()/write() methods for sending raw data to spectrometers across the bulk channel. Each method allows for a configured timeout. From: Stephen Ware Signed-off-by: Dennis O'Brien Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/ioctl-number.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl-number.txt b/Documentation/ioctl-number.txt index f8deb85..b880ce5 100644 --- a/Documentation/ioctl-number.txt +++ b/Documentation/ioctl-number.txt @@ -92,6 +92,7 @@ Code Seq# Include File Comments 'J' 00-1F drivers/scsi/gdth_ioctl.h 'K' all linux/kd.h 'L' 00-1F linux/loop.h +'L' 20-2F driver/usb/misc/vstusb.h 'L' E0-FF linux/ppdd.h encrypted disk device driver 'M' all linux/soundcard.h -- cgit v1.1 From 49e7cc84a86784ef2ab4e651f1824093be8f5b2b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Sarah Sharp Date: Mon, 6 Oct 2008 14:45:46 -0700 Subject: USB: Export if an interface driver supports autosuspend. Create a new sysfs file per interface named supports_autosuspend. This file returns true if an interface driver's .supports_autosuspend flag is set. It also returns true if the interface is unclaimed (since the USB core will autosuspend a device if an interface is not claimed). This new sysfs file will be useful for user space scripts to test whether a USB device correctly auto-suspends. Signed-off-by: Sarah Sharp Cc: Oliver Neukum Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb | 16 ++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 16 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb index 11a3c16..df6c8a0 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb @@ -85,3 +85,19 @@ Description: Users: PowerTOP http://www.lesswatts.org/projects/powertop/ + +What: /sys/bus/usb/device/-...:-/supports_autosuspend +Date: January 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.27 +Contact: Sarah Sharp +Description: + When read, this file returns 1 if the interface driver + for this interface supports autosuspend. It also + returns 1 if no driver has claimed this interface, as an + unclaimed interface will not stop the device from being + autosuspended if all other interface drivers are idle. + The file returns 0 if autosuspend support has not been + added to the driver. +Users: + USB PM tool + git://git.moblin.org/users/sarah/usb-pm-tool/ -- cgit v1.1 From fd7c519dd40a0d561280bb797386143fb2026949 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jaroslav Kysela Date: Fri, 10 Oct 2008 16:24:45 +0200 Subject: USB: hub.c: Add initial_descriptor_timeout module parameter for usbcore This patch adds initial_descriptor_timeout module parameter for usbcore.ko to allow modify initial 64-byte USB_REQ_GET_DESCRIPTOR timeout for non-standard devices. For example, the SATA8000 device from DATAST0R Technology Corp requires about 10 seconds to send reply (probably it waits until inserted disk is ready for operation). Also, this patch adds missing usbcore parameters to Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt. Signed-off-by: Jaroslav Kysela Acked-by: Alan Stern Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 19 +++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 19 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index dd28a0d..d4f4875 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -2253,6 +2253,25 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file autosuspended. Devices for which the delay is set to a negative value won't be autosuspended at all. + usbcore.usbfs_snoop= + [USB] Set to log all usbfs traffic (default 0 = off). + + usbcore.blinkenlights= + [USB] Set to cycle leds on hubs (default 0 = off). + + usbcore.old_scheme_first= + [USB] Start with the old device initialization + scheme (default 0 = off). + + usbcore.use_both_schemes= + [USB] Try the other device initialization scheme + if the first one fails (default 1 = enabled). + + usbcore.initial_descriptor_timeout= + [USB] Specifies timeout for the initial 64-byte + USB_REQ_GET_DESCRIPTOR request in milliseconds + (default 5000 = 5.0 seconds). + usbhid.mousepoll= [USBHID] The interval which mice are to be polled at. -- cgit v1.1